Manual Quantar PDF

TM
Digital-Capable Station
For Conventional, SECURENET, ASTRO,
6809 Trunking, and IntelliRepeater Systems
VHF 25W & 125W
UHF 25W, 100W, & 110W
800 MHz 20W & 100W
900 MHz 100W
Instruction Manual
68P81095E05-B
COMPUTER SOFTWARE COPYRIGHTS
The Motorola products described in this instruction manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor
memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer
programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted
Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied or reprodu ced in any
manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either
directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal
non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
EPS-34440-B
COMMERCIAL WARRANTY
(STANDARD)
Motorola radio communications products are warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a
period of ONE (1) YEAR, (except for crystals and channel elements which are warranted for a period of ten (10)
years) from the date of shipment. Parts, including crystals and channel elements, will be replaced and labor will be
provided free of charge for the full warranty period. Thereafter purchaser must pay for the labor involved in repairing
the product or replacing the parts at the prevailing rates together with any transportation charges to or from the
place where warranty service is provided. This express warranty is extended by Motorola Communications and
Electronics, Inc., 1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60196, to the original purchaser only, and only to
those purchasing for purpose of leasing or solely for commercial, industrial, or governmental use.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WHICH ARE
SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PAR
TICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.
In the event of a defect, malfunction or failure to conform to specifications established be seller, or if appropriate, to
specifications accepted by Seller in writing, during the period shown, Motorola, at its option, will either repair or
replace the product or refund the purchase price thereof, and such action on the part of Motorola shall be the full
extent of Motorola's liability hereunder.
This warranty is void if:
a. the product is used in other than its normal and customary manner;
b. the product has been subject to misuse, accident, neglect or damage;
c. unauthorized alterations or repairs have been made, or unapproved parts used in the equipment.
This warranty extends only to individual products, batteries are excluded. Because each radio system is unique,
Motorola disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty except by
a separate written agreement signed by an officer of Motorola.
LICENSED PROGRAMS Motorola software provided in connection with this order is warranted to be free from re
producible defects for a period of one (1) year. All material and labor to repair any such defects will be provided free
of charge for the full warranty period, and SUBJECT TO THE DISCLAIMER IN BOLD FACE TYPE.
Non-Motorola manufactured products are excluded from this warranty, but subject to the warranty provided by
their manufacturers, a copy of which will be supplied to you on specific written request.
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, purchaser must contact its Motorola salesperson or Motorola at the
address first above shown, attention Quality Assurance Department.
This warranty applies only within the United States.
EPS-48759-O
FCC INTERFERENCE WARNING

The FCC Requires that manuals pertaining to Class A and Class B computing devices must contain warnings
about possible interference with local residential radio and TV reception. This warning reads as follows:
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer
ence when the equipment is operated in a commercial or residential environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

Commercial Government and

Industrial Solutions Sector Digital-Capable Station
for Conventional, SECURENET, ASTRO,
6809 Trunking, and IntelliRepeater Systems
VHF 25W & 125W

UHF 25W, 100W, & 110W
800 MHz 20W & 100W
900 MHz 100W
Table of Contents
Model/Option Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E56
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Compact Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
StateoftheArt Electrical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Summary of Operating Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Multiple System Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Station Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Functional Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Transmitter Circuitry Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Receiver Circuitry Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Station Control Circuitry Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Wireline Interface Board Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Power Supply Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E57
Pre-Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Environmental Conditions at Intended Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Equipment Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
AC Input Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Equipment Mounting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Site Grounding and Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
Recommended Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Equipment Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Physical Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
continued on next page
Motorola, Inc. 2000 Commercial Government and 68P81095E05-B

All Rights Reserved Industrial Solutions Sector 9/1/00-UP
Printed in U.S.A. 1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Mounting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 20
Stacking Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25
Stacking Modular Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 26
Anti-Vibration/EMI Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 27
Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 28

Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 28
RF Cabling Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 32
Connecting System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 38
Connecting Telephone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 46
Connecting V.24 Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50
Connecting External Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 51
Post-Installation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 54
Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 54
Verifying Proper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 54
Proceeding to Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 56
OPTIMIZATION
OPTIMIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E72
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
OPERATION
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E58
Summary of Switches, Pushbuttons, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Summary of LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E39

Routine Maintenance Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E59
Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
List of Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Interpreting LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Interpreting Alarm Alert Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Verifying Transmitter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Verifying Receiver Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
ii 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00
Module Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 19
General Replacement Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 19
Replacing Power Amplifier Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 21
Replacing Exciter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 22
Replacing Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 23
Replacing Station Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 24
Replacing Wireline Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 30
Replacing Receiver Module and/or Preselector Assembly (VHF and UHF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 32
Replacing Receiver Module (800 MHz and 900 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33
Replacing ASTRO Modem Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 34
Replacing Backplane Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 35
Preselector Field Tuning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 36
Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 36
VHF Tuning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 37
UHF Tuning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 40
STATION MODULES
RECEIVER CIRCUITRY
RECEIVER MODULE (VHF Ranges 1 and 2; Includes Preselector) . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E28

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Overview of Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Preselector Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Receiver Front End Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Custom Receiver IC Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Address Decode and A/D Converter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
Voltage Regulator Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
RECEIVER MODULE (UHF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E48

Preselector Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
RECEIVER MODULE (800 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E76

9/1/00 68P81095E05-B iii

RECEIVER MODULE (900 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81091E92

TRANSMITTER CIRCUITRY
EXCITER BOARD (VHF, UHF, 800/900 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E24

RF Switch Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Microprocessor Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
TX Power Control Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
VHF POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE (25W/125W R1 & R2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E23

RF Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Output Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Sense and Detect Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Cooling Fans Control Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
UHF POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE (R1/25W; R2/110W; R4/110W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81088E44

iv 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00
POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE (20W/100W 800 MHz; 100W 900 MHz;) . . . . . . . . . 68P81091E91
STATION CONTROL CIRCUITRY
STATION CONTROL MODULE (CLN6960/CLN6961) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81094E76

Host Microprocessor/Host ASIC Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Non-Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
DRAM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
External Line Interface Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) and DSP ASIC Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Station Reference Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
HDLC Bus Control Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Audio Interface Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Front Panel LEDs and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
Supply Voltages Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
STATION CONTROL MODULE (CLN1614) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E87

Functional Theory of Operation (CLN7060A Control Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Host Microprocessor/Host ASIC Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Non-Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
DRAM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
External Line Interface Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) and DSP ASIC Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Station Reference Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
HDLC Bus Control Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Audio Interface Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Supply Voltages Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B v
Functional Theory of Operation (CLN7098A LED Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Front Panel LEDs and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
WIRELINE CIRCUITRY
WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD (4-WIRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81094E77

Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Description of Audio/Data Signal Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
WIRELINE INTERFACE MODULE (8-WIRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81094E78

Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Description of Audio/Data Signal Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
STATION BACKPLANE
STATION BACKPLANE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E33

Location of Backplane Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Backplane Connectors Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
STATION POWER SUPPLY MODULES
265W POWER SUPPLY MODULE (ac input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E09

Power Supply Module Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Functional Theory of Operation (ACtoDC Converter Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Input Conditioning Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Startup Delay Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Boost/Power Factor Correction Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Battery Revert Trigger Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
VCC Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
LED Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Functional Theory of Operation (DCtoDC Converter Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
+14V Main Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
vi 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00
+5V Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Battery Charger Control Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Reference Voltage Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Diagnostics Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13
Address Decode Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13
Startup/Shutdown Control Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Functional Theory of Operation (Battery Charger/Revert Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15
Charger Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15
Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
Battery Revert Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
Current Mode Controller Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
SPI Bus Interface Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
Shutdown Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
Local Supplies Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
625W POWER SUPPLY MODULE (ac input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81095E88

Functional Theory of Operation (ACtoDC Converter Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Startup Delay Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Boost/Power Factor Correction Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Battery Revert Trigger Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
VCC Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
LED Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Functional Theory of Operation (DCtoDC Converter Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
+28V Main Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
+14V Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
+5V Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Battery Charger Control Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13
Reference Voltage Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13
Functional Theory of Operation (Battery Charger/Revert Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15
Charger Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15
Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
Battery Revert Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
Current Mode Controller Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
SPI Bus Interface Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
Shutdown Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
Local Supplies Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
210W POWER SUPPLY MODULE (12/24 and 48/60 V dc input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81085E12

9/1/00 68P81095E05-B vii

Startup Inverter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Main Inverter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
+5 V Inverter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Diagnostics Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Address Decode Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
600W POWER SUPPLY MODULE (24 V dc input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81090E44

Startup Inverter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Main Inverter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
+14.2 V Inverter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
+5 V Inverter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Diagnostics Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Address Decode Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
600W POWER SUPPLY MODULE (48/60 V dc input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E84
Power Supply Module Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Functional Theory of Operation (DC Input Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Inverter Circuitry A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Ouput Filter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Functional Theory of Operation (DC Output Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Inverters A/B Control Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
+14.2 V Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
+5 V Supply Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Reference Voltage Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
ANTENNA RELAY OPTION
ANTENNA RELAY (Option X371AA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E22

Input and Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Option Complement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
viii 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

Mounting Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTIONS
VHF TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION (Options X676AA-AC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E34

Options Complement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
UHF TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION (Options X676AN and X676AP) . . . . . . . 68P81088E54

800/900 MHz TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION (Options X676AR and X676AQ) 68P81090E86
DUPLEXER OPTIONS
VHF DUPLEXERS (OPTIONS X182AA, AB, AJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E71

Adjustments and Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Typical Mounting Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Field Tuning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
UHF DUPLEXER (Options X182AC thru X182AF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81087E94
Field Tuning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Field Tuning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Setting Up for Tuning Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Duplexer Tuning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B ix
800/900 MHz DUPLEXERS (Options X182AG and X182AH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81091E93
MODEM OPTION
ASTRO MODEM CARD (OPTION X437AA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E38

PERIPHERAL TRAY OPTION
PERIPHERAL TRAY (OPTION X696AA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E37

Options Complement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Peripheral Tray Contents and Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
UHSO OPTION
ULTRA HIGH STABILITY OSCILLATOR (UHSO; Option X873AA) . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81088E08

SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
RA/RT CONFIGURATION (TRC CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81090E98
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Electrical Connections (RF Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Console to Station 1 Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Electrical Connections (Microwave Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Console to Microwave Station 1 Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Microwave Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
RSS Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
TX Wireline Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Station 1 TX Wireline Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
RA/RT CONFIGURATION (E & M Keying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81090E99

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Electrical Connections (RF Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Console to Station 1 Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
x 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00
Electrical Connections (Microwave Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
Console to Microwave Station 1 Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
Microwave Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
TX Wireline Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Station 3 TX Wireline Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
FALL BACK INCABINET REPEAT FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81095E96

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Configuring the FBICR Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
MAIN / STANDBY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81095E89

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Setting Wireline Impedance Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Main/Standby Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Customizing Main/Standby Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
FAST KEYUP FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P80800A02

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Fast Keyup Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
DUAL CONTROL OF GATED ADDESS VIA TRC AND SAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E11

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Station RSS Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
SAM RSS Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXTERNAL CONTROLLERS . . . . . . . 68P81096E86

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Editing Wildcard Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
, MOTOROLA, QUANTAR, SECURENET, and ASTRO are trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xi
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
xii 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

MODEL AND OPTION SELECTION PROCEDURE
(INCLUDES MODEL/OPTION COMPLEMENTS)
The following equipment ordering scenario is used by the sales representative to equip a Quantar station
with the proper hardware and firmware for specific system types and customerdefined options and fea
tures. The scenario is described here to explain the process and to show the structure and contents of
the various options and models.
The sales model is T5365A (as translated from C99ED/001C).

1
NOTE: The Sales Model includes only a TRN7795A Base Station Nameplate. Equip
ping the station with the proper modules is accomplished by ordering additional op
tions, as described in the following steps.
A System Family Option must be selected as follows:

2
System Type Family VHF UHF 800 900
Option MHZ MHZ
Conventional Analog X597
Conventional Analog SECURENET X598
Conventional ASTRO VSELP X599
Conventional ASTRO CAI X806
6809 Trunking Analog X997
6809 Trunking SECURENET X996
6809 Trunking ASTRO VSELP X992
6809 Trunking ASTRO CAI X900
SMARTZONE 6809 Trunking ASTRO VSELP X989
SMARTZONE 6809 Trunking ASTRO CAI X897
SMARTZONE IntelliRepeater Trunking X999
SMARTZONE IntelliRepeater Trunking SECURENET X998
SMARTZONE IntelliRepeater ASTRO VSELP X990
SMARTZONE IntelliRepeater ASTRO CAI X898
(Continued)
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xiii

3 The following tables show the available power and band options.
VHF
Output
Power 25W 125W
Frequency
Range
VHF High Band

Range 1 Option
(132-154 MHz) Option X530AA
X330AA
VHF High Band
Range 2 Option
(150-174 MHz) X530AB
NOTE: Customer-specified frequencies which are in the 150-154 MHz range are automatically assigned
to Range 2 by Order Processing unless one of the following options is ordered:
X325 (125W only) Specifies Range 1 Exciter (overrides automatic assignment to Range 2) where the
transmit frequency is between 150 and 154 MHz.
X326 Specifies Range 1 Receiver (overrides automatic assignment to Range 2) where the receive fre
quency is between 150 and 154 MHz.
These options are typically used to ensure that the transmit and receive frequencies are in the required
customer range; this is required for use with a duplexer module.
UHF
Output
Power 25W 100W 110W
Frequency
Range
UHF Range 1 Option Not Available Option

(403-433 MHz) X240AA X640AA
UHF Range 2 Option Option

X240AB Not Available X640AB
(438-470 MHz)
UHF Range 3 Not Available Not Available Option

(470-494 MHz) X640AC
UHF Range 4 Option Not Available

Not Available
(494-520 MHz) X640AD
800/900 MHz
Output
Power
Frequency 20W 100W
Range
Option Option
800 MHz X250AA X750AA
Not Available Option

900 MHz X660AA
(Continued)
xiv 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

If no other options are selected, Motorola's Order Processing appends the appropriate stan
4 dard options (based on power and frequency band) to complete the station equipment list.
The tables below show the completed equipment lists for the available options.
If additional options are desired, they must be added to the initial order form. Step 5 lists the
available options and the impact each has on the standard equipment configuration.
VHF
OPTION X330AA SELECTED IN STEP 3 OPTION X330AA SELECTED IN STEP 3
(VHF Range 1; 25W Transmitter) (VHF Range 2; 25W Transmitter)
Option/ Description Option/ Description

Source Source
Kit Kit
X330AA VHF High Band Ranges 1 & 2; 25W Transmitter X330AA VHF High Band Ranges 1 & 2; 25W Transmitter
TLD3110B 25 W Power Amplifier Module (VHF R1 & R2) TLD3110B 25 W Power Amplifier Module (VHF R1 & R2)
Option TKN8699A PA-to-Exciter RF Cable Option TKN8699A PA-to-Exciter RF Cable
from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board (Backplane) from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board (Backplane)
Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel
CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2) CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2)
X131AA Exciter Module (VHF HighBand Range 1) X131AB Exciter Module (VHF HighBand Range 2)
CLD1270A Exciter Module (Board and Hardware) CLD1280A Exciter Module (Board and Hardware)
X333AA Receiver Module (VHF HighBand Range 1) X333AB Receiver Module (VHF HighBand Range 2)
CLD1250A Receiver Module (Board, Preselector, Hardware) CLD1260A Receiver Module (Board, Preselector, Hardware)
CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel
TRN7799A VHF/UHF Tuning Kit TRN7799A VHF/UHF Tuning Kit
X43AB Power Supply Assembly X43AB Power Supply Assembly

CPN1049B 265W Power Supply (AC input; w/o battery chrg) CPN1049B 265W Power Supply (AC input; w/o battery chrg)
CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor
CPN6086A Front Panel, Dummy Charger Connector CPN6086A Front Panel, Dummy Charger Connector
X621AY Station Control Module (SCM); Standard EPIC III X621AY Station Control Module (SCM); Standard EPIC III
CLN1614A Station Control Module CLN1614A Station Control Module
TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker
Options/Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Options/Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable
Internally Added Internally Added
by Motorola X222AB Front Panel (Station Control Module) by Motorola X222AB Front Panel (Station Control Module)
Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel
Processing CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2) Processing CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2)
X216AA Wireline Interface Module (WIM) (4-wire) X216AA Wireline Interface Module (WIM) (4-wire)
CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board
TKN8731A WIM Cable TKN8731A WIM Cable
CLN6816A RFI Suppressor CLN6816A RFI Suppressor
C831AA Card Cage C831AA Card Cage

TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly (12") TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly (12")
X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly

TRN7494A Duplex Interface (includes ant. connector bracket) TRN7494A Duplex Interface (includes ant. connector bracket)
X249AW RF Cabling X249AW RF Cabling

TKN8753A Receiver mini-UHF to N-type coax cable TKN8753A Receiver mini-UHF to N-type coax cable
TKN9126A Transmitter N-type to N-type coax cable TKN9126A Transmitter N-type to N-type coax cable
X187AA Domestic Power Cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable

TRN7663A AC Line Cord TRN7663A AC Line Cord
X163AD Blank Panels X163AD Blank Panels

TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel
X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit

CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware
X430AA 12" Cabinet X430AA 12" Cabinet

THN6700A 12" x 20" Cabinet THN6700A 12" x 20" Cabinet
TTN5040A Grommet TTN5040A Grommet
X362AA Packing X362AA Packing

TBN6625A Packing for 12" Cabinet TBN6625A Packing for 12" Cabinet
X436AA Instruction Manual X436AA Instruction Manual

68P81095E05 Quantar Station Functional Manual 68P81095E05 Quantar Station Functional Manual
(Continued)
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xv
VHF
OPTION X530AA SELECTED IN STEP 3 OPTION X530AB SELECTED IN STEP 3

(VHF Range 1; 125W Transmitter) (VHF Range 2; 125W Transmitter)

Source Source
Kit Kit
X530AA VHF High Band Range 1; 125W Transmitter X530AB VHF High Band Range 2; 125W Transmitter
TLD3101F 125 W Power Amplifier Module (VHF R1) TLD3102F 125 W Power Amplifier Module (VHF R2)
X131AA Exciter Module (VHF HighBand Range 1) X131AB Exciter Module (VHF HighBand Range 2)
CLD1270A Exciter Module (Board and Hardware) CLD1280A Exciter Module (Board and Hardware)
X333AA Receiver Module (VHF HighBand Range 1) X333AB Receiver Module (VHF HighBand Range 2)
CLD1250A Receiver Module (Board, Preselector, Hardware) CLD1260A Receiver Module (Board, Preselector, Hardware)
X43AA Power Supply Assembly X43AA Power Supply Assembly

CPN1047A 625W Power Supply (AC input; w/o battery chrg) CPN1047A 625W Power Supply (AC input; w/o battery chrg)








X436AA Instruction Manual X436AA Instruction Manual

(Continued)
xvi 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

UHF

(Quantar UHF; Range 1, 25W Transmitter) (Quantar UHF; Range 1, 110W Transmitter)

Source Source
Kit Kit
X240AA Quantar UHF R1; 25W Transmitter X640AA Quantar UHF R1; 110W Transmitter
TLE2731A 25 W Power Amplifier Module (UHF R1) TTE2061A 110 W Power Amplifier Module (UHF R1)
X132AA Exciter Module (UHF, R1) X132AA Exciter Module (UHF, R1)
CLE1230A Exciter Module (Board and Hardware) CLE1230A Exciter Module (Board and Hardware)
X334AA Receiver Module (UHF, R1) X334AA Receiver Module (UHF, R1)
CLE1190A Receiver Module (Board, Preselector, Hardware) CLE1190A Receiver Module (Board, Preselector, Hardware)
X43AB Power Supply Assembly X43AA Power Supply Assembly

CPN1049B 265W Power Supply (AC input; w/o battery chrg) CPN1047A 625W Power Supply (AC input; w/o battery chrg)








X436AJ Instruction Manual X436AJ Instruction Manual

(Continued)
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xvii

UHF
OPTION X240AB SELECTED IN STEP 3 OPTION X640AB SELECTED IN STEP 3


Source Source
Kit Kit
X240AB Quantar UHF R2; 25W Transmitter X640AB Quantar UHF R2; 110W Transmitter
TLE2732A 25 W Power Amplifier Module (UHF R2) TTE2062A 110 W Power Amplifier Module (UHF R2)
X132AB Exciter Module (UHF, R2) X132AB Exciter Module (UHF, R2)
X334AB Receiver Module (UHF, R2) X334AB Receiver Module (UHF, R2)










(Continued)
xviii 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

UHF
OPTION X640AC SELECTED IN STEP 3 OPTION X640AD SELECTED IN STEP 3


Source Source
Kit Kit
X640AC Quantar UHF R3; 110W Transmitter X640AD Quantar UHF R4; 100W Transmitter
TTE2063A 110 W Power Amplifier Module (UHF R3) TTE2064A 100 W Power Amplifier Module (UHF R4)
X132AC Exciter Module (UHF, R3) X132AD Exciter Module (UHF, R4)
X334AC Receiver Module (UHF, R3) X334AD Receiver Module (UHF, R4)
X43AA Power Supply Assembly X43AA Power Supply Assembly

CPN1047A 625W Power Supply (AC input; w/o battery chrg) CPN1047A 625W Power Supply (AC input; w/o battery chrg)









(Continued)
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xix

800 MHz

(800 MHz Quantar; 20W Transmitter) (800 MHz Quantar; 100W Transmitter)

Source Source
Kit Kit
X250AA Quantar 800 MHz; 20W Transmitter X750AA Quantar 800 MHz; 100W Transmitter
TLF1940A 20 W Power Amplifier Module (800 MHz) TLF1930C 100 W Power Amplifier Module (800 MHz)
X133AA Exciter Module (800 MHz) X133AA Exciter Module (800 MHz)
CLF1510A Exciter Module (Board and Hardware) CLF1510A Exciter Module (Board and Hardware)
X335AA Receiver Module (800 MHz) X335AA Receiver Module (800 MHz)
CLF1530A Receiver Module (Board, Front Panel, Hardware) CLF1530A Receiver Module (Board, Front Panel, Hardware)

TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable
Options/Kits X222AB Front Panel (Station Control Module) Options/Kits X222AB Front Panel (Station Control Module)
Internally Added CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Internally Added CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel
by Motorola CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2) by Motorola CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2)
Order Order
Processing X216AA Wireline Interface Module (WIM) (4-wire) Processing X216AA Wireline Interface Module (WIM) (4-wire)




X163AL Blank Panels X163AL Blank Panels

TRN7695A Single Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7695A Single Slot Wide Blank Panel



X436AH Instruction Manual X436AH Instruction Manual

(Continued)
xx 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00
900 MHz
OPTION X660AA SELECTED IN STEP 3

(900 MHz; 100W Transmitter)
Option/ Description
Source
Kit
X660AA Quantar 900 MHz; 100W Transmitter

TLF1800B 100 W Power Amplifier Module (900 MHz)
Option TKN8699A PA-to-Exciter RF Cable
from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board (Backplane)
Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel
CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2)
X134AA Exciter Module (900 MHz)

CLF1520A Exciter Module (Board and Hardware)
X336AA Receiver Module (900 MHz)

CLF1540A Receiver Module (Board, Front Panel, Hardware)
X43AA Power Supply Assembly

CPN1047A 625W Power Supply (AC input; w/o battery chrg)
CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor
CPN6086A Front Panel, Dummy Charger Connector
X621AY Station Control Module (SCM); Standard EPIC III

CLN1614A Station Control Module
TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker
TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable
Options/Kits X222AB Front Panel (Station Control Module)

Internally Added CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel
by Motorola CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2)
Order
Processing X216AA Wireline Interface Module (WIM) (4-wire)
CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board
TKN8731A WIM Cable
CLN6816A RFI Suppressor
C831AA Card Cage

TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly (12")
X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly

TRN7494A Duplex Interface (includes ant. connector bracket)
X249AW RF Cabling
TKN8753A Receiver mini-UHF to N-type coax cable
TKN9126A Transmitter N-type to N-type coax cable
X187AA Domestic Power Cable

TRN7663A AC Line Cord
X163AL Blank Panels

TRN7695A Single Slot Wide Blank Panel
TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel
X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit

CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware
X430AA 12" Cabinet

THN6700A 12" x 20" Cabinet
TTN5040A Grommet
X362AA Packing
TBN6625A Packing for 12" Cabinet
X436AD Instruction Manual

68P81095E05 Quantar Station Functional Manual
(Continued)
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xxi

The following lists available options that may be selected in addition to the standard model
5 and options (described in Steps 1 thru 4).
AVAILABLE HARDWARE OPTIONS FOR QUANTAR STATION
Option
Option and Complement
Category
AC Input Supplies DC Input Supplies

X30AA 625W Power Supply with Battery Charger X121AA 210W Power Supply (12/24V DC Input)
CPN1048C 625W Power Supply Assembly w/ Battery Charger TRN7802A 210W Power Supply Assembly (12/24 V DC Input)
TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit
TKN8786A Battery Temperature Sensor TRN5155A 10' Extension Cable w/connectors and fuse block
TRN5155A 10' Extension Cable w/connectors and fuse block CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2)
CLN7261A AC Line Cord Ferrite RFI Suppressor
CLN7419A Power Supply Front Panel w/Screws
X30AB 265W Power Supply with Battery Charger X112AA 600W Power Supply (24V DC Input)
CPN1050E 265W Power Supply Assembly w/ Battery Charger TRN7801A 600W Power Supply Assembly (24 V DC Input)
TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit
TKN8786A Battery Temperature Sensor TRN5155A 10' Extension Cable w/connectors and fuse block
TRN5155A 10' Extension Cable w/connectors and fuse block CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2)
Power CHN6100A AntiVibration/EFI Screws (2)
Supply CLN7261A AC Line Cord Ferrite RFI Suppressor
CPN6086A Power Supply Front Panel w/Screws
X113AA 210W Power Supply (48/60 V DC Input)

TRN7803A 210W Power Supply Assembly (48/60 V DC Input)
TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit
TRN5155A 10' Extension Cable w/connectors and fuse block
X113AB 600W Power Supply (48/60 V DC Input)

CPN1031B 600W Power Supply Assembly (48/60 V DC Input)
TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit
TRN5155A 10' Extension Cable w/connectors and fuse block
TTN4068A Power Supply Front Panel and Screws
X84AA Omit Standard Wireline Interface Module (WIM)

Wireline
X144AA Add 8-Wire Wireline Interface Module (WIM)
Interface CLN6956A 8-Wire Wireline Interface Board (WIB)
Module TKN8731A WIM Cable Kit
CLN6816A RFI Suppressor
Antenna X371AA Add Antenna Relay

TRN7664A Antenna Relay, Cables, and Mounting Hardware
Relay
X182AA Add Duplexer Module (132-146 MHz)
0185417U01 Duplexer (132-146 MHz)
X182AC Add Duplexer Module (UHF R1) TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr
0185417U04 Duplexer (UHF R1)
TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr X182AB Add Duplexer Module (144-160MHz)
0185417U02 Duplexer (144-160 MHz)
X182AD Add Duplexer Module (UHF R2) TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr
TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr X182AJ Add Duplexer Module (158-174 MHz)
0185417U03 Duplexer (158-174 MHz)
Duplexer TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr
X182AE Add Duplexer Module (UHF R3)
TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr X182AG Add Duplexer Module (800 MHz)
TDF6980A Duplexer (800 MHz)
TTN5008A Duplexer Hardware (4 screws)
X182AF Add Duplexer Module (UHF R4)
TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr X182AH Add Duplexer Module (900 MHz)
TDF6542A Duplexer (900 MHz)
TTN5008A Duplexer Hardware (4 screws)
X437AA Add ASTRO Modem

Modem TRN7668A ASTRO Modem Card
xxii 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

Option
Option and Complement
Category
X676AP Add Triple Circulator (UHF, R3 and R4)
X676AN Add Triple Circulator (UHF, R1 and R2) TLE9130A Dual Circulator
TLE9120A Dual Circulator TLN3391A 50 Ohm Load with Heat Sink
TLN3391A 50 Ohm Load with Heat Sink TLE9140A Low Pass Filter
TLE9140A Low Pass Filter TRN7796A Fan, Peripheral Tray
TRN7796A Fan, Peripheral Tray
X676AQ Add Triple Circulator (800 MHz)

X676AA Add Triple Circulator (132-146 MHz) TLF7320A Dual Circulator
TYD4001A Dual Circulator TLN3391A 50 Ohm Load with Heat Sink
Circulator TLN3391A 50 Ohm Load with Heat Sink TLF7340A Low Pass Filter
TYD4010A Low Pass Filter TRN7796A Fan, Peripheral Tray
TRN7796A Cooling Fan
X676AB Add Triple Circulator (144-160 MHz) X676AR Add Triple Circulator (900 MHz)
Same as X676AA except substitute TYD4002A Dual Circulator TLF7330A Dual Circulator
TLN3391A 50 Ohm Load with Heat Sink
X676AC Add Triple Circulator (158-174 MHz) TLF7340A Low Pass Filter
Same as X676AA except substitute TYD4003A Dual Circulator TRN7796A Fan, Peripheral Tray
X873AA Add Internal Ultra High Stability Oscillator

CLN7012A BNC Terminator
CLN1477A UHSO Module
UHSO TTN5070CUHSO Board
TTN5071AUHSO Housing and Front Panel
TTN5072AUHSO 5 PPB Ovenized Element
Peripheral X696AA Add Peripheral Tray

TRN7751A Quantar Peripheral Shelf
Tray
HSN1000 External Speaker
TRN7738A External Speaker Hardware (bracket and cable)
Miscellaneous HMN1001A Microphone
Note that the external speaker and microphone are not options and must be
ordered as line items on the STIC-1 order form.
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xxiii

FOREWORD
Product Maintenance
Philosophy
Due to the high percentage of surfacemount components and
multi-layer circuit boards, the maintenance philosophy for this prod
uct is one of Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) substitution. The station is
comprised of selfcontained modules (FRUs) which, when determined
to be faulty, may be quickly and easily replaced with a known good
module to bring the equipment back to normal operation. The faulty
module must then be shipped to the Motorola System Support Center
for further troubleshooting and repair to the component level.
Scope of Manual
This manual is intended for use by experienced technicians familiar
with similar types of equipment. In keeping with the maintenance phi
losophy of Field Replaceable Units (FRU), this manual contains func
tional information sufficient to give service personnel an operational
understanding of all FRU modules, allowing faulty FRU modules to be
identified and replaced with known good FRU replacements.
The information in this manual is current as of the printing date.
Changes which occur after the printing date are incorporated by In
struction Manual Revisions (SMR). These SMRs are added to the man
uals as the engineering changes are incorporated into the equipment.
xxiv 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

Service and
Replacement Modules
For complete information on ordering FRU replacement modules, or
instructions on how to return faulty modules for repair, contact the Sys
Motorola System Support Center tem Support Center (see sidebar).
1311 E. Algonquin Road
Schaumburg, IL 60196 The following FRU replacement modules are available:
Receiver Module (VHF Range 1) TLN3250A
1-800-221-7144
Int'l 1-847-576-7300 Receiver Module (VHF Range 2) TLN3251A
FAX 1-847-576-2172 Receiver Module (UHF, Range 1) TLN3313A
Receiver Module (UHF, Range 2) TLN3314A
Receiver Module (800 MHz) TLN3315A
Receiver Module (900 MHz) TLN3316A
Exciter Module (VHF Range 1) TLN3252A
Exciter Module (VHF Range 2) TLN3253A
Exciter Module (UHF, Range 1) TLN3305A
Exciter Module (800 MHz) TLN3307A
Exciter Module (900 MHz) TLN3308A
Power Amplifier Module (VHF 25W, R1 & R2) TLN3255A
Power Amplifier Module (VHF 125W, R1) TLN3379A
Power Amplifier Module (VHF 125W, R2) TLN3254A
Power Amplifier Module (UHF R1; 25W) TLN3443A
Power Amplifier Module (800 MHz 20W) TLN3441A
Station Control Module (Conventional/6809) CLN1293A
Station Control Module (Conventional/6809 EPIC III) CLN1621A
Station Control Module (IntelliRepeater) CLN1294A
4-Wire Wireline Interface Module CLN1295A
8-Wire Wireline Interface Module CLN1296A
Power Supply Module (625W AC) TLN3259A
Power Supply Module (625W AC w/charger) TLN3260A
Power Supply Module (265W AC) TLN3261A
Power Supply Module (265W AC w/charger) TLN3262A
Power Supply Module (210W 12/24 V DC) TLN3264A
Power Supply Module (600W 24 V DC) TLN3263A
ASTRO Modem Card TLN3265A
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xxv

GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of
the equipment described in this manual. The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers
of which we are aware. You should follow these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe
operation of the equipment in your operating environment.
General Safety Precautions

Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in this manual be
fore installing, servicing or operating the equipment. Retain these safety instructions for future reference.
Also, all applicable safety procedures, such as Occupational, Safety, and Health Administration (OSHA)
requirements, National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements, local code requirements, safe working practic
es, and good judgement must be used by personnel.
Refer to appropriate section of the product service manual for additional pertinent safety information.
Because of danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unautho
rized modifications of equipment.
Identify maintenance actions that require two people to perform the repair. Two people are required when:
- A repair has the risk of injury that would require one person to perform first aid or call for emergency
support. An example would be work around high voltage sources. A second person may be required
to remove power and call for emergency aid if an accident occurs to the first person.
NoteUse the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) lifting equation to deter
mine whether a one or two person lift is required when a system component must be removed and re
placed in its rack.
If troubleshooting the equipment while power is applied, be aware of the live circuits.
DO NOT operate the transmitter of any radio unless all RF connectors are secure and all connectors are
properly terminated.
All equipment must be properly grounded in accordance with Motorola Standards and Guideline for Com
munications Sites R56" 68P81089E50 and specified installation instructions for safe operation.
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product
and to protect if from overheating, these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered.
Only a qualified technician familiar with similar electronic equipment should service equipment.
Some equipment components can become extremely hot during operation. Turn off all power to the equip
ment and wait until sufficiently cool before touching.
Human Exposure Compliance

This equipment is designed to generate and radiate radio frequency (RF) energy by means of an external antenna.
When terminated into a non-radiating RF load, the base station equipment is certified to comply with Federal Com
munications Commission (FCC) regulations pertaining to human exposure to RF radiation in accordance with the
FCC Rules Part 1 section 1.1310 as published in title 47 code of federal regulations and procedures established
in TIA/EIA TSB92, Report On EME Evaluation for RF Cabinet Emissions Under FCC MPE Guidelines. Compliance
to FCC regulations of the final installation should be assessed and take into account site specific characteristics
xxvi 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

such as type and location of antennas, as well as site accessibility of occupational personnel (controlled environ
ment) and the general public (uncontrolled environment). This equipment should only be installed and maintained
by trained technicians. Licensees of the FCC using this equipment are responsible for insuring that its installation
and operation comply with FCC regulations Part 1 section 1.1310 as published in title 47 code of federal regulations.
Whether a given installation meets FCC limits for human exposure to radio frequency radiation may depend not only
on this equipment but also on whether the environments" being assessed are being affected by radio frequency
fields from other equipment, the effects of which may add to the level of exposure. Accordingly, the overall exposure
may be affected by radio frequency generating facilities that exist at the time the licensee's equipment is being
installed or even by equipment installed later. Therefore, the effects of any such facilities must be considered in site
selection and in determining whether a particular installation meets the FCC requirements.
FCC OET Bulletin 65 provides materials to assist in making determinations if a given facility is compliant with the
human exposure to RF radiation limits. Determining the compliance of transmitter sites of various complexities may
be accomplished by means of computational methods. For more complex sites direct measurement of the power
density may be more expedient. Additional information on the topic of electromagnetic exposure is contained in
the Motorola Standards and Guideline for Communications Sites publication. Persons responsible for installation
of this equipment are urged to consult the listed reference material to assist in determining whether a given installa
tion complies with the applicable limits.
In general the following guidelines should be observed when working in or around radio transmitter sites:
All personnel should have electromagnetic energy awareness training
All personnel entering the site must be authorized
Obey all posted signs
Assume all antennas are active
Before working on antennas, notify owners and disable appropriate transmitters
Maintain minimum 3 feet clearance from all antennas
Do not stop in front of antennas
Use personal RF monitors while working near antennas
Never operate transmitters without shields during normal operation
Do not operate base station antennas in equipment rooms
For installations outside of the U.S., consult with the applicable governing body and standards for RF energy human
exposure requirements and take the necessary steps for compliance with local regulations.
References
TIA/EIA TSB92 Report On EME Evaluation for RF Cabinet Emissions Under FCC MPE Guidelines," Global Engi
neering Documents: http://global.ihs.com/
FCC OET Bulletin 65 Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electro
magnetic Fields": http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
Motorola Standards and Guideline for Communications Sites, Motorola manual 68P81089E50.
IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measure of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields - RF and Micro
wave, IEEE Std C95.3-1991, Publication Sales, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscattaway, NJ 08855-1331
IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3
kHz to 300 GHz, IEEE C95.1-1991, Publication Sales, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscattaway, NJ 08855-1331.
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xxvii

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
General
VHF UHF 800 900
132-154 MHz (R1) 403-433 MHz (R1) 851-870 MHz 935-941 MHz
TX Sub-Band Range 150-174 MHz (R2) 438-470 MHz (R2)
470-494 MHz (R3)
494-520 MHz (R4)
VHF UHF 800 900
132-154 MHz (R1) 403-433 MHz (R1) 806-825 MHz 896-902 MHz
RX Sub-Band Range 150-174 MHz (R2) 438-470 MHz (R2)
470-494 MHz (R3)
494-520 MHz (R4)
Number of Channels 16
Channel Spacing VHF: 30, 25, 12.5 kHz UHF/800: 12.5, 25 kHz 900: 12.5 kHz
Frequency Generation Synthesized
Power Supply Type Switching
Power Supply Input Voltage 90-280 V ac
Power Supply Input Frequency 47-63 Hz
12V (25W radios)
Battery Revert
24V (100W, 110W, and 125W radios)
T/R Separation (with duplexer option) VHF: >1.5 MHz UHF/800:45 MHz 900: 39 MHz
Temperature Range (ambient) 30 C to +60 C
xxviii 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
Receiver
VHF UHF 800 900
I-F Frequencies 21.45 MHz (1st) 73.35 MHz (1st) 73.35 MHz (1st) 73.35 MHz (1st)
450 kHz (2nd) 450 kHz (2nd) 450 kHz (2nd) 450 kHz (2nd)
Preselector Bandwidth VHF/UHF: 4 MHz 800: 19 MHz 900: 6 MHz
Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) VHF: 0.25 V UHF: 0.35 V 800/900: 0.30 V
Sensitivity (20 dB Quieting) VHF: 0.35 V UHF: 0.5 V 800/900: 0.42 V
VHF UHF 800 900
Adjacent Channel Rejection 90 dB (25/30 kHz) 75 dB (12.5 kHz) 70 dB (12.5 kHz) 70dB
80 dB (23.5 kHz) 85 dB (25 kHz) 80 db (25 kHz)
VHF UHF 800 900
Intermodulation Rejection 85 dB (25/30 kHz) 85 dB 85 dB 70 dB
80 dB (30 kHz)
Spurious and Image Rejection 100 dB
Wireline Output -20 dBm to 0 dBm @ 60% Rated System Deviation, 1 kHz
+1, -3 dB from 6 dB per octave de-emphasis; 300-3000 Hz referenced to 1000
Audio Response (Analog Mode)
Hz at line input
Audio Distortion Less than 3% @ 1000 Hz
VHF UHF 800 900
FM Hum and Noise (300 to 3000 kHz band
50 dB (25/30 kHz) 45 dB (12.5 kHz) 45 dB (12.5 kHz) 45 db
width)
45 dB (12.5 kHz) 50 dB (25 kHz) 50 dB (25 kHz)
Frequency Stability 1 ppm
RF Input Impedance 50
VHF: ABZ89FR3776 UHF: ABZ89FR4796 800: ABZ89FR5757
FCC Designation (FCC Rule Part 15)
900: ABZ89FR5768
9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xxix

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
Transmitter
VHF UHF 800 900
Power Output 6-25W 5-25W 5-20W 6-25W
25-125W 25-110W 20-100W
Electronic Bandwidth Full sub-band
VHF: 20 dB (single circulator; standard on all PAs)
65 dB (triple circulator - requires triple circulator option)
UHF: 50 dB (single circulator; standard on all PAs)
Intermodulation Attenuation
800: 50 dB (single circulator; standard on all PAs)
900: 20 dB (single circulator; standard on all PAs)
70 dB (triple circulator - requires triple circulator option)
Spurious and Harmonic Emissions Attenuation 90 dB
VHF, UHF, and 800 900
5 kHz (25 kHz) 2.5 kHz
Deviation 2.5 kHz (12.5 kHz)
4 kHz (SECURENET coded)
2.4 kHz (SECURENET coded)
Audio Sensitivity -35 dBm to 0 dBm (variable)
+1, -3 dB from 6 dB per octave pre-emphasis; 300-3000 Hz referenced to
Audio Response (Analog Mode)
1000 Hz at line input
Audio Distortion Less than 2% @ 1000 Hz @ 60% rated system deviation
45 dB nominal (12.5 kHz)
FM Hum and Noise (300 to 3000 Hz bandwidth)
50 dB nominal (25/30 kHz)
Frequency Stability VHF, UHF, 800: 1 ppm 900: 0.1ppm
RF Output Impedance 50
VHF
25W: ABZ89FC3774
125W: ABZ89FC3773
UHF
25W: ABZ89FC4797
FCC Designation (FCC Rule Parts 22, 74, 80, 110W: ABZ89FC4798
90)
800
20W: ABZ89FC5775
100W: ABZ89FC5776
900
100W: ABZ89FC5767
Measurement Methods per TIA/EIA-603

Specifications subject to change without notice
xxx 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

DESCRIPTION
Figure 1. Quantar Station in 12" Cabinet (UHF Shown)
1 INTRODUCTION
The Motorola Quantar Station (available in VHF, UHF, 800 MHz and 900 MHz) provides conventional analog,
ASTRO, ASTRO CAI, SECURENET, 6809 Trunking, and IntelliRepeater capabilities in a compact, software-con
trolled design. The station architecture and microprocessor-controlled Station Control Module allow for fast and
reliable expansion and upgrading. FLASH memory in the Station Control Module allows software downloads to
be performed locally (using serial or Ethernet port) or remotely via modem.
Compact Mechanical
Design
The entire Quantar station is housed in a 5 rack-unit-high card cage
weighing only 55 lbs. A single cage may be mounted in a 12" cabinet
(shown in Figure 1) or multiple cages may be mounted in standard
telephone-style equipment racks or various sizes of Motorola cabi
nets.

Motorola, Inc. 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector
All Rights Reserved 68P81096E56-A
Printed in U.S.A. 1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196 9/1/00-UP
Quantar Station Functional Manual
State-of-the-Art
Electrical Design
Transmitter Circuitry
The station transmitter circuitry is designed for continuous duty opera
tion and may be operated at full-rated power. Output power is continu
ally monitored by an internal calibrated wattmeter. The wattmeter out
put feeds a power control loop which continually adjusts and maintains
the desired output power. All adjustments are electronic, including de
viation and output power.
Receiver Circuitry
The station receive circuitry features multiple bandwidth capability
(12.5, 25, or 30 kHz, depending on band), as well as ASTRO digital op
eration. Injection signals for the 1st and 2nd mixers are generated by
frequency synthesizer circuitry electronically controlled by the Station
Control Module. All receive signals (analog, SECURENET, ASTRO, and
ASTRO CAI) are detected and digitized before being sent to the Station
Control Module, providing improved audio quality consistency
throughout the coverage area.
Station Control Module
The Quantar Station Control Module is microprocessor-based and
features extensive use of ASIC and digital signal processing technolo
gy. The module serves as the main controller for the station, providing
signal processing and operational control for the station modules.
Wireline Circuitry
The station wireline circuitry provides a wide variety of telephone
interfaces, including analog, ASTRO, ASTRO CAI, SECURENET, Tone
Remote Control, DC Remote Control, and WildCard I/O connections.
Telephone line connections are easily made to the wireline circuitry via
connectors on the rear of the station.
Switching Power Supply
The Quantar station features a switching-type power supply which ac
cepts a wide range of ac inputs (90-280 V ac, 47-63 Hz) and gener
ates the necessary dc operating voltages for the station modules. The
power supply continually monitors and adjusts the output voltages,
and requires no external adjustments or calibration.
2 68P81096E56-A
9/1/00
Description
Summary of Operating
Features
Standard Features
The following are a few of the standard Quantar features:
Compact, single cage design
Extensive SelfTest Diagnostics and Alarm Reporting
FRU maintenance philosophy (reduces down time)
Easily programmed via Radio Service Software
Local or Remote Software downloading to FLASH memory
Expansion and upgrades performed by module replacement
and/or software upgrade
Highly reliable and accurate continuous duty transmitter circuitry
Operates as IntelliRepeater trunking station
Compatible (with appropriate options) with analog,
SECURENET, ASTRO and ASTRO CAI digital signaling
Versatile and reliable switching-type power supply
Wide operating temperature range: -30 C to +60 C
(-22 F to +140 F)
Optional Hardware Features

The following are a few of the Quantar station optional hardware fea
tures:
Battery Revert charges colocated storage batteries and au
tomatically reverts to battery backup operation in the event of ac
power failure
Triple Circulator Option provides additional isolation and in
termodulation protection for rfcongested transmitter sites
Duplexer Option allows a single antenna to serve for both
transmitter and receiver circuitry in repeater applications
Antenna Relay Option allows a single antenna to be switched
between transmitter and receiver circuitry for base station appli
cations
UHSO Option ultra-high stability oscillator provides im
proved station frequency accuracy required for some system
types
ASTRO Modem allows connection (for ASTRO digital signal
ing) to a console through a Digital Interface Unit (DIU) in an
ASTRO system
Station Access Module (SAM) allows station to decode MDC
Repeater Access (e.g., Select5, DTMF, etc.)
Wide Space Receiver provides 8 MHz receiver bandwidth for
VHF and UHF stations
68P81096E56-A
9/1/00
3
Multiple System Capability

In addition to conventional capabilities, the Quantar station can be pro
grammed to operate in 6809 Trunking and IntelliRepeater Trunking
systems.
6809 Trunking
When programmed for 6809 Trunking capability, the station can oper
ate in a SMARTNET trunking system under control of a 6809 Trunking
Controller.
IntelliRepeater Trunking
When programmed for IntelliRepeater capability, the Quantar station
can operate in Motorola's most advanced widearea trunking systems
SMARTZONE. The station can operate both as a remote voice chan
nel and, if necessary, perform all call processing and channel assign
ment tasks normally requiring a trunking controller.
4 68P81096E56-A
9/1/00
Description
68P81096E56-A
9/1/00
5
2 STATION COMPONENTS
Figure 2 shows the Quantar station modules and components (UHF shown).
6 68P81096E56-A
9/1/00
Description
FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW
POWER AMPLIFIER POWER SUPPLY

MODULE MODULE
EXCITER
STATION TRANSMIT STATION RECEIVE
MODULE
OUTPUT INPUT
BACKPLANE
SHIELD
STATION CAGE
WIRELINE INTERFACE
BOARD
(BEHIND FRONT PANEL)
STATION CONTROL RECEIVER

MODULE MODULE
BATTERY REVERT
CABLE KIT
(OPTIONAL)
AC LINE CORD
Figure 2. Quantar Station Components (Front and Rear Views; UHF Shown)
9/1/00 68P81096E56-A 7
3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION
The following functional theory of operation provides an overview of the station circuitry. For a more thorough func
tional description of a particular module, refer to the functional sections located behind the tab STATION MOD
ULES. Refer to the block diagram in Figure 3 for the following functional theory of operation.
Transmitter Circuitry
Operation
Introduction
The Transmitter Circuitry is comprised of the Exciter Module and the
Power Amplifier (PA) Module. These modules combine to produce the
modulated, amplified rf signal which is transmitted via the site transmit
antenna.
Exciter Module Operation

The Exciter Module is a microprocessorcontrolled module which gen
erates a modulated rf signal at the desired transmit frequency and
sends this signal to the PA for amplification. The circuitry operates as
follows.
The synthesizer/VCO accepts frequency programming data from the
Station Control Module (via the SPI bus) and generates an rf carrier sig
nal at the specified frequency. The modulation audio signal (from the
SCM) modulates the carrier, resulting in a modulated rf signal at ap
proximately +13 dBm which is fed to the PA.
The TX Power Control Circuitry accepts an output power detect voltage
from the PA and compares this signal to a reference voltage represent
ing the desired output power. Based on the comparison, a power con
trol voltage is generated to control the output power from the PA. This
feedback and control loop continually monitors the output power and
adjusts the control voltage to maintain the proper output power from
the PA.
Power Amplifier Module Operation

The modulated rf signal from the Exciter Module is input to the
Intermediate Power Amplifier (IPA) in the PA. After amplification to ap
proximately 0-10 W (depending on power control voltage from Exciter
Module), the signal is fed to a Driver or a Final module (depending on
station's maximum output power). The gain of the IPA stage is con
trolled by the power control voltage from the Exciter Module.
The modulated rf signal is amplified by the Driver and/or Final and is
output to the site transmit antenna via a circulator and a harmonic filter/
coupler. The coupler consists of a calibrated wattmeter which feeds a
dc voltage proportional to the output power to the TX Power Control
Circuitry in the Exciter Module to serve as the feedback signal in the
power control loop.
8 68P81096E56-A
9/1/00
Description
Receiver Circuitry
Operation
Introduction
The Receiver Circuitry accepts receive rf signals from the site receive
antenna, performs filtering and dual conversion, and outputs a digi
tized receive signal to the Station Control Module.
Receiver Module Operation

The receive signal is input from the site receive antenna to a multipole
preselector filter which provides highly selective bandpass filtering.
The filtered signal is then amplified and fed to the rf input of the 1st mix
er, which mixes the signal with an injection signal generated by the syn
thesizer/VCO, resulting in a 21.45 MHz (VHF) or a 73.35 MHz (UHF,
800, 900) 1st i-f (intermediate frequency) signal. (The injection signal
frequency is determined by frequency programming data from the Sta
tion Control Module via the SPI bus.)
The 21.45 MHz or 73.35 MHz 1st i-f signal is filtered and input to a cus
tom receiver IC. This component contains circuitry for 2nd injection
and mixing, amplification, and A/D (analog to digital) conversion, re
sulting in a digitized receive signal. This signal is fed as differential data
to the Station Control Module.
Station Control Module

Operation
Introduction
The Station Control Module (SCM) is the microprocessor-based con
troller for the station. Major components include an MC68360 micro
processor, a 56002 Digital Signal Processor (DSP), and two ASIC de
vices (host and DSP). The SCM operates as follows.
Station Control Module Operation

The Host Microprocessor (P) serves as the controller for the SCM, op
erating from the station software stored in FLASH memory. This soft
ware determines the system capabilities of the station (analog, ASTRO,
SECURENET, etc.) The Host P communicates with the station mod
ules and the SCM circuitry via address and data buses, an HDLC bus,
and a SPI bus. External communications ports include a serial port
SCM front panel and backplane) and an Ethernet port (backplane).
The DSP and DSP ASIC perform the necessary digital processing for
the station audio and data signals. The DSP circuitry interfaces with the
Receiver Module (receive audio), the Exciter Module (modulation sig
nal), the Wireline Interface Board (wireline audio), and external audio
devices (microphone, handset, external speaker, and station local
speaker).
The 2.1 MHz Reference Oscillator generates the reference signal used
by the Receiver and Exciter Modules.
68P81096E56-A
9/1/00
9
Wireline Interface Board

Operation
Introduction
The Wireline Interface Board (WIB) serves as the interface between the
customer telephone lines and the station. In general, the WIB pro
cesses and routes all wireline audio signals between the station and
the landline equipment (such as consoles, modems, etc.). Landlineto
station and stationtolandline audio signals are connected to the WIB
via copper pairs at the rear of the station.
Wireline Interface Board Operation

Note:The WIB is offered in 4-wire and The WIB contains a microprocessor, two FLASH memory ICs (which
8-wire models. The WIB shown in the block contain the WIB operating software downloaded by the SCM), and an
diagram is a simplified 4-wire model. Refer
to the functional sections located behind tab ASIC device to process and route the various audio signals. Analog,
WIRELINE CIRCUITRY for details on both SECURENET, and ASTRO signals are processed as follows.
models. Analog signals are converted to digital signals and routed to the
SCM via the TDM (time division multiplex) bus.
ASTRO and ASTRO CAI data signals are processed by an
ASTRO modem card (daughter board plugged into the WIB) and
sent to/from the SCM via the HDLC bus. (The station operates
in transparent mode only, and does not perform encryption or
decryption of the ASTRO or ASTRO CAI signal.)
SECURENET encoded signals are processed by the ASIC, sent
to/from the microprocessor via the data bus, and sent to/from
the Station Control Module microprocessor via the HDLC bus.
(The station operates in transparent mode only, and does not
perform encryption or decryption of the SECURENET signal.)
The WIB also contains the I/O circuitry used with the WildCard Option.
Refer to the Quantar/Quantro RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35) for
more information on the WildCard Option.
Power Supply Module

Operation
The Power Supply Module is a switching-type power supply which ac
cepts an ac input (90-280 V ac, 47-63 Hz) and generates the neces
sary dc operating voltages for the station modules. Stations rated at
20/25 W output power are equipped with Power Supply Modules
which generate +5 and +14.2 V dc. Stations rated at 100/110/125 W
output power are equipped with Power Supply Modules which gener
ate +5, +14.2 V, and +28 V dc.
10 68P81096E56-A
9/1/00
Description
RECEIVE
ANTENNA
WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD
WIRELINE AUDIO WIRELINE AUDIO
FROM FROM
LANDLINE 4-WIRE & 2-WIRE AUDIO CIRCUIT STATION
TO (4-WIRE CIRCUIT SHOWN) TO
STATION LANDLINE
RF INPUT/OUTPUT
CONNECTOR RECEIVER MODULE
BRACKET
(REAR OF STATION) ADDRESS
ASTRO
MODEM
1ST MICROPROCESSOR
MIXER DATA
3-POLE (UHF) CUSTOM
5-POLE (VHF) RECEIVER
BANDPASS IC PERIPHERAL
7-POLE (800/900) DIFFERENTIAL DATA ASIC
PRESELECTOR FILTERING
21.45 MHz (VHF) (2ND INJECTION, DATA
FILTER 73.35 MHZ (UHF, MEMORY
AMPLIFICATION,
800, 900) A/D CONVERSION)
SPI BUS
HDLC BUS
TO/FROM SYNTHESIZER/
VCO
STATION CONTROL MODULE
STATION CONTROL
MODULE
RSS TERMINAL DSP TDM BUS

(LAPTOP TYPICAL) HDLC BUS ASIC
2.1 MHZ REF INTERFACE
COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
FOR DLAN, ETHERNET, AND
SERIAL
DATA AUDIO
HOST ADDRESS EXTERNAL
MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE
ADDRESS DIGITAL BUS SPEAKER
SIGNAL DSP
PROCESSOR ASIC
ADDRESS (DSP) DATA HANDSET
EARPIECE
& MOUTHPIECE
DATA HOST SPI BUS
TO/FROM AUDIO
ASIC INTERFACE
STATION MODULES
CIRCUITRY
MEMORY
STATION
LOCAL
RSS SPEAKER
HOST
INTERFACE MEMORY
VCO & REF MOD AUDIO
POWER SUPPLY MODULE 2.1 MHZ REF 2.1 MHZ REF
2.1 MHZ
2.1 MHZ REF 2.1 MHZ REF REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
TRANSMIT
VCO & REF MOD AUDIO ANTENNA
+5V
AC
INPUT SWITCHING REGULATOR TX FORWARD POWER DETECT
CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY +14.2V
+28V
EXCITER MODULE POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE
POWER CONTROL VOLTAGE

TX
PA KEY POWER CONTROL
SPI BUS CIRCUITRY
TO/FROM MICROPROCESSOR CIRCULATOR
TX ENABLE
STATION CONTROL DRIVER
INTERMEDIATE FINAL
MODULE AMPLIFIER HARMONIC
POWER AMPLIFIER
(UHF & FILTER/
AMPLIFIER (100/110/125 W
25W VHF COUPLER
(IPA) PA ONLY)
ONLY)
50 OHM
VCO & REF MOD AUDIO MODULATED RF LOAD
RF MODULATED RF
SYNTHESIZER/ SWITCH
2.1 MHZ REF VCO CIRCUITRY +13 DBM
Figure 3. Quantar Station Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81096E56-A 11
INSTALLATION
For Quantar Stations and
Ancillary Equipment
(VHF, UHF, 800 MHz, and 900 MHz)
Contents
1.Pre-Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . 2 3.Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Environmental Conditions at Intended Site . . . . . . . . . 3 AC Input Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Equipment Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DC Input Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
AC Input Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ground Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Equipment Mounting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Storage Battery Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Site Grounding and Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . 5
Recommended Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 RF Cabling Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Equipment Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Physical Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Separate RX and TX Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Quantar Cage without Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Antenna Relay Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Quantar Cages Installed in 7', 7' and 8' Racks . . . 8 Duplexer Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Quantar Cages Installed in Modular Racks . . . . . . . 9
12" x 20" Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
30" x 20" Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
46" x 20" Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
60" Indoor Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 IntelliRepeater DLAN Cabling Connections . . . . . 38
IntelliRepeater Ethernet Cabling Connections . . . . 40
6809 Trunking Cabling Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Zone Controller Cabling Connections . . . . . . . . . . 43
6809 Controller TSC/CSC Link Connections . . . . . 44
Connecting Telephone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

2.Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Telephone Line Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Location of Telephone Line Connections . . . . . . . . 47
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2Wire / 4Wire Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Unpacking Standalone Quantar Station Cage . . . . 14 Input/Output Impedance Matching Jumpers . . . . 48
Unpacking 12" x 20" Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 System Type vs Wireline Circuit Matrix . . . . . . . . . . 48
Unpacking 30", 46", and 60" Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . 18
Mounting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Connecting V.24 Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting External Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Mounting Cage in CustomerSupplied Cabinet . . 20
Mounting Cage in CustomerSupplied Rack . . . . . 22 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installing 7', 7', and 8' and Modular Racks . . . . 24 Single Station Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Mounting 30", 46" and 60" Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . 24 MultiDrop Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Stacking Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Stacking Modular Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 4.Post-Installation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
AntiVibration/EMI Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Verifying Proper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Proceeding to Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Motorola, Inc. 1999 Commercial Government and

All Rights Reserved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81096E57-A
1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196 11/15/99-UP
Printed in U.S.A.
1 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS
A good installation is important to ensure the best possible performance and reliability of the station equipment.
Vital to a good installation is pre-installation planning. Planning the installation includes considering the mounting
location of the equipment in relation to input power, antenna(s), and telephone interfaces. Also to be considered
are site environmental conditions, the particular mounting method (several available), and required tools and
equipment. The following paragraphs provide additional details on these and other pre-installation consider
ations.
Important If this is your first time installing this type of equipment, it is highly recommended that you completely
read the entire Installation section before beginning the actual installation.
Installation Overview
The following information is intended to serve as an overview for install
ing the Quantar station and ancillary equipment. Step-by-step pro
cedures for each of the major tasks are then provided beginning in
paragraph 2.
Plan the installation, paying particular attention to environmental
conditions at the site, ventilation requirements, and grounding
and lightning protection.
Unpack and inspect the equipment
Mechanically install the equipment at the site
Make necessary electrical and cabling connections, including
the following:
AC input cabling
Coaxial cables to transmit and receive antennas
Phone line connections
System cables
Perform a post-installation functional checkout test of the
equipment to verify proper installation
Proceed to the Optimization procedures (located behind the
OPTIMIZATION tab) to customize the station parameters per
customer specifications (e.g., operating frequency, PL codes,
etc.)
2 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
Environmental Conditions
at Intended Installation Site
The Quantar station may be installed in any location suitable for elec
tronic communications equipment, provided that the environmental
conditions do not exceed the equipment specifications for tempera
ture, humidity, and air quality. These are:
Important If the station is to be in Operating Temperature Range -30C to +60C
stalled in an environment which is unusu
ally dusty or dirty ( and thus does not meet
Humidity not to exceed 95% relative humidity @ 50C
the air quality requirements), the air used Air Quality For equipment operating in an environmentally
to cool the station modules must be controlled environment with the station cage(s)
treated using appropriate filtering de rack mounted, the airborne particulates level must
vices. Dust or dirt accumulating on the in not exceed 25 g/m3.
ternal circuit boards and modules is not
easily removed, and can cause such mal
functions as overheating and intermittent
For equipment operating in an area which is not en
electrical connections. vironmentally controlled (station cage(s) cabinet
mounted), the airborne particulates level must not
exceed 90 g/m3.
Important!Rack-mounted stations must be protected from drip

ping water from overhead pipes, air conditioning equipment, etc. Seri
ous damage to station components could occur if proper protection is
not provided.
Equipment Ventilation
Two of the station modules ( the power amplifier and power supply
modules) are equipped with cooling fans (thermostatically controlled)
that are used to provide forced convection cooling. The air flow is front
to back, allowing several station cages to be stacked within a rack or
cabinet. When planning the installation, observe the following ventila
tion guidelines:
Customer-supplied cabinets must be equipped with ventilation
slots or openings in the front (for air entry) and back or side pan
els (for air to exit). If several station cages are installed in a single
cabinet, be sure ventilation openings surround each cage to al
low for adequate cooling.
All cabinets must have at least 6 inches of open space between
the air vents and any walls or other cabinets. This allows ade
quate air flow.
When multiple cabinets (each equipped with several station
cages) are installed in an enclosed area, make sure the ambient
temperature of the room does not exceed the recommended
maximum operating temperature (+60C). It may be necessary
to have air conditioning or other climate control equipment in
stalled to satisfy the environmental requirements.
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
3
AC Input Power Requirements

The Quantar station is equipped with a multiple-output dc power sup
ply module (various models available) that operates from 90Vrms to
280Vrms, 50 or 60 Hz ac input power (automatic range and line fre
quency selection). A standard 3-prong line cord is supplied to con
nect the power supply (rear of station) to the ac source.
It is recommended that a standard 3-wire grounded electrical outlet

Note:If you wish to connect the station to
a 220 VAC outlet, you must obtain a line cord be used as the ac source. The outlet must be connected to an ac
employing HAR" flexible cord with fittings source capable of supplying a maximum of 766 Watts. For a nominal
approved by a safety testing agency in the 110V ac input, the ac source must supply 8.5 amperes and should be
end use country. protected by a circuit breaker rated at 15 amperes. For a nominal 220V
ac input, the ac source must supply approximately 4.25 amperes.
Equipment Mounting Methods

The Quantar station equipment may be mounted in a variety of racks
and cabinets (available as options), as follows:
No Rack or Cabinet
Station shipped without rack or cabinet (Option X87AA ) cus
tomer may install station in rack or cabinet of choice; station is
designed to fit standard EIA 19" rack configuration
Standard Open Racks

7' (Model TRN7342), 7' (Model TRN7343), or 8' (Model
TRN7344) racks open frame racks accept multiple Quantar
stations and ancillary equipment; EIA 19" rack configuration.
Note that rack mounting hardware (Option X153AA) is required
for each Quantar cage to be rack mounted.
Modular Racks
30" (Option X741AA), 45" (Option X742AA), or 60" (Option X743AA)
modular racks accept multiple Quantar stations and ancillary
equipment; EIA 19" rack configuration. These racks are designed to
be stacked (see page 26).
Cabinets
Shipped in 12" x 20" cabinet (Option X430AA) roll-formed cabinet
Note:Although cabinets can physically with front and rear vented doors holds a single Quantar station
house multiple stations, thermal limitations
may reduce the maximum number of stations Shipped in 30" x 20" cabinet (Option X52AA) roll-formed
for a given cabinet size. Consult Motorola cabinet with front and rear vented doors holds up to three (3)
System Engineering or the Product System Quantar stations
Planner if you anticipate possible thermal li
mitations. Shipped in 46" x 20" cabinet (Option X308AA) roll-formed
cabinet with front and rear vented doors holds up to four (4)
Quantar stations
Shipped in 60" x 20" cabinet (Option X180AA) roll-formed
cabinet with front and rear vented doors holds up to six (6)
Quantar stations
4 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
Site Grounding and

Lightning Protection
Site Grounding and Lightning Protection Recommendations
One of the most important considerations when designing a communi

cations site is the ground and lightning protection system. While prop
er grounding techniques and lightning protection are closely related,
the general category of site grounding may be divided as follows:
CAUTION
Electrical Ground Ground wires carrying electrical current from cir
cuitry or equipment at the site is included in the category of electrical
Proper site grounding and light
ground. Examples include the ac or dc electrical power used to source
ning protection are vitally impor
tant considerations. Failure to equipment located at the site, telephone lines, and wires or cables con
provide proper lightning protec nected to alarms or sensors located at the site.
tion may result in permanent
damage to the radio equipment. RF Ground This type of ground is related to the transmission of ra
dio-frequency energy to earth ground. An example of rf grounding is
the use of shielding to prevent (or at least minimize) the leakage of un
wanted rf transmissions from communications equipment and cables.
Lightning Ground Providing adequate lightning protection is critical

to a safe and reliable communications site. Telephone lines, rf trans
mission cables, and ac and dc power lines must all be protected to pre
vent lightning energy from entering the site building.
Although a comprehensive coverage of site grounding techniques and

lightning protection is not within the scope of this instruction manual,
there are several excellent industry sources for rules and guidelines on
grounding and lightning protection at communications sites. Motorola
recommends the following reference source:
Quality Standards FNE Installation Manual 68P81089E50
Quantar Equipment Grounding Guidelines
The Quantar station cage is equipped with a single ground lug located
on the rear panel of the cage. Use this lug to connect the cage to the
site ground point. It is assumed that all telephone lines, antenna
cables, and ac or dc power cabling has been properly grounded and
lightning protected by following the rules and guidelines provided in
the previously mentioned reference source.
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
5
Recommended Tools
and Equipment
In addition to the typical complement of hand tools, the following tools
and equipment are recommended for proper installation of the station
equipment.
A six to eight foot wooden step ladder (used to access the top
of the 7', 7', and 8' racks, if applicable)
A block-and-tackle or suitable hoist is recommended to lift
cabinets equipped with multiple stations, and to stack cabinets
or modular racks. (Each fully equipped station cage weighs ap
proximately 55 lbs.)
Tarpaulin or plastic drop cloth to cover surrounding equipment
while drilling concrete anchor holes (for installations where cabi
net or rack is being anchored to concrete flooring)
Vacuum cleaner for removing concrete dust (for installations
where cabinet or rack is being anchored to concrete flooring)
Equipment Unpacking
and Inspection
The Quantar station equipment may be shipped either by air freight or
electronic van (as specified by customer). The packing methods are
as follows:
If no cabinet or rack is selected, the station cage is shipped in
a cardboard container with styrofoam interior corner braces.
If the 12" x 20" cabinet is selected, the station cage is shipped
installed in the cabinet, all contained within a cardboard contain
er with corrugated interior corner braces.
All other available cabinets are shipped with the Quantar station
cage(s) installed in the cabinet, with the cabinet bolted to a
wooden skid and covered with a cardboard box with corrugated
interior corner braces
Stations ordered for use in open frame racks (7', 7', or 8' avail
able) are shipped with the cage(s) in a cardboard container with
corrugated interior corner braces. The rack is shipped separate
ly wrapped in insulating foam.
Stations ordered for use in a modular rack (30", 45", or 52" avail
able) are shipped installed in the rack. The rack is then covered
in an anti-static bag.
Thoroughly inspect the equipment as soon as possible after delivery.

If any part of the equipment has been damaged in transit, immediately
report the extent of the damage to the transportation company.
6 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
Physical Dimensions and

Clearances
Quantar Cage without Cabinet
Figure 1 shows the dimensions and recommended clearances for a

single Quantar station cage.
FRONT
8.68"
(220.5 CM) 14.75"
(37.5 CM)
14.7"
(373.5 CM)
FRONT
19"
(47.5 CM)
SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW
MINIMUM 6" FROM WALL OR OTHER

EQUIPMENT FOR VENTILATION
RECOMMENDED 30" FOR SERVICING ACCESS
MINIMUM 6" MINIMUM 6"

FROM WALL FROM WALL
OR OTHER OR OTHER
EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
FOR FOR
VENTILATION VENTILATION
FRONT
RECOMMENDED 36" FOR SERVICING ACCESS
CLEARANCES
Figure 1. Quantar Station Cage Dimensions and Clearances
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
7

Clearances (Continued)
Quantar Cages Installed in 7', 7', and 8' Racks
Model numbers for the three rack sizes Three sizes of racks are available for mounting Quantar station cages
are: and ancillary equipment. Figure 2 shows the physical dimensions for
7' TRN7342 all three rack sizes (shown is 8' rack with ten (maximum) Quantar cages
7' TRN7343 installed; 7' and 7' racks each hold nine maximum). Recommended
8' TRN7344 clearance front and rear is 36" minimum for servicing access. Refer to
Equipment Ventilation on Page 3 for recommended ventilation clear
ances.
20.5"
RACK 14.7" (52 CM)
CENTER (37 CM)
6.6"
(16.8 CM)
8.1"
(20.5 CM)
QUANTAR
CAGE
RACK
14.7" CENTER
(37 CM)
QUANTAR
CAGE
FRONT
FRONT
QUANTAR
CAGE TOP VIEW
108" (270 CM) RECOMMENDED FOR LIGHTS, CABLE TRAYS, ETC.
QUANTAR
CAGE
7' RACK
84" QUANTAR
(213 CM) CAGE
7' RACK
90"
(229 CM) QUANTAR
CAGE 0.75" DIA
8' RACK 20.5" (1.9 CM)
96" (52 CM)
(244 CM)
QUANTAR 16.5"
CAGE (42 CM)
3.5"
(9 CM)
QUANTAR
CAGE
RACK CENTER 7" 15.0"
(17.8 CM) 11"
(28 CM) (38.5 CM)
QUANTAR
CAGE
QUANTAR 5.5"
CAGE (14 CM) 2" 8.25" 2"
(5 CM) (21 CM) (5 CM)
10.25"
(26 CM)
MOUNTING FOOT DETAIL
SIDE VIEW
Figure 2. Dimensions and Clearances for 7', 7', and 8' Racks
8 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation

Quantar Cages Installed in Modular Racks
Option numbers for the three modular Three sizes of modular racks are available for mounting Quantar station
rack sizes for Quantar stations are: cages and ancillary equipment. Figure 3 shows the physical dimen
30" X741AA sions for all three rack sizes (shown is 52" modular rack with five (maxi
45" X742AA mum) Quantar cages installed; 30" racks hold 3 cages and 45" racks
52" X743AA hold 4 cages maximum). Recommended clearance front and rear is
36" minimum for servicing access. Refer to Equipment Ventilation on
Page 3 for recommended ventilation clearances.
.37" DIA
(.94 CM)
20.75" 2.0"
(52.7 CM) (5.0 CM)
17.94" 1.4"
(45.56 CM) (3.56 CM)
VIEWED
FROM
TOP 7.625"
(19.4 CM)
19.2" 15.25"
(48.8 CM) (38.8 CM) RACK
CENTER
19.2"
(48.8 CM)
RACK
CENTER
9.6"
(24.4 CM)
QUANTAR
FRONT
CAGE
FRONT
QUANTAR
CAGE MOUNTING FOOT / TOP DETAIL
30" RACK
31.2"
(79.2 CM)
QUANTAR
45" RACK CAGE
45.2"
(114.75 CM)
52" RACK
50.4" QUANTAR
(128.1 CM) CAGE
QUANTAR
CAGE
SIDE VIEW
Figure 3. Dimensions and Clearances for 30", 45", and 52" Modular Racks
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
9

12" x 20" Cabinet
Figure 4 shows the physical dimensions for a 12" x 20" cabinet

(Option X430AA). Minimum recommended clearances are 30"(front)
and 36" (rear) for installation access. Refer to Equipment Ventilation
on Page 3 for recommended ventilation clearances.
19.75"
22" (50.2 CM)
(55.9 CM)
18.3" 19.25"
(46.5 CM) (48.9 CM)
17.8"
(45.2 CM)
FRONT
12.0"
(30.5 CM)
MOUNTING
RAIL
0.25"
(0.64 CM)
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
5.6" 5.6"
(14.2 CM) (14.2 CM)
2" 22" 2"
(5.1 CM) (55.9 CM) (5.1 CM)
3.8" 3.8"
(9.6 CM) 2" 2" (9.6 CM)
(5.1 CM) (5.1 CM)
3.625" DIAMETER
HOLES
(2)
19.3"
(49 CM) 2" 2"
(5.1 CM) VIEWED (5.1 CM)
FROM
TOP
2" 2"
(5.1 CM) (5.1 CM) 0.62" DIAMETER
HOLES
(4)
BASE MOUNTING DETAIL
Figure 4. 12" x 20" Cabinet Dimensions
10 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation

30" x 20" Cabinet

22" 20"
(55.9 CM) (50.8 CM)
18.3"
(46.5 CM) 19.3"
(49 CM)
17.8"
(45.2 CM)
FRONT
30"
(76.2 CM)
0.25"
(0.64 CM)
MOUNTING
RAIL

5.6" 5.6"
(14.2 CM) (14.2 CM)
2" 22" 2"
(5.1 CM) (55.9 CM) (5.1 CM)
3.8" 3.8"
(9.6 CM) 2" 2" (9.6 CM)
(5.1 CM) (5.1 CM)
3.625" DIAMETER
HOLES
(2)
19.3"
(49 CM) 2" 2"
FROM
TOP
2" 2"
(5.1 CM) (5.1 CM) 0.62" DIAMETER
HOLES
(4)
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
11

46" x 20" Cabinet

22" 20"
(55.9 CM) (50.8 CM)
18.3"
(46.5 CM)
19.3"
17.8" (49 CM)
(45.2 CM)
FRONT
46"
(116.8 CM)
MOUNTING
RAIL
0.25"
(0.64 CM)

5.6" 5.6"
(14.2 CM) (14.2 CM)
2" 22" 2"
(5.1 CM) (55.9 CM) (5.1 CM)
3.8" 3.8"
(9.6 CM) 2" 2" (9.6 CM)
(5.1 CM) (5.1 CM)
3.625" DIAMETER
HOLES
(2)
19.3"
(49 CM) 2" 2"
FROM
TOP
2" 2"
(5.1 CM) (5.1 CM) 0.62" DIAMETER
HOLES
(4)
12 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation

60" Indoor Cabinet
Figure 7 shows the dimensions for a 60" indoor cabinet (Option

X180AA). Minimum recommended clearances are 30"(front) and 36"
(rear) for installation access. Refer to Equipment Ventilation on Page
3 for recommended ventilation clearances.
22"
(55.9 CM) 20"
(50.8 CM)
18.3"
(46.5 CM) 19.3"
17.8" (49 CM)
(45.2 CM)
FRONT
60.25"
(153 CM)
MOUNTING
RAIL
.25"
(63 CM)

5.6" 5.6"
(14.2 CM) (14.2 CM)
2" 22" 2"
(5.1 CM) (55.9 CM) (5.1 CM)
3.8" 3.8"
(9.6 CM) 2" 2" (9.6 CM)
(5.1 CM) (5.1 CM)
3.625" DIAMETER
HOLES
(2)
19.3"
(49 CM) 2" 2"
FROM
TOP
2" 2"
(5.1 CM) (5.1 CM) 0.62" DIAMETER
HOLES
(4)
Figure 7. 60" Indoor Cabinet Dimensions
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
13
2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
This section describes the procedures necessary to unpack and mechanically install the Quantar station equip
ment. A variety of mounting methods are possible, depending on such factors as which type of cabinet or rack
(if any) has been selected to house the station cage(s), whether stacking of cabinets is desired, etc. Procedures
are provided for each of the cabinet/rack types.
If it becomes necessary to remove any of the modules, refer to the Module Replacement Procedures located in
the Troubleshooting section of this manual for removal instructions. Be sure to observe proper electro-static
discharge precautions if modules must be removed from the cage.
Unpacking the Equipment

Introduction
Important:Regardless of the packing
method, immediately inspect the equipment Quantar station equipment packing methods vary depending upon the
for damage after unpacking and report the
extent of any damage to the transportation type of optional rack or cabinet selected by the customer. Quantar sta
company. tion cages may also be packed and shipped as standalone units with
no cabinet or cage. Unpacking procedures for these various methods
are provided in the following paragraphs.
Unpacking Standalone Quantar Station Cage
Standalone cages (ordered with Option X87AA, omit cabinet) are

packed in a cardboard box with styrofoam interior spacers and card
board stiffeners. Unpack as described in Figure 8.
14 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
1 Open carton and slide out station as shown.
CARDBOARD
CONTAINER
CARDBOARD
STIFFENERS
FOAM SPACER
QUANTAR
STATION CAGE
Remove foam spacers and cardboard

2 stiffeners. Line cord and plastic bag containing FOAM SPACER
mounting hardware are located inside container.
Figure 8. Unpacking Procedures for Quantar Station Cages
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
15

(Continued)
Unpacking 12" x 20" Cabinet
Quantar stations ordered with the 12" x 20" cabinet option are shipped
installed in the cabinet and packed in a cardboard container with corru
gated corner braces and a cardboard pallet. Unpack as described in
Figure 9.
16 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
1 Cut band at bottom of carton. 2 Unfold cardboard flaps from cardboard

pallet and remove cardboard cover.
CARDBOARD
COVER
CARDBOARD
CUT BAND FLAPS
CARDBOARD
CORNER BRACE
(4)
3 Cut band and remove cardboard corner

braces.
CUT BAND
PLASTIC CARDBOARD
BAG PALLET
4 Remove plastic bag.

STATION IN
12" x 20"
CABINET
Figure 9. Unpacking Procedures for Quantar Station Cages Shipped in 12" x 20" Cabinets
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
17

(Continued)
Unpacking 30" x 20" Cabinet, 46" x 20" Cabinet, and 60" Indoor
Cabinet
These cabinet styles are shipped mounted to a wooden skid, secured

with corrugated corner braces held by a plastic strap, and covered with
a cardboard cover. Unpack the equipment as described in Figure 10.
18 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
Remove anti-static bag. Do not discard

1 Remove cardboard cover from station. 4 bag. It will be re-installed to protect
equipment during installation.
CARDBOARD
COVER
ANTI-STATIC
BAG
TOP
PACKING
SPACER
Depending on cabinet type, either open

5 or remove front and rear doors to gain
CUT
THIS
access to the four (4) bolts securing the
BAND station to the wooden skid. Remove the
bolts and nuts as shown.
STATION
CABINET
WOODEN
CORRUGATED SKID
CORNER WOODEN
SUPPORTS SKID
2 Cut band as shown.
6 Use hoist to lift the station from the skid.

Remove skid and return station to floor.
Remove top packing spacer and

3 corrugated corner supports. 7 Replace anti-static bag over station to
provide protection during installation.
Figure 10. Unpacking Procedures for 30", 46" (shown), and 60" Indoor Quantar Cabinets
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
19
Mounting Procedures
Introduction
Perform the following procedures to mechanically install the Quantar
station equipment cages, racks, or cabinets. Note that racks and cabi
nets may house multiple Quantar station cages, and some cabinets
may be stacked one atop the other to maximize use of space.
Mounting Quantar Station Cage(s) in Customer-Supplied Cabinet

The Quantar station cage is designed to fit in a standard EIA 19" enclo
sure. Mounting screws (M6 x 1.0 tapping) are provided to secure the
cage flanges to the customer-supplied cabinet. Mount the cage(s) as
follows:
Note:Installing multiple cages one above Step 1. Determine the location in the cabinet into which to mount
the other is permitted as long as proper venti the cage. Note that when installing multiple cages, it is
lation is maintained. Refer to Equipment Ven
tilation on page 3 for details.
recommended that you mount the first cage in the lowest
possible position in the cabinet, making sure the modules
clear the bottom frame of the cabinet, then continue to
wards the top with additional cages.
Step 2. Thread two of the supplied mounting screws into the low
est mounting holes of the cabinet mounting rails. Now in
sert the cage into the cabinet, resting the cage on the two
screws.
Step 3. Insert the remaining two mounting screws through the
bottom two mounting holes in the cage mounting flanges
(left and right sides) and secure the cage to the cabinet
mounting rails.
Step 4. Remove the two lower mounting screws and insert them
through the upper two mounting holes in the cage mount
ing flanges.
Step 5. Tighten all four mounting screws securely.
20 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
21
Mounting Procedures
(Continued)
Mounting Quantar Station Cage(s) in Customer-Supplied Rack
Quantar station cages intended for field mounting in a customer-
Note:Option X153AA provides two (2) supplied rack require standoff brackets to center the cage within the
standoff brackets and four (4) self-tapping rack mounting rails. Mount the cage(s) as described in Figure 11.
screws.
Note that when installing multiple cages, it is recommended that you
mount the first cage in the lowest possible position in the rack, then
Note:Installing multiple cages one above continue building towards the top with additional cages. Mounting
the other is permitted as long as proper venti screws (M6 x 1.0 tapping) are provided with each cage to secure the
lation is maintained. Refer to Equipment Ven cage flanges to the standoff brackets.
tilation on page 3 for details.
22 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
STANDOFF
BRACKETS
M6 X 1.0
TAPPING
SCREWS
(4)
M6 X 1.0
TAPPING
SCREWS
Position standoff brackets at desired posi Partially install M6 x 1.0 tapping screws
1 tion on rack (as shown). Secure to rack 2 in bottom holes in brackets, as shown.
using M6 x 1.0 tapping screws.
REST CAGE
ON SCREWS
Rest cage on lower two screws and install Remove two screws used to support
3 two M6 x 1.0 tapping screws in holes as 4 cage and install in the upper two holes
shown. Tighten securely. of the brackets. Tighten securely.
Figure 11. Installation Procedure for Rack Standoff Brackets
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
23
Mounting Procedures
(Continued)
Installing 7', 7', and 8' Open Racks and 30", 45", and 52"
Modular Racks
WARNING In a typical installation, the rack is bolted to a concrete floor to provide

stability. The following procedure describes the steps necessary to bolt
the rack to a concrete floor. Be sure to check with local authorities to
A fully equipped 8' rack (ten
Quantar cages) weighs approxi verify that the following procedure conforms to local building codes
mately 650 lbs (245 kg). Handle and regulations before permanently installing the rack.
with extreme caution to avoid tip
ping. Step 1. Carefully align the rack at the desired anchoring location.
Step 2. Use the rack mounting foot as a template and mark the
location of the six (open racks) " (1.9 cm) or four (modu
lar racks) .37" (.94 cm) diameter mounting holes. All four
CAUTION or six anchoring positions must be used.
Step 3. Move the rack aside, drill holes in the concrete floor, and
Cement dust from concrete floor install the mounting anchors (RAM RD-56 anchors rec
ing is harmful to electronic equip ommended) per instructions provided with the anchors.
ment and wiring. Make sure that Make sure that none of the anchors comes in contact with
the rack and any co-located
equipment are protected prior to
the reinforcing wire mesh buried in the concrete; the rack
drilling holes in the concrete floor. must be electrically isolated from any other equipment or
Use a tarpaulin, cloth, or plastic materials at the site.
sheeting to cover exposed
equipment. (The rack should be Step 4. Align the rack with the installed anchors and lightly secure
already covered with an anti- the rack to the floor using the proper mounting hardware.
static bag; do not remove the bag Do not tighten the mounting hardware at this time.
at this time.) Use a vacuum while
drilling the holes to minimize the Step 5. Check the vertical plumb of the rack. Also check that the
spread of concrete dust. Careful top is level. Use shims (flat washers or flat aluminum
ly clean up any accumulated plates) as necessary under the rack mounting foot to
dust and debris from the anchor
achieve vertical plumb and horizontal level.
installation before uncovering
the equipment. Step 6. Tightly secure the rack to the floor anchors making sure
that it remains vertically plumb and horizontally level.
Step 7. After all debris is removed and cement dust is cleared
away, remove whatever protective covering has been
placed on the equipment, including the anti-static bag.
Mounting 30" x 20", 46" x 20", and 60" Indoor Cabinets
Each cabinet bottom is pre-drilled with four (4) mounting holes to al
low attachment to the site floor. If installing on a concrete floor, use the
cabinet as a template, mark the hole locations, and follow the proce
dures given for anchoring equipment racks (page 24). If installing on
a wooden floor, use lag bolts and washers (customer supplied) to se
cure the cabinet to the floor.
24 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
Stacking Cabinets
The 12", 30", 46", and 60" cabinets may be stacked on atop another
to maximize use of site space. Stacking kit TRN7750A contains the
necessary bolts, nuts, and washers to stack one cabinet on another.
Remove the knockouts on the top of the lower cabinet and use the
hardware as shown below to attach the upper cabinet.
UPPER
CABINET
NUT&
WASHER
(4 EACH)
Note:It is recommended that if different

sizes of cabinets are being stacked (e.g., if
a 30" cabinet is being stacked on top of a
46" cabinet), the larger size cabinet should
be placed on the bottom.
LOWER
CABINET
KNOCKOUT RE
MOVED (ALL FOUR
CORNERS)
BOLT&
WASHER
(4 EACH)
The table below lists the stacking limits for the available cabinet sizes.
Cabinet Stacking Limits
Cabinet Size Maximum Stacking Number
12" x 20" 6 (72" max height)

30" x 20" 3 (90" max height)
46" x 20" 2 (92" max height)
60" Indoor Not Stackable
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
25
Stacking Modular Racks

The 30", 45", and 52" modular racks may be stacked one atop another
to maximize use of site space. Stacking kit TRN7750A contains the
necessary bolts, nuts, and washers to stack one rack on another. Use
the hardware as shown below to attach the upper rack.
Note:It is recommended that if different

sizes of racks are being stacked (e.g., if a
30" rack and a 45" rack are being stacked),
the larger rack should be placed on the bot
tom. NUT&
WASHER
(4 EACH)
UPPER
RACK
Note:Lift Brackets are available from

WASPD to aid in lifting the racks. Install the
brackets as shown below, and attach a lift
bar or chain thru the bracket holes. A hoist
may then be used to lift the rack.
LIFT
BRACKET
(0782291W01)
BOLT&
WASHER
(4 EACH)
LOWER
RACK
Modular Rack Stacking Limits

Stacking Combinations
Three 30" Modular Racks
One 45" and One 30" Modular Rack
Two 45" Modular Racks
26 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
AntiVibration/EMI Screws
Stations are shipped with Torx-head tapping screws installed at the
top and bottom of each of the module front panels. These screws help
reduce EMI emissions from the station modules, as well as provide ad
ditional mechanical stability for installations where a high amount of vi
bration (such as from nearby heavy machinery) is encountered.
ANTI-VIBRATION SCREW
(SHOWN INSTALLED IN
RECEIVER MODULE)
ANTI-VIBRATION SCREW
(SHOWN INSTALLED IN
RECEIVER MODULE)
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
27
3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
After the station equipment has been mechanically installed, electrical connections must be made. These include
making power supply connections, connecting antenna coax cables, system cables, and telephone lines.
Power Supply Connections

AC Input Power Connection
CAUTION
Each station cage is shipped with an eight foot 3-conductor line cord.
Do not apply ac power to the sta Attach the receptacle end of the cord to the ac input plug located on
tion at this time. Make sure that
the ac power switch (located on
the rear of the power supply module (as shown in Figure 12). Plug the
the front panel of the Power Sup 3-prong plug into a 110 V ac grounded outlet. (If you wish to connect
ply Module is turned to OFF and the station to a 220 V ac outlet, you must obtain a line cord employing
that the circuit breaker asso HAR" flexible cord with fittings approved by a safety testing agency
ciated with the ac outlet is also in the end use country.)
turned to OFF.
P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTS
TO
AC OUTLET
FERRITE
RFI SUPPRESSOR
(Motorola Part No. Note:Ferrite bead required only for stations equipped with
7683477X02) CPN1047 or CPN1048 Power Supply Modules.
Figure 12. Connecting AC Line Cord
28 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation

(Continued)
DC Input Power Connections
Stations shipped with the optional dc input power supply module ac
cept a dc input from either a 12/24 V dc or 48/60 V dc source (e.g., a
bank of storage batteries). Connections to the dc source are made via
a 10' battery charger cable kit shipped with the station, as shown in
Figure 13.
P/O
CABLE/CONNECTORS TRN5155A
SHIPPED INSTALLED RED #8AWG
BATTERY CHARGER (+)
CABLE KIT
BLACK #8AWG
( )
RED
(+)
BLACK
( )
+ FUSE BLOCK
AND
60A FUSE
P/O
BACKPLANE
TO SOURCE OF
DC INPUT POWER
Figure 13. Making Connections to DC Power Source
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
29

(Continued)
Ground Connection
The Quantar station cage is equipped with a single ground lug located
on the rear panel of the cage. Connect this lug to the site ground point
as shown in Figure 14.
Refer to Quality Standards FNE Installation Manual (68P81089E50)

for complete information regarding lightning protection.
STATION GROUND LUG

(CONNECT TO SITE GROUND)
Figure 14. Connecting Station Ground Lug to Site Ground
30 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation

(Continued)
Storage Battery Connections
Important!Connect the charged battery to
the station before applying AC power. Failure Stations with a power supply module equipped with the battery char
to do so may prevent the Power Supply Mod ger/revert option offer the capability of reverting to battery backup pow
ule from reverting to battery power upon AC er in the event of an ac power failure. Connections associated with the
failure. battery charger/revert feature are:
Important!For Motorola Power Supply Charger/Revert Cable the station is shipped with a 4-wire
Modules with battery charging capability, the cable terminated in a heavy duty 2-position connector; cable
card edge connector used to connect to an kit TRN5155A (shipped with station) contains mating connector,
external battery (located on the backplane) two 10' lengths of red and black #8 AWG gauge wires, a fuse
may not be used as a secondary source of dc
block and 60A fuse, and crimp-on ring lugs. Make connections
output power. In order to prevent charging a
battery with one or more dead cells, the sup to the storage battery as shown in Figure 15.
ply is designed to provide charging current Battery Temperature Cable thermistor (TKN8786A) and cable
only if the battery is above +21.5 V (High Pow
er Supplies) or +10.5 V (Low Power Sup
(TKN8732A) are shipped with charger-style power supply);
plies). cable with three wires carries a variable resistance signal from
the thermistor which is mounted in close proximity to storage
Important!Be sure to connect the battery battery; resistance is proportional to battery temperature and is
cables exactly as shown in the illustration be used by diagnostic circuitry in power supply module. Make
low, making certain to observe wire colors thermistor connections as shown in Figure 15.
and polarities.
P/O
CABLE/CONNECTORS TRN5155A
SHIPPED INSTALLED RED #8AWG
BATTERY CHARGER (+)
CABLE KIT
BLACK #8AWG
( )
RED
(+)
BLACK BATTERY
( ) TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
FUSE BLOCK
AND
60A FUSE
+
BATTERY TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CABLE
P/O

BACKPLANE
STORAGE
BATTERY
Figure 15. Making Connections to Storage Battery
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
31
RF Cabling Connections
Introduction
The transmit and receive antenna rf connections may be made in one
of three fashions, depending on the options ordered with the station
and system application.
Separate TX and RX Connectors A bracket located on the
rear of the station holds two N-type connectors, one for RX and
one for TX. Coax cables from the receive and transmit antennas
must be connected to these N-type connectors.
Single Antenna with Antenna Relay Option An antenna
relay module is mounted on the rear of the station. Coax cables
from the station Receiver and Power Amplifier Modules are con
nected to the antenna relay module. A single N-type connector
is provided for connection to a single RX/TX antenna. The relay
module is controlled by a signal from the Station Control Module
via a 3-wire cable connected between the antenna relay mod
ule and a 3-pin connector located on the backplane.
Duplexer Option The duplexer option equips the station with
a Duplexer Module which is typically mounted in the same rack
or cabinet as the station. Coax cables from the station Receiver
and Power Amplifier Modules are connected to the Duplexer
Module. A single N-type connector is provided for connection
to a single RX/TX antenna.
32 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
(Continued)
Separate RX and TX Connectors
Stations intended for separate transmit and receive antennas are
shipped with the coax cables from the Power Amplifier and Receiver
Modules connected to the bracket on the backplane, as shown below
(Figure 16).
Connect the rf cables from the transmit and receive antennas to the sta
tion as shown below.
QUANTAR
STATION
(REAR VIEW)
TO TO
RECEIVE TRANSMIT
ANTENNA ANTENNA
STATION
TRANSMIT
OUTPUT
STATION
RECEIVE
INPUT
Figure 16. Separate RX and TX Antenna Connections
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
33
(Continued)
Antenna Relay Option
Stations equipped with the antenna relay option are shipped with the
antenna relay module installed in the bracket on the backplane, with
the rf cables from the Power Amplifier and Receiver Modules con
nected as shown below (Figure 17). Note that the 3-wire control cable
from the antenna relay to connector #23 located on the backplane has
been installed.
Connect the single transmit/receive antenna rf cable to the center N-

type connector on the antenna relay module.
TO
SINGLE
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE
ANTENNA
QUANTAR
STATION
(REAR VIEW)
STATION TRANSMIT OUTPUT

(FROM POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE)
ANTENNA RELAY
CONTROL CABLE
STATION RECEIVE INPUT

(TO RECEIVER MODULE)
Figure 17. RF and Control Cable Connections for Station Equipped with Antenna Relay
34 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
(Continued)
Duplexer Option
The Duplexer Option may be installed with or without the Triple Circula
tor Option. In either configuration, connect the rf cable to/from the
single TX/RX antenna to the Duplexer Module as shown in Figure 18
(for VHF). Figure 19 (for UHF), or Figure 20 (for 800/900 MHz).
CONNECT RF CABLE FROM

SINGLE TX/RX ANTENNA
HERE
STATION
PERIPHERAL
TRAY
DUPLEXER
MODULE
Figure 18. TX/RX Antenna Cable Connection to Duplexer Module (VHF; Triple Circulator Configuration Shown)
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
35
(Continued)
Duplexer Option (continued)
STATION
DUPLEXER
MODULE

SINGLE TX / RX ANTENNA
HERE
Figure 19. TX/RX Antenna Cable Connection to Duplexer Module (UHF)
36 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
(Continued)
Duplexer Option (continued)
STATION
PERIPHERAL
TRAY
DUPLEXER
MODULE

HERE
Figure 20. TX/RX Antenna Cable Connection to Duplexer Module (800/900 MHz; Triple Circulator Configuration
Shown)
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
37
Connecting System Cables

Introduction
Depending on the type of communications system and options, vari

ous system cables must be connected to the station backplane. Make
the connections as described in the following paragraphs.
IntelliRepeater DLAN Cabling Connections
A typical Motorola IntelliRepeater trunking site is comprised of multiple

IntelliRepeater-capable stations connected together in a local area
Note:IntelliRepeater networks may be ei network. One of the stations is assigned to act as the current active
ther D-LAN or Ethernet. Refer to page 40 for master and is responsible for all call processing and channel assign
instructions on connecting the stations in an
Ethernet network. ments within the site. The other stations act as voice channel repeaters
under control of the current active master.
Cabling for an IntelliRepeater trunking site using a DLAN network con

sists of making the LAN connections between each of the stations.
Make the cabling connections as follows.
Step 1. Select a station to be at one end of the network. Note that
Note:Options X148AA-X150AA provide an
the station need not be the station selected to serve as the
IntelliRepeater LAN cable kit which in
cludes a PhoneNet interface box, an RJ-11 current active master.
terminator, and a length (10', 25', or 50') of Step 2. Connect the 9-pin D-type connector (part of the Phone
telephone cable with RJ-11 connectors on
Net interface box) to connector DLAN1 (located on the
each end.
station backplane, as shown in Figure 21).
Step 3. Install an RJ-11 terminator in one of the RJ-11 ports on
the PhoneNet interface box. (The empty RJ-11 port at
each end of the network must be terminated with an
RJ-11 terminator.)
Step 4. Select the end of the telephone cable with a ground wire
and spade terminal attached. Connect the RJ-11 con
nector into the empty port of the PhoneNet interface box;
connect the spade lug to the station chassis screw, as
shown in Figure 21.
Step 5. Install a PhoneNet interface box to the remaining stations
in the IntelliRepeater network.
Step 6. Connect the stations together in a daisy chain" fashion,
as shown in Figure 21. Remember to connect the ground
wire and spade terminal to the station chassis screw on
each station.
Step 7. Install an RJ-11 terminator in the empty RJ-11 port in
the PhoneNet interface box on the last station in the net
work.
38 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
PHONENET CONNECTOR
PLUGS INTO
DLAN 1
ON STATION BACKPLANE
PHONE-NET CONNECTOR
P/O X148-150AA
DLAN CABLE OPTIONS
CONNECT SPADE TERMINAL

TO CHASSIS SCREW
STATIONS AT
ENDS OF NETWORK
MUST HAVE
TERMINATOR PLUG INSTALLED
TO TO
CHASSIS NEXT
SCREW STATION
FROM
PREVIOUS
STATION
Figure 21. IntelliRepeater Trunking Site D-LAN Network Cabling Detail
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
39

(Continued)
IntelliRepeater Ethernet Cabling Connections
Cabling for an IntelliRepeater trunking site using an Ethernet network

consists of making the 10BASE-2 (coaxial) cabling connections be
Note:IntelliRepeater networks may be ei
tween each of the stations. Make the cabling connections as follows.
ther D-LAN or Ethernet. Refer to page 38 for
instructions on connecting the stations in a Step 1. Connect a Tconnector to BNC connector #22 on the
D-LAN network. backplane of each station in the network.
Step 2. Select two stations, one at each end of the network. One
will be the terminated end of the Ethernet network, the
other will be the access point of the Ethernet network.
Step 3. Place a terminator on one end of the Tconnector on the
station selected to be at the terminated end of the net
work, as shown in Figure 22.
Note:A coaxial cable and a Tconnector is
provided with each IntelliRepeater station Step 4. Using the supplied 10BASE-2 coaxial cables, connect
shipped from the factory. A site termination kit the stations together in a daisy chain" fashion, as shown
(Option X843AB) provides two terminators, a in Figure 22.
Tconnector to serve as the network access
point, and a circular insulating pad. Step 5. Create a network access point by connecting the last sta
tion to a Tconnector and terminating the other end. This
Tconnector serves as the access point for the Ethernet
network. This Tconnector may be used to connect a PC
to the network to download station software to the FLASH
memory in each of the IntelliRepeater stations.
Step 6. Insulate each Tconnector by folding the circular insulat
ing pad around the connector and pressing it together
until it sticks to itself, holding it in place.
Important!Ethernet networks utilize a floating ground.

In order to eliminate possible data corruption resulting
from multiple ground points in the network, the network
should be grounded at only one point. This is typically
accomplished at the terminated end of the network by us
ing a terminator with an attached ground wire. Attach the
ground wire to the station chassis. Make sure that the oth
er Tconnectors and cables in the network are not
grounded to any station, either intentionally or accidental
ly, by using the circular insulating pads on every Tcon
nector.
40 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
ETHERNET
BNC CONNECTOR #22
T-CONNECTOR
TO
BNC CONNECTOR #22
TERMINATOR
STATION SELECTED TO BE AT
TERMINATED END OF ETHERNET
NETWORK STATION SELECTED TO BE AT
ACCESS POINT OF ETHERNET
NETWORK
10BASE-2 COAXIAL
CABLING
ETHERNET
ACCESS TERMINATOR
POINT
(CONNECT DIRECTLY TO PC;
DO NOT USE EXTENDER CABLE
Figure 22. IntelliRepeater Trunking Site Ethernet Network Cabling Detail
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
41

(Continued)
6809 Trunking Cabling Connections
Connect the control cable from the 6809 Trunking Controller to the sta
tion backplane as shown in Figure 23 below.
6809 TRUNKING CONTROLLER

CONTROL CABLE INPUT
Figure 23. Connecting 6809 Trunking Controller Cable
42 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation

(Continued)
Zone Controller Cabling Connections
Connect the control cable from the Zone Controller to the station back
plane as shown in Figure 24 below.
ZONE CONTROLLER
CONTROL CABLE INPUT
Figure 24. Connecting Zone Controller Cable
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
43

(Continued)
6809 Controller TSC/CSC Link Cabling Connections
Connect the TSC/CSC link cable (broadcast box) from the 6809 Con
troller to the station backplane as shown in Figure 25 below.
6809 CONTROLLER
TSC/CSC LINK
CABLE INPUT
Figure 25. Connecting Zone Controller Cable
44 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
45
Connecting Telephone Lines

Introduction
In conventional systems where the station is controlled by a remote

console, or in wide area systems utilizing comparators, phone lines
must be connected between the station and the remote equipment.
The phone lines may carry analog voice, SECURENET-encoded
voice, and/or ASTRO-encoded voice. Also carried on the phone lines
is one of two types of remote control signaling (Tone Remote Control
or ASTRO digital packets). The following information defines the speci
fications for the phone lines, the location on the station backplane for
phone line connections, and which of the four (4) wireline circuits to use
for various system types.
Telephone Line Specifications
Most telephone companies recognize either 3002" or Type 5" as des

ignations to define phone line types and associated electrical specifi
cations. Telephone lines meeting the specifications for either of these
types are acceptable for use with the Quantar station. The following
table shows the specifications for 3002" and Type 5" phone line
types.
Type 5 and 3002" Phone Line Specifications
Type 5 3002
Parameter
Specification Specification
Loss Deviation 4.0 dB 4.0 dB
C-Notched Noise 51 dBrnCO 51 dBrnCO
Attenuation Distortion:
504 to 2504 Hz -2.0 to +8.0 dB -2.0 to +8.0 dB
404 to 2804 Hz -2.0 to +10.0 dB spec not available
304 to 3004 Hz -3.0 to +12.0 dB -3.0 to +12.0 dB
Signal to C-Notched Noise Ratio > 24 dB > 24 dB
Envelope Delay Distortion:
1750 sec 1750 sec
804 to 2604 Hz
Impulse Noise Threshold 71 dBrnCO
Intermodulation Distortion:
> 25 dB
R2 > 27 dB
> 30
R3 > 32 dB
Phase Jitter:
> 25 Degrees
20-300 Hz > 10 Degrees
> 30 Degrees
Frequency Shift 3 Hz 5 Hz
46 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation

(Continued)
Location of Telephone Line Connections
For added convenience, telephone line connections may be made in

one of two locations on the station rear panel.
50-pin Telco Systems Connector
Orange 8-Position Screw Terminal Connector
The location of the telephone line connections is shown in Figure 26.

Note that these connections are not surge or transient protected. Refer
to Quality Standards FNE Installation Manual (68P81089E50) for de
tails.
PHONE LINE INPUTS
1 LINE 1 + 5 LINE 3 +
PHONE LINE INPUTS 2 LINE 1 6 LINE 3
3 LINE 2 + 7 LINE 4 +
4 LINE 2 8 LINE 4
1 LINE 1 + 3 LINE 3 +
26 LINE 1 28 LINE 3
2 LINE 2 + 4 LINE 4 +
27 LINE 2 29 LINE 4
8-POSITION
TERMINAL CONNECTOR
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR
Note: For easier connection of

phone lines, connector may be
separated by simply pulling
apart as shown.
Figure 26. Two Locations for Telephone Line Connections
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
47

(Continued)
2-Wire / 4-Wire Jumper Setting
Note:Stations equipped with a 4-wire
Wireline Interface Boards are shipped with the 2-wire/4-wire jumper
Wireline Interface Board (Model CLN6955)
can support a single 4-wire or a single (JU1010) installed in the 4-wire position. If required for your installation,
2-wire telephone line connection. move the jumper to the 2-wire position. Refer to the appropriate (per model)
Stations equipped with an 8-wire Wireline Wireline Interface Board section in this manual for jumper details.
Interface Board (Model CLN6956) can sup
port two 4-wire or a single 2-wire tele Input/Output Impedance Matching Jumper Settings
phone line connection. Refer to the Wireline
Interface Board section in this manual for de Wireline Interface Boards are shipped with the input/output impedance
tails. matching jumpers installed in the 600 positions. If required for your installa
tion, move the jumpers to the desired positions. Refer to the appropriate
model Wireline Interface Board section in this manual for jumper details.
System Type vs Wireline Circuit Matrix
The following table shows which of the four (4) wireline circuits to use
for various system types.
48 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation

(Continued)
System Type vs Wireline Circuit Matrix Table
Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4

System Type
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 3) (Note 3)
Conventional Local Area Analog Console Console Not Used Not Used
Conventional Local Area Analog with Repeater Access Console Console Not Used Not Used
Conventional Wide Area Analog Comparator Comparator Not Used Not Used
Conventional Simulcast Wide Area Analog (Note 2) Comparator Not Used Not Used
Conventional Local Area SECURENET DVM or CIU DVM or CIU Not Used Not Used
Conventional Local Area SECURENET w/Repeater Ac
DVM or CIU DVM or CIU Not Used Not Used
cess
DVM or DVM or
Conventional Wide Area SECURENET Not Used Not Used
DIGITAC DIGITAC
DVM or
Conventional Simulcast Wide Area SECURENET (Note 2) Not Used Not Used
DIGITAC
Conventional Local Area ASTRO DIU DIU Not Used Not Used
Conventional Local Area ASTRO w/Repeater Access DIU DIU Not Used Not Used
SMARTZONE SMARTZONE
IntelliRepeater Trunking Wide Area Analog Not Used Not Used
Audio Switch Audio Switch
SMARTZONE SMARTZONE
IntelliRepeater Trunking Wide Area SECURENET Not Used Not Used
Audio Switch Audio Switch
6809 Trunking Single Site Analog Interconnect Interconnect Not Used Not Used
6809 Trunking Single Site SECURENET DVM or CIU DVM or CIU Not Used Not Used
Interconnect Interconnect
6809 Trunking Single Site Analog w/Console Priority In
Console Console (8-Wire WIB (8-Wire WIB
terface
Req'd) Req'd)
6809 Trunking Wide Area Analog Comparator Comparator Not Used Not Used
6809 Trunking Simulcast Wide Area Analog (Note 2) Comparator Not Used Not Used
DVM or DVM or
6809 Trunking Wide Area SECURENET Not Used Not Used
DIGITAC DIGITAC
DVM or
6809 Trunking Simulcast Wide Area SECURENET (Note 2) Not Used Not Used
DIGITAC
Notes:
1.For 4-wire systems, Line 1 is transmit audio (landline to station), and Line 2 is receive audio (station to landline).
For 2-wire systems, Line 2 is transmit and receive audio (conventional local area analog only).
2.For Simulcast stations, transmit audio is connected from RDM (or equivalent) to GEN TX DATA+ and - on backplane.
3.Lines 3 and 4 can be used with the Enhanced WildCard Option for customerspecific applications (in analog stations only).
The optional 8wire Wireline Interface Module is required.
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
49
Connecting V.24 Board

For Quantar/Quantro Conventional stations (hybrid links) and
SMARTZONE Trunking stations (V.24 required), connections to/from
the station are made using a V.24 Interface Board (installed on the
NoteConnecting to a local DIU or ASTRO
TAC Comparator requires a null modem
Wireline Interface Board). This board (Option X889AC) allows
cable and programming the station for Inter connections to be made between external V.24 modem equipment and
nal Clock Generation (refer to the RSS User's the station via an RJ45 connector accessible on the front panel (as
Guide for details). shown below).
Make the connections and DIP Switch settings as shown in Figure 27.
V.24 INTERFACE BOARD

NoteThe cable connected to the V.24 RJ45 connector
must have a ferrite RFI suppressor installed. This S101
S102 (not used for station applications)
suppressor is supplied by Motorola with each station and
must be installed as shown below.
CONNECT TO
RJ45 CONNECTOR S101 DIP Switch Settings
ON STATION CONTROL
MODULE FRONT PANEL Local Connection to Connection to
Position
Comparator (Note 1) Microwave System (Note 2)
1 OFF ON
2 ON OFF
3 n/a n/a
4 n/a n/a
LESS
Note 1External Transmit Clock (located on the Wireline
THAN
Configuration RSS screen) must be set to DISABLED.
1 INCH
Note 2External Transmit Clock (located on the Wireline
Configuration RSS screen) must be set to ENABLED.
FERRITE
RFI SUPPRESSOR
RJ45 PINOUTS
1RCLK
2CD
3TCLK
4GND
5RXD
6TXD
7CTS
8RTS
Figure 27. Making V.24 Board Connections
50 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
Connecting External Reference

Overview
NoteFor standalone stations equipped
with an internal UHSO module, make sure the In some cases ( e.g., Simulcast, 900 MHz, etc.), the use of a frequency
BNC connector #30 (located on the back reference other than the internal reference oscillator (located on the
plane) is terminated as shown below. Station Control Board) is required. In these cases, either an internal
Ultra High Stability Oscillator (UHSO, available as an option) or an ex
ternal 5 MHz or 10 MHz source (typically from a rubidium-based stan
dard) must be employed. Without one of these sources connected, the
station synthesizers will not maintain the required stability.
Single Station Connections
TERMINATORS
For stations without the internal UHSO option, connect the output of an exter
nal 5 MHz or 10 MHz reference source to one of two station connectors, as
shown in Figure 28. (The external source must remain connected and pow
TCONNECTOR ered at all times during station operation; otherwise, the synthesizers will fail
to lock and the station will not transmit or receive.)
FRONT ACCESS
CONNECT
5 MHZ or 10 MHz
REFERENCE INPUT
(1.0 .5 V RMS @ 50 OHMS)
CONNECT
5 MHZ or 10 MHz
REFERENCE INPUT
REAR ACCESS (2.5V PP MINIMUM @ 150 KILOHMS)
Figure 28. Connecting External 5 MHz or 10 MHz Reference Source to Single Station
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
51
Connecting External Reference

(continued)
MultiDrop Connections
For sites with multiple stations that require a highstability reference

signal, a multidrop configuration may be used. In this configuration,
a single source (either an external signal source or a station equipped
with a UHSO module) provides the reference signal to all stations at the
site. Make the connections as shown in Figure 29.
Note the following guidelines and requirements:

A maximum of six (6) Quantar stations (mounted in same rack)
can be connected in a multidrop configuration.
An Ultra High Stability Oscillator module (UHSO) must be
installed in the bottom station only.
RSS programming for bottom station must be set for
INTERNAL HIGH STABILITY (Freq Ref: field on the Hard
ware Configuration screen). All other stations must be set for EX
TERNAL 5 MHz. Refer to the Radio Service Software User's
Guide 68P81085E35 for details on RSS programming.
52 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation
TERMINATOR
CONNECT TO
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE INPUT
BNC CONNECTOR
#30
T-CONNECTOR
(0909907D01)
COAXIAL CABLE
(0112004Z17)
QUANTAR STATION
WITH
UHSO MODULE
INSTALLED
Figure 29. MultiDrop Connections of Reference Source to Multiple Stations
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
53
4 POST-INSTALLATION CHECKOUT
After the station equipment has been mechanically installed and all electrical connections have been made, you
may now apply power and check for proper operation prior to optimizing the station.
Applying Power
Before applying power to the station, make sure all modules and
boards are securely seated in the appropriate connectors on the back
plane and that all rf cables are securely connected.
Step 1. Turn ON the circuit breaker controlling the ac outlet that
is supplying power to the station Power Supply Module.
Step 2. Turn the station power ON using the rocker switch located
on the Power Supply Module front panel.
Verifying Proper Operation

Introduction
Upon turning the station power ON, a start-up sequence begins

which performs certain tests and initialization before entering normal
station operation. The station LEDs provide a visual indication of the
progress of the start-up sequence, and may be decoded to determine
which test (if any) has failed.
The following describes the behavior of the LEDs upon powering up

the station, as well as how to decode the LEDs to isolate potential hard
ware and software malfunctions.
Station Control Module LEDs Power Up Sequence

Step 1. The Station Fail LED momentarily lights, followed by all
eight LEDs turning on.
Step 2. The start-up sequence tests now run, and the LEDs go
out (top to bottom) as each test is completed.
Step 3. After Aux LED is turned off, the Station Fail LED is turned
on and (for Conventional/6809 stations only) the
Intercom LED flashes while the station software and
hardware are initialized.
Step 4. Once initialized, the Station Fail and Intercom LEDs are
turned off and the Station On LED (green) is turned on.
This indicates that the module has passed all the start-
up tests and is now operational.
54 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
Installation

(Continued)
Station Control Module Failures
If the Station Fail lights and stays on (Step 1), check to see if the
Station Control Module and Power Supply Module are seated
properly in the backplane. Also check to make sure that the
EPROMs (two 40-pin socket-mounted ICs located on Station
Control Board) are seated properly and installed with pin 1 of
each IC closest to the center of the board. Otherwise, replace
Station Control Module.
If LEDs #6 and #7 (Rx 2 Active and Rx Fail, respectively) alter
nately blink, one of the start-up tests has failed, as indicated by
one of the first three LEDs being turned on.
If LED #1 is turned on, reseat the FLASH SIMM in its socket;

otherwise, replace the FLASH SIMM.
If LED #2 or #3 is turned on, check to make sure DRAM

SIMMs are correct size for system application (IntelliRepeater
stations require one 8 Mbyte DRAM SIMM). If correct size, re
seat the DRAM SIMMs in sockets. Otherwise, replace DRAM
SIMMs.
If start-up tests are run successfully (all LEDs light and go off
one by one) and the Station Fail lights and stays on (Step 3),
replace Station Control Module.
If startup tests are run successfully (all LEDs light and go out
one by one) and the Station Fail lights momentarily followed by
all LEDs blinking, perform a software download to FLASH
memory as described in the Quantar/Quantro RSS User's Guide
(68P81085E35).
Exciter Module LEDs Power Up Sequence

Step 1. After Station Control Module passes all start-up tests
and becomes operational, all four Exciter LEDs momen
tarily light.
Step 2. The startup sequence tests now run, and the LEDs go
out (top to bottom) as each test is completed.
Step 3. Once PA FAIL is turned off, the TX Lock LED is turned on.
This indicates that the module has passed all of the start-
up tests and is now operational.
Exciter Module Failures

If LEDs #1 and #2 (TX Lock and PA Full, respectively) alternately
blink, one of the start-up tests has failed. Check to make sure that
the EPROM (40pin socketmounted IC located on Exciter Board) is
seated properly and installed with pin 1 of the IC closest to the center
of the board. Otherwise, replace Exciter Module.
68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
55

(Continued)
Wireline Module LEDs Power Up Sequence

Step 1. After Station Control Module passes all start-up tests
and becomes operational, the Wireline start-up tests
now run.
Step 2. If all tests are passed, the WL On LED is turned on
(green).
Wireline Module Failures

If the two LEDs alternately flash slowly (in any one of several pos
sible flashing patterns), replace the Wireline Interface Board.
Proceeding to Optimization
If all LEDs sequence properly, the station may be considered electrical
ly functional and is ready for optimizing and alignment. Proceed to the
Optimization section in this manual.
56 68P81096E57-A
11/15/99
OPTIMIZATION
For Quantar and Quantro
Station and Ancillary Equipment
1 DESCRIPTION
After the station and ancillary equipment have been mechanically installed, properly cabled, and power applied
(as described in the Installation section of this manual), the equipment must then be optimized before placing into
operation.
An overview of the optimization tasks is as follows:
Customize the station codeplug and saving the data to the station
Perform the following alignment tasks:
Rx Wireline
Tx Wireline
Receiver RSSI calibration
Receiver Squelch Adjust
Battery Equalization
Reference Oscillator
Simulcast/ASTRO Launch Time Offset (required for ASTRO Simulcast systems only)
Perform post-optimization checkout procedures, such as verifying power output, deviation, etc.
For detailed instructions to perform these optimization tasks, follow the procedures provided in Optimizing a New
Installation, located in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).

All Rights Reserved 68P81086E72-B
OPERATION
1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes the switches, pushbuttons, connectors and LED indicators provided on the Quantar station
used during local operation of the station and servicing.
Summary of Switches,
Pushbuttons, and
Connectors
The following switches, pushbuttons, and connectors are provided to
allow the station to be operated and/or serviced locally. The location
and function of these controls and connectors is shown in Figure 1.
Switches, Pushbuttons, and Connectors

Station Control Module Power Supply Module
Volume Up Pushbutton Main Power On/Off Switch
Volume Down Pushbutton
CSQ/PL/OFF Pushbutton (squelch mode)
Intercom Pushbutton
Handset/Microphone Connector
External Speaker Connector
RSS Port Connector
External 5 MHz Input BNC Connector
Summary of LED Indicators

Note:Refer to the Troubleshooting section The following LED indicators are provided to indicate operating status
of this manual for detailed descriptions and of the station. The location of these controls and connectors is shown
interpretation of the LED indicators. in Figure 1.
Summary of LED Indicators
Wireline
Station Control Power Supply Exciter
Interface
Module Module Module
Module
Station On Module Fail TX Lock WL On*
Station Fail Power On PA Full WL Fail*
Intcm/Acc D PA Low
Control Ch PA Fail *LEDs visible on
Rx 1 Active Station Control
Rx 2 Active Module front
Rx Fail panel
Aux LED

2 68P81096E58-A
9/1/00
Operation
STATION ON LED VOLUME UP PUSHBUTTON

USED TO INCREASE THE VOLUME OF THE LOCAL SPEAKER, EXTERNAL SPEAKER,
AND HANDSET EARPIECE
STATION FAIL LED IF LOCAL SPEAKER ON, EACH DEPRESSION RAISES VOLUME LEVEL ONE OF
POWER AMPLIFIER POWER SUPPLY WIRELINE INTERFACE
16 STEPS; STOPS AT STEP 16
MODULE MODULE BOARD
INTCM/ACC D (BEHIND FRONT PANEL) IF LOCAL SPEAKER OFF, DEPRESS ONCE TO RAISE VOLUME LEVEL ONE STEP
AND TURN ON LOCAL SPEAKER
CONTROL CH EXCITER STATION CONTROL RECEIVER MODULE #1 VOLUME DOWN PUSHBUTTON

MODULE MODULE
USED TO DECREASE THE VOLUME OF THE LOCAL SPEAKER, EXTERNAL
RX1 ACTIVE LED SPEAKER, AND HANDSET EARPIECE
EACH DEPRESSION LOWERS VOLUME LEVEL ONE OF 16 STEPS; STOPS AT

STEP 0
RX2 ACTIVE LED
IF LOCAL SPEAKER ON, HOLD BUTTON IN FOR 2 SECONDS AND RELEASE TO
LOWER VOLUME LEVEL ONE STEP AND TURN OFF LOCAL SPEAKER
RX FAIL LED
SQUELCH SELECT PUSHBUTTON
AUX LED USED TO SELECT BETWEEN PL, CARRIER, OR SQUELCH OFF
WITH SQUELCH OFF, EACH DEPRESSION OF PUSHBUTTON
SELECTS SQUELCH IN FOLLOWING SEQUENCE:
NOTE: FUNCTION OF LED INDICATORS IS
DESCRIBED IN THE TROUBLESHOOTING OFF>CARRIER>PL
SECTION IN THIS MANUAL.
INTERCOM PUSHBUTTON
USED TO TOGGLE INTERCOM MODE
WHEN INTERCOM MODE ENABLED, TECHNICIAN AT SITE AND REMOTE
CONSOLE OPERATOR MAY COMMUNICATE IN AN INTERCOM FASHION (USING
MICROPHONE/HANDSET WITH PTT BUTTON); NEITHER PARTY'S AUDIO IS
TX LOCK LED TRANSMIT TED OVER THE AIR
PA FULL LED
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
PA LOW LED PUSHBUTTON
FUNCTION
COMBINATION
PA FAIL LED STATION RESET PERFORMS A WARM"

VOLUME UP, VOLUME DOWN, & INTERCOM STATION RESET; TAKES APPROXIMATELY
10-20 SECONDS
NOTE: FUNCTION OF LED INDICATORS IS
DESCRIBED IN THE TROUBLESHOOTING
SECTION IN THIS MANUAL. INTERCOM & VOLUME UP TOGGLE TX KEY KEYS/DEKEYS STATION
(NOTE) TRANSMITTER WITHOUT PL NOTE THAT TX
KEY TIMES OUT AFTER APPROXIMATELY
2 MINUTES.
ACCESS DISABLE SELECT TOGGLES AC

CESS DISABLE MODE; WHEN IN ACCESS
INTERCOM & VOLUME DOWN DISABLE, STATION MAY BE KEYED ONLY BY
POWER SUPPLY WIRELINE FAIL LED (NOTE) LOCAL MICROPHONE/HANDSET, INTERCOM
& VOLUME UP BUTTONS, OR BY APPROPRI
MODULE FAIL LED ATE FUNCTION KEY FROM RSS.
WIRELINE ON LED
NOTE: USE THE INTERCOM BUTTON AS A SHIFT" KEY TO PERFORM MULTIPLE PUSH
POWER ON/OFF BUTTON FUNCTIONS. FOR EXAMPLE, PRESS AND HOLD INTERCOM, THEN PRESS VOL
LED UME UP TO TOGGLE TX KEY FUNCTION.
EXTERNAL REFERENCE INPUT EIA-232 RSS PORT CONNECTOR

USED TO CONNECT AN EXTERNAL SOURCE OF 5/10 MHZ FOR USED TO CONNECT AN IBM PC (OR COMPATIBLE) PC RUNNING RSS SOFTWARE
CALIBRATION OF STATION REFERENCE OSCILLATOR TO PERFORM STATION ALIGNMENT, OPTIMIZATION, AND DIAGNOSTICS
POWER REQUIRES NULL MODEM CABLE (MOTOROLA PART NO. 30-80369E31)
ON/OFF HANDSET/MICROPHONE CONNECTOR (RJ11)
SWITCH USED TO CONNECT TELEPHONE-STYLE HANDSET WITH PTT BUTTON
(TMN6164 OR EQUIVALENT) EXTERNAL SPEAKER CONNECTOR (RJ11)
NOTE: FUNCTION OF LED INDICATORS IS OR USED TO CONNECT 6W EXTERNAL SPEAKER (HSN1000)
DESCRIBED IN THE TROUBLESHOOTING MICROPHONE WITH PTT BUTTON (HMN1001A OR EQUIVALENT)
SECTION IN THIS MANUAL.
Figure 1. Switches, Pushbuttons, Connectors, and LED Indicators for Quantar Station (UHF Shown)
9/1/00 68P81096E58-A 3
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
For Quantar and Quantro
Station and Ancillary Equipment
1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides routine maintenance recommendations for the Quantar and Quantro station and associated
ancillary equipment.
Routine Maintenance
Overview
The Quantar and Quantro station and ancillary equipment have been
designed with state-of-the-art technology and operate under soft
ware control, thus requiring minimal routine maintenance. Virtually all
station operating parameters are monitored and self-corrected by the
Station Control Module, making virtually all periodic adjustments and
tuning unnecessary.
Providing that the equipment is installed in an area which meets the
specified environmental requirements (see Pre-Installation planning
for environmental specifications), the only routine maintenance task
required is the calibration of the station reference oscillator circuit (and
the optional UHSO, if installed). The calibration procedure is provided
in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
Note: If the station equipment is installed in a particularly dusty envi
ronment, precautions must be taken to filter the air used for forced
cooling of the station. Excessive dust drawn across and into the station
circuit modules by the cooling fans can adversely affect heat dissipa
tion and circuit operation. In such installations, be sure to clean or re
place external filtering devices periodically. Refer to Pre-Installation
Planning in the Installation section of this manual for recommended fil
tering techniques.

All Rights Reserved 68P81086E39-D
Quantar and Quantro Station Products
2 RECOMMENDED SCHEDULE
The circuit device(s) responsible for determining the station reference frequency exhibit slight variations in their
operating characteristics over time ( infant aging" ). Approximately 90% of the component aging process occurs
during the first year of operation. After the initial one year period, the device(s) remain stable for a substantially
longer period of time. Therefore, it is recommended that the station reference oscillator be calibrated after one
year of operation, and thereafter less often as prescribed in a recommended schedule of periodic calibration.
Station Reference Calibration

Schedule
After performing the initial one year calibration procedure, periodic cali
bration is required according to the schedule shown below. Note that
the intervals are affected by the accuracy (in PPM) required either for
FCC compliance or by the system requirements, whichever is more
stringent.
Table 1.Recommended Intervals for Calibrating

Station Reference Oscillator
(After Initial One-Year Calibration)
Accuracy Recommended
Desired/Required Interval
5 PPM Every 4 years
2.5 PPM Every 2 years
1.5 PPM Once yearly
1.0 PPM
Once yearly
(821-824 MHz Public Safety Band)
0.1 PPM (see note) Once yearly
Note:0.1 PPM accuracy requires the use of either the UHSO Option
X873AA or an external 5 MHz source. The UHSO option requires both the inter
nal station reference oscillator and the UHSO to be calibrated once yearly us
ing the RSS. When using an external 5 MHz source, the internal station refer
ence oscillator must be calibrated once yearly using the RSS, and the external
source must be calibrated once yearly using the manufacturer's recommended
procedure.
2 68:81086E39-D
9/1/00
TROUBLESHOOTING
For Quantar Station
and Ancillary Equipment
(VHF, UHF, 800 MHz, and 900 MHz)
1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides troubleshooting recommendations and procedures for the Quantar station and associated
ancillary equipment.
Troubleshooting
Overview
The troubleshooting procedures and supporting diagrams provided in
this section allow the service technician to isolate station faults to the
module/assembly level. Defective modules are then replaced with
known good modules to restore the station to proper operation.
Troubleshooting information includes:
Table defining the function of the various alarm LED indicators
Troubleshooting flow charts
Module replacement procedures
Postrepair procedures for performing alignment following re
placement of defective modules
2 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT
The following list of test equipment is recommended to perform troubleshooting procedures on the
Quantar station and ancillary equipment.
List of Test Equipment

Motorola R2001 or R2600 Series Communications Analyzer (or
equivalent)
PC with RSS program
9pin female to 9pin male Null Modem Cable (30-80399E31)
InLine Wattmeter (Motorola S1350 or equivalent)
Dummy Load (50, station wattage or higher)
Handset/Microphone with PTT switch (TMN6164 or equivalent)
Torx driver with #15 bit (for removal of module front panels)
IC Extraction Tool (01-80386A04)

All Rights Reserved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81096E59-B
Printed in U.S.A.
3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
The troubleshooting and repair philosophy for the Quantar station and ancillary equipment is one of Field Replace
able Unit (FRU) substitution. The station is comprised of selfcontained modules (FRUs) which, when determined
to be faulty, may be replaced with a known good module to quickly bring the station back to normal operation.
The faulty module must then be shipped to a Motorola repair depot for further troubleshooting and repair to the
component level.
Because the Quantar station is computercontrolled and employs stateoftheart digital signal processing tech
niques, many of the troubleshooting procedures require the use of the Motorolasupplied Radio Service Software
(RSS). The RSS is run on a PC (or compatible) with RS232 communication port capability. The RSS allows the
technician to access alarm log files, run diagnostics, and set up the equipment for various audio and rf tests. Com
plete details on the operation of the RSS are provided in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
Troubleshooting Overview
Introduction
Two procedures are provided for troubleshooting the Quantar station
and ancillary equipment. Each procedure is designed to quickly identi
fy faulty modules, which may then be replaced with known good mod
ules to restore proper station operation.
Procedure 1 Routine Site Visit Functional Checkout

Procedure 1 consists of a series of nonintrusive tests that can be quick
ly run during a routine site visit. This procedure allows the technician
to verify the proper station operation without taking the station out of
service. An overview of the procedure is shown in the flow chart
(Figure 1) on page 3.
Procedure 2 Troubleshooting A Reported/Suspected Problem

Procedure 2 should be used when an equipment problem has been
either reported or is suspected. This procedure is comprised of both
nonintrusive (equipment not taken out of service) and intrusive (requir
ing the equipment be temporarily taken out of service) tests that allow
the technician to troubleshoot reported or suspected equipment mal
functions. An overview of the procedure is shown in the flow chart
(Figure 2) on page 4.
How to Use These Troubleshooting Procedures

Perform the following basic steps in order to efficiently troubleshoot the
Quantar station equipment.
Step 1. Select the appropriate troubleshooting procedure flow
chart (Procedure 1 or Procedure 2).
Step 2. Perform the tasks given in the selected flow chart. Tasks
requiring additional explanation are marked with page ref
erences. Locate the additional information, perform the
tasks (if any), and return to the flow chart.
Step 3. Once the faulty module has been identified, proceed to
Module Replacement Procedures, beginning on page 19.
2 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
PROCEDURE 1
ROUTINE
SITE VISIT
OBSERVE LED INDICATORS and

MONITOR ALARM TONES (Pages 6 & 9)
OBSERVE LED INDICATORS ON STATION
MODULE FRONT PANELS
MONITOR ALARM ALERT TONES FROM
LOCAL SPEAKER
YES GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING
MODULE SUSPECTED PROCEDURE 2 FLOW CHART
OF BEING
FAULTY?
NO
INTERPRET STATUS REPORT

(RSS USER'S GUIDE 68P81085E35)
USING RSS, ACCESS THE STATUS REPORT
SCREEN AND LOOK AT HISTORY OF ALARMS
AND TIME STAMPS
YES
MODULE SUSPECTED GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING
OF BEING PROCEDURE 2 FLOW CHART
FAULTY?
NO
RUN STATION DIAGNOSTICS

USING RSS, RUN DIAGNOSTICS ON
STATION MODULES
YES
MODULE SUSPECTED GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING
OF BEING PROCEDURE 2 FLOW CHART
FAULTY?
NO
DONE
Figure 1. Quantar Station Troubleshooting Overview (Procedure 1 Routine Site Visit)
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
3
PROBLEM
REPORTED OR SUSPECTED
PROCEDURE 2
OBSERVE LED INDICATORS and

MONITOR ALARM TONES (Pages 6 & 9)
OBSERVE LED INDICATORS ON STATION
MODULE FRONT PANELS
MONITOR ALARM ALERT TONES FROM
LOCAL SPEAKER
LED PATTERN USING RSS, ACCESS THE STATUS

YES REPORT SCREEN. ANALYZE
INDICATES STATION
IN SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MESSAGES TO DETERMINE IF
MODE? MODULE FAILURE HAS
OCCURRED.
NO
NO USING RSS, DOWNLOAD STATION

MODULE SUSPECTED SOFTWARE TO FLASH MEMORY
OF BEING ON STATION CONTROL BOARD
FAULTY?
YES
YES GO TO MODULE REPLACEMENT

MODULE SUSPECTED
OF BEING PROCEDURES ON PAGE 19
FAULTY?
NO
RUN STATION DIAGNOSTICS

USING RSS, ACCESS DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN,
RUN DIAGNOSTICS, AND INTERPRET RESULTS
YES
MODULE SUSPECTED GO TO MODULE REPLACEMENT
FAULTY?
NO
GO TO
Figure 2. Quantar Station Troubleshooting Overview (Procedure 2 Reported or Suspected Problem)
4 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
PROCEDURE 2 (Cont'd)
CHECK CODE PLUG PROGRAMMING

USING RSS, READ THE STATION CODE PLUG
AND VERIFY THAT PROGRAMMING IS COR
RECT (COMPARE TO CODE PLUG FILE ON PC
FOR PARTICULAR STATION)
CODE PLUG RE-PROGRAM STATION CODE PLUG BY DOWNLOADING

NO
PROGRAMMING CUSTOMER DATA FROM CODE PLUG FILE FOR PARTICU
CORRECT? LAR STATION
IF PROBLEM STILL EXISTS, PROCEED TO INTERPRET
STATUS REPORT
YES
INTERPRET STATUS REPORT

USING RSS, ACCESS THE STATUS REPORT
SCREEN AND LOOK AT HISTORY OF ALARMS
AND TIME STAMPS
YES
MODULE SUSPECTED GO TO MODULE REPLACEMENT
FAULTY?
NO
RUN TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER TESTS

PERFORM VERIFYING TRANSMITTER CIRCUITRY TESTS
(Page 10) TO ISOLATE PROBLEM TO TRANSMITTER
CIRCUITRY
PERFORM VERIFYING RECEIVER CIRCUITRY TESTS
(Page 14) TO ISOLATE PROBLEM TO RECEIVER CIRCUITRY
REPLACE FAULTY MODULE AS DESCRIBED IN

MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
BEGINNING ON PAGE 19
Figure 2.Troubleshooting Procedure 2 (Continued)
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
5
Interpreting LED Indicators

Several LED indicators are provided on the front panels of the modules
that indicate specific operating conditions. The service technician may
observe these LEDs to obtain a quick status indication of the station
equipment.
Figure 3 shows the location of all LED indicators provided on the sta
tion equipment. Table 1 lists each LED indicator along with a descrip
tion of the status indicated by each LED.
Station On
Station Fail
Intcm/AccD WL Fail
Control Ch
Rx 1 Active WL On
Rx 2 Active
Rx Fail
Aux LED
WIRELINE INTERFACE MODULE

(FRONT PANEL OF STATION
STATION CONTROL MODULE CONTROL MODULE)
(FRONT PANEL)
Tx Lock
PA Full
PA Low Module Fail
PA Fail Power On
EXCITER MODULE
(FRONT PANEL) POWER SUPPLY MODULE
(FRONT PANEL)
Figure 3. Quantar Station LED Indicators (UHF Shown)
6 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
Table 1.Quantar Station LED Indicator Functions

LED Location LED Name Status Definition
-GREEN when Exciter synthesizer is locked; module fully functional.
-OFF when:
TX Lock synthesizer is out of lock
or
+5V, +14.2V, or both are absent
-GREEN when transmitter is keyed and PA output power is at expected power

level (as set by technician via RSS during station alignment)
-OFF when:
PA Full PA not keyed
or
PA keyed but PA output power is not at expected power level
(as set by technician via RSS during station alignment)
-YELLOW when transmitter is keyed and PA output power is less than expected
power level (as set by technician via RSS during station alignment) but not shut
down (for example, during power cutback mode)
EXCITER MODULE PA Low -OFF when:
PA not keyed
or
PA keyed and PA output power is at expected power level
(as set by technician via RSS during station alignment)
-RED when:
No PA output power (for example, during PA shutdown mode);
LED status is latched, thereby indicating status during current key or
for previous key
or
(High power models only) Overdrive alarm is generated by Driver PA
Note:Any component associated with the PA could cause LED to light.

These include the +5V/IPA Module, the Driver PA Module, the Final PA
PA Fail
Module, and rf peripherals (such as the circulator, low pass filter, etc.)
-FLASHING when PA is in Test Mode (activated by technician via RSS; when in

Test Mode, power cutback, VSWR protection, and open power loop protection
are disabled)
-OFF when PA output power is either at expected level or at specific cutback lev
els (any level other than shutdown); LED status is latched, thereby indicating sta
tus during current key or for previous key
-OFF during normal operation.

Module Fail -Lights RED when module malfunction occurs, such as shorted output, current
limit exceeded, loss of communication with Station Control Module, etc.
POWER SUPPLY MODULE -GREEN with ac input power present and switch turned ON
Power On
-OFF when ac input power absent or switch turned OFF
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
7
Table 1.Quantar Station LED Indicator Functions (continued)

LED Location LED Name Status Definition
-GREEN when SCM fully functional

Station On -FLASHING when front panel switch press detected
-OFF for SCM failure
-RED for SCM failure

Station Fail
-OFF when SCM fully functional (no failure)
-YELLOW when station is in Intercom mode

-FLASHING once per second when station is in Access Disable Mode
Intcm/Acc D
-FLASHING twice per second when station is TX Inhibited
-OFF when station is not in Intercom mode
-GREEN when station is control channel (trunking systems only)
STATION CONTROL
MODULE Control Ch -FLASHES each time station decodes ISW (IntelliRepeater systems only)
(SCM)
-OFF when station is not control channel (trunking systems only)
-GREEN when Station Control Board is passing audio/data (receive path un
muted) from Receiver #1; The following conditions must be met:
Carrier at proper frequency being received
Carrier signal level is above threshold set in codeplug
RX 1 Active Squelch criteria met (carrier, PL, DPL, ASTRO, secure, etc.)
(Note that squelch criteria can be manually altered via RSS for
testing purposes)
-OFF when above conditions are not met for Receiver #1
RX 2 Active -Indicates condition of Receiver #2; Same status definitions as RX 1 ACTIVE
-RED when Receiver #1 and #2 are both non-functional
-BLINKING ONCE PER SECOND when Receiver #1 is non-functional
-BLINKING TWICE PER SECOND when Receiver #2 is non-functional or when
SAM Module or UHSO Module is non-functional
RX Fail
-OFF when both Receiver #1 and #2 are functional
(or no receiver modules installed)
A receiver module is considered non-functional if a failure is detected during

diagnostics run at time of power-up or during normal operation.
Aux LED -GREEN LED available for special application function

All LEDs -Station is in Software Download mode, either initiated by the RSS or due to soft
Flashing On and ware failure.
Off
in Unison
LEDs Flashing -Stationhas received software files from RSS and is in process of downloading
Up and Down in the software to FLASH memory in the Station Control Module
Sequential
Pattern
-GREEN when WIB fully functional

WL On
-OFF for WIB failure
WIRELINE INTERFACE -GREEN when WIB fully functional
BOARD WL On
((WIB)) -OFF for WIB failure
Both LEDs -WIB is in Software Download mode (operating software is being downloaded
Blinking Rapidly into the FLASH memory on WIB from Station Control Module)
Notes:
1. All LEDs momentarily light following station reset (Volume Up, Volume Down, and Intercom buttons on SCM front panel pressed simultaneously)
or upon station power up.
2. If no LED indicators are on, make sure that ac power to the station power supply is present. Check the circuit breaker at the ac source. Check
the ac line cord. If no problem found, suspect Power Supply Module.
8 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
Interpreting Alarm Alert Tones

Introduction
Four station alarm conditions are reported with audio alert tones which
are routed to the local speaker. The alarms are also entered into the
Note:The alarm tones may also be routed
to the console (via the wireline) and trans alarm log which can be accessed using the RSS (refer to RSS User's
mitted over the air. Refer to the RSS User's Guide 68P81085E35).
Guide 68P81085E35 for details on enabling/
disabling these two alarm routing options. The four alarm conditions are represented by a series of alarm tones,
from a single beep to four beeps. Each beep is a 1200 Hz tone lasting
125 msec. The alarm tones occur during a repeating 10 second win
dow, with 2 seconds between successive alarms (when more than one
alarm are active). The following two examples illustrate the timing of the
alarm tones.
Example 1: Single Alarm (#3)
beep...beep....beep.........................................[repeats]
Alarm #3
10 Second Window
Example 2: Multiple Alarms (#1 and #4)
beep...............beep....beep....beep....beep............[repeats]
2 seconds
Alarm #1 Alarm #4
10 Second Window
The alarm tone definitions are as follows:
Number of Alarm Condition

Alarm Condition Description
Beeps Name
Alarm is reported when station loses ac line
1 Battery Revert power and reverts to battery backup. Alarm
is cleared when station receives ac power.
Alarm is reported when PA fails to key up to
2 PA Fail full output power. Alarm is cleared upon
successful keyup to full power.
Alarm is reported when either TX or RX
3 Synthesizer synthesizers fail to lock. Alarm is cleared
when both synthesizers lock.
Alarm is reported when battery charging
voltage is above +34.5 V (100 W stations) or
4 Overvoltage
+17.25 V (20 W stations). Alarm is cleared
when voltage returns to normal range.
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
9
Verifying Transmitter Circuitry

Introduction
While most module faults can be detected by running the station diag
nostics provided by the RSS, the following procedure provides a more
traditional method of troubleshooting the transmitter circuitry. This pro
IMPORTANT cedure is useful in the event that the RSS is not at hand or for some
reason cannot be utilized (PC malfunction, etc.).
Performing this procedure
requires that the station be This procedure allows the service technician to make minor adjust
taken out of service. It is rec
ommended that, unless the ments and verify proper operation of the station transmit circuitry, in
station is already out of ser cluding:
vice due to an equipment Exciter Module
malfunction, this procedure
be performed during off Power Amplifier Module
peak hours so as to minimize Power Supply Module
the disruption of service to
the system subscribers. To 2.1 MHz reference oscillator circuitry
take the equipment out of Transmitterrelated circuitry on the Station Control Board (SCM)
service, use the Access
Disable function described In general, the transmitter circuitry is exercised by injecting and mea
in the Operation section of suring signals using a Motorola R2001 Communications Analyzer (or
this manual.
equivalent). Incorrect measurement values indicate a faulty module(s);
measurement values within the acceptable range verify proper opera
tion of the above listed modules and circuitry.
Required Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required to perform the procedure:
Motorola R2001 Communications Analyzer (or equivalent)
Telephonestyle handset with PTT switch (TMN6164 or equiv.)
InLine Wattmeter (Motorola Model S1350 or equivalent)
Dummy Load (50, station wattage or higher)
Verifying Transmitter Circuitry Procedure

Step 1. Connect test equipment by performing Steps 1-3 shown
in Figure 4.
Step 2. Connect handset to RJ11 connector on SCM front panel
as shown.

FRONT PANEL
HANDSET
PTT
BUTTON
10 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
TO TO
RECEIVE TRANSMIT
ANTENNA ANTENNA
QUANTAR
STATION
(REAR VIEW)
STATION
TRANSMIT
OUTPUT
STATION
RECEIVE
INPUT
Disconnect cable from

1 transmit antenna to upper N-
type connector on bracket. 2
Connect N-to-N cable between station
transmit output and in-line wattmeter.
Connect wattmeter to dummy load.
IN-LINE
WATTMETER
DUMMY
LOAD
MOTOROLA
R2001
ANTENNA COMMUNICATIONS
RF PORT SELECT KNOB ANALYZER
(PULL OUT)
Connect antenna to R2001 antenna

3 input. Be sure to pull RF PORT SELECT
knob out to select antenna rf input.
Figure 4. Test Equipment Setup for Verifying Transmitter Circuitry
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
11

(Continued)
Step 3. Press the PTT button and observe LED indicators on
Exciter Module front panel.
If PA Low or PA Fail LED is lit, suspect the following:
Note:Suspected faulty modules are Power Amplifier Module failure
shown ranked in order of most to least Exciter Module failure
likelihood. Loose or bad ExcitertoPA rf cable
Loose or bad PAtoantenna rf output cable
PA rf output cable not properly terminated
If TX Lock LED is off, suspect the following:
Faulty Station Control Module
Faulty Exciter Module
Faulty backplane
Step 4. Measure output power by pressing the PTT button and
observing reading on inline wattmeter.
If PA output not at proper power (as set for particular
site), adjust the output power as described in the
RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
Step 5. If PA output power OK, set up R2001 for
spectrum analyzer display. Press the
PTT button and observe the display.
The display should look similar to:
If the display shows multiple carriers evenly spaced
about the carrier, suspect a faulty PA module or
+5V/IPA Module
If the display shows a solid carrier but off frequency,
suspect the following:
Note:Suspected faulty modules are Faulty Exciter or Station Control Module
shown ranked in order of most to least Faulty external 5 MHz reference source
likelihood. If the display shows a single carrier moving erratical
ly, suspect:
Faulty Exciter Module
Faulty PA Module
(continued on page 13)
12 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting

(Continued)
Step 6. If display OK, set up R2001 to display
modulation. Using the handset, push
the PTT button and speak into the
mouthpiece. Verify that the
display shows:
If proper display is not obtained, suspect faulty SCM
or Exciter Module.
Step 7. Set the R2001 for GEN/MON MTR. Press the PTT button
and speak loudly in the mouthpiece to cause maximum
deviation. Display should read 5 kHz maximum.
If proper display is not obtained, suspect faulty SCM
or Exciter Module.
Step 8. This completes the Verifying Transmitter Circuitry test

procedure. If all displays and measurements are correct,
the transmitter circuitry may be considered to be operat
ing properly. Remove test equipment, restore the station
to normal service, and return to the troubleshooting flow
chart to resume troubleshooting sequence.
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
13
Verifying Receiver Circuitry

(Analog Capable Stations)
Introduction
traditional method of troubleshooting the receiver circuitry. This proce
IMPORTANT dure is useful in the event that the RSS is not at hand or for some reason
cannot be utilized (PC malfunction, etc.).
Performing this procedure
requires that the station be This procedure allows the service technician to make minor adjustments and
taken out of service. It is rec
ommended that, unless the verify proper operation of the station receive circuitry, including:
station is already out of ser Receiver Module
vice due to an equipment Power Supply Module
malfunction, this procedure
be performed during off 2.1 MHz reference oscillator circuitry
peak hours so as to minimize Receiverrelated circuitry in the Station Control Module (SCM)
the disruption of service to
the system subscribers. To In general, the receiver circuitry is exercised by injecting and measur
take the equipment out of ing signals using a Motorola R2001 Communications Analyzer (or
service, use the Access equivalent). Incorrect measurement values indicate a faulty module(s);
Disable function described
in the Operation section of
measurement values within the acceptable range verify proper opera
this manual. tion of the above listed modules and circuitry.
Telephonestyle handset with PTT switch (TMN6164 or similar)
Female Ntype to Female Ntype coaxial cable
RJ11 to BNC cable
Dummy Load (50, station wattage or higher) required for re
IMPORTANT peater stations only
Note that if station operates
Verifying Receiver Circuitry Procedure
as a repeater the transmit Step 1. Connect test equipment by performing Steps 1-3 shown
output from the station must
be connected to a dummy
in Figure 5.
load to prevent overtheair Step 2. Disable PL and carrier squelch by repeatedly pressing the
broadcast during receiver
testing.
PL/CSQ/Off button until receiver noise is heard thru the
handset (or external or internal speaker). If no audio is
heard, suspect the following:
Faulty Receiver Module
R2001 is outputting a carrier signal
Step 3. Set R2001 to generate a .5 V (-113 dBm) FM signal at
the Quantar receiver frequency, modulated by a 1 kHz
tone at 3 kHz deviation. The 1 kHz tone should be audible
thru the handset (or internal or external speaker). If no au
dio is heard, suspect the following:
Faulty Station Control Module (2.1 MHz reference)
Faulty antennatoReceiver preselector rf cable
Faulty R2001tostation rf cable
14 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
TO
RECEIVE
ANTENNA
QUANTAR
STATION
(REAR VIEW)
Disconnect cable from

1 receive antenna to lower
N-type connector on STATION
bracket. RECEIVE MOTOROLA
INPUT R2001
COMMUNICATIONS
ANALYZER
Connect N-to-N cable between RF IN/OUT

2 station receive input and RF In/Out
connector on R2001. STATION
CONTROL
MODULE
FRONT
PANEL
HANDSET
Connect handset to RJ-11 jack on front panel

3 of Station Control Module (or connect External
PTT
BUTTON
Speaker to RJ-11 jack, or use built-in W
internal speaker).
Figure 5. Test Equipment Setup for Verifying Receiver Circuitry
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
15

(Continued)
Step 4. If audio is heard, connect the HANDSET RJ-11 jack to
the Oscilloscope input BNC connector, as shown below:
OSCILLOSCOPE
TO INPUT
STATION
RECEIVE
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR STATION CONTROL MODULE
FRONT PANEL
RJ-11 TO BNC
TEST CABLE
MOTOROLA PART NO.
01-82069W01
(AVAILABLE FROM
MOTOROLA WASPD)
Step 5. Use Volume Up button to increase volume to maximum.

Measure the audio level using the R2001.
Audio level should measure approximately .75 to
1.5 V p-p. If not, suspect faulty SCM.
Step 6. Change R2001 injection signal level to:
VHF:.25 V (-119 dBm)
Note:To measure SINAD, the station UHF:.35 V (-116 dBm)
must be programmed for mixed mode
800, 900:.30 V (-117.5 dBm)
Analog/Digital operation. Incorrect read
ing will result if programmed for Digital Step 7. Measure the receiver SINAD. The value should read 12 dB
Only operation. or greater. If not, tune the preselector (VHF and UHF only)
and recheck SINAD. If 12 dB SINAD cannot be achieved,
replace the Receiver Module.
Note:For VHF and UHF stations only,
refer to 5. Preselector Field tuning Pro Step 8. This completes the Verifying Receiver Circuitry test pro
cedure in this section for procedures to cedure. If all displays and measurements are correct, the
tune the receiver preselector. receiver circuitry may be considered to be operating
properly. Remove test equipment, restore the station to
normal service, and return to the troubleshooting flow
16 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting

(Digital Only Stations)
Introduction
traditional method of troubleshooting the receiver circuitry.
IMPORTANT
This procedure allows the service technician to make minor adjustments
Performing this procedure and verify proper operation of the station receive circuitry, including:
requires that the station be
taken out of service. It is rec Receiver Module
ommended that, unless the Power Supply Module
station is already out of ser 2.1 MHz reference oscillator circuitry
vice due to an equipment
malfunction, this procedure Receiverrelated circuitry in the Station Control Module (SCM)
be performed during off
peak hours so as to minimize
In general, the receiver circuitry is exercised by injecting and measur
the disruption of service to ing test pattern signals using a Motorola R2670 Communications Ana
the system subscribers. To lyzer (or equivalent) and analyzing the Bit Error Rate using the RSS. In
take the equipment out of correct measurement values indicate a faulty module(s); measure
service, use the Access ment values within the acceptable range verify proper operation of the
Disable function described
in the Operation section of
above listed modules and circuitry.
this manual. Required Test Equipment
Motorola R2670 Communications Analyzer with ASTRO CAI
Option (or equivalent)
PC running Radio Service Software (RSS) program
Female Ntype to Female Ntype coaxial cable
Dummy Load (50, station wattage or higher) required for re
peater stations only
IMPORTANT
Verifying Receiver Circuitry Procedure
Note that if station operates
as a repeater the transmit Step 1. Proceed to the procedure ASTRO Bit Error Rates Reports
output from the station must (located in Chapter 4 of the RSS User's Guide
be connected to a dummy
load to prevent overtheair 68P81085E35). Follow the instructions for setting up the
broadcast during receiver test equipment and initiating a BER report using the RSS.
testing.
Step 2. If the BER reading is above 5%, suspect the following:
Faulty Station Control Module (2.1 MHz reference)
Faulty antennatoReceiver preselector rf cable
Faulty R2670tostation rf cable
Step 3. Change R2670 injection signal level to:

VHF:.25 V (-119 dBm)
UHF:.35 V (-116 dBm)
800, 900:.30 V (-117.5 dBm)
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
17

(Analog Capable Stations)
(Continued)
Step 4. Note the receiver BER reading. The BER reading should
be 5% or less. If not, tune the preselector (VHF and UHF
Note:For VHF and UHF stations only, only) and recheck the BER reading. If a reading of 5% or
refer to 5. Preselector Field tuning Pro less cannot be achieved, replace the Receiver Module.
cedure in this section for procedures to
tune the receiver preselector. Step 5. This completes the Verifying Receiver Circuitry test pro
cedure. If all displays and measurements are correct, the
receiver circuitry may be considered to be operating
properly. Remove test equipment, restore the station to
normal service, and return to the troubleshooting flow
18 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
4 MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
Station modules suspected of being faulty must be replaced with known good modules to restore the station to
proper operation. The following procedures provide instructions for replacing each of the station modules and
performing any required postreplacement adjustments or programming.
General Replacement
Information
Anti-Static Precaution
The station circuitry contains many CMOS and other staticsensitive
devices. When servicing the equipment, you must take precautionary
steps to prevent damage to the modules from static discharge. Com
plete information on prevention of static protection is provided in Moto
rola publication 68P81106E84, available through Motorola National
Parts. Some additional precautions are as follows:
A wrist strap (Motorola Part No. RSX4015A, or equivalent)
should be worn while servicing to minimize static buildup. Ba
WARNING nana jacks are built into the station cage for connection of the
wrist strap.
When wearing Conductive Wrist
Strap, be careful near sources of
high voltage. The good ground
provided by the wrist strap will
also increase the danger of lethal
shock from accidentally touching
high voltage sources.
WRIST STRAP
BANANA JACK
(ONE ON EACH SIDE OF CAGE)
CAUTION
DO NOT insert or remove station

modules with power applied.
This may result in damage to the Do not insert or remove modules with power applied. Always
modules. turn off the station using the On/Off switch located on the front
of the Power Supply Module before inserting or removing mod
ules.
All spare modules should be kept in a conductive bag for storage
and transporting. When shipping modules to the repair depot,
always pack in conductive material.
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
19
General Replacement
Information (Continued)
Care of Gold-Plated Connector Contacts
The connections between the modules and the station backplane
board are made with goldplated card edge connector contacts to pro
vide maximum reliability. Goldplated materials do not form a noncon
ductive oxide layer, and therefore should not require cleaning under
normal conditions.
When the modules have been subjected to many extraction/insertion
cycles, or if the station is operated in a dusty environment, the contacts
may require cleaning. Do not use an eraser or any type of abrasive sub
stance to clean either the module cardedge connectors or the back
plane connector contacts. Any type of abrasive cleaning (typically
employed for cleaning non goldplated contacts) can result in the re
moval of the gold plating or bending of the connector contacts.
If cleaning of the goldplated contacts is required, use a soft cloth
dampened with alcohol to lightly wipe the contacts. Be sure not to
touch the contact surfaces with your fingers, as finger oils and salts can
contaminate the contact surfaces.
Cleaning Module Rails

After a few module extraction/insertion cycles, wipe the module rails
with a soft cloth to remove any oxidation or foreign material. This ensur
es a good ground connection between the module and the cage.
Power Down Station Before Removing/Inserting Modules

Before removing or inserting a module into the station cage and engag
ing the backplane connector, be sure to turn off the station power using
the Power Supply Module On/Off switch.
Important! If the station is equipped with battery backup, turning the
On/Off switch to OFF will not turn the station off. You must also discon
nect the battery revert cable from the station backplane. Remember to
reconnect the battery cable before restoring the station to operation.
Validating Repairs
After replacing a faulty module with a known good module, perform
one of the following tests to validate the repair before leaving the site.
If the faulty module was detected as the result of running station

diagnostics via the RSS, run the diagnostics again after the repair
is made to ensure that the replacement module passes all diagnos
tic tests.
If the faulty module was detected by an operational failure, perform
the operation to ensure that the repair corrected the reported/de
tected failure.
20 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
Replacing Power Amplifier

Module
Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Turn off station power (refer to page 20).
Step 2. Using a Torx #15 driver, remove antivibration screw(s) (if
installed) from top and/or bottom of module front panel.
Step 3. Disconnect mini-UHF connector on rf cable connecting
Exciter Module to Power Amplifier Module.
Step 4. Slide the module out to the first stop. Disconnect the N
type connector (rf output from the module) from the lower
left side of module.
Step 5. Remove faulty module from cage.
Step 6. Install replacement Power Amplifier Module by sliding
module into cage (about 2 inches from full insertion). Con
nect the rf output cable to the Ntype connector at the low
er left side of the module.
Step 7. Slide the module in completely and firmly seat the module
connector into the backplane. (Do not slam the module
against the backplane or push any harder than necessary
to seat the connectors.) Now reconnect the rf cable from
the Exciter Module.
Step 8. Restore power to the station.
PostReplacement Optimization Procedure

Perform the Power Output alignment procedure located in the RSS
User's Guide (68P81085E35).
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
21
Replacing Exciter Module

NoteThe replacement board must have the installed) from top and/or bottom of module front panel.
same model number as the faulty board (e.g.,
TLF6920). If it does not, contact the System Step 3. Disconnect miniUHF connector on rf cable connecting
Support Center at 18002217144 for instruc Power Amplifier Module to Exciter Module.
tions on how to proceed.
Step 5. The Exciter Board software must now be removed from
the old board and installed onto the replacement board.
The software is contained on a single EPROM. You must
remove the EPROM from the replacement board and re
NoteIf the existing EPROM is faulty, con place it with the EPROM from the old board. The following
tact the System Support Center at illustration shows the location of the EPROM.
18002217144 to obtain replacement
part. The version of software contained in
the replacement device must match that of
the faulty device. U3701
15 14 15 14
28 1
U3701
NoteUse an IC Extraction Tool (Motoorla
Part No. 01-80386A04) to remove the firm
ware devices. 28 1
Step 6. Install replacement Exciter Module by sliding module into

cage and firmly seating the module connector into the
backplane. (Do not slam the module against the back
plane or push any harder than necessary to seat the con
nectors.) Now reconnect the rf cable from the Power Am
plifier Module.

Step 1. Perform the TX Deviation Gain Adjust alignment proce
dure located in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
Step 2. Perform the Reference Modulation alignment procedure
located in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
Step 3. For ASTRO Simulcast systems only, perform the
ASTRO/Simulcast Launch Time Offset alignment proce
dure located in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
22 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
Replacing Power Supply

Module
Step 4. Install replacement Power Supply Module by sliding mod
ule into cage and firmly seating the module connector into
the backplane. (Do not slam the module against the
backplane or push any harder than necessary to seat the
connectors.)

Replacement Power Supply Modules are factory aligned. Therefore, no
postreplacement optimization is required for this module.
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
23
Replacing Station Control

Module (all except modules in
IntelliRepeater Ethernet
Networks)
Step 1. If the module is capable of communicating with the RSS,
NoteThe replacement board must have the connect the PC to the RSS port, start the RSS program,
same model number as the faulty board (e.g., and save the codeplug from the station to a file on the PC
CLN6961). If it does not, contact the System hard disk. This will allow the codeplug information to be
Support Center at 18002217144 for instruc downloaded to the codeplug located on the replacement
tions on how to proceed.
Station Control Board. If the module cannot communicate
with the RSS, an archive file (if available) of the particular
station codeplug may be downloaded. If no archive code
plug file exists, you must program the codeplug as de
scribed in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
NoteIf the existing EPROM or FLASH SIMM
is faulty, contact the System Support Center at Step 3. Using a Torx #15 driver, remove front panel and Station
18002217144 to obtain replacement parts. Control Board as described in Figure 6.
The version of software contained in the re Step 4. The Station Control Board software must now be re
placement devices must match that of the
faulty devices. moved from the old board and installed onto the replace
ment board. The software is contained on either two or
four EPROMS (earlier version boards) or a single FLASH
SIMM (later version boards). You must remove the
NoteUse an IC Extraction Tool (Motorola EPROMs or FLASH SIMM from the replacement board
Part No. 01-80386A04) to remove the firm and install the EPROMs or FLASH SIMM from the old
ware devices. board. The following illustrations show the locations of the
EPROMs and FLASH SIMM.
Software on
Two EPROMs
Software on
Four EPROMs
24 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting

Module (Conventional/6809)
(Continued)
Replacement Procedure (continued)
Software on
Single FLASH
SIMM
Step 5. Install replacement Station Control Board by sliding

board into cage and firmly seating the board cardedge
connectors into the backplane. (Do not slam the board
Note:When inserting Station Control Board
into cage, place your thumbs on the BNC and
to seat the connectors.)
Dtype connectors and firmly push the board Step 6. Replace the front panel by pressing it into place and re
into the backplane connector. placing the two screws. Be sure the 2wire cable from the
local speaker is connected to the 3pin connector at the
bottom front of the Station Control Board. If the connector
is not keyed (earlier models), you may connect the 3pin
connector in either polarity.

Step 1. Replacement Station Control Modules are shipped with
default data programmed into the codeplug (EEPROM
Alignment Procedures
RX Wireline located on board). After replacing a Station Control
TX Wireline Board, you must download codeplug data (unique to the
Squelch Adjust particular station) to the replacement board codeplug.
Battery Equalization (if required) Simply retrieve the file from your archive and follow the
Power Output instructions in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35) for
Tx Deviation Gain Adjust
saving data to the codeplug. Note that if no archive
Reference Modulation
codeplug file exists, you may create a new codeplug by
For ASTRO stations, also perform RSSI and copying the training.cp codeplug file (supplied with the
Simulcast/ASTRO Launch Time Offset align RSS) and then program it as necessary to meet the
ment. particular station's requirements.
Step 2. Calibrate the reference oscillator (station reference) by
For 6809 Trunking stations, also perform
TDATA alignment. performing the procedure in the Routine Maintenance
section of this manual.
Step 3. Perform the alignment procedures listed in the sidebar as
described in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
25

Module (for modules in
IntelliRepeater Ethernet
Networks)
Step 1. If the module is capable of communicating with the RSS,
connect the PC to the RSS port, start the RSS program,
and save the codeplug from the station to a file on the PC
hard disk. This will allow the codeplug information to be
downloaded to the codeplug located on the replacement
Station Control Board. If the module cannot communicate
with the RSS, an archive file (if available) of the particular
station codeplug may be downloaded. If no archive code
plug file exists, you must program the codeplug as de
scribed in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
NoteIf the Physical Address and/or the IP Step 2. Using the RSS, read the IP Address and Physical Address
Address cannot be read, contact the System assigned to the station and jot them down. (From the RSS
Support Center at 18002217144. Main Menu, go to Service:Ethernet Parameters to read
the IP Address and the Physical Address.)
Step 4. Disconnect the station from the Ethernet LAN as de
scribed below.
DISCONNECT TCONNECTOR
FROM CONNECTOR #22
TO NEXT
STATION
TO NEXT
STATION
Step 5. Using a Torx #15 driver, remove front panel and Station
Control Board as described in Figure 6.
Step 6. The Station Control Board software must now be re
NoteUse an IC Extraction Tool (Motorola moved from the old board and installed onto the replace
Part No. 01-80386A04) to remove the firm ment board. The software is contained on a single FLASH
ware devices. SIMM. You must remove the FLASH SIMM from the re
placement board and install the FLASH SIMM from the old
board. The following illustration shows the location of the
FLASH SIMM.
26 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
Replacing Station Control Module (for

modules in IntelliRepeater Ethernet
Networks) (Continued)
Replacement Procedure (continued)
NoteIf the existing FLASH SIMM is faulty, Software on

contact the System Support Center at Single FLASH
18002217144 to obtain a replacement part. SIMM
NoteThe replacement board must have the

same model number as the faulty board (e.g.,
CLN6960). If it does not, contact the System Step 7. Install replacement Station Control Board by sliding
Support Center at 18002217144 for instruc board into cage and firmly seating the board cardedge
tions on how to proceed. connectors into the backplane. (Do not slam the board
Note:When inserting Station Control Board Step 8. Replace the front panel by pressing it into place and re
into cage, place your thumbs on the BNC and placing the two screws. Be sure the 2wire cable from the
D-type connectors and firmly push the local speaker is connected to the 3pin connector at the
board into the backplane connector.

Step 1. Replacement Station Control Modules are shipped with
default data programmed into the codeplug (EEPROM lo
cated on board). After replacing a Station Control Board,
you must download codeplug data (unique to the particu
lar station) to the replacement board codeplug. Simply re
trieve the file from your archive and follow the instructions
in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35) for saving data
to the codeplug. Note that if no archive codeplug file ex
ists, you may copy a codeplug from another station at the
site and save it to this station.
Important! When the RSS prompts you to Crossload"
Alignment Procedures the other stations at the site, answer NO.
RX Wireline Step 2. Using the RSS, navigate to Service:Ethernet Parame
TX Wireline ters and change the IP Address and Physical Address to
Squelch Adjust
Battery Equalization (if required)
the addresses you read in Step 2 on page 26.
Power Output Step 3. Calibrate the reference oscillator (station reference) by
Tx Deviation Gain Adjust performing the procedure in the Routine Maintenance
Reference Modulation section of this manual.
For ASTRO stations, also perform RSSI and Step 4. Perform the alignment procedures listed in the sidebar as
Simulcast/ASTRO Launch Time Offset align described in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
ment.
Step 6. Reconnect the Tconnector from the Ethernet LAN.
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
27
28 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
1 2
Remove the two screws from top and bottom Partially remove front panel and position
of Station Control Module front panel. the board extraction tab on the bottom rail
of the cage and slide the panel to the left
until the lip of the tab is positioned behind
the cutout in the Station Control Board.
TORX
SCREWS
(2)
EXTRACTOR TAB
BEHIND BOARD CUTOUT

FRONT PANEL
STATION
CONTROL
BOARD
3 4
Tip back on the panel to pry the Station Remove Station Control Board from cage.
Control Board out of the backplane
connectors.
Figure 6. Removal Procedure for Station Control Board (Quantar VHF Station Shown)
11/15/99 68P81096E59-B 29
Replacing Wireline Interface

Board
Step 3. Remove Station Control Module front panel and Wireline
NoteA later model board (CLNxxxx) can be Interface Board as described in Figure 6.
used to replace both later model boards and
earlier model boards (TRNxxxx). However, Step 4. Set all jumpers on replacement board to match those on
earlier model boards cannot be used to re the faulty board. These include input/output impedance
place later model boards. (Later model matching jumpers, 2wire/4wire select jumper, and dc re
boards support either EPROMs or FLASH; mote control selection jumpers.
earlier model boards support only EPROMs.)
Step 5. The Wireline Board software must now be removed from
the old board and installed onto the replacement board.
The software is contained on either two EPROMS (earlier
version boards) or two FLASH ICs (later version boards).
You must remove the EPROMs or FLASH ICs from the re
placement board and install the EPROMs or FLASH ICs
NoteIf the existing EPROM or FLASH SIMM from the old board. The following illustration shows the
is faulty, contact the System Support Center at locations of the EPROMs and FLASH ICs.
18002217144 to obtain replacement parts.
The version of software contained in the re
placement devices must match that of the
faulty devices.
17 16 17 16 17 16 17 16
NoteUse an IC Extraction Tool (Motorola U134 U135
Part No. 01-80386A04) to remove the firm U134 U135
ware devices.
32 1 32 1
32 1 32 1
Step 6. Install replacement Wireline Interface Board by sliding

board into cage and firmly seating the board cardedge
connectors into the backplane. (Do not slam the board
Step 7. Replace the front panel by pressing it into place and re
placing the two screws. Be sure the 2wire cable from the
local speaker is connected to the 3pin connector at the

Perform the Rx Wireline and Tx Wireline adjustment procedures located
in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
30 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
1 2
Remove the two screws from top and bottom Partially remove front panel and position
of Station Control Module front panel. the board extraction tab on the bottom rail
of the cage and slide the panel to the left
until the lip of the tab is positioned behind
the cutout in the Wireline Interface Board.
TORX
SCREWS
(2)
EXTRACTOR TAB
BEHIND BOARD CUTOUT

FRONT PANEL
WIRELINE
INTERFACE
BOARD
8POSITION CONNECTOR
(CABLE CONNECTS TO
ORANGE TERMINAL STRIP ON
REAR OF STATION)
3 4
Tip back on the panel to pry the Wireline Disconnect the 8position connector as
Interface Board out of the backplane shown and remove Wireline Interface
connectors. Board from cage.
Figure 7. Removal Procedure for Wireline Interface Board (Quantar VHF Station Shown)
11/15/99 68P81096E59-B 31
Replacing Receiver Module

and/or Preselector Assembly
(VHF and UHF)
Step 2. Using a Torx #15 driver, remove antivibration screws (if
Step 3. Slide the module out to the first stop. Disconnect mini
UHF connector on rf cable (rf input to the module) con
nected to the preselector assembly.
Step 5. If Receiver Board is being replaced:
Disconnect cable (miniUHF connector) connected
Note:On VHF and UHF models, the Receiv to Receiver Board.
er Module is comprised of a Preselector As
sembly and a Receiver Board attached to a Remove nine (9) Torx-head screws securing Re
module housing. The Preselector Assembly ceiver Board to module housing. Note location of
and the Receiver Board are each considered
to be a field replaceable unit (FRU). Replace foam insulating pad beneath VCO portion of Receiv
ment procedures are given for each FRU. If er Board.
you choose to replace the entire module (in
cluding receiver board and preselector), you Remove faulty board and replace with known good
must perform the preselector tuning proce board. Be sure to position the foam insulating pad
dure. (noted in previous step) behind the VCO.
Secure board using Torxhead screws removed pre
viously. Reconnect rf cable to miniUHF connector
on board.
Step 6. If Preselector Assembly is being replaced:
Disconnect cables (miniUHF connectors) from as
sembly.
Remove faulty Preselector Assembly by removing
two(2) Torxhead screws securing assembly to mod
ule housing.
Install known good assembly and secure using
Torx-head screws removed previously. Reconnect
rf cables to miniUHF connectors.
(continued on next page)
32 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting

and/or Preselector Assembly
(VHF and UHF)
(Continued)
Replacement Procedure (Continued)
Step 7. Install repaired Receiver Module by sliding module into
cage (about 2 inches from full insertion). Connect the rf in
put cable to the miniUHF connector on the Preselector
Assembly.
Step 8. Slide the module in completely and firmly seat the module
connector into the backplane. (Do not slam the module

Step 1. If you replaced the Receiver Board Perform the
Squelch Adjust and the RSSI alignment procedures lo
cated in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
Step 2. If you replaced the Preselector Assembly Perform the
preselector field tuning procedure beginning on page 36.

(800 MHz and 900 MHz)
Step 2. Remove antivibration screws (if installed) from top and/or
bottom of module front panel.
Step 3. Slide the module out to the first stop. Disconnect mini
UHF connector on rf cable (rf input to the module) con
nected to the preselector assembly.
Step 5. Install replacement Receiver Module by sliding module
into cage and firmly seating the module connector into the
backplane. (Do not slam the module against the back
plane or push any harder than necessary to seat the con
nectors.) Connect the rf cable to the miniUHF connector
at the top of the module.

Perform the Squelch Adjust and the RSSI alignment procedures lo
cated in the RSS User's Guide (68P81085E35).
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
33
Replacing ASTRO Modem

Card
Step 2. Remove the Wireline Interface Board as described on
page 30.
Step 3. Unplug faulty ASTRO Modem Card from Wireline Inter
face Board.
Step 4. Inspect the label on the EPROM (shown below). If the date
is 81693, remove the EPROM and install it on the re
placement board. For all other dates, the EPROM on the
replacement board is compatible and need not be re
placed.
EPROM
Pin 1
(Notched)
Pin 1
Step 5. Install replacement modem card.

Step 6. Install Wireline Interface Board as described on page 30.
The ASTRO Modem Card requires no settings or adjustments. The
card is configured by the Station Control Module on station power up.
34 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
Replacing Backplane Board

Step 2. Remove all modules/boards from the station cage as de
scribed on the previous pages. Make sure that all modules/
boards are placed on properly grounded antistatic surface.
Step 3. Label all cables connected to the rear of the Backplane
Board. Disconnect all cables from the backplane.
Step 4. Remove the eleven (11) Torxhead screws which secure
the metal shield and backplane board to the cage.
Step 5. Remove the metal shield from the backplane, sliding the
two guide pins located at each end at the bottom of the
shield from the backplane board. Remove the backplane
board.
Step 6. Install the replacement Backplane Board and metal shield
using the 11 Torxhead screws removed previously, re
connect all cables, and reinstall all modules/boards.

Using the RSS, run a complete battery of diagnostics to exercise all
boards and modules.
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
35
5 PRESELECTOR FIELD TUNING PROCEDURE
The VHF and UHF Receiver Modules are comprised of a circuit board and a preselector assembly, both secured
in a slide-in module housing. The preselector assembly is a 3pole (UHF) or a 5pole (VHF) bandpass filter
equipped with tuning slugs to adjust the passband corresponding to the operating frequency(s) of the station.
The preselector assembly must be field tuned if replaced in the field or if the station operating frequency(s) are
modified. The tuning procedure follows.

The following test equipment is required to properly tune the preselec
tor assembly:
RF Signal Generator Motorola R2600 Communications Ana
lyzer, R2001 Communications Analyzer (see note), or HP8656A
signal generator (or equivalent)
IMPORTANT Dip/Peak Monitor HP435B Power Meter (or equivalent) with
HP8484A sensitive power head, Boonton Model 92E with BNC
Tuning for best SINAD response input, or R2001/R2600 using the spectrum analyzer function
DOES NOT result in optimum
tuning of the preselector assem Torque driver capable of delivering 12 in-lbs of torque and 10
bly. You must use this field tuning mm deep well socket
procedure to obtain optimum Tuning probe Motorola Part No. 0180763D22, p/o TRN7799A
preselector performance.
tuning kit
Flat-blade screwdriver
Note:The R2600 Communications Analyzer can both generate

and measure simultaneously. The R2001 may be used for either
the generator or the monitor function, but not both simultaneous
ly. When using R2001 as the signal generator, rf signal must be
taken from the Antenna port.
36 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
VHF Tuning Procedure

Calculating Proper Alignment Frequency
Use one of the following two methods to calculate the alignment fre
quency to be generated by the signal generator.
For stations with a single receive frequency, calculate the frequency
of the alignment signal as follows:
Step 1. From the site documentation or the RSS, determine the
station receive frequency.
Step 2. If the frequency is < 148 MHz (Range 1), or < 156 MHz
(Range 2), subtract 250 kHz. Otherwise, note actual fre
quency.
Example:If station receive frequency is 134.575 MHz,

subtract 250 kHz since frequency is less than 143 MHz.
134.575 MHz 250 kHz = 134.325 MHz

Step 3. If Receiver Module is Range 1, determine the alignment
frequency as follows:
If frequency (from Step 2) is < 134 MHz, then alignment
frequency = 133.75 MHz.
If frequency (from Step 2) is > 152 MHz, then alignment
frequency = 152 MHz.
Otherwise, use actual frequency from Step 2.

frequency = 151.75 MHz.
For stations with multiple receive frequencies, calculate the frequen

cy of the alignment signal as follows:
Step 1. From the site documentation or the RSS, note the receive
frequency for each channel supported by the station.
Step 2. Calculate a midpoint frequency as follows:
Fmid = (Fhighest + Flowest) 2
Step 3. Using Fmid in place of the station receive frequency, per
form Step 2 thru Step 4 from above.
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
37

(Continued)
Preparing Equipment
Step 1. Make sure Receiver Module (with Preselector Assembly)
is installed in a functional station cage equipped with a
Power Supply Module.
Step 2. Remove the two Torx-head screws from the Receiver
Module front panel and remove the panel.
Step 3. Detune the preselector as follows.
If the alignment frequency (calculated on the previous
page) is greater than 148 MHz (Range 1) or 156 MHz
(Range 2), turn the five tuning screws in (CW) until 1/8"
protrudes past each of the tension nuts. If the alignment
frequency is less than or equal to 148 MHz (Range 1) or
156 MHz (Range 2), back out (CCW) the five tuning
screws until " protrudes past each of the tension nuts.
Step 4. Using the torque driver and deep well socket, tighten the
five tension nuts on the adjustment screws to 6 in-lbs.
Step 5. Connect the test equipment as shown below:
PRESELECTOR
ASSEMBLY
TENSION NUT
(5)
TUNING
SCREW
(5)
TO
RECEIVER
BOARD
TO
DIP/PEAK
MONITOR
(RF MILLIVOLTMETER
OR POWER METER)
TO
TUNING RECEIVE
PROBE ANTENNA
STATION
RECEIVE
INPUT
Test Equipment Setup for Preselector Field Tuning

FROM
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
38 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting

(Continued)
Tuning Procedure
Step 1. Turn the station power supply ON (to provide the active
50 termination).
IMPORTANT Step 2. Adjust the signal generator to the frequency calculated on
page 40. Set the level to +5 dBm.
When tuning for peak or dip, turn Step 3. Insert tuning probe into cavity H1 and adjust tuning
the tuning screw turn past the
peak or dip to verify that you have
screw 1 for a PEAK.
obtained a true peak or dip. After Step 4. Leave tuning probe in cavity H1 and adjust tuning screw
ensuring you have found true
2 for a DIP.
peak or dip, turn the screw back
to the location of the original peak Step 5. Insert tuning probe into cavity H2 and adjust tuning
or dip. screw 3 for a DIP.
Step 6. Insert tuning probe into cavity H3 and adjust tuning
screw 4 for a DIP.
Step 7. Insert tuning probe into cavity H4. Decrease output from
signal generator to -5 dBm.
Step 8. Adjust tuning screw 5 for a DIP. Then turn tuning screw 5
turn CCW. (Note that dip will not be as sharp for screw
5 as it was for screws 2 thru 4.)
PRESELECTOR
ASSEMBLY
TO
STATION
1 RECEIVE ANTENNA
H1 PORT
2
H2
3
H3
4
H4
TO
H5 RECEIVER
BOARD
5
Location of Tuning Screws and Cavity Probe Holes
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
39
UHF Tuning Procedure

Calculating Proper Alignment Frequency
Use one of the following two methods to calculate the alignment fre
quency to be generated by the signal generator.
For stations with a single receive frequency, calculate the frequency
of the alignment signal as follows:
Step 1. From the site documentation or the RSS, determine the
station receive frequency. Add 200 kHz.
Step 4. If Receiver Module is Range 3 or 4, determine the align
ment frequency as follows:
For stations with multiple receive frequencies, calculate the frequen

cy of the alignment signal as follows:
Step 1. From the site documentation or the RSS, note the receive
frequency for each channel supported by the station.
Step 2. Calculate a midpoint frequency as follows:
Fmid = (Fhighest + Flowest) 2
Step 3. Using Fmid in place of the station receive frequency, per
form Step 1 thru Step 4 from above.
40 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
Troubleshooting
UHF Tuning Procedure

(Continued)
Preparing Equipment
Step 1. Make sure Receiver Module (with Preselector Assembly)
is installed in a functional station cage equipped with a
Power Supply Module.
Step 2. Remove the two Torx-head screws from the Receiver
Module front panel and remove the panel.
Step 3. Using the torque driver and deep well socket, loosen the
three tension nuts on the adjustment screws.
Step 4. Detune the preselector as follows.
Turn tuning screws 3 and 4 clockwise until they bottom
out. Be careful not to apply more than 3 in-lbs of torque
to prevent warping preselector cover and housing.
Step 5. Connect the test equipment as shown below:
PRESELECTOR
ASSEMBLY
TENSION NUT
(3)
TUNING
SCREW TO
(3) RECEIVER
BOARD
TO
DIP/PEAK
MONITOR
(RF MILLIVOLTMETER
OR POWER METER)
TO
TUNING RECEIVE
PROBE ANTENNA
STATION
RECEIVE
INPUT
Test Equipment Setup for Preselector Field Tuning

FROM
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
41
Tuning Procedure (Continued)

Tuning Procedure
Step 1. Turn the station power supply ON (to provide the active
50 termination).
IMPORTANT Step 2. Adjust the signal generator to the frequency calculated on
page 40. Set the level to +5 dBm.
When tuning for peak or dip, turn Step 3. Insert tuning probe into cavity U2 and adjust tuning
the tuning screw turn past the
peak or dip to verify that you have
screw 2 for a PEAK.
obtained a true peak or dip. After Step 4. Tighten tension nut on tuning screw 2 to at least 12 in-lb
ensuring you have found true
and fine tune tuning screw 2 for a PEAK.
peak or dip, turn the screw back
to the location of the original peak Step 5. Keep tuning probe in cavity U2 and adjust tuning screw
or dip. 3 for a DIP.
Step 6. Tighten tension nut on tuning screw 3 to at least 12 in-lb
and fine tune tuning screw 2 for a DIP.
Step 7. Insert tuning probe into cavity U3. Decrease output from
signal generator to -5 dBm.
Step 8. Adjust tuning screw 4 for a DIP.
Step 9. Tighten tension nut on tuning screw 4 to at least 12 in-lb
and fine tune tuning screw 4 for a DIP.
PRESELECTOR
ASSEMBLY
TO
STATION
RECEIVE ANTENNA
PORT
U2
TUNING SCREW 2
U3
TUNING SCREW 3
U4
TUNING SCREW 4
TO
RECEIVER
BOARD
Location of Tuning Screws and Cavity Probe Holes
42 68P81096E59-B
11/15/99
RECEIVER MODULE
INCLUDES MODELS:
TRD6361AF Receiver Board(132-154 MHZ)
TFD6511A Preselector Filter (132-154 MHZ)
TRD6362AF Receiver Board (150-174 MHZ)
TFD6512A Preselector Filter (150-174 MHZ)
1 DESCRIPTION
The Quantar/Quantro VHF High Band Receiver Modules are described in this section. A general description, identi
fication of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of operation
are provided. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the
module, allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. (Refer also to the Maintenance and Trou
bleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station.)
General Description
The Receiver Module provides the receiver functions for the Quantar VHF
station. Each receiver module is comprised of a Preselector Filter Assembly
and a Receiver Board, all contained within a slide-in module housing. The
receiver module performs highly selective bandpass filtering and dual down
conversion of the station receive rf signal. A custom receiver IC then performs
an analog to digital conversion of the received signal and outputs a differen
tial data signal to the Station Control Module.
The Models TFD6511/TFD6512 Preselector Filter Assemblies and the
TRD6361/TRD6362 Receiver Boards differ only in the range of opera
tion. Models TFD6511/TRD6361 operate in VHF Range 1
(132-154MHz); Models TFD6512/TRD6362 operate in VHF Range 2
(150-174MHz). Unless otherwise noted, the information provided in
this section applies to all models.
Overview of Circuitry
The receiver module contains the following circuitry:
Frequency Synthesizer Circuitry consisting of a phase-
locked loop and VCO, generates the 1st LO injection signal
Preselector Filter Assembly provides 5-pole bandpass filter
ing of the station receive rf input
Receiver Front End Circuitry performs filtering, amplification,
and the 1st down conversion of the receive rf signal
Custom Receiver IC Circuitry consists of a custom IC which
performs the 2nd down conversion, filtering, amplification, and
analog to digital conversion of the receive signal
Address Decode & A/D Converter Circuitry performs address
decoding to provide board and chip select signals; also con
verts analog status signals to digital format for transfer to Station
Control Module
Local Power Supply Regulation accepts +14.2V dc input and
outputs +10V and +5V dc operating voltages

All Rights Reserved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81086E28-B
Printed in U.S.A.
Quantar/Quantro Station Products
2 CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 1 shows the receiver module controls, indicators, and all input and output external connections.
RECEIVER RF INPUT
TO PRESELECTOR
FROM
RECEIVE ANTENNA
PRESELECTOR
TUNING SCREWS
RECEIVER MODULE
FRONT PANEL
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

(MATES WITH BACKPLANE)
REAR VIEW
Figure 1. Quantar/Quantro VHF Receiver Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs
2 68P81086E28-B
9/1/00
TRD6361AF/TRD6362AF Receiver Modules
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the receiver circuitry at a functional level. The informa
tion is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module
in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram
of the receiver module.
Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry

Introduction
The synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the 1st LO injection signal
for the 1st mixer in the receiver front end circuitry. Functional operation
of these circuits is as follows.
Phase-Locked Loop
The phase-locked loop (PLL) IC receives frequency selection data
from the Station Control Module microprocessor. Once programmed,
the PLL IC compares a 2.1 MHz reference signal (from the Station Con
trol Module) with a feedback sample of the VCO output. Depending on
whether the feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2.1
MHz reference, correction pulses are generated. (The width of these
correction pulses is dependent on the amount of difference between
the 2.1 MHz reference and the VCO feedback.)
The up/down pulses from the PLL IC are fed to a charge pump which
outputs a dc voltage proportional to the pulse widths. This dc voltage
is then low-pass filtered and fed to the VCO as the CONTROL VOLT
AGE. (Note that if a frequency change is requested by the microproces
sor, the low-pass loop filter is momentarily bypassed to accelerate the
frequency change.)
VCO
The dc control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to dual VCOs which
generate the 1st LO injection signal. Within each band (Range 1 and
Range 2), one VCO generates signals in the upper half of the band,
while the other VCO generates signals in the lower half of the band.
Only one VCO is active at a time. Selection of the active VCO is provided
by a BANDSHIFT signal from the PLL IC.
The active VCO responds to the dc control voltage and generates the
appropriate rf signal. This signal is fed through a buffer ampifier and
impedance matching and output to the 1st LO injection amplifier in the
receiver front end circuitry. A sample of the injection signal is returned
to the PLL IC (via a feedback buffer) to serve as a VCO feedback signal.
68P81086E28-B
9/1/00
3
Preselector Filter Assembly

The preselector filter assembly provides 5 poles of bandpass filtering
for the station receive rf input signal. The filter assembly is mounted to
the front of the receiver module housing and provides mini-UHF con
nectors for input from the receive antenna and output to the receiver
board. Tuning screws are provided for filter tuning. (Refer to the Trou
bleshooting section in this manual for instructions on tuning the pres
elector assembly.)
Receiver Front End Circuitry

The receive rf input is fed from the antenna through the 5-pole pres
elector assembly to the receiver board. The signal is low-pass filtered,
amplified, image filtered, and fed to one input of the 1st mixer. The sig
nal is mixed with the 1st LO injection signal (generated by the synthe
sizer/VCO circuitry) to produce a 21.45 MHz 1st i-f signal.
The 1st i-f signal is 2-pole bandpass filtered and fed to an amplifier.
The amplifier gain (high or low) is determined by an AGC switch circuit
that is controlled by an AGC select signal from the Station Control
Board. The amplified 1st i-f signal is then 4-pole bandpass filtered
and fed to the rf input of the custom receiver IC.
Custom Receiver IC Circuitry

The custom receiver IC provides additional amplification, filtering, a
second down conversion, and finally analog to digital conversion of the
2nd i-f signal. The digital receive signal is then output via differential
driver circuitry to the Station Control Board. This data signal contains
the necessary I and Q quadrature information, AGC information, and
other data transfer information required by the Station Control Board
to process the receive signal. (Note that the recovered audio signal is
in digital format throughout the station circuitry, resulting in a more noi
se-free, linear receiver. Analog audio is present only in the external
speaker driver circuitry on the Station Control Board and on the Wire
line Interface Board at the phone line connections to and from the sta
tion.)
The remainder of the custom receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and
tank circuits to support the internal oscillator, 2nd LO synthesizer cir
cuitry, and 2nd i-f circuitry.
A serial bus allows data communications between the custom receiver
IC and the DSP ASIC located on the Station Control Board. This bus
allows the DSP ASIC to control various current and gain settings, es
tablish the data bus clock rate, program the 2nd LO, and perform other
control functions.
4 68P81086E28-B
9/1/00
TRD6361AF/TRD6362AF Receiver Modules
Address Decode and

A/D Converter Circuitry
Address Decode Circuitry
The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Board to use
the address bus to select a specific device on a specific station board
for control or data communications purposes (via the SPI bus). If the
board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 thru A5 as the receiver
module address, it enables the chip select circuitry. The chip select cir
cuitry then decodes address lines A0 and A1 and generates chip select
signals for the PLL and A/D converter and the SYNTH ADAPT signal to
control the loop filter bypass switch in the synthesizer circuitry.

Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the
receiver board are fed to the A/D converter, which converts them to a
digital signal and, upon request by the Station Control Board, outputs
the signal to the Station Control Board via the SPI bus.
Voltage Regulator Circuitry

The voltage regulator circuitry consists of +10V and two +5V regula
tors. The +10V regulator accepts a +14.2V dc input and generates
a +10V dc operating voltage for the receiver board circuitry.
The +10V regulator output also feeds two +5V regulators which output
Custom Analog +5V and Custom Digital +5V dc operating voltages to
supply the custom receiver IC. In addition, a +5V dc operating voltage
is input at the backplane (from the station power supply) to supply Digi
tal +5V to the remainder of the receiver board circuitry.
68P81086E28-B
9/1/00
5
6 68P81086E28-B
9/1/00
TRD6361AF/TLD6362AF Receiver Board
COAXIAL CABLE
RECEIVER FRONT END CIRCUITRY AGC
SWITCH
FROM
RF INPUT/OUTPUT N-TYPE CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR ON AGC SELECT HIGH LOW
BRACKET RF INPUT/OUTPUT FROM
(REAR OF STATION) CONNECTOR BRACKET STATION CONTROL
TO MODULE
5-POLE FILTER INPUT 1ST
N-TYPE MINI-UHF MINI-UHF MINI-UHF MIXER
CONNECTOR CONNECTORS CONNECTORS CONNECTORS 21.45 MHZ
5-POLE IMAGE 1ST I-F 2-POLE 4-POLE
RECEIVE RF LO-PASS PREAMPLIFIER BANDPASS BANDPASS
PRESELECTOR CIRCUITRY FILTER
FROM FILTER FILTER FILTER
FILTER CIRCUITRY
RX ANTENNA
1ST LO VCO FEEDBACK

ADDRESS DECODE & A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY INJECTION CUSTOM P/O
P2801
AMPLIFIER
RECEIVER
IC 77
CIRCUITRY
A0 & A1 CHIP 21.45 MHZ DIFF
1ST LO INPUT 1ST I-F
SELECT DATA
DECODE CHIP TO
CIRCUITRY SELECT STATION
ADDRESS P/O CONTROL
BUS REGULATOR P2802 MODULE
FROM
STATION VARIOUS CIRCUITRY
CONTROL SIGNALS A/D CUSTOM
MODULE FROM +5V DIGITAL 78
CONVER REGULATOR
BOARD RECEIVER BOARD TER +5V
SELECT TO BE MONITORED SOURCE
DECODE +14.2 V
A2-A5 CIRCUITRY +10V +10V
FROM REGULATOR SOURCE
BACKPLANE
+5V CUSTOM CUSTOM DRIVER

SPI BUS REGULATOR ANALOG RECEIVER CIRCUITRY
SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA) SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA) +5V IC
TO/FROM
STATION SOURCE
CONTROL 450 KHZ
MODULE FILTER
CIRCUITRY
VCO SERIAL
CIRCUITRY BUS
SYNTHESIZER CHIP TO/FROM
SELECT STATION
CIRCUITRY +9.1 V
CONTROL
14.4 MHZ MODULE
VCO TIMING
+10 V CIRCUITRY
BANDSHIFT SELECT
AUX1 CIRCUITRY
SYNTH ADAPT
SUPER 2ND LO
FILTER TANK
PHASE FREQUENCY CIRCUITRY
P/O CHANGE +9.1 V
P2801 LOCKED
LOOP FILTER BYPASS
(ANALOG SWITCHES) VCO CIRCUITRY (UPPER OF BAND)
IC
2.1 MHZ 2.1 MHZ
REF 65 BUFFER RIN OSCILLATOR
FROM BUFFER 2.1 MHZ
SCM AMP REFERENCE
UP LO-PASS CONTROL VOLTAGE OUTPUT

CHARGE
PUMP LOOP IMPEDANCE
DOWN FILTER (+2.5 TO +7.5 V DC) +9.1 V MATCHING
VCO
FEEDBACK
VCO CIRCUITRY (LOWER OF BAND)
FIN
OSCILLATOR
BUFFER
AMP
VCO VCO FEEDBACK

FEEDBACK
BUFFER
2.1 MHZ REFERENCE
Figure 2. VHF Ranges 1 and 2 Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81086E28-B 7
RECEIVER MODULE
INCLUDES MODELS:
TRE6281A-E Receiver Board/TLE5991A Preselector (403-433 MHZ)
1 DESCRIPTION
The Quantar/Quantro UHF Receiver Modules (ranges 1 thru 4) are described in this section. A general description,
identification of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of oper
ation are provided. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of
the module, allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. (Refer also to the Maintenance and
Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all equipment modules.)
General Description
The Receiver Module provides the receiver functions for the Quantar/
Quantro communications equipment. Each receiver module is comprised of
a Preselector Filter Assembly and a Receiver Board, all contained within a
slide-in module housing. The receiver module performs highly selective
bandpass filtering and dual down conversion of the receive rf signal. A cus
tom receiver IC then performs an analog to digital conversion of the received
signal and outputs a differential data signal to the Station Control Module.
The preselector and receiver board models differ only in the range of
operation. Unless otherwise noted, the information provided in this
section applies to all models.
Preselector Filter Assembly provides 3-pole bandpass filter
ing of the receive rf input
Control Module
Local Power Supply Regulation accepts +14.2 V dc input and

All Rights Reserved 68P81086E48-C
RECEIVER RF INPUT
TO PRESELECTOR
FROM
RECEIVE ANTENNA
PRESELECTOR
TUNING SCREWS
RECEIVER MODULE
FRONT PANEL
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

REAR VIEW
Figure 1. UHF Receiver Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs
2 68P81086E48-C
4/15/99
Quantar/Quantro UHF Receiver Modules

Introduction
Phase-Locked Loop
frequency change.)
VCO
generate the 1st LO injection signal. Within each band (Ranges 1 thru
4), one VCO generates signals in the upper half of the band, while the
other VCO generates signals in the lower half of the band. Only one
VCO is active at a time. Selection of the active VCO is provided by a
BANDSHIFT signal from the PLL IC.
appropriate rf signal. This signal is fed through a buffer amplifier and
impedance matching and output to the 1st LO injection amplifier in the
receiver front end circuitry. A sample of the injection signal is returned
to the PLL IC (via a feedback buffer) to serve as a VCO feedback signal.
68P81086E48-C
4/15/99
3
Preselector Filter Assembly

The preselector filter assembly provides 3 poles of bandpass filtering
for the receive rf input signal. The filter assembly is mounted to the front
of the receiver module housing and provides mini-UHF connectors for
input from the receive antenna and output to the receiver board. Tuning
screws are provided for filter tuning. (Refer to the Troubleshooting sec
tion in this manual for instructions on tuning the preselector assembly.)

The receive rf input is fed from the antenna through the 3-pole pres
elector assembly to the receiver board. The signal is low-pass filtered,
amplified, image filtered, and fed to one input of the 1st mixer. The sig
nal is mixed with the 1st LO injection signal (generated by the synthe
sizer/VCO circuitry) to produce a 73.35 MHz 1st i-f signal.
that is controlled by an AGC select signal from the Station Control Mod
ule. The amplified 1st i-f signal is then 4-pole bandpass filtered and
fed to the rf input of the custom receiver IC.

2nd i-f signal. The digital receive signal is then output via differential
driver circuitry to the Station Control Board. This data signal contains
the necessary I and Q quadrature information, AGC information, and
other data transfer information required by the Station Control Module
to process the receive signal. (Note that the recovered audio signal is
in digital format throughout the equipment circuitry, resulting in a more
noise-free, linear receiver. Analog audio is present only in the external
speaker driver circuitry on the Station Control Board and on the Wire
line Interface Board at the phone line connections to and from the
equipment.)
The remainder of the custom receiver IC circuitry consists of 2nd LO
VCO circuitry and timing and tank circuits to support internal circuitry.
control functions.
4 68P81086E48-C
4/15/99
Address Decode and


digital signal and, upon request by the Station Control Module, outputs
the signal to the Station Control Module via the SPI bus.

The voltage regulator circuitry consists of +10V and three +5V regula
The +10V regulator output also feeds three +5V regulators. Two of the
regulators provide Custom Analog +5V and Custom Digital +5V dc
operating voltages to supply the custom receiver IC. The third regula
tor provides Synth +5V to supply the synthesizer circuitry.
In addition, a +5V dc operating voltage is input at the backplane (from
the station power supply) to supply Digital +5V to the remainder of the
receiver board circuitry.
68P81086E48-C
4/15/99
5
6 68P81086E48-C
4/15/99
COAXIAL CABLE
SWITCH
FROM
TO MODULE
3-POLE FILTER INPUT 1ST
N-TYPE MINI-UHF MINI-UHF MINI-UHF MIXER
CONNECTOR CONNECTORS CONNECTORS CONNECTORS 73.35 MHZ
RECEIVE RF LO-PASS PREAMPLIFIER BANDPASS BANDPASS
PRESELECTOR CIRCUITRY FILTER
FROM FILTER FILTER FILTER
FILTER CIRCUITRY
RX ANTENNA
1ST LO VCO FEEDBACK

INJECTION
ADDRESS DECODE & A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY AMPLIFIER CUSTOM P/O
P2801
RECEIVER
1ST LO INPUT IC 77
CIRCUITRY
SELECT REGULATOR 1ST I-F DATA
DECODE CHIP
SELECT
CIRCUITRY TO
STATION
ADDRESS CIRCUITRY
P/O CONTROL
BUS +5V SYNTH +5V P2802
REGULATOR MODULE
FROM SOURCE
STATION VARIOUS
CONTROL SIGNALS A/D +14.2V +10V +10V
MODULE FROM CONVER FROM REGULATOR 78
SOURCE
BOARD RECEIVER BOARD TER BACKPLANE
SELECT TO BE MONITORED
+5V CUSTOM
DECODE DIGITAL +5V
A2-A5 CIRCUITRY REGULATOR
SOURCE
+5V CUSTOM CUSTOM

ANALOG +5V DRIVER
SPI BUS REGULATOR RECEIVER CIRCUITRY
SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA) SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA) SOURCE IC
TO/FROM
STATION
CONTROL 450 KHZ
MODULE FILTER
CIRCUITRY
VCO SERIAL
CIRCUITRY BUS
SELECT STATION
CIRCUITRY +9.1 V
14.4 MHZ CONTROL
TIMING MODULE
VCO +10 V CIRCUITRY
BANDSHIFT SELECT (Note below)
AUX1 CIRCUITRY
SYNTH ADAPT
SUPER 2ND LO
FILTER VCO
P/O CHANGE +9.1 V
P2801 LOCKED
LOOP FILTER BYPASS
(ANALOG SWITCHES) VCO CIRCUITRY (UPPER OF BAND)
IC
2.1 MHZ 2.1 MHZ
FROM BUFFER 2.1 MHZ
SCM AMP REFERENCE
Note: Early models contained
a crystal in the 14.4 MHz
UP Timing Circuitry.
LO-PASS CONTROL VOLTAGE OUTPUT
CHARGE
PUMP LOOP IMPEDANCE
DOWN FILTER (+2.5 TO +7.5 V DC) +9.1 V MATCHING
VCO
FEEDBACK
VCO CIRCUITRY (LOWER OF BAND)
FIN
OSCILLATOR
BUFFER
AMP
VCO VCO FEEDBACK

FEEDBACK
BUFFER
2.1 MHZ REFERENCE
Figure 2. Quantar/Quantro UHF (Ranges 1 thru 4) Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram
4/15/99 68P81086E48-C 7
RECEIVER MODULE
Includes TRF6551G Receiver Board
1 DESCRIPTION
The Quantro/Quantar 800 MHz Receiver Module is described in this section. A general description, identification
of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of operation are pro
vided. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module,
allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. (Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshoot
ing section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station.)
General Description
The Receiver Module provides the receiver functions for the Quantro/
Quantar 800 MHz station. The receiver module is comprised of a Re
ceiver Board and a ceramic preselector (mounted on board), all con
tained within a slide-in module housing. The receiver module per
forms highly selective bandpass filtering and dual down conversion of
the station receive rf signal. A custom receiver IC then performs an ana
log to digital conversion of the received signal and outputs a differential
data signal to the Station Control Module.
Ceramic Preselector Filter provides 7-pole bandpass filter
Control Module

All Rights Reserved 68P81086E76-D
RECEIVER RF INPUT
FROM
RECEIVE ANTENNA
RECEIVER MODULE
FRONT PANEL
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

REAR VIEW
Figure 1. Quantro/Quantar 800 MHz Receiver Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs
2 68P81086E76-D
9/1/00
Quantro/Quantar 800 MHz Receiver Module

Introduction
Phase-Locked Loop
frequency change.)
VCO
The dc control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to a VCO which gen
erates the 1st LO injection signal. The VCO responds to the dc control
voltage and generates the appropriate rf signal. This signal is fed
through a buffer amplifier and impedance matching and output to the
1st LO injection amplifier in the receiver front end circuitry. A sample of
the injection signal is returned to the PLL IC (via a feedback buffer) to
serve as a VCO feedback signal.
68P81086E76-D
9/1/00
3

The receive rf input is fed from the antenna through a low-pass filter
to a 7-pole ceramic preselector filter which provides highly selective
bandpass filtering. The output of the preselector filter is then amplified,
image filtered, and fed to one input of the 1st mixer. The signal is mixed
with the 1st LO injection signal (generated by the synthesizer/VCO cir
cuitry) to produce a 73.35 MHz 1st i-f signal.

2nd i-f signal. The digital receive signal is then sent via differential driv
er circuitry to the Station Control Board. This data signal contains the
necessary I and Q quadrature information, AGC information, and other
data transfer information required by the Station Control Module to pro
cess the receive signal. (Note that the recovered audio signal is in digi
tal format throughout the station circuitry, resulting in a more noise-
free, linear receiver. Analog audio is present only in the external speak
er driver circuitry on the Station Control Board and on the Wireline Inter
face Board at the phone line connections to and from the station.)
control functions.
4 68P81086E76-D
9/1/00
Address Decode and



supply the custom receiver IC and Synthesizer IC. In addition, a +5V
dc operating voltage is input at the backplane (from the station power
supply) to supply Digital +5V to the remainder of the receiver board
circuitry.
68P81086E76-D
9/1/00
5
6 68P81086E76-D
9/1/00
COAXIAL CABLE
SWITCH
FROM
TO MODULE
LO-PASS FILTER 1ST
N-TYPE MINI-UHF MIXER
CONNECTOR CONNECTORS 73.35 MHZ
RECEIVE RF LO-PASS CERAMIC PREAMPLIFIER BANDPASS BANDPASS
CIRCUITRY FILTER
FROM FILTER PRESELECTOR FILTER FILTER
CIRCUITRY
RX ANTENNA FILTER
INJECTION
FILTER
ADDRESS DECODE & A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY 1ST LO VCO FEEDBACK CUSTOM P/O
P2801
INJECTION
AMPLIFIER
RECEIVER
IC 77
CIRCUITRY
SELECT DATA
DECODE CHIP TO
ADDRESS P/O CONTROL
FROM
CONTROL SIGNALS A/D CUSTOM/SYNTH
+5V DIGITAL 78
MODULE FROM CONVERTER REGULATOR +5V SOURCE
BOARD RECEIVER BOARD
DECODE +14.2V +10V
A2-A5 +10V
CIRCUITRY FROM REGULATOR SOURCE
BACKPLANE
CUSTOM CUSTOM DRIVER

+5V ANALOG RECEIVER
SPI BUS SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA) REGULATOR CIRCUITRY
TO/FROM SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA) +5V IC
STATION SOURCE
CONTROL 450 KHZ
MODULE FILTER
CIRCUITRY
VCO SERIAL
CIRCUITRY BUS
SELECT STATION
CIRCUITRY CONTROL
14.4 MHZ MODULE
TIMING
CIRCUITRY
+10 V
SYNTH ADAPT
2ND LO
VCO
P/O CHANGE
P2801 LOCKED SUPER
LOOP FILTER BYPASS FILTER
IC (ANALOG SWITCHES)
2.1 MHZ 2.1 MHZ
REF 65 BUFFER RIN
FROM 2.1 MHZ
SCM REFERENCE
+9.1 V

CHARGE
PUMP LOOP OSCILLATOR IMPEDANCE
DOWN FILTER (+2.5 TO +7.5 V DC) BUFFER MATCHING
VCO AMP
FEEDBACK
FIN
VCO VCO FEEDBACK

FEEDBACK
BUFFER
2.1 MHZ REFERENCE
Figure 2. Quantro/Quantar 800 MHz Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81086E76-D 7
RECEIVER MODULE
Includes TRF6552G Receiver Board
1 DESCRIPTION
The Quantar/Quantro 900 MHz Receiver Module is described in this section. A general description, identification
of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of operation are pro
vided. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module,
General Description
The Receiver Module provides the receiver functions for the Quantar/
Quantro 900 MHz station. The receiver module is comprised of a Re
ceiver Board and a ceramic preselector (mounted on board), all con
tained within a slide-in module housing. The receiver module per
forms highly selective bandpass filtering and dual down conversion of
the station receive rf signal. A custom receiver IC then performs an ana
log to digital conversion of the received signal and outputs a differential
data signal to the Station Control Module.
Ceramic Preselector Filter provides 7-pole bandpass filter
Control Module

Printed in U.S.A.
RECEIVER RF INPUT
FROM
RECEIVE ANTENNA
RECEIVER MODULE
FRONT PANEL
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

REAR VIEW
Figure 1. Quantar/Quantro 900 MHz Receiver Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs
2 68P81091E92-B
9/1/00
Quantar/Quantro 900 MHz Receiver Module

Introduction
Phase-Locked Loop
frequency change.)
VCO
The dc control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to a VCO which gen
erates the 1st LO injection signal. The VCO responds to the dc control
voltage and generates the appropriate rf signal. This signal is fed
through a buffer amplifier and impedance matching and output to the
1st LO injection amplifier in the receiver front end circuitry. A sample of
the injection signal is returned to the PLL IC (via a feedback buffer) to
serve as a VCO feedback signal.
68P81091E92-B
9/1/00
3

The receive rf input is fed from the antenna through a low-pass filter
to a 7-pole ceramic preselector filter which provides highly selective
bandpass filtering. The output of the preselector filter is then amplified,
image filtered, and fed to one input of the 1st mixer. The signal is mixed
with the 1st LO injection signal (generated by the synthesizer/VCO cir
cuitry) to produce a 73.35 MHz 1st i-f signal.

2nd i-f signal. The digital receive signal is then sent via differential driv
er circuitry to the Station Control Board. This data signal contains the
necessary I and Q quadrature information, AGC information, and other
data transfer information required by the Station Control Module to pro
cess the receive signal. (Note that the recovered audio signal is in digi
tal format throughout the station circuitry, resulting in a more noise-
free, linear receiver. Analog audio is present only in the external speak
er driver circuitry on the Station Control Board and on the Wireline Inter
face Board at the phone line connections to and from the station.)
control functions.
4 68P81091E92-B
9/1/00
Address Decode and



supply the custom receiver IC and Synthesizer IC. In addition, a +5V
dc operating voltage is input at the backplane (from the station power
supply) to supply Digital +5V to the remainder of the receiver board
circuitry.
68P81091E92-B
9/1/00
5
6 68P81091E92-B
9/1/00
COAXIAL CABLE
SWITCH
FROM
TO MODULE
LO-PASS FILTER 1ST
N-TYPE MINI-UHF MIXER
CONNECTOR CONNECTORS 73.35 MHZ
RECEIVE RF LO-PASS CERAMIC PREAMPLIFIER BANDPASS BANDPASS
CIRCUITRY FILTER
FROM FILTER PRESELECTOR FILTER FILTER
CIRCUITRY
RX ANTENNA FILTER
INJECTION
FILTER
ADDRESS DECODE & A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY 1ST LO VCO FEEDBACK CUSTOM P/O
P2801
INJECTION
AMPLIFIER
RECEIVER
IC 77
CIRCUITRY
SELECT DATA
DECODE CHIP TO
ADDRESS P/O CONTROL
FROM
CONTROL SIGNALS A/D CUSTOM/SYNTH
+5V DIGITAL 78
MODULE FROM CONVER REGULATOR +5V SOURCE
BOARD RECEIVER BOARD TER
DECODE +14.2V +10V
A2-A5 +10V
CIRCUITRY FROM REGULATOR SOURCE
BACKPLANE
CUSTOM CUSTOM DRIVER

+5V ANALOG RECEIVER
SPI BUS SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA) REGULATOR CIRCUITRY
TO/FROM SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA) +5V IC
STATION SOURCE
CONTROL 450 KHZ
MODULE FILTER
CIRCUITRY
SERIAL
BUS
SELECT STATION
CIRCUITRY VCO CONTROL
14.4 MHZ
CIRCUITRY TIMING
MODULE
CIRCUITRY
+10 V
SYNTH ADAPT
2ND LO
VCO
P/O CHANGE
P2801 LOCKED SUPER
LOOP FILTER BYPASS FILTER
2.1 MHZ 2.1 MHZ
REF 65 BUFFER RIN
FROM 2.1 MHZ
SCM REFERENCE
+9.1 V

CHARGE
PUMP LOOP OSCILLATOR IMPEDANCE
DOWN FILTER (+2.5 TO +7.5 V DC) BUFFER MATCHING
VCO AMP
FEEDBACK
FIN
VCO VCO FEEDBACK

FEEDBACK
BUFFER
2.1 MHZ REFERENCE
Figure 2. Quantar/Quantro 900 MHz Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81091E92-B 7
EXCITER BOARD
MODELS TLD9831AD (132-154 MHZ)
TLD9832AD (150-174 MHZ)
TLE5971AF (403-433 MHZ)
TLE5972AF (438-470 MHZ)
TLE5973AF (470-494 MHz)
TLE5974AF (494-520 MHz)
TLF6920AG (850-870 MHZ)
TLF6930AG (935-941 MHz)
1 DESCRIPTION
The TLD9831A/32, TLE5971 thru 74, TLF6920, and TLF6930 Exciter Boards are described in this section. A gener
al description, identification of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional
theory of operation are provided. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional un
derstanding of the module, allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. (Refer also to the
Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules
in the station.)
General Description
The Exciter Board (in conjunction with the Power Amplifier Module)
provides the transmitter functions for the Quantar and Quantro stations.
Contained within a slide-in module housing, the exciter board gener
ates a low-level modulated rf signal which is input to the power amplifi
er module for further amplification and output to the transmit antenna.
These Exciter Boards differ only in the range of operation, as shown in the
title of this section. Unless otherwise noted, the information provided in this
section applies to all models.
The exciter board contains the following circuitry:
Microprocessor serves as the main controller for the exciter
board; provides control, monitoring of signals, and interfaces
with the Station Control Module microprocessor over a serial
bus
locked loop and VCO, generates a modulated rf signal at the
transmitter carrier frequency
Transmitter Power Control generates a dc control voltage
which controls the output power of the power amplifier module
RF Switch allows the microprocessor to turn on/off the exciter
output signal to the power amplifier module

All Rights Reserved 68P81086E24-E
Figure 1 shows the exciter module controls, indicators, and all input and output external connections.
RF OUTPUT
TO
POWER AMPLIFIER
MODULE
TX LOCK
LED
PA FULL
LED
PA LOW
LED
PA FAIL
LED
EXCITER MODULE
FRONT PANEL
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

REAR VIEW
Figure 1. Exciter Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs
2 68P81086E24-E
9/1/00
Exciter Boards
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the exciter circuitry at a functional level. The informa
of the exciter module.

Introduction
As mentioned previously, the exciter module generates a low-level
modulated rf signal which is input to the power amplifier module. The
rf carrier is generated by a frequency synthesizer consisting of synthe
sizer circuitry and VCO circuitry. Functional operation of these circuits
is as follows.
Phase-Locked Loop
from the microprocessor. Once programmed, the PLL IC compares a
2.1 MHz reference signal (from the Station Control Module) with a feed
back sample of the VCO output. Depending on whether the feedback
signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2.1 MHz reference, cor
rection pulses are generated. (The width of these correction pulses is
dependent on the amount of difference between the 2.1 MHz reference
and the VCO feedback.)
frequency change.)
VCO
generate the rf carrier signal. Within each band (VHF-R1, R2, UHF-
Note:800 MHz and 900 MHz Exciter Mod R1, R2, R3, R4, and 800 MHz), one VCO generates signals in the upper
ules have only one VCO which operates over half of the band, while the other VCO generates signals in the lower half
the entire 900 MHz range. of the band. Only one VCO is active at a time. Selection of the active
VCO is provided by a BANDSHIFT signal from the PLL IC.
appropriate rf signal. This signal is fed through impedance matching,
amplification, and filtering and is output to the RF Switch Circuitry. A
sample of the output is returned to the PLL IC to serve as a VCO feed
back signal.
68P81086E24-E
9/1/00
3

(Continued)
Modulation
The active VCO receives an audio/data modulation signal from the Sta
tion Control Module via two low-pass filters. This modulation signal
modulates the active VCO to produce a modulated low-level rf carrier
signal.
Low-frequency modulation signals (below the loop filter corner) tend
to be interpreted by the PLL as VCO frequency error. A modulation
compensation signal is added to the PLL control voltage to cancel out
this effect and allow for low frequency modulation.
RF Switch Circuitry
The modulated rf signal from the VCO is fed through an attenuator to
an rf switch circuit. Signal TX ENABLE from the microprocessor con
trols the switch. The rf signal is output to a mini-UHF connector
mounted in a recess in the module front cover. An rf cable connects the
exciter output to the power amplifier module.
Microprocessor Circuitry
Introduction
The microprocessor (P) serves as the main controller for the exciter
module circuitry. The P provides the following functions.
Communications with Station Control Module

Data communications between the exciter P and the Station Control
Module P is performed via a serial peripheral interface (SPI) bus. This
bus allows the SCM P to interrogate the exciter P (to obtain status
and alarm information) and to issue commands to the exciter P (to se
lect frequency and output power). The SPI bus is also used to allow the
exciter P to send data to the synthesizer PLL IC (to select frequency)
and the D/A Converter IC (to control output power).
Monitoring External Signals

The exciter P accepts input signals from various sources, including portions
of the exciter circuitry and from the power amplifier module. These signals
are input to the P through analog multiplexers where they are monitored.
The levels on these status lines are used by the P to control the operation
of the exciter circuitry and to report to the SCM P.
EPROM
The P operating program and various algorithms for frequency and
output power control are stored in an EPROM. The P accesses the
EPROM via an address bus and a data bus.
4 68P81086E24-E
9/1/00
Exciter Boards
(Continued)
Output Control Signals
Various output control signals from the P are fed to latches via the
data bus. These signals include PA KEY, TX ENABLE, and the control
signals for the front panel LEDs. Other control signals are provided to
portions of the exciter module circuitry, as well as to the Power Amplifier
Module.
Exciter ID Resistor ROM

A resistor network ROM provides exciter ID information to the P. This
information defines in which band and range (e.g., VHF-Range 1,
UHF, 900 MHz, etc.) the particular exciter is designed to operate.
Oscillator Circuitry
The clock signal for the P is generated by internal circuitry and an ex
ternal 8.0000 MHz crystal circuit.
TX Power Control Circuitry

A/D Converter
The TX Power Control Circuitry consists of an D/A converter and a cus
tom Power Control IC. Upon station power-up, the exciter P sends
data to the D/A converter (via the SPI bus) to select the desired output
power (in Watts) from the power amplifier. The D/A converter outputs
a dc reference voltage proportional to the selected output power.
Power Control IC
The Power Control IC generates a dc power control voltage (V_CONT)
which is fed to the power amplifier module to control the output power.
A forward power detect (TX_VF) signal (dc voltage proportional to the
output power from the power amplifier) is fed back to the Power Control
IC. The Power Control IC compares the TX_VF signal with the POWER
SELECT voltages from the A/D converter and adjusts V_CONT accord
ingly to obtain the selected output power. This feedback and control
loop" continually monitors the TX_VF signal and adjusts V_CONT to
maintain a constant output power at the selected level.
Monitoring of Loop Status
A sample of the dc power control voltage (V_CONT) is fed back to the
P via the analog multiplexer to allow the P to monitor the status of the
power control loop. Inability of the power amplifier to output the se
lected power (as indicated by V_CONT going to the maximum level)
results in the P re-programming the A/D converter to select a lower
output power level. If after two reductions in selected power the power
amplifier still cannot output the selected power, the P initiates shut
down" mode by selecting 0 Watts and turning the rf switch OFF.
68P81086E24-E
9/1/00
5
6 68P81086E24-E
9/1/00
Exciter Board
MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUITRY
TX LOCK
TX POWER CONTROL CIRCUITRY

ANALOG PA FULL
MULTIPLEXER

ADDRESS BUS LED PA LOW POWER CONTROL VOLTAGE
DRIVERS (V_CONT)

PA FAIL
TO
EPROM
DATA BUS MICROPROCESSOR

VARIOUS VIA ANALOG MUX
SIGNALS TO BE P/O
MONITORED LATCHES

VARIOUS P101
FORWARD
CONTROL POWER

LINES TX_VF
DETECT 19
FILTERS TO (TX_VF)
A/D PORT P/O P101

EXCITER AND FROM
PA MODULE POWER
POWER SELECT V_CONT
VARIOUS DATA BUS AMPLIFIER VOLTAGES 15
SIGNALS TO BE MODULE 17 PA CONTROL
MONITORED PA KEY D/A POWER VOLTAGE
FROM CONVERTER CONTROL (V_CONT)
RESISTOR ROM
2 MUXs IN IC P/O P102 TO
POWER (EXCITER TYPE ID) TX ENABLE POWER
AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
+9.6 V 16
MODULE FAST/SLOW SELECT MODULE
18
PA KEY
BUFFER ENABLE
MICROPROCESSOR
P/O P101
LOCAL SPI BUS STATION SPI BUS FAST
KEY-UP TIMING CONTROL
SPI BUS
MOSI CONTROL
LO-VOLTAGE HI-Z 53 SPI BUS
RESET BUFFER TO/FROM
CIRCUITRY RESET STATION +10.2 V SERIES
P/O P/O P102 CONTROL
P101 PASS
52 MISO MODULE
54 SCK
RESET
FROM 55 RESET TO D/A TX ENABLE
SCM AND LATCHES
SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA) SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)
+10.2 V VCO
SYNTHESIZER +8.9 V
SUPER
CIRCUITRY
CIRCUITRY VCO
FILTER
BANDSHIFT SELECT
AUX1 CIRCUITRY +8.9 V
(NOTE 1)
SYNTH ADAPT
RF SWITCH
FREQUENCY CIRCUITRY
P/O PHASE +8.7 V
LOCKED CHANGE
P102 FILTER BYPASS
LOOP VCO CIRCUITRY (UPPER OF BAND)
2.1 MHZ 2.1 MHZ (NOTE 1)
FROM BUFFER
SCM AMP (ALL BANDS TX ENABLE
EXCEPT 800 MHZ) J3100
LOW FREQ AMP MINI-
COMP MODULATION
UP LO-PASS CONTROL VOLTAGE OUTPUT UHF
MIN CHARGE PIN LO-PASS MODULATED
LOOP DIODES IMPEDANCE ATTENUATOR RF OUTPUT
PUMP FILTER
FILTER MATCHING TO POWER
DOWN (+2.5 TO +7.5 V DC) +8.7 V
VCO AMPLIFIER
FEEDBACK RF SWITCH MODULE
VCO CIRCUITRY (LOWER OF BAND) CIRCUITRY
FIN
OSCILLATOR
BUFFER
AMP
MODULATION
VCO VCO FEEDBACK
P/O FEEDBACK NOTES:
P101 BUFFER
1) Upper Band VCO Circuitry and VCO Select Circuitry are not
REF present on 800 MHz (TLF6920) and 900 MHz (TLF6930)
AUDIO LO-FREQUENCY Exciter Boards.
FROM 77 MODULATION
SCM COMPENSATION MODULATION
LOW PASS LOW PASS
VCO P/O P102 FILTER FILTER
AUDIO
FROM 78
SCM
Figure 2. VHF, UHF, 800 MHz, and 900 MHz Exciter Modules Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81086E24-E 7
POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE
MODELS: TLD3110A (25W, 132-174 MHz)
TLD3101A (125W, 132-154 MHz)
TLD3102A (125W, 150-174 MHz)
1 DESCRIPTION
The Models TLD3110 and TLD3101/TLD3102 Power Amplifier Modules are described in this section. A general
description, identification of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, functional block diagrams, and functional
derstanding of the module, allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. (Refer also to the Main
tenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in
the station.)
General Description
The Power Amplifier Module (PA) accepts a low-level modulated rf signal
from the Exciter Module and amplifies the signal for transmission via the site
transmit antenna. The output power is continually monitored and regulated
by a feedback and control loop, with a power output control voltage being
generated by the transmitter control circuitry located in the Exciter Module.
The Models TLD3110 and TLD3101/TLD3102 PA Modules are very similar
in design and function, with the major differences being the output power
capabilities and operating frequency range. Unless otherwise noted, the in
formation provided in this section applies to all three models.
The PA contains the following circuitry:
Intermediate Power Amplifier (IPA) low-level amplifier stage
which is controlled by the transmitter control voltage from the
Exciter Module; provides an output of approximately 0 to 10W
Driver Power Amplifier (DPA) contained in 25W PA only, provides
final amplification of the IPA output; provides an output of 35W maxi
mum
Final Power Amplifier (FPA) contained in 125W PA only, pro
vides final amplification of the IPA output; provides an output of
160W maximum
Circulator provides PA module output isolation
Harmonic Filter/Coupler suppresses harmonic radiation and
couples the PA output to the transmit antenna connector; also
serves as a power meter
Sense and Detect Circuitry provides sense and detect signals
for critical signal points throughout the circuitry; signals are
monitored by the Exciter Module

Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual
Figure 1 shows the PA controls, indicators, and all input and output external connections.
RF INPUT
FROM
EXCITER MODULE
POWER AMPLIFIER
MODULE
FRONT PANEL
RF OUTPUT
FRONT VIEW
COOLING
FANS
HEAT SINK
RF
OUTPUT
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

SIDE VIEW
Figure 1. Power Amplifier Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs (125 W Model Shown)
2 68P81086E23-B
9/1/00
TLD3110 and TLD3101/TLD3102 Power Amplifier Modules
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the PA circuitry at a functional level. The information
is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in
order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Functional block diagrams are provided
in Figure 2 (TLD3110, 25 W) and Figure 3 (TLD3101/TLD3102, 125 W). As mentioned previously, the four PA mod
ules are similar in design and function. The following theory of operation applies to all four modules except where
noted.
RF Signal Path
A low-level modulated rf signal (approximately +13 dBm) from the Ex
citer module is input to the PA module via a coax cable. The signal is
input to the IPA and amplified to approximately 0 to 10W [depending
on the dc power control voltage (V_CONT) from the Exciter Module].
The IPA output is fed to a DPA (25W) or an FPA (125W), where final am
plification occurs. The output of the DPA (35W maximum) or FPA (160W
maximum) is fed to a circulator, which passes the transmit signal to the
harmonic filter/coupler, while routing all reflected power to a 50 load.
The output of the circulator is fed to the harmonic filter/coupler. This cir
cuit provides highly selective bandpass filtering and couples the signal
to an N-type connector mounted to the module casting. A coax cable
routes the signal to an N-type connector mounted on an rf input/out
put connector bracket located on the rear of the station.
Output Power Control

A feedback and control loop configuration is used to regulate the PA
output power. The Harmonic Filter/Coupler generates a dc voltage pro
portional to the PA Module output power. This voltage (TX_VF) is fed to
the TX Power Control Circuitry in the Exciter Module. The TX_VF voltage
is compared to reference voltages to generate a dc power control volt
age (V_CONT).
Note that V_OMNI does not control the output The dc power control voltage (V_CONT) is output from the Exciter Mod
level of the DPA directly but serves as on/off ule and fed through filtering circuitry in the PA to a voltage translation
control for the DPA stage.
and current limiting circuit. The output of this circuitry is V_OMNI, a dc
voltage which controls the output power of the IPA.
Summary of Power Control Operation By controlling the output
level of the IPA (range of 0 to 10W), the output power of the PA module
is established. The feedback and control loop (TX_VF fed back to Excit
er Module resulting in V_CONT to control IPA output) continually moni
tors and maintains the proper output power from the PA.
68P81086E23-B
9/1/00
3
Sense and Detect Circuitry

Introduction
The PA is equipped with several sense and detect circuits to provide
status signals to the Exciter Module. In most cases, the Exciter Module
microprocessor uses these signals to determine PA operating condi
tions and, in response, varies certain control signals to correct output
power, turn on cooling fans, etc. The sense and detect circuits are de
scribed in the following paragraphs.
Current Sensing Circuitry (25W)

IPA and DPA current sense circuitry (comprised of two differential am
plifiers and two sensing resistors) meters the current being drawn by
the IPA and the DPA and outputs two dc signals directly proportional
to the IPA and DPA currents. Circuit operation is described in the follow
ing paragraph.
In each of the current sense circuits, a differential amplifier measures
the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage di
rectly proportional to the current through the resistor. The dc voltage
(IPA_I or DPA_I ) is fed to the Exciter Module (via an analog multiplexer
and filtering circuitry) where it is used in calculating the current being
drawn by the IPA or DPA.

IPA current sense circuitry (comprised of a differential amplifier and a
sensing resistor) meters the current being drawn by the IPA and out
puts a dc signal directly proportional to the IPA current. Circuit opera
tion is described in the following paragraph.
The differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing
resistor and outputs a dc voltage directly proportional to the IPA cur
rent. The dc voltage (IPA_I) is fed to the Exciter Module (via an analog
multiplexer and filtering circuitry) where it is used in calculating the cur
rent being drawn by the IPA.
FPA current sense circuitry (comprised of two differential amplifiers

and two sensing resistors) meters the current being drawn by the FPA
(side A and side B) and outputs two dc signals directly proportional to
the currents for side A and side B. Circuit operation is described in the
following paragraph.
rectly proportional to the current through the resistor. The dc voltages
(FPA_I1_A and FPA_I1_B) is fed to the Exciter Module (via an analog
rent being drawn by the FPA (side A or side B).
4 68P81086E23-B
9/1/00

(Continued)
PA Temperature Sense
A thermistor and buffer circuit provides a dc voltage proportional to the
PA temperature. This signal (PA_TEMP) is fed to the Exciter Module,
which monitors the signal and reduces the PA output power [by reduc
ing the dc power control voltage (V_CONT)] if the PA temperature ex
ceeds set limits.
IPA, DPA, and FPA Detect Circuitry

Detection circuits provide a dc voltage approximately proportional to
the rf outputs of the IPA, DPA (25W), and FPA (125W) stages. These dc
signals (IPA_VF, DPA_VF, and FPA_VF, used for diagnostic purposes
only) are fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter
circuitry.
Reflected Power Detect Circuitry

The Harmonic Filter/Coupler provides a dc voltage approximately pro
portional to the reflected power at the output of the stage. This dc signal
(TX_VR) is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter
circuitry. The signal indicates the amount of potentially harmful re
flected power at the PA output. If the reflected power exceeds a set limit,
the Exciter Module will shut down the PA.
V_OMNI Detect Circuitry

A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately propor
tional to the V_OMNI control voltage from the Voltage Translator & Cur
rent Limiter circuit. This dc signal (V_OMNI*) is fed to the Exciter Mod
ule via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry.
+14V Detect Circuitry

tional to the +14 V dc input voltage from the station Power Supply Mod
ule. This dc signal (14.2V_REF*) is fed to the Exciter Module via an ana
log multiplexer and filter circuitry.
+28V Detect Circuitry (125W Only)

ule. This dc signal (28V_REF*) is fed to the Exciter Module via an ana
68P81086E23-B
9/1/00
5
Cooling Fans Control Circuitry

(125 W Models Only)
The PA is equipped with a dual fan module to provide forced air cooling
WARNING of the PA. The fan module is controlled by a FAN ON signal from the
Exciter Module, which is fed to a driver circuit in the PA Module. The Fan
The cooling fans in the PA Mod Driver/Detect Circuitry controls the power to the fans via two feed-thru
ule are thermostatically con pins in the PA chassis which mate with the power connector on the sli
trolled and may come on at any de-in fan module. The fans are turned on only when the temperature
time during station operation.
Keep fingers clear of fan blades. in the PA exceeds a set limit. It is normal for the fans to cycle on and
off during station operation.
The Fan Driver/Detect Circuitry also monitors the current to the fans
and feeds a dc detect voltage to the Fan Status Circuitry, which outputs
a status signal indicating whether the fan current is above or below a
predetermined range. The status signal (FAN_ALARM) is fed to the
Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry.
Power Amplifier ID Resistor

ROM
A resistor network ROM" provides power amplifier ID information to
the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuits. This in
formation includes the band and range in which the PA is designed to
operate (e.g., VHF-Range 1, UHF, 900 MHz, etc.) and the maximum
output power (e.g., 25 W, 125 W, etc.).
6 68P81086E23-B
9/1/00
P/O
P101
32
33
PWR CONTROL
VOLTAGE P/O
P/O
FROM LINE V_CONT
P102 VOLTAGE TRANSLATOR
EXCITER FILTER
MODULE CIRCUITRY & COAXIAL CABLE
CURRENT LIMITER FROM
34
35 POWER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT
TO RF INPUT/OUTPUT
N-TYPE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
ON BRACKET
RF INPUT/OUTPUT (REAR OF STATION)
CONNECTOR BRACKET
V_OMNI V_OMNI
CIRCULATOR
N-TYPE
J4100 CONNECTOR
+13 DBM INTERMEDIATE 0 TO 10 W DRIVER 35W MAX HARMONIC 25W MAX
MODULATED RF POWER POWER FILTER/
FROM AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER COUPLER TRANSMIT RF
EXCITER (IPA) (DPA) OUTPUT
MODULE
+14V
TX_POWER_VRFL
IPA +14V
TX_POWER_VFWD
DPA 50 OHM
LOAD
P/O
P101/P102 BUFFER
+14V IPA/DPA TX_VR

CURRENT IPA DPA
+14V DETECT DETECT
SENSE P/O
CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY P101/P102
TX_VF
BUFFER
RESISTOR ROM" P/O

(INDICATES PA TYPE) ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
DPA DETECT DPA_V

F
IPA DETECT BUFFER IPA_VF

P/O MULTIPLEXER
LINE OUTPUTS
BUFFER FILTER
+14V VOLTAGE 14.2V_REF* TO
CIRCUITRY EXCITER MODULE
DIVIDER
OMNI_VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE V_OMNI*
DIVIDER
DPA_I
IPA_I P/O
ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
THERMISTOR
PA TEMP
T
BUFFER
Figure 2. TLD3110 25W Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81086E23-B 7
P/O
P101
32
33 COAXIAL CABLE
FROM
PWR CONTROL POWER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT
VOLTAGE P/O TO RF INPUT/OUTPUT
P/O N-TYPE CONNECTOR
FROM LINE V_CONT CONNECTOR
P102 VOLTAGE TRANSLATOR ON
EXCITER FILTER BRACKET
MODULE CIRCUITRY & RF INPUT/OUTPUT (REAR OF STATION)
CURRENT LIMITER CONNECTOR BRACKET
34
35
CIRCULATOR
N-TYPE
CONNECTOR
HARMONIC 125W MAX
FILTER/
COUPLER TRANSMIT RF
V_OMNI OUTPUT
J4100
+13 DBM INTERMEDIATE 0 TO 10 W FINAL 160W MAX
MODULATED RF POWER POWER 50 OHM
TX_POWER_VFWD
TX_POWER_VRFL
FROM AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER LOAD
EXCITER (IPA) (FPA)
MODULE
+14V
SIDE B 28V
SIDE A 28V
P/O IPA BUFFER
P101/P102 TX_VR
+28V
+28V P/O
P101/P102
TX_VF
FPA
DETECT BUFFER
P/O +28V CIRCUITRY
P101/P102
IPA FPA RESISTOR ROM"
+14V IPA (INDICATES PA TYPE)
+14V CURRENT CURRENT
SENSE DETECT SENSE P/O
CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY FPA DETECT FPA_VF ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
BUFFER
+14V 14.2V_REF*
VOLTAGE
DIVIDER
MULTIPLEXER
IPA DETECT IPA_VF P/O OUTPUTS
LINE TO
FILTER EXCITER MODULE
BUFFER CIRCUITRY
OMNI_VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE V_OMNI*
DIVIDER
FPA_I1_A
FPA_I1_B
P/O
IPA_I ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
28V VOLTAGE 28V_REF*
DIVIDER
THERMISTOR
BUFFER PA TEMP
T
P/O
P101
FAN ON
FROM FAN ON FAN DRIVER FAN CURRENT MONITOR FAN FAN STATUS
48 STATUS P/O
EXCITER CIRCUITRY POWER AMPLIFIER
MODULE CIRCUITRY
CASTING
FAN POWER FAN POWER

MATES WITH
DUAL FAN
ASSEMBLY
FAN RTN FAN RTN MOLEX-TYPE
CONNECTOR
Figure 3. TLD3101/TLD3102 125W Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram
8 68P81086E23-B 9/1/00
MODELS: TLE2731A (25W, UHF Range 1)
TLE2732A (25W, UHF Range 2)
TTE2061A (110W, UHF Range 1
TTE2062A (110W, UHF Range 2)
1 DESCRIPTION
The Models TLE2731A, TLE2732A, TTE2061A, TTE2062A, TTE2063A, and TTE2064A Power Amplifier Modules
are described in this section. A general description, identification of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs,
functional block diagrams, and functional theory of operation are provided. The information provided is sufficient
to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module, allowing maintenance and troubleshooting
to the module level. (Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed
troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station.)
General Description
The Power Amplifier Module (PA) accepts a low-level modulated rf signal
from the Exciter Module and amplifies the signal for transmission via the site
transmit antenna. The output power is continually monitored and regulated
by a feedback and control loop, with a power output control voltage being
generated by the transmitter control circuitry located in the Exciter Module.
These PA Modules are very similar in design and function, with the
major differences being the output power capabilities and operating
frequency range. Unless otherwise noted, the information provided in
this section applies to all three models.
Driver Power Amplifier (DPA) contained in 25W PA only, provides
final amplification of the IPA output; provides an output of 35W max.
Final Power Amplifier (FPA) contained in 100/110W PAs only,
provides final amplification of the IPA output; provides an output
of 180W maximum

Printed in U.S.A.
Quantar UHF Station Functional Manual
RF INPUT
FROM
EXCITER MODULE
POWER AMPLIFIER
MODULE
FRONT PANEL
RF OUTPUT
FRONT VIEW
COOLING
FANS
HEAT SINK
RF
OUTPUT
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

SIDE VIEW
Figure 1. Power Amplifier Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs (110 W Model Shown)
2 68P81088E44-B
9/1/00
TLE2731A/TLE2732A/TTE2061A-64A Power Amplifier Modules
in Figure 2 (TLE2731A and TLE2732A, 25 W) and Figure 3 (TTE2061A-63A, 110 W and TTE2064A, 100W). As
mentioned previously, the five PA modules are similar in design and function. The following theory of operation
applies to all four modules except where noted.
RF Signal Path
A low-level modulated rf signal (approximately +13 dBm) from the
Exciter module is input to the PA module via a coax cable. The signal
is input to the IPA and amplified to approximately 0 to 15W [depending
The IPA output is fed to a DPA (25W) or an FPA (100/110W), where final
amplification occurs. The output of the DPA (35W maximum) or FPA
(180W maximum) is fed to a circulator, which passes the transmit signal
to the harmonic filter/coupler, while routing all reflected power to a 50
load.
The output of the circulator is fed to the harmonic filter/coupler. This
circuit provides highly selective bandpass filtering and couples the
signal to an N-type connector mounted to the module casting. A coax
cable routes the signal to an N-type connector mounted on an rf
input/output connector bracket located on the rear of the station.

output power. The Harmonic Filter/Coupler generates a dc voltage
proportional to the PA Module output power. This voltage (TX_VF) is fed
to the TX Power Control Circuitry in the Exciter Module. The TX_VF
voltage is compared to reference voltages to generate a dc power
control voltage (V_CONT).
Note that V_OMNI does not control the output The dc power control voltage (V_CONT) is output from the Exciter
level of the DPA directly but serves as on/off Module and fed through filtering circuitry in the PA to a voltage
control for the DPA stage. translation and current limiting circuit. The output of this circuitry is
V_OMNI, a dc voltage which controls the output power of the IPA.
is established. The feedback and control loop (TX_VF fed back to
Exciter Module resulting in V_CONT to control IPA output) continually
monitors and maintains the proper output power from the PA.
68P81088E44-B
9/1/00
3

Introduction
microprocessor uses these signals to determine PA operating
conditions and, in response, varies certain control signals to correct
output power, turn on cooling fans, etc. The sense and detect circuits
are described in the following paragraphs.

IPA and DPA current sense circuitry (comprised of two differential
amplifiers and two sensing resistors) meters the current being drawn
by the IPA and the DPA and outputs two dc signals directly proportional
to the IPA and DPA currents. Circuit operation is described in the
the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage
directly proportional to the current through the resistor. The dc voltage
Current Sensing Circuitry (100/110W)

IPA current sense circuitry (comprised of a differential amplifier and a
sensing resistor) meters the current being drawn by the IPA and
outputs a dc signal directly proportional to the IPA current. Circuit
operation is described in the following paragraph.
The differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing
resistor and outputs a dc voltage directly proportional to the IPA
current. The dc voltage (IPA_I) is fed to the Exciter Module (via an
analog multiplexer and filtering circuitry) where it is used in calculating
the current being drawn by the IPA.

the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage
directly proportional to the current through the resistor. The dc voltages
multiplexer and filtering circuitry) where it is used in calculating the
current being drawn by the FPA (side A or side B).
4 68P81088E44-B
9/1/00

(Continued)
which monitors the signal and reduces the PA output power [by
reducing the dc power control voltage (V_CONT)] if the PA temperature
exceeds set limits.

the rf outputs of the IPA (15W), DPA (25W), and FPA (100/110W) stages.
These dc signals (IPA_VF, DPA_VF, and FPA_VF, used for diagnostic
purposes only) are fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer
and filter circuitry.

The Harmonic Filter/Coupler provides a dc voltage approximately
proportional to the reflected power at the output of the stage. This dc
signal (TX_VR) is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer
and filter circuitry. The signal indicates the amount of potentially
harmful reflected power at the PA output. If the reflected power exceeds
a set limit, the Exciter Module will shut down the PA.

A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately
proportional to the V_OMNI control voltage from the Voltage Translator
& Current Limiter circuit. This dc signal (V_OMNI*) is fed to the Exciter
Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry.

proportional to the +14 V dc input voltage from the station Power
Supply Module. This dc signal (14.2V_REF*) is fed to the Exciter
Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry.
+28V Detect Circuitry (100/110W Only)

proportional to the +28 V dc input voltage from the station Power
Supply Module. This dc signal (28V_REF*) is fed to the Exciter Module
via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry.
68P81088E44-B
9/1/00
5

(100/110 W Models Only)
ule are thermostatically con pins in the PA chassis which mate with the power connector on the
trolled and may come on at any slide-in fan module. The fans are turned on only when the temperature
in the PA exceeds a set limit. It is normal for the fans to cycle on and
Keep fingers clear of fan blades.

ROM
the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuits. This
information includes the band and range in which the PA is designed
to operate (e.g., UHF, 800 MHz, etc.) and the maximum output power
(e.g., 25 W, 110 W, etc.).
6 68P81088E44-B
9/1/00
P/O
P101
32
33
PWR CONTROL
VOLTAGE P/O
P/O
FROM LINE V_CONT
EXCITER FILTER
34
TO RF INPUT/OUTPUT
ON BRACKET
CONNECTOR BRACKET
V_OMNI V_OMNI
CIRCULATOR
N-TYPE
J4100 CONNECTOR
MODULE
+14V
TX_POWER_VRFL
IPA +14V
TX_POWER_VFWD
DPA 50 OHM
LOAD
P/O
P101/P102 BUFFER
+14V IPA/DPA TX_VR

CURRENT IPA DPA
+14V DETECT DETECT
SENSE P/O
TX_VF
BUFFER
RESISTOR ROM" P/O

MULTIPLEXER
DPA DETECT DPA_V

F

P/O MULTIPLEXER
LINE OUTPUTS
BUFFER FILTER
DIVIDER
OMNI_VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE V_OMNI*
DIVIDER
DPA_I
IPA_I P/O
ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
THERMISTOR
PA TEMP
T
BUFFER
Figure 2. TLE2731A/TLE2732A 25W UHF Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81088E44-B 7
P/O
P101
32
33 COAXIAL CABLE
FROM
34
35
CIRCULATOR
N-TYPE
CONNECTOR
HARMONIC
FILTER/
COUPLER TRANSMIT RF
V_OMNI 100/110W MAX OUTPUT
J4100
+13 DBM INTERMEDIATE 0 TO 15 W FINAL 150W MAX
MODULATED RF POWER POWER 50 OHM
TX_POWER_VFWD
TX_POWER_VRFL
FROM AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER LOAD
EXCITER (IPA) (FPA)
MODULE
+14V
SIDE B 28V
SIDE A 28V
P/O IPA BUFFER
P101/P102 TX_VR
+28V
+28V P/O
P101/P102
TX_VF
FPA
DETECT BUFFER
P/O +28V CIRCUITRY
P101/P102
IPA FPA RESISTOR ROM"
MULTIPLEXER
BUFFER
+14V 14.2V_REF*
VOLTAGE
DIVIDER
MULTIPLEXER
LINE TO
BUFFER CIRCUITRY
OMNI_VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE V_OMNI*
DIVIDER
FPA_I1_A
FPA_I1_B
P/O
IPA_I ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
DIVIDER
THERMISTOR
BUFFER PA TEMP
T
P/O
P101
FAN ON
48 STATUS P/O
MODULE CIRCUITRY
CASTING
FAN POWER FAN POWER

MATES WITH
DUAL FAN
ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
Figure 3. TTE2061A-63A 110W UHF and TTE2064A 100W UHF

Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram
8 68P81088E44-B 9/1/00
MODELS: TLF1940A (20W, 850-870 MHz)
TLF1930A (100W, 850-870 MHz
TLF1800A (100W, 935-941 MHz)
1 DESCRIPTION
The Models TLF1940A/TLF1930A 800 MHz and TLF1800A 900 MHz Power Amplifier Modules are described in this
section. A general description, identification of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, functional block diagrams,
and functional theory of operation are provided. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel
a functional understanding of the module, allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. (Refer
also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for
all modules in the station.)
General Description
The Power Amplifier Module (PA) accepts a low-level modulated rf sig
nal from the Exciter Module and amplifies the signal for transmission
via the site transmit antenna. The output power is continually moni
tored and regulated by a feedback and control loop, with a power out
put control voltage being generated by the transmitter control circuitry
located in the Exciter Module.
The PA Modules described in this section are very similar in design and
function, with the major differences being the output power capabilities
and operating frequency. Unless otherwise noted, the information pro
vided in this section applies to all four models.
Driver Power Amplifier (DPA) provides amplification (35W
maximum) of the IPA output
Final Power Amplifier (FPA) contained in 100W PA only, pro
vides final amplification of the IPA output; provides an output of
160W maximum

Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz Stations Functional Manuals
RF INPUT
FROM
EXCITER MODULE
POWER AMPLIFIER
MODULE
FRONT PANEL
RF OUTPUT
FRONT VIEW
COOLING
FANS
HEAT SINK
RF
OUTPUT
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

SIDE VIEW
Figure 1. Power Amplifier Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs (100W Model Shown)
2 68P81091E91-B
9/1/00
TLF1930A/TLF1940A/TLF1800A Power Amplifier Modules
in Figure 2 (TLF1940A, 20 W) and Figure 3 (TLF1800A and TLF1930A, 100 W). As mentioned previously, the four
PA modules are similar in design and function. The following theory of operation applies to all four modules except
where noted.
RF Signal Path
A low-level modulated rf signal (approximately +13 dBm) from the Ex
citer module is input to the PA module via a coax cable. The signal is
input to the IPA and amplified to approximately 0 to 10W [depending
On the 20W model, the IPA output is fed to a DPA which provides final
amplification. On the 100W model, the IPA output is fed to a DPA and
then to an FPA which provides final amplification. The output of the DPA
(35W maximum) or FPA (160W maximum) is fed to a circulator, which
passes the transmit signal to the harmonic filter/coupler, while routing
all reflected power to a 50 load.
The output of the circulator is fed to the harmonic filter/coupler. This cir
cuit provides highly selective bandpass filtering and couples the signal
to an N-type connector mounted to the module casting. A coax cable
routes the signal to an N-type connector mounted on an rf input/out
put connector bracket located on the rear of the station.

output power. The Harmonic Filter/Coupler generates a dc voltage pro
portional to the PA Module output power. This voltage (TX_VF) is fed to
the TX Power Control Circuitry in the Exciter Module. The TX_VF voltage
is compared to reference voltages to generate a dc power control volt
age (V_CONT).
Note that V_OMNI does not control the output The dc power control voltage (V_CONT) is output from the Exciter Mod
level of the DPA directly but serves as on/off ule and fed through filtering circuitry in the PA to a voltage translation
control for the DPA stage. and current limiting circuit. The output of this circuitry is V_OMNI, a dc
voltage which controls the output power of the IPA.
is established. The feedback and control loop (TX_VF fed back to Excit
er Module resulting in V_CONT to control IPA output) continually moni
tors and maintains the proper output power from the PA.
68P81091E91-B
9/1/00
3

Introduction
microprocessor uses these signals to determine PA operating condi
tions and, in response, varies certain control signals to correct output
power, turn on cooling fans, etc. The sense and detect circuits are de

ing paragraph.

ing paragraph.
rectly proportional to the current through the resistor. The dc voltages
rent being drawn by the FPA (side A or side B).
4 68P81091E91-B
9/1/00
TLF1930A/TLF1940A/TLF1800A Power Amplifier Modules

(Continued)
which monitors the signal and reduces the PA output power [by reduc
ing the dc power control voltage (V_CONT)] if the PA temperature ex
ceeds set limits.

the rf outputs of the IPA, DPA, and FPA (100W only) stages. These dc
signals (IPA_VF, DPA_VF, and FPA_VF, used for diagnostic purposes
only) are fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter
circuitry.

The Harmonic Filter/Coupler provides a dc voltage approximately pro
portional to the reflected power at the output of the stage. This dc signal
(TX_VR) is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter
circuitry. The signal indicates the amount of potentially harmful re
flected power at the PA output. If the reflected power exceeds a set limit,
the Exciter Module will shut down the PA.

tional to the V_OMNI control voltage from the Voltage Translator & Cur
rent Limiter circuit. This dc signal (V_OMNI*) is fed to the Exciter Mod
ule via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry.

ule. This dc signal (14.2V_REF*) is fed to the Exciter Module via an ana
+28V Detect Circuitry (100W Only)

ule. This dc signal (28V_REF*) is fed to the Exciter Module via an ana
68P81091E91-B
9/1/00
5

(100 W Models Only)
ule are thermostatically con pins in the PA chassis which mate with the power connector on the sli
trolled and may come on at any de-in fan module. The fans are turned on only when the temperature
in the PA exceeds a set limit. It is normal for the fans to cycle on and
Keep fingers clear of fan blades.

ROM
the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuits. This in
formation includes the band and range in which the PA is designed to
operate (e.g., VHF-Range 1, UHF, 900 MHz, etc.) and the maximum
output power (e.g., 25 W, 125 W, etc.).
6 68P81091E91-B
9/1/00
TLF1930A/TLF1940A/TLF1880A/TLF1800APower Amplifier Modules
P/O
P101
32
33
PWR CONTROL
VOLTAGE P/O
P/O
FROM LINE V_CONT
EXCITER FILTER
34
TO RF INPUT/OUTPUT
ON BRACKET
CONNECTOR BRACKET
V_OMNI V_OMNI
CIRCULATOR
N-TYPE
J4100 CONNECTOR
MODULE
+14V
TX_POWER_VRFL
IPA +14V
TX_POWER_VFWD
DPA 50 OHM
LOAD
P/O
P101/P102 BUFFER
+14V IPA/DPA TX_VR

CURRENT IPA DPA
+14V DETECT DETECT
SENSE P/O
TX_VF
BUFFER
RESISTOR ROM" P/O

MULTIPLEXER
DPA DETECT DPA_V

F

P/O MULTIPLEXER
LINE OUTPUTS
BUFFER FILTER
DIVIDER
OMNI_VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE V_OMNI*
DIVIDER
DPA_I
IPA_I P/O
ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
THERMISTOR
PA TEMP
T
BUFFER
Figure 2. TLF1940A (800 MHz) 20W Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81091E91-B 7
P/O
P101
32
33 COAXIAL CABLE
FROM
34
35
CIRCULATOR
N-TYPE
CONNECTOR
HARMONIC 125W MAX
FILTER/
COUPLER TRANSMIT RF
V_OMNI OUTPUT
J4100
+13 DBM INTERMEDIATE 0 TO 10 W DRIVER 35W MAX FINAL 160W MAX
MODULATED RF POWER POWER POWER 50 OHM
TX_POWER_VFWD
TX_POWER_VRFL
FROM AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER LOAD
EXCITER (IPA) (DPA) (FPA)
MODULE
+14V
SIDE B 28V
SIDE A 28V
+14V DPA BUFFER
P/O IPA DPA
P101/P102 DETECT TX_VR
CIRCUITRY
+28V
+28V FPA P/O
DETECT P101/P102
CIRCUITRY TX_VF
P/O +28V BUFFER

P101/P102
IPA/DPA FPA RESISTOR ROM"
MULTIPLEXER
BUFFER
+14V 14.2V_REF*
VOLTAGE
DIVIDER
DPA DETECT DPA_VF
MULTIPLEXER
BUFFER TO
LINE
OMNI_VOLTAGE BUFFER CIRCUITRY
VOLTAGE V_OMNI*
DIVIDER
FPA_I1_A
FPA_I1_B
DPA_I
P/O
IPA_I ANALOG
MULTIPLEXER
DIVIDER
THERMISTOR
BUFFER PA TEMP
T
P/O
P101
FAN ON
48 STATUS P/O
MODULE CIRCUITRY
CASTING
FAN POWER FAN POWER

MATES WITH
DUAL FAN
ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
Figure 3. TLF1930A (800 MHz) and TLF1800A (900 MHz) 100W Power Amplifier Module
Functional Block Diagram
8 68P81091E91-B 9/1/00
MODELS CLN6960A
CLN6961A
1 DESCRIPTION
The Models CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Modules (SCM) are described in this section. A general
description, identification of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional
the station.)
General Description
The SCM serves as the main controller for the station. The SCM board
contains a 68EN360 microprocessor, a 56002 Digital Signal Processor,
and support circuitry which combine to provide signal processing and
operational control over the other station modules. The SCM also con
tains the station operating software (stored in FLASH memory) and
codeplug which define the personality of the station, including system
capabilities (ASTRO, SECURENET, IntelliRepeater, etc.) and operating
parameters such as output power and operating frequency.
The CLN6961A provides conventional operation along with MRTI and
6809 trunking capabilities. The CLN6960A is a full-featured model and
is required for use in IntelliRepeater applications. Specific differences
between the two models are shown throughout the functional block
diagram (Figure 2).

Printed in U.S.A.
The SCM contains the following circuitry:
Host Microprocessor 68EN360 P which comprises the
central controller of the SCM and station
Non-Volatile Memory consists of a FLASH SIMM module
that contains the station operating software and data, and an
EEPROM that contains the station codeplug data
DRAM Memory Dynamic RAM into which station software is
downloaded and executed
External Line Interface Circuitry provides interface between
the SCM and external devices such as IntelliRepeater DLAN
ports, RSS port, an Ethernet port, and miscellaneous backplane
connectors
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) and DSP ASIC Circuitry
performs high-speed processing of audio and signaling data
signals
Station Reference Circuitry generates the 2.1 MHz refer
ence signal used throughout the station
HDLC Bus Control Circuitry provides bus control to allow
Host Microprocessor communications port SCC1 to communi
cate with the Wireline Interface Board and other optional mod
ules via the HDLC interprocessor communications bus
Audio Interface Circuitry routes the various audio input sig
nals (such as microphone, wireline, and receiver audio) to out
put devices (such as external speaker, built-in local speaker,
and exciter modulation inputs)
Input / Output Ports Circuitry two 32-line output buses al
low miscellaneous control signals to be sent to various circuits
throughout the station; two 32-line input buses allow miscella
neous inputs to be received from throughout the station
Front Panel LEDs and Switches general purpose input/out
put ports control eight status LEDs and accept inputs from four
momentary switches, all located on the SCM front panel
Supply Voltages Circuitry contains filtering and regulator
circuitry which accepts +14.2 V and +5 V from backplane and
generates the operating voltages required by the SCM circuitry
2 68P81094E76-A
9/1/00
9/1/00
2
DRAM
FLASH MEMORY
68P81094E76-A
MEMORY SIMM
SIMM
LED INDICATORS
VOLUME UP
PUSHBUT TON
VOLUME DOWN
PUSHBUT TON
SQUELCH SELECT
PUSHBUT TON
INTERCOM
PUSHBUT TON
EIA232
RSS PORT
CONNECTOR
EXTERNAL SPEAKER
CONNECTOR
(RJ11)
HANDSET/MICROPHONE
CONNECTOR
(RJ11)
CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 1 shows the SCM controls, indicators, and all input and output external connections.
EXTERNAL 5/10 MHZ INPUT

CONNECTOR
CARD EDGE
Figure 1. Station Control Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs (CLN6960A shown)
CONNECTORS
(MATE WITH BACKPLANE)
3
CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Modules
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the SCM circuitry at a functional level. The information
order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of
the SCM.
Host Microprocessor
Overview
The Host Microprocessor (P) serves as the main controller for the
SCM (and station). The P, an MC68EN360 running at a clock speed
of 25 MHz, controls the operation of the station as determined by the
station software (contained in a FLASH SIMM module) and the station
codeplug (EEPROM).
Communications Buses
The Host P provides six general-purpose serial communications
buses, as follows:
SCC1 Used as Ethernet port for highspeed communications,
either to connect to the Ethernet local network of an IntelliRe
peater trunking site or to allow station software to be down
loaded from a local PC into the FLASH memory
SCC2 Used as communications port to allow the station to
connect into the local network of an IntelliRepeater trunking site;
external connections are provided by a 9-pin D-type connec
tor (#19) located on backplane
SCC3 Used as the Interprocessor Communications Bus
(HDLC protocol) to allow the Host P to communicate with the
Wireline Interface Board and other optional modules
SCC4 Used as RS-232 port for connections to external
equipment, such as a modem
SMC1 Used as RS-232 port for RSS communications (9pin
Dtype connector #20 on backplane)
Dtype connector located on SCM front panel)
Address and Data Buses
The P is equipped with a 28-line address bus used to access the
non-volatile memory, DRAM memory, and provide control (via
memory mapping) for other circuitry in the SCM. A 32-line data bus
(buffered for the non-volatile memory) is used to transfer data to/from
the SCM memory, as well as other SCM circuitry.
SPI Bus
The Host P also controls the SPI bus, a general-purpose communi
cations bus that allows the Host P to communicate with other modules
in the station.
(continued)
4 68P81094E76-A
9/1/00
Host Microprocessor
(Continued)
DRAM Controller
The Host P provides signals necessary to access and refresh the
DRAM memory.
25 MHz Clock Circuitry

A crystal-controlled 25 MHz clock circuit and buffer provide the
25 MHz clock signal to the Host P.
Non-Volatile Memory
Station Software FLASH Memory
The station software resides in a FLASH SIMM module (1M x 32 for
CLN6960A, 512k x 32 for CLN6961A). The FLASH SIMM is accessed
by the Host P via the 28-line Host Buffered Address Bus and the
32-line Host Buffered Data Bus.
Codeplug EEPROM
The data which determines the station personality resides in an 8K x 8
codeplug EEPROM. Stations are shipped from the factory with generic
default data programmed into the codeplug EEPROM. Field program
ming is performed during installation using the Radio Service Software
(RSS) program to enter additional customer-specific data, such as
site output power, time-out timer settings, etc.
DRAM Memory
Each SCM contains a DRAM SIMM into which the station software code
is downloaded and run. The DRAM also provides short-term storage
Note: for data generated/required during normal operation. Read and write
Model CLN6961A contains a 512k x 32 operations are performed using the Host Buffered Address and Host
DRAM SIMM. Model CLN6960A contains Buffered Data buses.
a 2M x 32 DRAM SIMM (for use in
IntelliRepeater applications). The DRAM memory locations are sequentially refreshed by the column
and row signals from the Host P.
68P81094E76-A
9/1/00
5
External Line Interface

Circuitry
IntelliRepeater DLAN Network Port
A DLAN port is provided on the station backplane to allow the station
to connect into the local network of an IntelliRepeater trunking site. This
DLAN port is provided by Host P serial communication bus SCC2.
SCC2 communicates with an RS-485 bus transceiver, which provides
DLAN+ and DLAN- signals. These signals are connected to a 9-pin
D-type connector (#19) located on the station backplane, which typi
cally mates with a PhoneNET adapter module connected into the
IntelliRepeater local network.
Ethernet Port
An Ethernet port is provided via a BNC connector on the station back
plane which allows the station to connect into the Ethernet local net
work of an IntelliRepeater trunking site. The Ethernet port may also be
used to allow station software to be downloaded from a local PC into
the FLASH SIMM module. This Ethernet port is provided by Host P se
rial communication bus SCC1.
General Purpose RS232 Serial Port

A general purpose RS-232 communications port is provided by Host
P serial communication bus SCC4. This port is available at a DB25
connector (#15) located on the station backplane, and may be used
to connect external equipment (e.g., an external modem).
RSS Port (Backplane)

A 9-pin D-type connector (#20) is provided on the station backplane
to allow service personnel to connect a PC loaded with the Radio Ser
vice Software (RSS) and perform programming and maintenance
tasks. The RSS port may also be used to allow station software to be
downloaded from a local PC into the FLASH SIMM module. This RSS
port is provided by Host P serial communication bus SMC1 which
communicates with the RSS terminal via EIA-232 Bus Receivers/Driv
ers.
RSS Port (Front Panel)

A 9-pin D-type connector is provided on the SCM front panel to allow
service personnel to connect a PC loaded with the Radio Service Soft
ware (RSS) and perform programming and maintenance tasks. The
RSS port may also be used to allow station software to be downloaded
from a local PC into the FLASH SIMM module. This RSS port is provided
by Host P serial communication bus SMC2 which communicates with
the RSS terminal via EIA-232 Bus Receivers/Drivers.
6 68P81094E76-A
9/1/00
Digital Signal Processor (DSP)

and DSP ASIC Circuitry
General
All station transmit and receive audio/data is processed by the DSP
and related circuitry. This circuitry includes the DSP IC, the DSP ASIC,
and the DSP ASIC Interface Circuitry. All audio signals input to or output
from the DSP are in digitized format.
Inputs to the DSP circuitry are:
Digitized receive signals from the Receiver Module
Audio from handset or microphone connected to appropriate SCM
front panel connector; signal is digitized by CODEC IC (p/o Audio In
terface Circuitry) before being sent to DSP via Audio Interface Bus
Digitized voice audio/data from Wireline Interface Board and
other optional modules via TDM bus
ASTRO modem data from Wireline Interface Board via HDLC bus
SECURENET modem data from Wireline Interface Board via
HDLC bus
6809/MRTI transmit audio
Outputs from the DSP circuitry are:
Digitized voice audio/data from DSP to Wireline Interface Board
and other optional modules via TDM bus
Digitized voice audio from DSP to external speaker, built-in
speaker, or handset earpiece via Audio Interface Bus and Audio
Interface Circuitry
Digitized voice audio/data from DSP to Exciter Module (modulation
signals) via Audio Interface Bus and Audio Interface Circuitry
The DSP, a 56002 operating at an internal clock speed of 60 MHz, ac
cepts and transmits digitized audio to/from the various modules in the
station. The DSP provides address and data buses to receive/transmit
digitized audio (via the DSP ASIC) and to access the DSP program and
signal processing algorithms contained in three 32K x 8 SRAM ICs.
Three additional 32K x 8 SRAM ICs are provided for data storage.
DSP ASIC
The DSP ASIC operates under control of the DSP to provide a number
of functions, as follows:
Interfaces with the DSP via the DSP address and data buses
Accepts 16.8 MHz signal from Station Reference Circuitry and
outputs a 2.1 MHz reference signal used throughout the station
Provides interfaces for the HDLC bus, TDM bus, and serial bus
used to communicate with the Receiver Module,
Accepts digitized data from Receiver Module via DSP ASIC Inter
face Circuitry
Provides interfaces for several A/D and D/A converters
68P81094E76-A
9/1/00
7
Station Reference Circuitry

The Station Reference Circuitry consists of a phase-locked loop com
prised of a high-stability VCO and a PLL IC. The output of the VCO is
a 16.8 MHz signal which is fed to the DSP ASIC. The ASIC divides the
signal by 8 and outputs a 2.1 MHz signal which is separated and buff
ered by a splitter and output to the Exciter Module and Receiver Module
as 2.1 MHz REF.
The Station Reference Circuitry may operate in one of three modes:
Normal Mode In this mode, the control voltage is turned off
(via control voltage enable switch) and the high-stability VCO
operates in an open loop mode; stability of the VCO in this mode
Note: is 1 PPM per year.
Two BNC connectors (one 50 input lo
cated on SCM front panel, one high im Manual Netting Mode Periodically, an external 5/10 MHz
pedance input located on the station source is required to fine tune, or net", the 16.8 MHz reference
backplane) are provided to allow an exter signal. In this mode, the PLL compares the 5/10 MHz reference
nal 5/10 MHz source to be input to the and a sample of the 16.8 MHz VCO output and generates up/
OSCin input to the PLL to perform frequen down pulses. The Host P reads the pulses (via SPI bus) and
cy netting. Refer to the Maintenance sec sends correction signals (via SPI bus) to the VCO to adjust the
tion in this manual for recommended inter output frequency to 16.8 Mhz 0.3 ppm.
vals and procedures for netting the station
reference. High-Stability Mode For some systems (e.g., Simulcast
systems), the free-running stability of the VCO is unacceptable
for optimum system performance. Therefore, an external
5/10 MHz source is connected permanently to one of the BNC
connectors. In this mode, the PLL compares the 5/10 MHz refer
ence and a sample of the 16.8 MHz VCO output and generates
a dc correction voltage. The control voltage enable switch is
closed, allowing the control voltage from the PLL to adjust the
high-stability VCO frequency to 16.8 Mhz 0.3 ppm. The VCO
operates in this closed loop mode and is continually being fre
quency controlled by the control voltage from the PLL.
HDLC Bus Control Circuitry

The HDLC Bus Control Circuitry provides high-impedance buffering
and data routing for the Interprocessor Communications Bus (a serial
data bus implementing HDLC protocol). This bus allows the Host P to
communicate with the microprocessor located on the Wireline Inter
face Board and other optional modules via an interprocessor commu
nications bus.
8 68P81094E76-A
9/1/00
Audio Interface Circuitry

General
The Audio Interface Circuitry interfaces external analog audio inputs
and outputs with the DSP circuitry.
External Audio Sources

A multiplexer, under control of the Host P, is used to select one of eight
possible external audio input sources (four for diagnostic loopback sig
nals, two for future use, one for 6809/MRTI transmit audio, and one for
handset or microphone audio). The selected audio source signal is
converted to a digital signal by the A/D portion of the CODEC IC and
sent to the DSP ASIC via the Audio Interface Bus. The DSP circuitry pro
cesses the signal and routes it to the desired destination.
External Audio Destinations

Digitized audio from the DSP circuitry is input to the D/A portion of the
CODEC IC and is output to one of four external devices:
External Speaker connects to RJ-11 jack ( ) located on
SCM front panel
Handset Earpiece/Microphone connects to RJ-11 jack ( )
located on SCM front panel
Local Built-In Speaker internal speaker and W audio am
plifier; may be switched on/off and volume controlled by using
volume up ( ) and down ( ) buttons on SCM front panel
J14 on Station Backplane 6809/MRTI receive audio output to
external MRTI Module
Exciter Modulation Signals

Digitized audio/data intended to be transmitted from the station is out
put from the DSP circuitry to a D/A converter via the TX/Voice Audio sig
nal (p/o the Serial Synchronous Interface bus, connected between the
DSP and the DSP ASIC). The digitized signal is converted to analog,
level shifted and amplified, and fed to a 0-6 kHz filter. The output of the
filter is then fed to one of the inputs of a multiplexer. The output of the
multiplexer is fed to two individual digitally controlled potentiometers
(each of which is adjusted by the Host P via the SPI Bus) and output
to the Exciter Module as modulation signals VCO MOD AUDIO and REF
MOD AUDIO.
68P81094E76-A
9/1/00
9
Input/Output Ports
Input Ports
Two general-purpose 32-line input ports are provided to allow vari
ous input signals from the SCM and station circuitry to be accepted and
sent to the Host P. The two ports (I/O Port P0 In and I/O Port P1 In) are
each comprised of 32 lines which come from circuitry in the SCM as
well as other modules in the station via the backplane. The buses are
input to buffers which make the data available to the Host P via the
Host Buffered Data Bus. Typical inputs include the pushbutton
switches located on the SCM front panel and the MIC PTT signal from
the handset/microphone.
Output Ports
Two general-purpose 32-line output ports are provided to allow vari
ous control signals from the Host P to be output to the SCM and sta
tion circuitry via the backplane. The two ports (I/O Port P0 Out and I/O
Port P1 Out) are each comprised of 32 lines which come from the Host
Buffered Data Bus via latches. Typical output control signals include
the control lines for the eight LEDs located on the SCM front panel and
the local speaker enable signal.
6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry

6809 Trunking Interface
TX DATA from the 6809 Trunking Controller is input to the station via J14
on the station backplane. The signal is routed thru nominal filtering on
the 6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry and fed to the Audio Interface Circuit
ry. The T DATA signal is then waveshaped/filtered and fed to an A/D
converter, which outputs a digital signal to the DSP via the Audio Inter
face Bus.
6809 RX AUDIO is output from the DSP to the Local Audio Circuitry via
the Audio Interface Bus. The signal is amplified, filtered, buffered, and
output thru nominal filtering on the 6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry to the
6809 Trunking Controller via J14 on the station backplane.
MRTI Interface
MRTI AUDIO from an external MRTI module is input to the station via
J14 on the station backplane. The signal is routed thru the 6809/MRTI
Interface Circuitry and fed to one input of an 8-to-1 multiplexer. If se
lected, the MRTI TX AUDIO signal is converted to a digital signal by the
A/D portion of the CODEC IC and sent to the DSP ASIC via the Audio
Interface Bus.
MRTI RX AUDIO is output from the DSP to the Local Audio Circuitry via
output thru the 6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry to the external MRTI Mod
ule via J14 on the station backplane.
10 68P81094E76-A
9/1/00
Front Panel LEDs and

Switches
Note: LEDs
Refer to the Troubleshooting section of
this manual for complete details on the in Eight status LEDs are provided on the SCM front panel to provide visual
terpretation of the LEDs. indications of various station operating conditions.The LEDs are con
trolled by eight lines from I/O Port P0 Out.
Note: Switches
Refer to the Operation section of this man
Four momentary contact pushbutton switches are provided on the
ual for complete details on the use of the
pushbutton switches.
SCM front panel to allow various station functions to be selected. De
pressing a pushbutton causes a high to be sent to the Host P via
I/O Port P0 In.
Supply Voltages Circuitry

The SCM contains on-board regulator and filtering circuitry to gener
ate the various operating voltages required by the SCM circuitry.
+14.2 V and +5V from the backplane are used as sources for the fol
lowing supply voltage circuits:
+10V Regulator Circuitry provides +10 V dc and a +5 V refer
ence voltage ( of +10V) for the Audio Interface Circuitry in the
SCM.
VCCA Supply Circuitry provides VCCA (+5V) and a +2.5 V
reference voltage ( of VCCA) for the Audio Interface Circuitry in
the SCM.
Filtering Circuitry filters the +14.2 V and +5V from the back
plane to provide A+ and VCC, respectively, for the SCM digital cir
cuitry.
68P81094E76-A
9/1/00
11
12 68P81094E76-A
9/1/00
CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Module
9/1/00 68P81094E76-A 13
HOST MICROPROCESSOR / HOST SUPPORT CIRCUITRY ETHERNET CIRCUITRY

ETHERNET
CONNECTOR #22
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS ON BACKPLANE
ETHERNET
SCC1 CONVERTER
7 CIRCUITRY
INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATIONS BUS (HDLC)
SCC3
6 6
A
EXTERNAL LINE INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
CONNECTOR #19
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS DLAN +
RS-485 DLAN
SCC2 BUS (DB9 CONNECTOR
TRANSCEIVER ON BACKPLANE)
3 3
DLAN -
CONNECTOR #15
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS
FOR FUTURE USE
EIA-232
SCC4 (DB25 CONNECTOR
BUS
7 7 12 ON BACKPLANE)
RECEIVERS/
HANDSHAKING SIGNALS DRIVERS
(P/O I/O PORTS P1 OUT & P0 IN)
5
CONNECTOR #20
RS-232
EIA-232 (DB9 CONNECTOR
SMC1
BUS 7 ON BACKPLANE)
2 2 RECEIVERS/
HOST HANDSHAKING SIGNALS DRIVERS
MICROPROCESSOR 5
SCM FRONT PANEL
EIA-232 RSS PORT
SMC2 BUS (DB9 CONNECTOR
2 2 7 ON SCM FRONT PANEL)
RECEIVERS/
25 MHZ 5
CLOCK TIMING
CIRCUITRY
HOST ADDRESS BUS HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS
HOST
BUFFERS BUFFERED
ADDRESS
BUS
HOST ADDRESS BUS
ADDRESS HOST
ADDRESS
BUS
RESET
RESET

POWER-UP RESET CONTROLLER RESET
CIRCUITRY HOST DATA BUS

MANUAL RESET
HOST

DATA DATA
BUS

HOST DATA BUS HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS

HOST

BUFFERS BUFFERED
DATA
BUS
SPI BUS
SPI BUS
TO/FROM
STATION MODULES SPI BUS SPI BUS
SPI BUS BUFFERS
3
B
Figure 2. CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Module Functional Block Diagram (1 of 5)
14 68P81094E76-A 9/1/00
A 6 6
C
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY

HOST DATA BUS
FROM

HOST
MICROPROCESSOR

DRAM MEMORY

8K x 8
EEPROM
CODEPLUG

FLASH HOST ADDRESS BUS
SIMM FROM DRAM ADDRESS
HOST

(SEE NOTE MULTIPLEXERS
MICROPROCESSOR
BELOW)

DRAM
SIMM

(SEE NOTE
BELOW)

CAS RAS

(SEE NOTE

BELOW)

(SEE NOTE
HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS BELOW)
FROM

HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
28 CAS SELECT LINES

FROM
NOTE ON SOME EARLY MODELS, SOCKETED HOST

EPROMS ARE PROVIDED TO CONTAIN STATION MICROPROCESSOR
SOFTWARE. LATER MODELS ELIMINATE THE

EPROMS AND SOCKETS AND PROVIDE A FLASH
SIMM TO CONTAIN THE STATION SOFTWARE PROGRAM ENABLE
FROM

HOST MICROPROCESSOR

RAS SELECT LINES
FROM

HOST
HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS MICROPROCESSOR

FROM
HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS
B D
Figure 2.CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Module Functional Block Diagram (2 of 5)
9/1/00 68P81094E76-A 15
HDLC BUS CONTROL CIRCUITRY
C 6
HDLC BUS
CONTROL
CIRCUITRY 3 3
HDLC BUS
TO/FROM
WIRELINE INTERFACE
MODULE
3 DSP ASIC INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
RX1 DATA FROM
DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL
CONVERTER/BUFFER RECEIVER MODULE #1
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) / DSP ASIC VIA BACKPLANE
DSP
ODC ODC FROM
ASIC
BUFFER RECEIVER MODULE #1
VIA BACKPLANE
HDLC SBI SBI TO

3 BUFFER RECEIVER MODULE #1
VIA BACKPLANE
SERIAL SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE BUS
SERIAL BUS SERIAL BUS

6 5 SERIALBUS
SERIAL TO/FROM
BUFFERS
4 RECEIVER
1 4
MODULE #1

ADDRESS ADDRESS
HOST BUFFERED
DATA BUS TDM BUS

TDM BUS TDM BUS
HOST TO/FROM
TDM BUFFERS

PORT WIRELINE
4 4
DSP DATA BUS INTERFACE
MODULE

DATA DATA
FROM

HOST
MICROPROCESSOR AUDIO INTERFACE BUS
HOST ADDRESS BUS PROGRAM

MEMORY
LOCAL AUDIO
DIGITAL INTERFACE

F
SIGNAL 32K X 8 BUS
BUFFERS RAM TX VOICE/DATA
PROCESSOR

(DSP)
16.8 MHZ TO ASIC

16.8 MHZ
IN BACKPLANE

32K X 8 1PPS INPUT
RAM STATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRY
1PPS

1 PPS DRIVER 2.1 MHZ REF
CIRCUITRY TO EXCITER MODULE

2.1 MHZ 2.1 MHZ FROM DSP ASIC
BUFFER/ VIA BACKPLANE
OUT SPLITTER 2.1 MHZ REF

32K X 8 1 PPS
TO RECEIVER MODULE
RAM BACKPLANE DECODER
#1 VIA BACKPLANE

5/10 MHZ (FUTURE)
BUFFER/
INPUT WAVESHAPING
10 MHZ
TIMING

DATA FRONT
AMPLIFIER

MEMORY PANEL 5/10 MHZ REF
CIRCUITRY
5/10 MHZ
OSCin

32K X 8 INPUT
RAM
SPI BUS PHASE

LOCKED
LOOP

3 16.8 MHZ IC
Fin

32K X 8
RAM SPI BUS 16.8 MHZ TO ASIC
HIGH

STABILITY VCO
3 (PENDULUM)

CONTROL VOLTAGE
ENABLE SWITCH

32K X 8 CONTROL VOLTAGE
RAM
FREQUENCY NET ENABLE

(P/O I/O PORT P1 OUT)
D 3 3 E
16 68P81094E76-A 9/1/00
INPUT / OUTPUT PORTS CIRCUITRY

I/O PORT P0 OUT

HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS 32

FROM HOST
MICROPROCESSOR VARIOUS CONTROL LINES

LATCHES TO
SCM & STATION CIRCUITRY

I/O PORT P1 OUT
I/O PORT P0 IN

VARIOUS INPUTS 32
32

FROM SCM & STATION
I/O PORT P1 IN BUFFERS
CIRCUITRY
32
SERIAL ID DATA
FROM
BACKPLANE
AUDIO INTERFACE CIRCUITRY EXTERNAL

SPEAKER
HANDSET/
MICROPHONE CODEC
IC
MULTIPLEXER
MIC AUDIO
MRTI TX AUDIO
FOR FUTURE USE A/D

CONVERTER EXTERNAL SPEAKER
AUDIO
VARIOUS DIAGNOSTIC 3
LOOPBACK SIGNALS
SELECT LINES LEVEL SHIFTER/ HANDSET

(P/O I/O PORT P1 OUT) AMPLIFIER EARPIECE
3 HANDSET
DIGITIZED SIGNAL FROM DSP ASIC D/A SPEAKER AUDIO
CONVERTER
AUDIO INTERFACE BUS DIGITIZED SIGNAL TO DSP ASIC LOCAL SPEAKER

W AUDIO STATION
AUDIO LOCAL
F TX VOICE/DATA
3
LOCAL SPKR ENABLE

AMPLIFIER SPEAKER
1 (P/O I/O PORT P1 OUT)
TX WIDEBAND AUDIO
6809/MRTI INTERFACE CIRCUITRY LEVEL SHIFTER/
(ANALOG SIMULCAST)
MULTIPLEXER
AMPLIFIER
NOT USED DIGITAL
2 D/A LO-PASS FILTER LINE DRIVER/
TRANSIENT MRTI TX AUDIO (0-6 KHZ) POT
MRTI TX AUDIO PROTECTION CONVERTER AMPLIFIER
VCO MOD AUDIO
3 SELECT LINES TO
MRTI RX AUDIO (P/O I/O PORT P1 OUT) EXCITER MODULE
MRTI RX AUDIO 2
LINE DRIVER/
LEVEL SHIFTER/ AMPLIFIER
T DATA WAVESHAPING/ AMPLIFIER BUFFER
TO/FROM TX DATA + A/D
FILTERING CONVERTER REF MOD AUDIO
J14 ON
TO
BACKPLANE TX DATA - D/A LO-PASS FILTER EXCITER MODULE
CONVERTER (0-6 KHZ)
6809 3 6809
RX AUDIO/ RX AUDIO/
DIGITAL
MRTI RX AUDIO MRTI RX AUDIO
POT
6809 RX AUDIO ADJUST
2
SPI BUS SPI BUS
E 2
9/1/00 68P81094E76-A 17
SUPPLY VOLTAGES CIRCUITRY
+5 V FILTER
VCC
(FROM CIRCUITRY (+5V)
BACKPLANE)
FRONT PANEL LEDS AND SWITCHES
LED CONTROL LINES

8 A+
(+14.2 V)
STATION STATION INTCM/ACC D CONTROL RX 1 ACTIVE RX 2 ACTIVE RX FAIL AUX LED

ON FAIL CH
VCC
+14.2 V FILTER +5V VCCA
(FROM CIRCUITRY REGULATOR (ANALOG +5V)
BACKPLANE)
VCC VCC VCC VCC
+2.5V
( VCCA)
PUSHBUTTON
SWITCH SIGNALS
(P/O I/O PORT P0 IN)
VOL UP VOL DOWN CSQ-PL-OFF INTERCOM

/LOCAL PTT /ACCESS DISABLE /SHIFT +10V +10V
REGULATOR
+5V
( OF+10V)
DIGITAL
GROUND
LOGIC GND
(FROM
STATIC
BACKPLANE) GROUND
AUDIO
GROUND
18 68P81094E76-A 9/1/00
MODEL CLN1614A
1 DESCRIPTION
The Model CLN1614A Station Control Module (SCM) is described in this section. A general description, identifica
tion of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of operation are
provided. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the mod
ule, allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. (Refer also to the Maintenance and Trouble
shooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station.)
General Description
The SCM serves as the main controller for the station. Each SCM is
comprised of two circuit boards (Control Board and LED Board), con
tained in a single slidein housing. The two boards are connected via
a multiconductor ribbon cable.
The Control Board contains a 68EN360 microprocessor, a 56002 Digi
tal Signal Processor, and support circuitry which combine to provide
signal processing and operational control over the other station mod
ules. The SCM also contains the station operating software (stored in
FLASH memory) and codeplug which define the personality of the sta
tion, including system capabilities (ASTRO, SECURENET, etc.) and op
erating parameters such as output power and operating frequency.
The CLN1614A SCM provides conventional operation along with MRTI
and 6809 trunking capabilities for use in Quantar and Quantro stations.

All Rights Reserved 68P81096E87-O
Printed in U.S.A.
The SCM is comprised of two circuit boards, connected together via
a multiconductor ribbon cable. These boards contain circuitry as fol
lows:
Control Board (CLN7060A)

Host Microprocessor 68EN360 P which comprises the
central controller of the SCM and station
Non-Volatile Memory consists of a FLASH SIMM module
that contains the station operating software and data, and an
EEPROM that contains the station codeplug data
DRAM Memory Dynamic RAM into which station software is
downloaded and executed
External Line Interface Circuitry provides interface between
the SCM and external devices such as the RSS port, an Ethernet
port, and miscellaneous backplane connectors
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) and DSP ASIC Circuitry
performs highspeed processing of audio and signaling data
signals
Station Reference Circuitry generates the 2.1 MHz refer
ence signal used throughout the station
HDLC Bus Control Circuitry provides bus control to allow
Host Microprocessor communications port SCC1 to communi
cate with the Wireline Interface Board and other optional mod
ules via the HDLC interprocessor communications bus
Audio Interface Circuitry Comprised of a Local Audio ASIC
that routes the various audio input signals (such as microphone,
wireline, and receiver audio) to output devices (such as external
speaker, built-in local speaker, and exciter modulation inputs)
Input / Output Ports Circuitry two multi-line output buses
allow miscellaneous control signals to be sent to various circuits
throughout the station; two multi-line input buses allow miscel
laneous inputs to be received from throughout the station
Supply Voltages Circuitry contains filtering and regulator
circuitry which accepts +14.2 V and +5 V from backplane and
generates the operating voltages required by the SCM circuitry
LED Board (CLN7098A)

Front Panel LEDs and Switches general purpose input/out
put ports control eight status LEDs and accept inputs from four
momentary switches, all located on the SCM front panel
Front Panel Connectors four connectors (RSS Port DB9,
External Speaker RJ11, Handset/Microphone RJ11, and
5/10 MHz External Input BNC) are mounted on the front panel
for interface with external equipment
2 68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
3
4
LED CONTROL FLASH DRAM
2
BOARD BOARD MEMORY MEMORY
SIMM SIMM
LED INDICATORS
VOLUME UP
PUSHBUT TON
VOLUME DOWN
PUSHBUT TON
SQUELCH SELECT
PUSHBUT TON
INTERCOM
PUSHBUT TON
EIA232
RSS PORT
CONNECTOR
EXTERNAL SPEAKER
CONNECTOR
(RJ11)
HANDSET/MICROPHONE
CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONNECTOR
(RJ11)
Figure 1. Station Control Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs (Front View)
EXTERNAL 5/10 MHZ INPUT
CONNECTOR CARD EDGE
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the SCM controls, indicators, and all input and output external connections.
CONNECTORS
68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
CONTROL
BOARD

CONNECTORS
CARD EDGE
NEW PHOTO
RIBBON
CABLE
BOARD
LED
Figure 2. Station Control Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs (Rear View)
68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
5

(CLN7060A Control Board)
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CLN7060A Control Board circuitry at a functional
level. The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed
by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Refer to Figure 3 for a
block diagram of the CLN7060A Control Board.
Host Microprocessor
Overview
The Host Microprocessor (P) serves as the main controller for the
SCM (and station). The P, an MC68EN360 running at a clock speed
of 25 MHz, controls the operation of the station as determined by the
station software (contained in a FLASH SIMM module) and the station
codeplug (EEPROM).
Communications Buses
The Host P provides five general-purpose serial communications
buses, as follows:
SCC1 Used as Ethernet port for highspeed communications,
either to allow station software to be downloaded from a local PC
into the FLASH memory
SCC3 Used as the Interprocessor Communications Bus
(HDLC protocol) to allow the Host P to communicate with the
Wireline Interface Board and other optional modules
SCC4 Used as RS-232 port for connections to external
equipment, such as a modem
Dtype connector #20 on backplane)
Dtype connector located on SCM front panel)
Address and Data Buses
The P is equipped with a 28-line address bus used to access the
non-volatile memory, DRAM memory, and provide control (via
memory mapping) for other circuitry in the SCM. A 32-line data bus
(buffered for the non-volatile memory) is used to transfer data to/from
the SCM memory, as well as other SCM circuitry.
SPI Bus
The Host P also controls the SPI bus, a general-purpose communi
cations bus that allows the Host P to communicate with other modules
in the station.
(continued)
6 68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
Host Microprocessor
(Continued)
DRAM Controller
The Host P provides signals necessary to access and refresh the
DRAM memory.
25 MHz Clock Circuitry

A crystal-controlled 25 MHz clock circuit and buffer provide the
25 MHz clock signal to the Host P.
Non-Volatile Memory
Station Software FLASH Memory
The station software resides in a 512k x 32 FLASH SIMM module. The
FLASH SIMM is accessed by the Host P via the 28-line Host Buffered
Address Bus and the 32-line Host Buffered Data Bus.
Codeplug EEPROM
The data which determines the station personality resides in an 8K x 8
codeplug EEPROM. Stations are shipped from the factory with generic
default data programmed into the codeplug EEPROM. Field program
ming is performed during installation using the Radio Service Software
(RSS) program to enter additional customer-specific data, such as
site output power, time-out timer settings, etc.
DRAM Memory
Each SCM contains a 512k x 32 DRAM SIMM into which the station soft
ware code is downloaded and run. The DRAM also provides short-
term storage for data generated/required during normal operation.
Read and write operations are performed using the Host Buffered Ad
dress and Host Buffered Data buses.
The DRAM memory locations are sequentially refreshed by the column
and row signals from the Host P.
68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
7
External Line Interface

Circuitry
Ethernet Port
An Ethernet port is provided via a BNC connector on the station back
plane which allows the station to connect into the Ethernet local net
work of an IntelliRepeater trunking site. The Ethernet port may also be
used to allow station software to be downloaded from a local PC into
the FLASH SIMM module. This Ethernet port is provided by Host P se
rial communication bus SCC1.
General Purpose RS232 Serial Port

A general purpose RS-232 communications port is provided by Host
P serial communication bus SCC4. This port is available at a DB25
connector (#15) located on the station backplane, and may be used
to connect external equipment (e.g., an external modem).
RSS Port (Backplane)

A 9-pin D-type connector (#20) is provided on the station backplane
to allow service personnel to connect a PC loaded with the Radio Ser
vice Software (RSS) and perform programming and maintenance
tasks. The RSS port may also be used to allow station software to be
downloaded from a local PC into the FLASH SIMM module. This RSS
port is provided by Host P serial communication bus SMC1 which
communicates with the RSS terminal via EIA-232 Bus Receivers/Driv
ers.
RSS Port (Front Panel)

A 9-pin D-type connector is provided on the SCM front panel to allow
service personnel to connect a PC loaded with the Radio Service Soft
ware (RSS) and perform programming and maintenance tasks. The
RSS port may also be used to allow station software to be downloaded
from a local PC into the FLASH SIMM module. This RSS port is provided
by Host P serial communication bus SMC2 which communicates with
the RSS terminal via EIA-232 Bus Receivers/Drivers.
8 68P81096E87-O
9/1/00

and DSP ASIC Circuitry
General
All station transmit and receive audio/data is processed by the DSP
and related circuitry. This circuitry includes the DSP IC, the DSP ASIC,
and the DSP ASIC Interface Circuitry. All audio signals input to or output
from the DSP are in digitized format.
Inputs to the DSP circuitry are:
Digitized receive signals from the Receiver Module
Audio from handset or microphone connected to appropriate SCM
front panel connector; signal is digitized by CODEC IC (p/o Audio In
terface Circuitry) before being sent to DSP via Audio Interface Bus
Digitized voice audio/data from Wireline Interface Board and
other optional modules via TDM bus
ASTRO modem data from Wireline Interface Board via HDLC bus
SECURENET modem data from Wireline Interface Board via
HDLC bus
Outputs from the DSP circuitry are:
Digitized voice audio/data from DSP to Wireline Interface Board
and other optional modules via TDM bus
Digitized voice audio from DSP to external speaker, built-in
speaker, or handset earpiece via Audio Interface Bus and Audio
Interface Circuitry
Digitized voice audio/data from DSP to Exciter Module (modulation
signals) via Audio Interface Bus and Audio Interface Circuitry
The DSP, a 56002 operating at an internal clock speed of 60 MHz, ac
cepts and transmits digitized audio to/from the various modules in the
station. The DSP provides address and data buses to receive/transmit
digitized audio (via the DSP ASIC) and to access the DSP program and
signal processing algorithms contained in three 32K x 8 SRAM ICs.
Three additional 32K x 8 SRAM ICs are provided for data storage.
DSP ASIC
The DSP ASIC operates under control of the DSP to provide a number
of functions, as follows:
Interfaces with the DSP via the DSP address and data buses
Accepts 16.8 MHz signal from Station Reference Circuitry and
outputs a 2.1 MHz reference signal used throughout the station
Provides interfaces for the HDLC bus, TDM bus, and serial bus
used to communicate with the Receiver Module,
Accepts digitized data from Receiver Module via DSP ASIC Inter
face Circuitry
Provides interfaces for several A/D and D/A converters
68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
9
Station Reference Circuitry

The Station Reference Circuitry consists of a phase-locked loop com
prised of a high-stability VCO and a PLL IC. The output of the VCO is
a 16.8 MHz signal which is fed to the DSP ASIC. The ASIC divides the
signal by 8 and outputs a 2.1 MHz signal which is separated and buff
ered by a splitter and output to the Exciter Module and Receiver Module
as 2.1 MHz REF.
The Station Reference Circuitry may operate in one of three modes:
Normal Mode In this mode, the control voltage is turned off
(via control voltage enable switch) and the high-stability VCO
operates in an open loop mode; stability of the VCO in this mode
Note: is 1 PPM per year.
Two BNC connectors (one 50 input lo
cated on SCM front panel, one high im Manual Netting Mode Periodically, an external 5/10 MHz
pedance input located on the station source is required to fine tune, or net", the 16.8 MHz reference
backplane) are provided to allow an exter signal. In this mode, the PLL compares the 5/10 MHz reference
nal 5/10 MHz source to be input to the and a sample of the 16.8 MHz VCO output and generates up/
OSCin input to the PLL to perform frequen down pulses. The Host P reads the pulses (via SPI bus) and
cy netting. Refer to the Maintenance sec sends correction signals (via SPI bus) to the VCO to adjust the
tion in this manual for recommended inter output frequency to 16.8 Mhz 0.3 ppm.
vals and procedures for netting the station
reference. High-Stability Mode For some systems (e.g., Simulcast
systems), the free-running stability of the VCO is unacceptable
for optimum system performance. Therefore, an external
5/10 MHz source is connected permanently to one of the BNC
connectors. In this mode, the PLL compares the 5/10 MHz refer
ence and a sample of the 16.8 MHz VCO output and generates
a dc correction voltage. The control voltage enable switch is
closed, allowing the control voltage from the PLL to adjust the
high-stability VCO frequency to 16.8 Mhz 0.3 ppm. The VCO
operates in this closed loop mode and is continually being fre
quency controlled by the control voltage from the PLL.
HDLC Bus Control Circuitry

The HDLC Bus Control Circuitry provides high-impedance buffering
and data routing for the Interprocessor Communications Bus (a serial
data bus implementing HDLC protocol). This bus allows the Host P to
communicate with the microprocessor located on the Wireline Inter
face Board and other optional modules via an interprocessor commu
nications bus.
10 68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
Audio Interface Circuitry

General
The Audio Interface Circuitry interfaces external analog audio inputs
and outputs with the DSP circuitry. Most of the local audio processing
is performed by a custom Local Audio ASIC.
External Audio Sources

A multiplexer, under control of the Host P, is used to select one of six
possible external audio input sources (four for diagnostic loopback sig
nals, one for 6809/MRTI transmit audio, and one for handset or micro
phone audio). The selected audio source signal is converted to a digital
signal by the A/D portion of the CODEC circuit and sent to the DSP
ASIC via the Audio Interface Bus. The DSP circuitry processes the sig
nal and routes it to the desired destination.
External Audio Destinations

Digitized audio from the DSP circuitry is input to the D/A portion of the
CODEC IC and is output to one of four external devices:
External Speaker connects to RJ-11 jack ( ) located on
SCM front panel
Handset Earpiece/Microphone connects to RJ-11 jack ( )
located on SCM front panel
Local Built-In Speaker internal speaker and W audio am
plifier; may be switched on/off and volume controlled by using
volume up ( ) and down ( ) buttons on SCM front panel
J14 on Station Backplane 6809/MRTI receive audio output to
external MRTI Module
Exciter Modulation Signals

Digitized audio/data intended to be transmitted from the station is out
put from the DSP circuitry to a D/A converter via the TX/Voice Audio sig
nal (p/o the Serial Synchronous Interface bus, connected between the
DSP and the DSP ASIC). The digitized signal is converted to analog,
level shifted and amplified, and fed to a 0-6 kHz filter. The output of the
filter is then fed to one of the inputs of a multiplexer. The output of the
multiplexer is fed to two individual digitally controlled potentiometers
(each of which is adjusted by the Host P via the SPI Bus) and output
to the Exciter Module as modulation signals VCO MOD AUDIO and REF
MOD AUDIO.
68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
11
Input/Output Ports
Input Ports
Two general-purpose multi-line input ports are provided to allow vari
ous input signals from the SCM and station circuitry to be accepted and
sent to the Host P. The two ports (I/O Port P0 In and I/O Port P1 In) are
comprised of 32 and 24 lines, respectively, which come from circuitry
in the SCM as well as other modules in the station via the backplane.
The buses are input to buffers which make the data available to the
Host P via the Host Buffered Data Bus. Typical inputs include the
pushbutton switches located on the SCM front panel and the MIC PTT
signal from the handset/microphone.
Output Ports
Two general-purpose multi-line output ports are provided to allow
various control signals from the Host P to be output to the SCM and
station circuitry via the backplane. The two ports (I/O Port P0 Out and
I/O Port P1 Out) are comprised of 32 and 8 lines, respectively, which
come from the Host Buffered Data Bus via latches. Typical output con
trol signals include the control lines for the eight LEDs located on the
SCM front panel and the local speaker enable signal.
6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry

6809 Trunking Interface
TX DATA from the 6809 Trunking Controller is input to the station via J14
on the station backplane. The signal is routed thru nominal filtering on
the 6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry and fed to the Audio Interface Circuit
ry. The T DATA signal is then waveshaped/filtered and fed to an A/D
converter, which outputs a digital signal to the DSP via the Audio Inter
face Bus.
6809 RX AUDIO is output from the DSP to the Local Audio Circuitry via
output thru nominal filtering on the 6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry to the
6809 Trunking Controller via J14 on the station backplane.
MRTI Interface
MRTI TX AUDIO from an external MRTI module is input to the station
via J14 on the station backplane. The signal is routed thru the
6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry and fed to one input of an 6-to-1 multi
plexer. If selected, the MRTI TX AUDIO signal is converted to a digital
signal by the A/D portion of the CODEC IC and sent to the DSP ASIC
via the Audio Interface Bus.
MRTI RX AUDIO is output from the DSP to the Local Audio Circuitry via
output thru the 6809/MRTI Interface Circuitry to the external MRTI Mod
ule via J14 on the station backplane.
12 68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
Supply Voltages Circuitry

The SCM contains on-board regulator and filtering circuitry to gener
ate the various operating voltages required by the SCM circuitry.
+14.2 V and +5V from the backplane are used as sources for the fol
lowing supply voltage circuits:
VCCA Supply Circuitry provides VCCA (+5V) for the Audio In
terface Circuitry in the SCM.
Filtering Circuitry filters the +14.2 V and +5V from the back
plane to provide A+ and VCC, respectively, for the SCM digital cir
cuitry.
68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
13

(CLN7098A LED Board)
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CLN7098A LED Board circuitry at a functional
block diagram of the CLN7098A LED Board.
Front Panel LEDs and

Switches
Note: LEDs
Refer to the Troubleshooting section of
this manual for complete details on the in Eight status LEDs are provided on the SCM front panel to provide visual
terpretation of the LEDs. indications of various station operating conditions.The LEDs are con
trolled by eight lines from I/O Port P0 Out.
Note: Switches
Refer to the Operation section of this man
Four momentary contact pushbutton switches are provided on the
ual for complete details on the use of the
pushbutton switches.
SCM front panel to allow various station functions to be selected. De
pressing a pushbutton causes a high to be sent to the Host P via
I/O Port P0 In.
Front Panel Connectors

Four connectors are provided on the SCM front panel to interface with
external equipment:
RSS Port DB9 connector used for connection to a PC loaded
with Radio Service Software (RSS) for configuring/servicing the
station
External Speaker Connector RJ11 connector used for con
nection to an external speaker (Model HSN1000)
External Handset/Microphone RJ11 connector used for
connection to an external handset (Model TMN6164) or micro
phone (Model HMN1001)
5/10 MHz Input BNC connector used for connection to an ex
ternal source of 5 or 10 MHz to be used as a station reference
14 68P81096E87-O
9/1/00
9/1/00 68P81096E87-O 15
HOST MICROPROCESSOR / HOST SUPPORT CIRCUITRY ETHERNET CIRCUITRY

ETHERNET
CONNECTOR #22
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS ON BACKPLANE
ETHERNET
SCC1 CONVERTER
7 CIRCUITRY
ISOLATED
ETHERNET
GROUND
SCC3
6 6
A
EXTERNAL LINE INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
CONNECTOR #15
SYNC MULTIPURPOSE RS232
SCC4 EIA-232 (DB25 CONNECTOR
7 7 BUS 12 ON BACKPLANE)
RECEIVERS/
5
CONNECTOR #20
ASYNC RS-232
SMC1 EIA-232 (DB9 CONNECTOR
2 2 BUS 7 ON BACKPLANE)
RECEIVERS/
HANDSHAKING SIGNALS DRIVERS P/O
(P/O I/O PORTS P0 OUT & P0 IN) RIBBON CABLE
5
P1
HOST (LOCATED ON
P14
MICROPROCESSOR LED BOARD)

RSS
RSS PORT
SMC2 EIA-232
(DB9 CONNECTOR
BUS 7
2 2 ON SCM FRONT PANEL)
RECEIVERS/
(P/O I/O PORTS P0 OUT & P0 IN) 5
25 MHZ
CLOCK TIMING
CIRCUITRY
HOST ADDRESS BUS HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS
HOST
BUFFERS BUFFERED
ADDRESS
BUS
HOST ADDRESS BUS
ADDRESS HOST
ADDRESS
BUS
RESET
RESET

POWER-UP RESET CONTROLLER RESET
CIRCUITRY HOST DATA BUS

MANUAL RESET
HOST

DATA DATA
BUS

HOST DATA BUS HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS

HOST

BUFFERS BUFFERED
DATA
BUS
SPI BUS
SPI BUS
TO/FROM
STATION MODULES SPI BUS SPI BUS
SPI BUS BUFFERS
3
B
Figure 3. CLN7060A Station Control Board Functional Block Diagram (1 of 5)
16 68P81096E87-O 9/1/00
A 6 6
C
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY

HOST DATA BUS
FROM

HOST
MICROPROCESSOR

DRAM MEMORY

FLASH
SIMM

8K x 8
EEPROM

CODEPLUG
HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS

DRAM
SIMM

CAS RAS

HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS
FROM

HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
28 CAS SELECT LINES

FROM
HOST

MICROPROCESSOR

PROGRAM ENABLE
FROM

HOST MICROPROCESSOR

RAS SELECT LINES
FROM

HOST
HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS MICROPROCESSOR

FROM
HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
B D
Figure 3.CLN7060A Station Control Board Functional Block Diagram (2 of 5)
9/1/00 68P81096E87-O 17
HDLC BUS CONTROL CIRCUITRY
C 6
HDLC BUS
CONTROL
CIRCUITRY 3 3
HDLC BUS
TO/FROM
WIRELINE INTERFACE
MODULE
4 DSP ASIC INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
RX1 DATA
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL FROM
RX2 DATA RECEIVER MODULEs
CONVERTER/BUFFER
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) / DSP ASIC #1 & #2
VIA BACKPLANE
DSP
ASIC
RX1 ODC ODC FROM
RECEIVER MODULES
RX2 ODC BUFFER #1 & #2
HDLC VIA BACKPLANE
4
SERIAL SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE BUS RX1 SBI SBI FROM

RECEIVER MODULES
RX2 SBI BUFFER #1 & #2
6 5 VIA BACKPLANE
1 RX1 AGC AGCTO

ADDRESS RECEIVER MODULES
HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS RX2 AGC #1 & #2
DATA BUS VIA BACKPLANE

HOST TDM BUS TDM BUS TDM BUS

PORT
TDM BUFFERS TO/FROM
DSP DATA BUS WIRELINE
7 4

INTERFACE
DATA DATA MODULE
TO/FROM

HOST
MICROPROCESSOR AUDIO INTERFACE BUS
PROGRAM

MEMORY
LOCAL AUDIO
HOST ADDRESS BUS DIGITAL INTERFACE

F
SIGNAL 32K X 8 BUS
RAM TX VOICE/DATA
PROCESSOR

(DSP)
16.8 MHZ TO ASIC

16.8 MHZ
IN BACKPLANE

32K X 8 GPS1PPS
RAM INPUT STATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRY
1PPS

1 PPS DRIVER 2.1 MHZ REF
CIRCUITRY TO EXCITER MODULE

2.1 MHZ 2.1 MHZ FROM DSP ASIC
BUFFER/ VIA BACKPLANE
OUT SPLITTER 2.1 MHZ REF

32K X 8 TO RECEIVER MODULE
RAM BACKPLANE #1 VIA BACKPLANE

5/10 MHZ BUFFER/
INPUT WAVESHAPING
10 MHZ
TIMING

DATA
AMPLIFIER

MEMORY 5/10 MHZ REF
CIRCUITRY
OSCin

32K X 8
RAM
SPI BUS PHASE

LOCKED
P/O LOOP

RIBBON CABLE 3 16.8 MHZ IC
Fin

32K X 8 P1
RAM (LOCATED ON P14 SPI BUS HIGH 16.8 MHZ TO ASIC
LED BOARD)

STABILITY VCO
3 (PENDULUM)
FRONT

CONTROL VOLTAGE
PANEL
ENABLE SWITCH
5/10 MHZ

32K X 8 CONTROL VOLTAGE
INPUT
RAM
FREQUENCY NET ENABLE

D 3 3 E
18 68P81096E87-O 9/1/00
P/O
EXTERNAL
RIBBON CABLE
SPEAKER
HANDSET/ P1 AUDIO INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
MICROPHONE (LOCATED ON P14
LED BOARD)
MIC AUDIO P/O

LOCAL AUDIO ASIC RIBBON CABLE
(U301) P1
P14 (LOCATED ON
LED BOARD)
EXTERNAL SPEAKER
6809/MRTI INTERFACE CIRCUITRY TX AUDIO IN CODEC AUDIO
MULTIPLEXER
MIC AUDIO
MRTI TX AUDIO
TRANSIENT MRTI TX AUDIO MRTI TX AUDIO
PROTECTION
A/D
VARIOUS DIAGNOSTIC CONVERTER
MRTI RX AUDIO
LOOPBACK SIGNALS
3
TO/FROM TX DATA +
J14 ON P/O
BACKPLANE RIBBON CABLE
TX DATA -
P1
TX AUDIO IN MUX (LOCATED ON HANDSET
LEVEL SHIFTER/ P14 EARPIECE
LED BOARD)
AMPLIFIER
HANDSET
6809 RX AUDIO SPEAKER AUDIO
DIGITIZED SIGNAL FROM DSP ASIC D/A
CONVERTER
AUDIO INTERFACE BUS DIGITIZED SIGNAL TO DSP ASIC LOCAL SPEAKER

W AUDIO STATION
AUDIO LOCAL
F TX VOICE/DATA
3
AMPLIFIER SPEAKER
1
T DATA
TX WIDEBAND AUDIO TX AUDIO OUT
(ANALOG SIMULCAST) MULTIPLEXER
LEVEL SHIFTER/ (FROM BACKPLANE)
AMPLIFIER
LO-PASS FILTER DIGITAL

2 D/A POT LINE DRIVER/
CONVERTER (0-6 KHZ) AMPLIFIER
VCO MOD AUDIO
3 TO
EXCITER MODULE
LINE DRIVER/
LEVEL SHIFTER/ AMPLIFIER
T DATA WAVESHAPING/ AMPLIFIER
A/D
FILTERING CONVERTER TX AUDIO REF MOD AUDIO
DISC AUDIO OUT MUX TO
D/A LO-PASS FILTER EXCITER MODULE
6809 BUFFER/ CONVERTER
AMPLIFIER (0-6 KHZ)
RX AUDIO/ 3
MRTI RX AUDIO DISC AUDIO
DIGITAL
POT
ADJUST
FET
AUDIO
GATE TX WIDEBAND AUDIO OR TX VOICE/DATA
TX AUDIO IN MUX
1 TX AUDIO OUT MUX
E
SPI BUS SPI BUS
CONTROLLER LOCAL SPKR ENABLE
2
SPI BUS SELECT DIGITAL POT ADJUST
1
9/1/00 68P81096E87-O 19
SUPPLY VOLTAGES CIRCUITRY
+5 V FILTER
VCC
(FROM CIRCUITRY (+5V)
BACKPLANE)
A+
INPUT / OUTPUT PORTS CIRCUITRY (+14.2 V)
I/O PORT P0 OUT

VCCA

HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS 32 +14.2 V FILTER +5V
TO/FROM HOST (FROM CIRCUITRY REGULATOR (ANALOG +5V)

MICROPROCESSOR BACKPLANE)
VARIOUS CONTROL LINES
LATCHES TO

SCM & STATION CIRCUITRY
I/O PORT P1 OUT
I/O PORT P0 IN
VARIOUS INPUTS

8

FROM SCM & STATION 32
I/O PORT P1 IN
CIRCUITRY
24 BUFFERS
VARIOUS CONTROL
LINES
6
SERIAL ID DATA
FROM
BACKPLANE DIGITAL
GROUND
LOGIC GND
(FROM
STATIC
BACKPLANE) GROUND
AUDIO
GROUND
20 68P81096E87-O 9/1/00
FRONT PANEL LEDS AND SWITCHES
STATION STATION INTCM/ACC D CONTROL RX 1 ACTIVE RX 2 ACTIVE RX FAIL AUX LED

ON FAIL CH
VCC
VCC VCC VCC VCC
P1
LED CONTROL LINES

VOL UP VOL DOWN CSQ-PL-OFF INTERCOM
/LOCAL PTT /ACCESS DISABLE /SHIFT
PUSHBUTTON SWITCH SIGNALS

(P/O I/O PORT P0 IN)
FRONT PANEL CONNECTORS

4
RIBBON CABLE
(CONNECTS TO SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS
CONTROL BOARD) RSS PORT
(DB9 CONNECTOR
7
EXTERNAL
SPEAKER
EXTERNAL
HANDSET/
MICROPHONE
5/10 MHZ
INPUT
Figure 4. CLN7098A LED Board Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81096E87-O 21
WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD
MODELS CLN6955A
CLN6957A
1 DESCRIPTION
The Models CLN6955A and CLN6957A Wireline Interface Boards are described in this section. A general descrip
tion, identification of jumpers, indicators, and inputs/outputs, functional block diagrams, and functional theory of
operation are provided. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding
of the module, allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. (Refer also to the Maintenance and
Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station.)
General Description
customer telephone lines and the station equipment. Each WIB con
Note:Model CLN6955 WIB is designed for
use in stations installed in locations where lo tains circuitry to interface with a variety of telephone line configurations
cal codes permit phone line connections to and signal types. In addition, the board contains a connector to accept
either the 50-pin Telco connector or the one modem card. This card is required to interface with a 9.6kbps
orange screw terminal connector. Model (ASTRO) input.
CLN6957 allows only connections to the
orange screw terminal connector. The WIB is installed behind the Station Control Module front panel and
connects to the station backplane. Phone line connections may be
made either to a 50-pin Telco connector and/or an orange screw ter
minal connector (see sidebar).
The WIB contains the following circuitry:
Audio and Data Circuits the WIB provides a number of voice
and data circuits which interface with the customer phone lines
Microprocessor serves as the main controller for the WIB;
communicates with the Station Control Module microprocessor,
interfaces with the ASTRO and SECURENET data signals, and
provides monitoring and control for a variety of on-board I/O
circuits
Peripheral Application Specific IC (PASIC) primarily responsi
ble for injecting and retrieving PCM voice signals into/from the
TDM (time division multiplex) bus that connects from the WIB to
the Station Control Module
DC Remote Detection circuitry provides current sensing and
detection for dc remote control of station
Simulcast Processing Circuitry circuitry is provided for sum
ming and control of Simulcast PL and reverse burst tones

Printed in U.S.A.
Figure 1 shows the WIB jumpers, indicators, and all input and output external connections.
MATES WITH CABLE

TO ORANGE TERMINAL STRIP 2WIRE / 4WIRE SELECT FLASH
(ACCESSIBLE ON REAR OF STATION) JUMPER MEMORY
LINE 1 AUDIO CIRCUIT

TRANSFORMER AND
IMPEDANCE MATCHING
JUMPERS

TRANSFORMER AND
IMPEDANCE MATCHING
JUMPERS
WL FAIL
LED
WL ON
LED
DC REMOTE CONTROL
2WIRE / 4WIRE
JUMPERS
CARD EDGE
CONNECTORS
Figure 1. Wireline Interface Board Jumpers, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs (CLN6955A Shown)
2 68P81094E77-A
9/1/00
CLN6955A and CLN6957A Wireline Interface Boards
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the WIB circuitry at a functional level. The information
order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Refer to Figure 2 for an overall block dia
gram of the WIB, and Figure 3 thru Figure 6 for block diagrams for 2-wire voice, 4-wire voice, 9.6kbps (ASTRO),
and 12kbps SECURENET signal paths.
Functional Overview
(Refer to Figure 2)
Introduction
As mentioned previously, the WIB serves as the interface between the
customer telephone lines and the station equipment. In general, the
WIB processes and routes all voice and/or data signals between the
station equipment and the landline equipment (e.g., a control center,
modem, etc.).
As shown in the block diagram in Figure 2, the WIB contains a micro
processor with RAM and EPROM, a Peripheral Application Specific IC
(PASIC), one 4-wire audio circuit, and one 2-wire audio circuit. Also
provided are a dc remote decoding circuit, Simulcast processing cir
cuitry, and miscellaneous I/O circuits. All of these circuits are described
in the following paragraphs.
The WIB microprocessor (P) provides overall control of the WIB oper
ation, provides two serial bus links, and communicates with the micro
processor in the Station Control Module.
The WIB operating code and other parameters are stored in two 256k
x 8 FLASH ICs. Short term storage is provided by two 128k x 8 RAM ICs.
The P data bus is connected to each of the PASICs to provide control
and to input and output 12kbps SECURENET data.
Two serial bus links are provided and managed by the P. One of these
is dedicated to interfacing with a plug-in modem card for 9.6kbps
(ASTRO) applications. The other serial link is used to interface with the
microprocessor in the Station Control Module using HDLC protocol.
Peripheral Application Specific IC (PASIC)

One PASIC is provided on the WIB to interface with the various audio/
data circuits. In general, the PASIC is responsible for accepting either
PCM voice information (for 4-wire or 2-wire operation) or 12kbps se
cure data (12kbps SECURENET operation) and routing the information
to the proper destination (i.e., from landline to station, and from station
to landline). Details of the signal paths are provided in Description of
Audio/Data Signal Paths later in this section.
68P81094E77-A
9/1/00
3
Functional Overview
(Cont'd)
(Refer to Figure 2)
Audio/Data Circuits
Each WIB contains circuitry for one 4-wire audio/data circuit, one
2-wire audio/data circuit, one 9.6kbps (ASTRO) data circuit, and one
12kbps SECURENET data circuit. As shown in the block diagram, the
PASIC and its associated circuitry function to provide the following sig
nal paths:
4-wire voice audio from landline to station, and from station to
landline
landline
9.6kbps (ASTRO) modem data from landline to station, and from
station to landline
12kbps SECURENET modem data from landline to station, and
from station to landline
Description of Audio/Data Signal Paths provided later in this section
contains block diagrams of each of the major signal paths with an ex
planation of the signal flows.
DC Remote Detection
The WIB contains circuitry to monitor the Line 1 Audio and Line 2 Audio
input lines and detect dc control currents. The detection outputs
(12.5mA, 5.5 mA, +2.5 mA, and -2.5 mA) are dc voltages (nomi
nally either +.7V or +5V) which are fed to an A/D converter. The conver
ter serves as a comparator and interprets the inputs as highs and lows.
The data is then sent serially to the microprocessor.
Miscellaneous Inputs/Outputs
The following inputs and outputs are provided on the WIB. These lines
may be assigned various functions according to customer specifica
tions.
One (1) optically-coupled inputs
Seven (7) transistor-coupled inputs
One (1) relay closure outputs (normally open contacts)
Three (3) transistor-coupled outputs
Simulcast Processing Circuitry

Summing and gating circuitry is provided on the WIB to allow PL tones,
reverse burst, and TX audio (GEN TX DATA) to be combined and output
to the VCO in the Exciter Module (after signal processing by the SCM)
to directly modulate the rf carrier. The simulcast circuitry is controlled
by the Station Control Board microprocessor via the WIB microproces
sor and the PASIC on the WIB.
4 68P81094E77-A
9/1/00
P/O P/O
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR 50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR
(CLN6955) (CLN6955)
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR
(CLN6955, CLN6957) (CLN6955, CLN6957)
ON ON
STATION BACKPLANE 4-WIRE CIRCUIT #1 STATION BACKPLANE
AND LINE 2 AUDIO

FROM STATION TO LANDLINE
LINE 1 AUDIO 2-WIRE CIRCUIT (4-WIRE)
FROM LANDLINE
TO STATION (INCLUDES VARIABLE GAIN STAGES, BUFFERS, LINE DRIVERS, OR
FROM LANDLINE TO STATION
2-WIRE CANCELLATION CIRCUITRY, AND A/D & D/A CONVERTERS) AND
(2-WIRE)
MISCELLANEOUS LINE 2 AUDIO
TO
INPUTS & OUTPUTS DC REMOTE
SERIAL DATA
DETECTION CIRCUITRY
FROM BACKPLANE
TO MICROPROCESSOR
1
OPTO-ISOLATED INTERPROCESSOR
VIA LATCHES
INPUT COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL DATA BUS BUS TO/FROM
ASTRO HDLC (HDLC) MICROPROCESSOR
MODEM INTERFACE IN
7
TRANSISTOR- CIRCUITRY STATION CONTROL
COUPLED MODULE
INPUTS
WIRELINE FAIL
1 WIRELINE ON
MICROPROCESSOR
TO BACKPLANE
N.O. RELAY RAM

OUTPUT

FROM
PCM VOICE DATA BUS

ADDRESS LINES AND DATA ADDRESS BUS 128K X 8

3 (4) PERIPHERAL TO/FROM
TRANSISTOR- STATION CONTROL
COUPLED ASIC

MODULE
OUTPUTS VIA TDM BUS MICROPROCESSOR 128K X 8
DC REMOTE
DATA BUS

DETECTION
LINE 2 AUDIO
FROM
CIRCUITRY FLASH

50-PIN
CONNECTOR

256K X 8
A/D
SERIAL DATA
SERIAL DATA

256K X 8
CONVERTER
SIMULCAST
GEN PROCESSING TX WIDEBAND AUDIO
TX DATA TO DATA BUS DATA BUS
CIRCUITRY STATION CONTROL
MODULE
POWER +9.6 V
A+ SUPPLY
CIRCUITRY -9.6 V
Figure 2. CLN6955A / CLN6957A Wireline Interface Board Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81094E77-A 5
6 68P81094E77-O 10/15/96
Description of Audio/Data Signal Paths

2-Wire Voice Audio Path (Refer to Figure 3)
Note:
Depending on local codes and/or customer Voice audio signals sent to/from the station via 2-wire copper pair are
preference, phone line connections may be processed by the 2-wire audio circuit on the WIB (Line 2 Audio). The
made at either the 50-pin Telco connector or audio transformer in this circuit may have both inbound and outbound
the screw terminal connector on the station audio signals present simultaneously, and therefore employs circuitry
backplane. 2-wire audio connections are to pass audio in each direction while cancelling the alternate signal.
made at Line 2 Audio. The 2-wire audio circuit operates as follows:
For systems using dc remote control, set Landline to Station balanced audio is input to the primary of an audio trans
jumpers JU1008 and JU1009 as shown below former. The signal is induced into the transformer secondary and fed to an
for 2-wire applications: amplifier. [Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and sec
ondary coils provide for selectable impedance matching. Refer to the illustra
tion below for impedance setting information.]
WIRELINE The amplifier sums the inbound and outbound signals and feeds one
INTERFACE
BOARD input to the cancellation amplifier. The other input to this amplifier is the
T1000 T1001 output signal only. A cancellation of the outbound signal results, and
the output from this amplifier is the inbound signal only. The signal is
fed to a buffer (through jumper JU1010 placed in the 2-wire position,
as shown below) which feeds the gain adjust circuitry. Under control
of the PASIC, the gain control circuitry provides eight levels of gain ad
2-WIRE
just (5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, and 40 dB).
DC REMOTE
The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to an A/D converter, which digi
tizes the audio signal into a PCM output. This output is fed serially to the PAS
IC, which places the data in the proper TDM timeslot (as instructed by the
JU1008 JU1009 microprocessor in the SCM) and output to the SCM on the TDM Bus.
Station to Landline audio is input to the PASIC in the form of PCM data
Four levels of gain adjustment are provided by on the TDM bus. The PASIC extracts the data and feeds it to a D/A con
circuitry on the WIB for Landline-to-Station verter, which takes the PCM data and converts it to an analog audio sig
and Station-to-Landline audio paths. Addi nal. The audio signal is fed to the gain adjust circuitry. Under control
tional fine level adjustments are performed in of the PASIC, the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain ad
software in the Station Control Module. just (0dB, -6dB, -12dB, and -18dB).
The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed thru a 2-pole low-pass filter
and into the inputs of two amplifiers. The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to
(Note that a sample of the outbound signal is
fed from one of the output transistors to the can
two transistors which are connected in a push-pull configuration to drive the
cellation amplifier in the landline to station cir primary of an audio transformer. The audio signal is induced into the second
cuitry. This signal is used to cancel the out ary and output to the landline system (via either the 50-pin Telco connector
bound signal and allow the inbound signal to or screw terminal connector) as balanced audio.
pass through the landline to station circuitry.)
JUMPERS
IMPEDANCE IN POSITION
4.7UF
SETTINGS
1
WIRELINE .027UF .033UF 511
INTERFACE
BOARD 1 2 3 4
2-WIR LINE 2 4.7UF

E
JU1010
AUDIO
2 120
.047UF
.033UF 909
T1001
4.7UF
T1000 T1001
3 120
.068UF
.033UF 909
4 3 2 1
4.7UF
4 680
.1UF
.033UF 909
Note: All jumpers removed for high impedance input/output.
68P81094E77-A
9/1/00
7
Description of Audio/Data
Signal Paths (Continued)
Note:
Depending on local codes and/or customer Voice audio signals sent to/from the station via 4-wire copper pairs are
preference, phone line connections may be processed by the 4-wire audio circuit on the WIB (Line 1 Audio &
made at either the 50-pin Telco connector or Line 2 Audio). The 4-wire circuit operates as follows:
the screw terminal connector on the station
backplane. Landline to Station signals are Landline to Station balanced audio is input to the primary of an audio
connected at Line 1 Audio. Station to Land transformer. The signal is induced into the transformer secondary and
line signals are connected at Line 2 Audio. fed to a buffer (through jumper JU1010 placed in the 4-wire position,
as shown below). [Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the pri
mary and secondary coils provide for selectable impedance matching.
For systems using dc remote control, set Refer to the illustration below for impedance setting information.]
jumpers JU1008 and JU1009 as shown below
for 4-wire applications: The buffer output is fed to the gain adjust circuitry. Under control of the
PASIC, the gain control circuitry provides eight levels of gain adjust
(5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, and 40 dB).
WIRELINE The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to an A/D converter, which
INTERFACE
BOARD digitizes the audio signal into a PCM output. This output is fed serially
T1000 T1001 to the PASIC, which places the data in the proper TDM timeslot (as in
structed by the microprocessor in the Station Control Module) and out
put to the SCM on the TDM Bus.
on the TDM bus. The PASIC extracts the data and feeds it to a D/A con
4-WIRE
DC RE verter, which takes the PCM data and converts it to an analog audio sig
MOTE nal. The audio signal is fed to the gain adjust circuitry. Under control
of the PASIC, the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain ad
JU1008 JU1009
just (0dB, -6dB, -12dB, and -18dB).
The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed thru a 2-pole low-pass
filter and into the inputs of two amplifiers. The outputs of the amplifiers
are fed to two transistors which are connected in a push-pull configu
Four levels of gain adjustment are provided by ration to drive the primary of an audio transformer. The audio signal is
circuitry on the WIB for Landline-to-Station induced into the secondary and output to the landline system (via ei
and Station-to-Landline audio paths. Addi
tional fine level adjustments are performed in ther the 50-pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector) as bal
software in the Station Control Module. anced audio.
JUMPERS
IN POSITION
WIRELINE IMPEDANCE 4.7UF
1
INTERFACE .033UF 511
BOARD
SETTINGS .027UF
1 2 3 4
4.7UF
LINE 1 LINE 2 2 120

.047UF
.033UF 909
AUDIO AUDIO
JU1010 T1001
4-WIR 4.7UF
E 3 120
.068UF
.033UF 909
T1000 T1001
4 3 2 1 4.7UF
4 .1UF
680 .033UF 909
8 68P81094E77-A
9/1/00
9.6KBPS (ASTRO) Modem Data Path (Refer to Figure 5)
9.6kbps (ASTRO) modem data signals are sent to/from the station via
4-wire copper pairs and are processed by the 4-wire audio circuit on
the WIB (Line 1 Audio & Line 2 Audio). The 4-wire circuit operates as
Note: follows:
Depending on local codes and/or customer
preference, phone line connections may be Landline to Station modem data is input to the primary of an audio
made at either the 50-pin Telco connector or transformer as balanced audio. The signal is induced into the trans
the screw terminal connector on the station former secondary and fed to a buffer (through jumper JU1010 placed
backplane. Landline to Station signals are in the 4-wire position, as shown at the bottom of page 8). [Note that
connected at Line 1 Audio. Station to Land jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and secondary coils pro
line signals are connected at Line 2 Audio. vide for selectable impedance matching. Refer to the illustration at the
bottom of page 8 for impedance setting information.]
The buffer output is fed to a modem (a separate card which plugs into
the WIB) which converts the modem signal to detected data. The data
signal is then fed to the microprocessor over a serial bus. The micropro
cessor sends the data to the microprocessor in the Station Control
The WIB is equipped with a connector to ac
Module over an interprocessor communications bus (HDLC protocol).
cept a plug-in ASTRO modem card.
Station to Landline modem data is input to the microprocessor from
the Station Control Module microprocessor via the interprocessor com
munications bus (HDLC protocol). The microprocessor feeds the data
to the modem which converts the data to a modem signal.
The output of the modem is fed to the gain adjust circuitry. Under con
trol of the PASIC, the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain
adjust (0dB, -6dB, -12dB, and -18dB).
ration to drive the primary of an audio transformer. The modem data
signal is induced into the secondary and output to the landline system
(via either the 50-pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector) as
balanced audio.
68P81094E77-A
9/1/00
9
12KBPS SECURENET Modem Data Path (Refer to Figure 6)
12kbps SECURENET modem data signals are sent to/from the station
The Quantar station supports SECURENET via 4-wire copper pairs and are processed by the 4-wire audio circuit
transparent mode only. on the WIB (Line 1 Audio & Line 2 Audio). The 4-wire circuit operates
as follows:
Landline to Station 12kbps modem data is input to the primary of an
audio transformer as balanced audio. The signal is induced into the
transformer secondary and fed to a buffer (through jumper JU1010
Note: placed in the 4-wire position, as shown at the bottom of page 8).
Depending on customer preference, phone [Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and secondary
line connections may be made at either the coils provide for selectable impedance matching. For SECURENET
50-pin Telco connector or the screw termi systems, place both jumpers in position 1, as shown in the illustration
nal connector on the station backplane. at the bottom of page 8.]
Landline to Station signals are connected at
Line 1 Audio. Station to Landline signals are The buffer output is fed through a 3-pole low-pass filter to a limiter,
connected at Line 2 Audio. which converts the modem signal to a data signal. The output of the
limiter is fed to the PASIC as serial data.
For SECURENET systems, make sure jump The PASIC sends the data to the microprocessor as 8-bit parallel data
ers JU1011 and JU1012 are placed as shown over the data bus.The microprocessor sends the data to the micropro
below. cessor in the Station Control Module over an interprocessor communi
cations bus (HDLC protocol).
Station to Landline 12kbps modem data is input to the microproces
WIRELINE
INTERFACE sor from the Station Control Module microprocessor via the interpro
BOARD cessor communications bus (HDLC protocol). The microprocessor
T1000 T1001
feeds the data to the PASIC as 8-bit parallel data over the data bus.
The PASIC outputs the data serially through a 3-pole low-pass filter
to the gain adjust circuitry. Under control of the PASIC, the gain control
circuitry provides four levels of gain adjust (0dB, -6dB, -12dB, and
-18dB).
SECURENET The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to the inputs of two amplifi
POSITIONS
ers. The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to two transistors which are
connected in a push-pull configuration to drive the primary of an audio
transformer. The modem data signal is induced into the secondary and
JU1011 JU1012
output to the landline system (via either the 50-pin Telco connector or
screw terminal connector) as balanced audio.
10 68P81094E77-A
9/1/00
2-WIRE VOICE SIGNAL PATH CIRCUIT LANDLINE TO STATION VOICE AUDIO PATH
GAIN CONTROL
FROM PASIC
OUTBOUND JU1010
SIGNAL (PLACED IN
INBOUND 2-WIRE POSITION)
SIGNAL
GAIN PCM VOICE
AMPLIFIER AND DATA
INBOUND & ADJUST
CIRCUITRY TO
OUTBOUND AMPLIFIER BUFFER STATION
SIGNALS CONTROL
P/O A/D MODULE
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR CONVERTER (TDM BUS)
(CLN6955)
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR
LINE 2 OUTBOUND SIGNAL
(CLN6955, CLN6957)
ON (USED FOR CANCELLATION)
STATION BACKPLANE PERIPHERAL
AMPLIFIER ASIC
+ GAIN CONTROL
LINE 2 AUDIO FROM PASIC
FROM LANDLINE TO STATION JUMPER JUMPER

AND FIELD FIELD D/A
FROM STATION TO LANDLINE CONVERTER
AMPLIFIER
2-POLE GAIN PCM VOICE
LOW-PASS ADJUST AND DATA
FILTER CIRCUITRY FROM
+ STATION
CONTROL
MODULE
(TDM BUS)
STATION TO LANDLINE VOICE AUDIO PATH
Figure 3. 2-Wire Voice Audio Path Functional Block Diagram
4-WIRE VOICE SIGNAL PATH CIRCUIT

LANDLINE TO STATION VOICE AUDIO PATH
P/O
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR GAIN CONTROL
(CLN6955) FROM PASIC
JU1010
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR (PLACED IN
(CLN6955, CLN6957) 4-WIRE POSITION)
ON
STATION BACKPLANE
GAIN PCM VOICE
ADJUST AND DATA
CIRCUITRY TO
JUMPER JUMPER BUFFER STATION
LINE 1 AUDIO
FIELD FIELD CONTROL
FROM LANDLINE A/D MODULE
TO STATION CONVERTER (TDM BUS)
P/O PERIPHERAL
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR ASIC
(CLN6955)
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR
(CLN6955, CLN6957) GAIN CONTROL
ON FROM PASIC
STATION BACKPLANE AMPLIFIER
D/A
CONVERTER
+
LINE 2 AUDIO JUMPER JUMPER
FIELD FIELD
FROM STATION 2-POLE GAIN PCM VOICE
TO LANDLINE LOW-PASS ADJUST AND DATA
AMPLIFIER STATION
CONTROL
MODULE
(TDM BUS)
+
9/1/00 68P81094E77-A 11
9.6KBPS(ASTRO) MODEM DATA SIGNAL PATHS

LANDLINE TO STATION DATA SIGNAL PATH
P/O
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR JU1010
(CLN6955) (PLACED IN 4-WIRE
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR POSITION)
(CLN6955, CLN6957)
LINE 1 AUDIO JUMPER JUMPER BUFFER

FROM LANDLINE FIELD FIELD
TO STATION
MICROPROCESSOR
P/O DATA
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR SERIAL BUS TO/FROM
(CLN6955) STATION
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR ASTRO CONTROL
(CLN6955, CLN6957) MODEM MODULE
ON STATION BACKPLANE GAIN CONTROL
AMPLIFIER VIA
FROM PASIC
HDLC BUS
+
FROM STATION FIELD FIELD
TO LANDLINE
2-POLE GAIN
AMPLIFIER LOW-PASS ADJUST
FILTER CIRCUITRY
STATION TO LANDLINE DATA SIGNAL PATH
Figure 5. 9.6kbps (ASTRO) Modem Data Signal Path Functional Block Diagram
12KBPS SECURENET MODEM DATA SIGNAL PATHS

P/O
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR
(CLN6955) JU1010
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR (PLACED IN 4-WIRE
(CLN6955, CLN6957) POSITION
3-POLE SERIAL DATA
LO-PASS
BUFFER FILTER LIMITER
TO STATION
MICROPROCESSOR
P/O DATA BUS DATA

50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR PERIPHERAL TO/FROM
(CLN6955) ASIC STATION
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CONTROL
(CLN6955, CLN6957) MODULE
ON STATION BACKPLANE AMPLIFIER GAIN CONTROL VIA
FROM PASIC HDLC BUS
+
FROM STATION FIELD FIELD
TO LANDLINE
GAIN 3-POLE SERIAL DATA
AMPLIFIER ADJUST LOW-PASS
CIRCUITRY FILTER

Figure 6. 12kbps SECURENET Modem Data Signal Path Functional Block Diagram
12 68P81094E77-A 9/1/00
WIRELINE INTERFACE
BOARD
MODELS CLN6956A
CLN6958A
1 DESCRIPTION
The Models CLN6956A and CLN6958A Wireline Interface Boards are described in this section. A general descrip
tion, identification of jumpers, indicators, and inputs/outputs, functional block diagrams, and functional theory
of operation are provided. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understand
ing of the module, allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. (Refer also to the Maintenance
and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station.)
General Description
customer telephone lines and the station equipment. Each WIB con
Note:Model CLN6956 WIB is designed for
use in stations installed in locations where lo tains circuitry to interface with a variety of telephone line configurations
cal codes permit phone line connections to and signal types. In addition, the board contains connectors to accept
either the 50-pin Telco connector or the two modem cards. These cards are required to interface with up to two
orange screw terminal connector. Model 9.6kbps (ASTRO) inputs.
CLN6958 allows only connections to the
orange screw terminal connector. The WIB is installed behind the Station Control Module front panel and
connects to the station backplane. Phone line connections may be
made either to a 50-pin Telco connector and/or an orange screw ter
minal connector (see sidebar).
The WIB contains the following circuitry:
Audio and Data Circuits the WIB provides a number of voice
and data circuits which interface with the customer phone lines
Microprocessor serves as the main controller for the WIB;
communicates with the Station Control Module microprocessor,
interfaces with the ASTRO and SECURENET data signals, and
provides monitoring and control for a variety of on-board I/O
circuits
Peripheral Application Specific IC (PASIC) primarily responsi
ble for injecting and retrieving PCM voice signals into/from the
TDM (time division multiplex) bus that connects from the WIB to
the Station Control Module
DC Remote Detection circuitry provides current sensing and
detection for dc remote control of station
Simulcast Processing Circuitry circuitry is provided for sum
ming and control of Simulcast PL and reverse burst tones

Figure 1 shows the WIB jumpers, indicators, and all input and output external connections.
MATES WITH CABLE

TO ORANGE TERMINAL STRIP 2WIRE / 4WIRE SELECT FLASH
(ACCESSIBLE ON REAR OF STATION) JUMPER MEMORY

TRANSFORMER AND
IMPEDANCE MATCHING
JUMPERS

TRANSFORMER AND
IMPEDANCE MATCHING
JUMPERS
WL FAIL
LED insert
FAEPS-48907
(Y876) @ 100%
WL ON
LED
DC REMOTE CONTROL
2WIRE / 4WIRE
JUMPERS
CARD EDGE
CONNECTORS
Figure 1. Wireline Interface Board Jumpers, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs (CLN6956A Shown)
2 68P81094E78-A
9/1/00
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the WIB circuitry at a functional level. The information
order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Refer to Figure 2 for an overall block dia
gram of the WIB, and Figure 3 thru Figure 6 for block diagrams for 2-wire voice, 4-wire voice, 9.6kbps (ASTRO),
and 12kbps SECURENET signal paths.
Functional Overview
(Refer to Figure 2)
Introduction
As mentioned previously, the WIB serves as the interface between the
customer telephone lines and the station equipment. In general, the
WIB processes and routes all voice and/or data signals between the
station equipment and the landline equipment (e.g., a control center,
modem, etc.).
As shown in the block diagram in Figure xx, the WIB contains a micro
processor with RAM and EPROM, two Peripheral Application Specific
ICs (PASIC), two 4-wire audio circuits, and one 2-wire audio circuit.
Also provided are a dc remote decoding circuit, Simulcast processing
circuitry, and miscellaneous I/O circuits. All of these circuits are de
The WIB microprocessor (P) provides overall control of the WIB oper
ation, provides three serial bus links, and communicates with the mi
croprocessor in the Station Control Module.
The WIB operating code and other parameters are stored in two 256k
x 8 FLASH ICs. Short term storage is provided by two 128k x 8 RAM ICs.
The P data bus is connected to each of the PASICs to provide control
and to input and output 12kbps SECURENET data.
Three serial bus links are provided and managed by the P. Two of
these are dedicated to interfacing with two plug-in modem cards for
9.6kbps (ASTRO) applications. The other serial link is used to interface
with the microprocessor in the Station Control Module using HDLC pro
tocol.
Peripheral Application Specific IC (PASIC)

Two PASICs are provided on the WIB to interface with the various audio/
data circuits. One PASIC interfaces with the 4-wire/2-wire circuitry,
and the other PASIC interfaces with the second 4-wire circuit. In gen
eral, each PASIC is responsible for accepting either PCM voice informa
tion (for 4-wire or 2-wire operation) or 12kbps secure data (12kbps
SECURENET operation) and routing the information to the proper desti
nation (i.e., from landline to station, and from station to landline). De
tails of the signal paths are provided in Description of Audio/Data Sig
nal Paths later in this section.
68P81094E78-A
9/1/00
3
Functional Overview
(Cont'd)
(Refer to Figure 2)
Audio/Data Circuits
Each WIB contains circuitry for two 4-wire audio/data circuits, one
2-wire audio/data circuit, two 9.6kbps (ASTRO) data circuits, and two
12kbps SECURENET data circuits. As shown in the block diagram, the
upper PASIC interfaces with the 2-wire/4-wire circuitry, and the lower
PASIC interfaces with the second 4-wire circuit.
Each PASIC and its associated circuitry function to provide the follow
ing signal paths:
landline
2-wire voice audio (upper PASIC only) from landline to station,
and from station to landline
9.6kbps (ASTRO) modem data from landline to station, and from
station to landline
12kbps SECURENET modem data from landline to station, and
from station to landline
Description of Audio/Data Signal Paths provided later in this section
contains block diagrams of each of the major signal paths along with
an explanation of the signal flows.
DC Remote Detection
The WIB contains circuitry to monitor the Line 1 Audio and Line 2 Audio
input lines and detect dc control currents. The detection outputs
(12.5mA, 5.5 mA, +2.5 mA, and -2.5 mA) are dc voltages (nomi
nally either +.7V or +5V) which are fed to an A/D converter. The conver
ter serves as a comparator and interprets the inputs as highs and lows.
The data is then sent serially to the microprocessor.
Miscellaneous Inputs/Outputs
The following inputs and outputs are provided on the WIB. These lines
may be assigned various functions according to customer specifica
tions.
Four (4) optically-coupled inputs
Eight (8) transistor-coupled inputs
Four (4) relay closure outputs (normally open contacts)
Six (6) transistor-coupled outputs
Simulcast Processing Circuitry

Summing and gating circuitry is provided on the WIB to allow PL tones,
reverse burst, and TX audio (GEN TX DATA) to be combined and output
to the VCO in the Exciter Module (after signal processing by the SCM)
to direclty modulate the rf carrier. The simulcast circuitry is controlled
by the Station Control Board microprocessor via the WIB microproces
sor and upper PASIC on the WIB.
4 68P81094E78-A
9/1/00

(CLN6956) (CLN6956)
(CLN6956, CLN6958) (CLN6956, CLN6958)
ON STATION BACKPLANE 4-WIRE CIRCUIT #1 ON STATION BACKPLANE
AND LINE 2 AUDIO
LINE 1 AUDIO 2-WIRE CIRCUIT (4-WIRE)
FROM LANDLINE
TO STATION (INCLUDES VARIABLE GAIN STAGES, BUFFERS, LINE DRIVERS, OR
FROM LANDLINE TO STATION
2-WIRE CANCELLATION CIRCUITRY, AND A/D & D/A CONVERTERS) AND
(2-WIRE)
MISCELLANEOUS LINE 2 AUDIO
TO
INPUTS & OUTPUTS DC REMOTE
SERIAL DATA
DETECTION CIRCUITRY
FROM BACKPLANE
TO MICROPROCESSOR
4
OPTO-ISOLATED INTERPROCESSOR
VIA LATCHES
INPUTS COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL DATA BUS BUS TO/FROM
ASTRO (HDLC)
MODEM HDLC MICROPROCESSOR
8 #1 INTERFACE IN
TRANSISTOR- CIRCUITRY STATION CONTROL
COUPLED MODULE
INPUTS
WIRELINE FAIL
4 WIRELINE ON
MICROPROCESSOR
TO BACKPLANE
N.O. RELAY RAM

OUTPUTS

FROM
PCM VOICE DATA BUS

ADDRESS LINES ADDRESS BUS
AND DATA 128K X 8
6 (4)

TO/FROM
TRANSISTOR- STATION CONTROL
COUPLED PERIPHERAL

MODULE
OUTPUTS MICROPROCESSOR
ASIC VIA TDM BUS 128K X 8

DC REMOTE
DATA BUS
DETECTION

LINE 2 AUDIO
FROM
CIRCUITRY FLASH

50-PIN
CONNECTOR

DATA BUS
256K X 8
GEN
SIMULCAST
PROCESSING TX WIDEBAND AUDIO
A/D
CONVERTER
SERIAL DATA
SERIAL DATA BUS

SERIAL DATA
256K X 8
TX DATA TO
CIRCUITRY STATION CONTROL
MODULE
DATA BUS DATA BUS
PERIPHERAL
ASIC
POWER +9.6 V
A+ SUPPLY PCM VOICE
CIRCUITRY -9.6 V AND DATA
TO/FROM
ASTRO STATION CONTROL
MODEM MODULE
#2 VIA TDM BUS

SERIAL DATA (CLN6956)
(CLN6956)
(CLN6956, CLN6958) (CLN6956, CLN6958)
ON STATION BACKPLANE ON STATION BACKPLANE
LINE 3 AUDIO LINE 4 AUDIO

FROM LANDLINE
4-WIRE CIRCUIT #2 FROM STATION
TO STATION (INCLUDES VARIABLE GAIN STAGES, BUFFERS, LINE DRIVERS, AND TO LANDLINE
A/D & D/A CONVERTERS)
Figure 2. CLN6956A / CLN6958A Wireline Interface Board Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81094E78-A 5
6 68P81094E78-A 9/1/00
Description of Audio/Data Signal Paths

Note: 2-Wire Voice Audio Path (Refer to Figure 3)
preference, phone line connections may be Voice audio signals sent to/from the station via 2-wire copper pair are
made at either the 50-pin Telco connector or processed by the 2-wire audio circuit on the WIB (Line 2 Audio). The
the screw terminal connector on the station audio transformer in this circuit may have both inbound and outbound
backplane. 2-wire audio connections are audio signals present simultaneously, and therefore employs circuitry
made at Line 2 Audio. to pass audio in each direction while cancelling the alternate signal.
The 2-wire audio circuit operates as follows:
For systems using dc remote control, set
jumpers JU1008 and JU1009 as shown below Landline to Station balanced audio is input to the primary of an audio trans
for 2-wire applications: former. The signal is induced into the transformer secondary and fed to an
amplifier. [Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and sec
ondary coils provide for selectable impedance matching. Refer to the illustra
WIRELINE tion below for impedance setting information.]
INTERFACE
BOARD The amplifier sums the inbound and outbound signals and feeds one
T1000 T1001 input to the cancellation amplifier. The other input to this amplifier is the
output signal only. A cancellation of the outbound signal results, and
the output from this amplifier is the inbound signal only. The signal is
as shown below) which feeds the gain adjust circuitry. Under control
2-WIRE
of the PASIC, the gain control circuitry provides eight levels of gain ad
DC RE just (5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, and 40dB).
MOTE
The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to an A/D converter, which digi
tizes the audio signal into a PCM output. This output is fed serially to the PAS
JU1008 JU1009 IC, which places the data in the proper TDM timeslot (as instructed by the
microprocessor in the SCM) and output to the SCM on the TDM Bus.
Four levels of gain adjustment are provided on the TDM bus. The PASIC extracts the data and feeds it to a D/A con
by circuitry on the WIB for Landline-to-Sta
tion and Station-to-Landline audio paths.
verter, which takes the PCM data and converts it to an analog audio sig
Additional fine level adjustments are per nal. The audio signal is fed to the gain adjust circuitry. Under control
formed in software in the Station Control Mod of the PASIC, the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain ad
ule. just (0dB, -6dB, -12dB, and -18dB).
(Note that a sample of the outbound signal is are fed to two transistors which are connected in a push-pull configu
fed from one of the output transistors to the can
ration to drive the primary of an audio transformer. The audio signal is
cellation amplifier in the landline to station cir
cuitry. This signal is used to cancel the out induced into the secondary and output to the landline system (via ei
bound signal and allow the inbound signal to ther the 50-pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector) as bal
pass through the landline to station circuitry.) anced audio.
JUMPERS
IMPEDANCE IN POSITION
4.7UF
SETTINGS
1
WIRELINE .027UF .033UF 511
INTERFACE
BOARD 1 2 3 4
2-WIR LINE 2 4.7UF

E
JU1010
AUDIO
2 120
.047UF
.033UF 909
T1001
4.7UF
T1000 T1001
3 120
.068UF
.033UF 909
4 3 2 1
4.7UF
4 .1UF
680 .033UF 909
Note: All jumpers removed for high impedance input/output
68P81094E78-A
9/1/00
7
Note:
Voice audio signals sent to/from the station via 4-wire copper pairs are
preference, phone line connections may be
processed by one of two 4-wire audio circuits on the WIB:
made at either the 50-pin Telco connector or Line 1 Audio & Line 2 Audio
the screw terminal connector on the station Line 3 Audio & Line 4 Audio
backplane. Landline to Station signals are
connected at Line 1 Audio or Line 3 Audio. Both 4-wire circuits operate identically as follows:
Station to Landline signals are connected at Landline to Station balanced audio is input to the primary of an audio
Line 2 Audio or Line 4 Audio. transformer. The signal is induced into the transformer secondary and
as shown below). [Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the pri
For systems using dc remote control, set
jumpers JU1008 and JU1009 as shown below
mary and secondary coils provides for selectable impedance match
for 4-wire applications: ing. Refer to the illustration below for impedance setting information.]
The buffer output is fed to the gain adjust circuitry. Under control of the
PASIC, the gain control circuitry provides eight levels of gain adjust
(5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, and 40dB).
WIRELINE
INTERFACE The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to an A/D converter, which
BOARD digitizes the audio signal into a PCM output. This output is fed serially
T1000 T1001
to the PASIC, which places the data in the proper TDM timeslot (as in
structed by the microprocessor in the Station Control Module) and out
put to the SCM on the TDM Bus.
on the TDM bus. The PASIC extracts the data and feeds it to a D/A con
4-WIRE
DC RE
verter, which takes the PCM data and converts it to an analog audio sig
MOTE nal. The audio signal is fed to the gain adjust circuitry. Under control
of the PASIC, the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain ad
just (0dB, -6dB, -12dB, and -18dB).
JU1008 JU1009
Four levels of gain adjustment are provided ration to drive the primary of an audio transformer. The audio signal is
by circuitry on the WIB for Landline-to-Sta induced into the secondary and output to the landline system (via ei
tion and Station-to-Landline audio paths. ther the 50-pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector) as bal
Additional fine level adjustments are per anced audio.
formed in software in the Station Control Mod
ule.
JUMPERS
IN POSITION
SETTINGS
1
INTERFACE .027UF .033UF 511
BOARD
1 2 3 4
4.7UF
LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 LINE 4 2 120
.047UF
.033UF 909
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO T1000
JU1010 T1001
T1002
4-WIR T1003 4.7UF
E 3 120
.068UF
.033UF 909
T1000 T1001 T1002 T1003
4 3 2 1
4.7UF
4 .1UF
680 .033UF 909
Note: All jumpers removed for high impedance input/output
8 68P81094E78-A
9/1/00
9.6KBPS (ASTRO) Modem Data Path (Refer to Figure 5)
9.6kbps (ASTRO) modem data signals are sent to/from the station via
4-wire copper pairs and are processed by one of two 4-wire audio
circuits on the WIB:
Line 1 Audio & Line 2 Audio
Both 4-wire circuits operate identically as follows:
Note:
Landline to Station modem data is input to the primary of an audio
preference, phone line connections may be transformer as balanced audio. The signal is induced into the trans
made at either the 50-pin Telco connector or former secondary and fed to a buffer (through jumper JU1010 placed
the screw terminal connector on the station in the 4-wire position, as shown at the bottom of page 8). [Note that
backplane. Landline to Station signals are jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and secondary coils pro
connected at Line 1 Audio or Line 3 Audio. vide for selectable impedance matching. Refer to the illustration at the
Station to Landline signals are connected at bottom of page NO TAG for impedance setting information.]
Line 2 Audio or Line 4 Audio.
The buffer output is fed to a modem (a separate card which plugs into
the WIB) which converts the modem signal to detected data. The data
signal is then fed to the microprocessor over a serial bus. The micropro
cessor sends the data to the microprocessor in the Station Control
Module over an interprocessor communications bus (HDLC protocol).
The WIB is equipped with two connectors to
accept two plug-in ASTRO modem cards, Station to Landline modem data is input to the microprocessor from
one for each 4-wire modem data circuit. the Station Control Module microprocessor via the interprocessor com
munications bus (HDLC protocol). The microprocessor feeds the data
to the modem which converts the data to a modem signal.
The output of the modem is fed to the gain adjust circuitry. Under con
trol of the PASIC, the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain
adjust (0dB, -6dB, -12dB, and -18dB).
ration to drive the primary of an audio transformer. The modem data
signal is induced into the secondary and output to the landline system
(via either the 50-pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector) as
balanced audio.
68P81094E78-A
9/1/00
9
12KBPS SECURENET Modem Data Path (Refer to Figure 6)
12kbps SECURENET modem data signals are sent to/from the station
The Quantar station supports SECURENET via 4-wire copper pairs and are processed by one of two 4-wire audio
transparent mode only. circuits on the WIB:
Both 4-wire circuits operate identically as follows:
Note: Landline to Station 12kbps modem data is input to the primary of an

Depending on customer preference, phone audio transformer as balanced audio. The signal is induced into the
line connections may be made at either the transformer secondary and fed to a buffer (through jumper JU1010
50-pin Telco connector or the screw termi placed in the 4-wire position, as shown at the bottom of page 8). [Note
nal connector on the station backplane. that jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and secondary coils
Landline to Station signals are connected at provide for selectable impedance matching. For SECURENET sys
Line 1 Audio or Line3 Audio. Station to Land tems, place both jumpers in position 1, as shown in the illustration at
line signals are connected at Line 2 Audio or
the bottom of page 8.]
Line 4 Audio.
The buffer output is fed through a 3-pole low-pass filter to a limiter,
which converts the modem signal to a data signal. The output of the
For SECURENET systems, make sure jump limiter is fed to the PASIC as serial data.
ers JU1011 and JU1012 are placed as shown
below. The PASIC sends the data to the microprocessor as 8-bit parallel data
over the data bus.The microprocessor sends the data to the micropro
cessor in the Station Control Module over an interprocessor communi
WIRELINE cations bus (HDLC protocol).
INTERFACE
BOARD
T1000 T1001 Station to Landline 12kbps modem data is input to the microproces
sor from the Station Control Module microprocessor via the interpro
cessor communications bus (HDLC protocol). The microprocessor
feeds the data to the PASIC as 8-bit parallel data over the data bus.
The PASIC outputs the data serially through a 3-pole low-pass filter
to the gain adjust circuitry. Under control of the PASIC, the gain control
SECURENET circuitry provides four levels of gain adjust (0dB, -6dB, -12dB, and
POSITIONS -18dB).
The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to the inputs of two amplifi
ers. The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to two transistors which are
JU1011 JU1012 connected in a push-pull configuration to drive the primary of an audio
transformer. The modem data signal is induced into the secondary and
output to the landline system (via either the 50-pin Telco connector or
screw terminal connector) as balanced audio.
10 68P81094E78-A
9/1/00
2-WIRE VOICE SIGNAL PATH CIRCUIT LANDLINE TO STATION VOICE AUDIO PATH
GAIN CONTROL
FROM PASIC
OUTBOUND JU1010
SIGNAL (PLACED IN 2-WIRE
INBOUND POSITION)
SIGNAL
GAIN PCM VOICE
AMPLIFIER AND DATA
INBOUND & ADJUST
CIRCUITRY TO
OUTBOUND AMPLIFIER BUFFER STATION
SIGNALS CONTROL
P/O A/D MODULE
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR CONVERTER (TDM BUS)
(CLN6956)
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR LINE 2 OUTBOUND SIGNAL
(CLN6956, CLN6958)
(USED FOR CANCELLATION)
ON PERIPHERAL
STATION BACKPLANE ASIC
AMPLIFIER
+ GAIN CONTROL
LINE 2 AUDIO FROM PASIC
FROM LANDLINE TO STATION JUMPER JUMPER

AND FIELD FIELD D/A
FROM STATION TO LANDLINE CONVERTER
AMPLIFIER
LOW-PASS ADJUST AND DATA
+ STATION
CONTROL
MODULE
(TDM BUS)
4-WIRE VOICE SIGNAL PATH CIRCUIT

(1 OF 2 CIRCUITS SHOWN) LANDLINE TO STATION VOICE AUDIO PATH
GAIN CONTROL
FROM PASIC
JU1010
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR (CLN6956A) (PLACED IN
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR 4-WIRE POSITION)
(CLN6956, CLN6958)
GAIN PCM VOICE
ADJUST AND DATA
CIRCUITRY TO
LINE 1 AUDIO JUMPER JUMPER BUFFER STATION
FROM LANDLINE FIELD FIELD CONTROL
TO STATION A/D MODULE
CONVERTER (TDM BUS)
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR (CLN6956A) PERIPHERAL

OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR ASIC
(CLN6956, CLN6958)
ON STATION BACKPLANE AMPLIFIER GAIN CONTROL
FROM PASIC
+ D/A
LINE 2 AUDIO JUMPER JUMPER CONVERTER
FOM STATION FIELD FIELD
TO LANDLINE

AMPLIFIER LOW-PASS ADJUST AND DATA
STATION
CONTROL
MODULE
+ (TDM BUS)
9/1/00 68P81094E78-A 11
9.6KBPS(ASTRO) MODEM DATA SIGNAL PATHS

(1 OF 2 CIRCUITS SHOWN)
JU1010
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR (CLN6956) (PLACED IN 4-WIRE
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR POSITION)
(CLN6956, CLN6958)
LINE 1 AUDIO JUMPER JUMPER BUFFER

TO STATION
MICROPROCESSOR
DATA
SERIAL BUS TO/FROM
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR (CLN6956) STATION
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR MODEM CONTROL
ON STATION BACKPLANE GAIN CONTROL
AMPLIFIER VIA
FROM PASIC
HDLC BUS
+
FIELD FIELD
FROM STATION
TO LANDLINE
2-POLE GAIN
AMPLIFIER LOW-PASS ADJUST
FILTER CIRCUITRY
Figure 5. 9.6kbps (ASTRO) Modem Data Signal Path Functional Block Diagram
12KBPS SECURENET MODEM DATA SIGNAL PATHS

(1 OF 2 CIRCUITS SHOWN)
JU1010
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR (CLN6956) (PLACED IN 4-WIRE
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR POSITION
(CLN6956, CLN6958)
ON STATION BACKPLANE SERIAL DATA
3-POLE
LO-PASS
BUFFER FILTER LIMITER
TO STATION
MICROPROCESSOR
DATA BUS DATA

PERIPHERAL TO/FROM
50-PIN TELCO CONNECTOR (CLN6956) STATION
ASIC
OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CONTROL
ON STATION BACKPLANE AMPLIFIER GAIN CONTROL VIA
FROM PASIC HDLC BUS
+
FIELD FIELD
FROM STATION
TO LANDLINE
GAIN 3-POLE SERIAL DATA
AMPLIFIER ADJUST LOW-PASS
CIRCUITRY FILTER

Figure 6. 12kbps SECURENET Modem Data Signal Path Functional Block Diagram
12 68P81094E78-A 9/1/00
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
INCLUDES MODELS:
CPN1049A (265W w/o Battery Charger; AC Input)
CPN1050B (265W with Battery Charger; AC Input)
1 DESCRIPTION
The Models CPN1049A/CPN1050B Power Supply Modules are described in this section. A general description,
performance specifications, identification of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram,
General Description
The Models CPN1049A/CPN1050B Power Supply Modules each ac
cept an ac input (90-264 V ac, 47-63 Hz) and generate +14.2V dc
and +5.1V dc operating voltages to power the station modules. Each
power supply module is comprised of three circuit boards which pro
vide several switchingtype power supply circuits, power factor correc
tion circuitry, battery charger/revert circuitry (CPN1050B only), and
diagnostics and monitoring circuitry, all contained within a slidein
module housing.
The power supply module provides the following features:
Autoranging for input voltage and frequency circuitry
automatically adjusts for input ranges of 90-264 V ac and
47-63 Hz; no jumpers, switches, or other settings are required
Input transient and EMI protection MOV, gas discharge,
and filter devices protect the power supply circuitry from ac line
voltage transients and electromagnetic interference
Internal voltage and current limiting circuitry continually
monitors critical voltages and currents and shuts supply down
if preset thresholds are exceeded
Temperature protection module contains builtin cooling
fan; supply shuts down if temperature exceeds preset threshold
Diagnostic monitoring critical internal parameters are con
tinually monitored and reported to the Station Control Module,
which can automatically provide correction for certain operating
conditions

Quantar Station Products Functional Manual
General Description
(continued)
Fan Failure Protection Power Supply enters shutdown
mode in event of cooling fan failure
Battery Reverse Polarity Protection Charger circuitry is pro
tected against connecting the external battery in reverse polarity
(CPN1050 only)
Auto Switchover to/from Battery If AC input fails, station is
automatically switched over to battery operation; when AC input
is restored, station is automatically switched back to power sup
ply operation (CPN1050 only)
Auto Recovery from Shutdown Power Supply automatically
recovers from shutdown mode if the cause of the shutdown no
longer exists
SoftwareControlled Battery Charging Voltage The battery
charging voltage and current is controlled based on the ambient
temperature (CPN1050 only)
Limited InRush Current Circuitry limits inrush current to
less than 30 A in all conditions
The Models CPN1049A and CPN1050B differ only in the inclusion of
battery charger/revert board (CPN1050B only). Unless otherwise
noted, the information provided in this section applies to both models.
Power Supply Module

Simplified Block Diagram
The illustration below provides a simplified block diagram of a Power
Supply Module (with battery charger) showing how the three circuit
boards interconnect. A detailed block diagram and functional theory
of operation for each board is provided later in this section (beginning
on page 8).
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

+5 V DC
+400 V DC DCTODC SUPPLY VOLTAGES

AC INPUT ACTODC
CONVERTER TO
50-60 HZ CONVERTER
BOARD BOARD STATION MODULES
110V/220V AC +14 V DC VIA BACKPLANE
BATTERY CONNECTS TO
CHARGER/REVERT EXTERNAL
BOARD BATTERY
CHARGING CURRENT
REVERT CURRENT
2 68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
CPN1049A/CPN1050B 265W Power Supply Modules
The power supply module is comprised of three circuit boards, con
nected together via cables. These boards contain circuitry as follows:
ACtoDC Converter Board (CPN6065B)

Input Conditioning Circuitry consists of ac line transient
protection, EMI filtering, front panel on/off switch, startup
delayed relay, and a fullwave rectifier.
Startup Delay Circuitry provides a delay of approximately
1.5 seconds from time on/off switch is turned on until the power
supply becomes functional (allows precharge of highcapacity
filter capacitors to limit inrush current on power up).
Boost/Power Factor Correction Circuitry consists of
switchingtype power supply that generates +400V dc for use
by DCtoDC Converter Board, as well as providing power factor
correction.
Battery Revert Trigger Circuitry Monitors +400 V dc and
generates a signal to the Battery Charger/Revert Board to acti
vate battery revert if the +400 V dc fails or drops below approxi
mately +350 V dc.
VCC Supply Circuitry consists of switchingtype power sup
ply that generates the VCC supply voltage (approximately +13V
dc) for use by circuitry on ACtoDC Converter Board and DCto
DC Converter Board.
DCtoDC Converter Board (CPN6079B)

+14 V Supply Circuitry consists of switchingtype power
supply that generates the +14 V dc supply voltage and provides
primary/secondary isolation.
+5 V Supply Circuitry consists of switchingtype power sup
ply that generates the +5 V dc supply voltage (from +14 V dc
supply voltage).
Battery Charger Control Circuitry Provides buffering for sig
nals related to battery charging/revert operation.
Reference Voltage Circuitry Generates +10V_SEC and
+2.5V_SEC supply voltages for use by local circuitry.
Diagnostics Circuitry converts analog status signals to digi
tal format for transfer to Station Control Module.
Address Decode Circuitry performs address decoding to
provide chip select signal for the A/D converter.
Startup/Shutdown Control Circuitry Provides delay inter
vals for startup and shutdown of entire power supply module.
68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
3
(Continued)
Battery Charger/Revert Board (CPN6074A)
Charger Supply Circuitry consists of switchingtype power
supply that generates charging current for the external storage
battery.
Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry consists of pulsewidth
modulator, boost switch timer, and driver circuitry to provide vari
ablewidth pulses for the FET switches in the Charger Supply
Circuitry.
Battery Revert Circuitry consists of signal monitoring circuit
ry which turns on the Battery Revert FET Switches for certain in
put signal conditions (such as AC Fail).
Current Mode Controller Circuitry consists of current and
voltage feedback signal monitoring circuitry which controls the
Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry to maintain the desired charger
output current and voltage.
SPI Bus Interface Circuitry consists of a D/A converter
which accepts charger control digital signals from the Station
Control Module and converts these signals to analog dc volt
ages to control various operating characteristics of the battery
charger circuitry.
Shutdown Circuitry consists of signal monitoring circuitry
which shuts down the battery charger for certain input signal
conditions (such as loss of BATT_WATCHDOG signal from the
Station Control Module).
Local Supplies Circuitry Accepts +14V_RAW (from DCto
DC Converter Board) and generates VCC (+10V) and +5V sup
ply voltages for use by local circuitry.
4 68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
5
2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Models CPN1049A and CPN1050B Power Supply
Modules.
Performance Specifications
Table 1.CPN1049A/CPN1050B Power Supply Modules

Parameter Specification
Weight 6.5 kg (14.3 lbs)
Operating Temperature Range -30 to +60 C (no derating)
Input Voltage Range 90 to 264 V ac
Input Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
Maximum Input Current 8.5 A
+14.2 V dc 5%
Steady State Output Voltages
+5.0 V dc 5%
+14.2 12.5 A
Output Current Ratings
+5.1 9A
265W*
Total Output Power Rating
* including 100W for battery charger
All outputs 150 mV p-p (measured

Output Ripple with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at
25C).
6 68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
Figure 1 shows the power supply module controls, indicators, and all input and output external connections.
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

FRONT PANEL
MODULE FAIL
LED
POWER ON
LED
STATION
ON/OFF
SWITCH
REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

AC INPUT CONNECTOR
(BLIND MATES WITH
AC CONNECTOR ON
BACKPLANE
BATTERY CHARGER
OUTPUT CONNECTOR
(CPN1050)
OR
EXTERNAL CHARGER CONNECTOR
(CPN1049)
Figure 1. CPN1049A/CPN1050B Power Supply Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs
68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
7

(ACtoDC Converter Board)
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6065B ACtoDC Converter Board circuitry
at a functional level. The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the func
tions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Refer
to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the ACtoDC Converter Board.
Input Conditioning Circuitry

Introduction
The ACtoDC Converter Board accepts ac power from an external
source, typically a 110V or 220/240V ac wall receptacle. AC power is
connected to the board via a 3wire line cord plugged into an ac recep
tacle mounted on the station backplane, into which the entire power
supply module slides (blind mate connection).
Transient and EMI Protection

The ac line input is fed to the ACtoDC Converter Board circuitry via
transient protection and EMI filter circuits. The transient protection de
vices provide protection against voltage spikes by providing an effec
tive short to ground under high voltage transient conditions. The EMI
filter prevents electrical noise generated by the power supply module
from interfering with other equipment connected to the same ac line cir
cuit.
Front Panel On-Off Switch / Relay Circuitry

A rockertype switch located on the power supply module front panel
allows the power supply (and station) to be turned on and off. Note that
the switch allows the filter circuitry (p/o Boost/Power Factor Correction
Circuitry) to slowly charge ( for approximately 1.5 seconds after switch
is turned on) through two diodes and resistors. After the 1.5 second
delay, the relay turns on and provides an ac input to the bridge rectifier.
This 1.5 second precharge delay period limits inrush current through
the filter capacitors upon power up.
Rectifier Circuitry
The ac line voltage (via the relay) is rectified by a fullwave bridge rectifi
er and fed to the Boost/Power Factor Correction Circuitry.
Startup Delay Circuitry

This circuitry monitors the ac input (from the on/off switch) and pro
vides a 1.5 second delay when switch is turn on before energizing the
relay to turn on the power supply.
If the AC input is below approximately 85 V rms, the relay will not be
turned on and the power supply outputs will be disabled. The red
Module Fail LED on the front panel will light.
8 68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
Boost/Power Factor
Correction Circuitry
Overview
The Boost/Power Factor Correction Circuitry is comprised of a switch
ingtype power supply which generates a +400 V dc voltage. This volt
age is fed to the DCtoDC Converter Board to be used as the source
for the +14V and +5V Supply Circuits.
Switching Power Supply Operation

The switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator
(PWM) running at 67 kHz. The PWM output pulses are fed through driv
er transistors to control three power FETs which rapidly switch the To
roid Power Coil to ground. The result is a high induced current which
charges the filter capacitors to approximately 400 V dc.
Note that the PWM output pulses are also controlled by voltage and
current feedback signals. These feedback signals allow the average ac
line current over switching cycles to be sinusoidal and inphase with
the ac input voltage (i.e., power factor corrected).
Battery Revert Trigger

Circuitry
A comparator monitors the +400 V dc from the output of the Boost/
Power Factor Correction Circuitry and a +5V reference signal. If the
+400 V dc voltage should drop below approximately +350 V dc (con
sidered an ac input failure), a BOOST_LOW signal is sent to the Battery
Charger/Revert Board (via the DCtoDC Converter Board) to activate
battery revert mode.
VCC Supply Circuitry

This circuitry consists of a switchingtype power supply which gener
ates a +13 V dc supply voltage used as VCC by the local circuitry and
the primary side of the DCtoDC Converter Board.
The circuitry consists of a pulse width modulator (PWM) running at
67 kHz (from DCtoDC Converter Board). The PWM output repetitively
gates the +400 V dc (from the Boost/Power Factor Correction Circuitry)
to the primary of the housekeeping transformer. The result is an in
duced voltage in the secondary winding which feeds a halfwave rectifi
er circuit. The output is a +13 V dc VCC supply voltage.
68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
9
LED Status Indicators

Two LEDs located on the power supply module front panel indicate
module status as follows:
AC On lights GREEN when On/Off switch is On and the AC in
put voltage is within operating range; LED turns off when module
is turned off, ac power is removed, or AC input voltage is below
approximately 85 V rms.
Module Fail lights RED when initially turning on or off the Pow
er Supply (this is normal and does not indicate a failure) or when
the DCtoDC Converter Board is not functioning properly; LED
turns off when module is functioning properly
NoteWhen in Battery Revert Mode (CPN1050 only), neither

LED is lit. The cooling fan will continue to run.
10 68P81096E09-O
11/15/99

(DCtoDC Converter Board)
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6079B DCtoDC Converter Board circuitry
to Figure 3 for a block diagram of the DCtoDC Converter Board.
+14V Main Supply Circuitry

Overview
The +14V Main Supply Circuitry is comprised of two mirrored switch
ingtype power supplies which generate the +14 V supply voltage. This
voltage is used as the source for the +5V supply circuit, as well as the
+14V supply voltage for the station modules (via the backplane) and

The +14V Main Supply Circuitry consists of two identical switching
type power supplies operating in parallel. Both supplies operate identi
cally, as follows. A 133 kHz clock signal from the Sync Generator Cir
cuitry is fed through a buffer to a Pulse Width Modulator (PWM). The
PWM output pulses control a pair of power FETS (via a driver) to gate
the +400 V dc (from the ACtoDC Converter Board) to the primary of
a power transformer. The induced voltage in the transformer secondary
is halfwave rectified to charge the output filter circuitry, resulting in an
output voltage of +14 V dc.
Since each supply receives a 133 kHz clock signal that is 180 out of
phase with the other, each switching power supply alternately charges
the output filter circuitry, resulting in an effective charging rate of
266 kHz.
Protection Circuitry
Peak/Average Current Limiting Circuitry The peak current limiting
circuitry accepts an output current feedback signal and a scaled
+14V_RAW reference signal to control the PWMs. This effectively
maintains a constant output voltage for varying output current de
mands.
The average current limiting circuitry monitors the +14 V dc output and
generates a shutdown signal (MAIN_SD_PRI) if the average output cur
rent reaches a predetermined limit.
Overvoltage Protection Circuitry This circuitry monitors the +14V
output voltage and generates a shutdown signal (MAIN_SD_SEC) to
shut down the entire power supply module if the +14 V output voltage
exceeds a preset threshold.
68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
11
+5 V Supply Circuitry
Overview
The +5 V Supply Circuitry is comprised of a switchingtype power sup
ply which generates a +5 V dc supply voltage. This voltage is used as
the +5 V supply voltage for the station modules (via the backplane).

The +5 V switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator
(PWM) running at 133 kHz. The PWM output pulses are fed through a
driver to control a power FET which repetitively gates the +14V_RAW
(from the +14V Main Supply Circuitry) to a power coil. The result is a
high induced voltage which charges the filter capacitors to approxi
mately +5 V dc. A current sense comparator provides a feedback sig
nal to the PWM to maintain a constant output voltage.
An overvoltage detect circuit monitors the output voltage and, if preset
thresholds are exceeded, turns on a FET crowbar circuit which im
mediately discharges the output to protect other modules in the sta
tion.
An overcurrent detect circuit monitors the current draw from the +5V
Supply Circuitry and, if a preset threshold is exceeded, generates a
MAIN_SD_SEC signal which shuts down the entire power supply mod
ule.
Battery Charger Control

Circuitry
The AC_FAIL signal (from the ACtoDC Converter Board) is buffered
and fed to 1) the diagnostics circuitry as AC_GOOD_DIAG, and 2) the
Battery Charger/Revert Board as BATTERY_REVERT. This signal acti
vates battery revert mode.
Reference Voltage Circuitry

This circuitry accepts +14V_RAW (from the +14V Main Supply Circuit
ry) and generates +10V_SEC and +2.5V_SEC supply voltages for use
by local circuitry.
12 68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
Diagnostics Circuitry
Overview
The diagnostics circuitry consists of an 11channel A/D converter
which converts analog status signals from critical points in the power
supply module to digital format for transfer to the Station Control Mod
ule via the SPI bus. Most of the status signals are generated by detect
circuits to indicate the status of dc supply voltages and references.
Temperature Monitor and Control Circuitry

A thermistor mounted on the power supply module heatsink provides
a varying resistance input to the Heatsink Temp Detect Circuitry. If the
heatsink temperature exceeds a preset limit, the circuitry generates a
MAIN_SD_SEC shutdown signal which shuts down the entire power
supply module. A HEATSINK_DIAG signal is also sent to the Station
Control Module via the A/D converter and SPI bus.
Fan Monitor and Control Circuitry

The cooling fan in the power supply module is powered from the +14V
Supply Circuitry and runs continuously. If the fan fails, the Fan Fault De
tect circuit generates a fail signal (FAN_FAIL_DIAG) which is fed to the
A/D converter. The fail signal also triggers a 50 second delay circuit
which (after 50 seconds) generates a MAIN_SD_SEC signal which
shuts down the entire power supply.

The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Module to use
the address bus to select either the D/A converter (Battery Charger/Re
vert Board) or the A/D converter (Diagnostics Circuitry) for communica
tions via the SPI bus. Typical communications include reading status
signals from the Diagnostics Circuitry and providing charger output
control signals to the Battery Charger/Revert Board.
68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
13
Startup/Shutdown Control
Circuitry
Shutdown Delay Circuitry
Upon receiving a shutdown signal (MAIN_SD_PRI) from the +14V Main
Supply Circuitry, this circuit passes the signal through the Soft Start Cir
cuitry for a 1 second interval to allow the entire power supply module
to shutdown. The module then restarts (if the on/off switch is in On posi
tion). If the MAIN_SD_PRI signal is still active, the shutdown process
will repeat.
Startup/Shutdown Delay Circuitry

When the power supply module is first turned on, the RELAY_ON sig
nal is low and the output of the Startup/Shutdown Delay Circuitry keeps
the supply in shutdown mode. After about 1.5 seconds RELAY_ON
goes high, and the Startup/Shutdown Delay Circuitry provides a 1 se
cond delay before releasing the shutdown signal and allowing the pow
er supply to operate.
When the power supply module is turned off, the RELAY_ON signal
goes low and the Startup/Shutdown Delay Circuitry keeps the supply
in operating mode for 1 second to allow Battery Revert Mode to acti
vate.
Soft Start Circuitry

Each time the Soft Start Circuitry receives a startup signal (i.e.,
MAIN_SD_PRI is inactive and the output of the Startup/Shutdown
Delay Circuitry is high), the Soft Start Circuitry provides a gradually in
creasing output signal to soft start" the Pulse Width Modulators (p/o
+14V Main Supply Circuitry). This action minimizes the surge current
when charging the output filter capacitors.
14 68P81096E09-O
11/15/99

(Battery Charger/Revert Board)
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6074A Battery Charger/Revert Board circuitry
to Figure 4 for a block diagram of the Battery Charger/Revert Board.
NoteModel CPN1049A Power Supply Modules (without battery charging capabilities) are equipped with a
CPN6078A External Charger Connect Board in place of the CPN6074A Battery Charger/Revert Board. The External
Charger Connect Board provides a direct electrical path from the +14V Main Supply Circuitry (p/o the DCtoDC
Converter Board) to the card edge connector used to connect to an external charger and battery. The external char
ger is responsible for 1) charging the external battery and 2) detecting an AC power fail condition and initiating
Charger Supply Circuitry

Overview
The Charger Supply Circuitry is comprised of a switchingtype power
supply which generates the charging current necessary to charge an
external storage battery.

The charger switching power supply accepts +14V (from the DCto
DC Converter Board) which is fed through a filter and a Buck FET
Switch to a Power Coil. This coil is controlled by the Buck FET Switch
and a Boost FET Switch to produce an induced output voltage of
approximately +12 to +16 V dc. This charging voltage is filtered and
fed through a pair of Reverse Battery FET Switches to the output termi
nals (card edge connector that extends from the rear of the Power Sup
ply Module). Connections to an external storage battery are made to
this card edge connector.
Protection against connecting the battery in reverse polarity is provided
by the Charger Output Control Circuitry and the Reverse Battery FET
Switches.
A thermistor mounted near the battery and connected to the station via
a backplane connector provides an input to a comparator. The
comparator output (BATT_T_DIAG) provides a dc voltage proportional
to the battery temperature. This signal is sent to the Station Control
Module via the Diagnostics Circuitry on the DCtoDC Converter Board.
68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
15
Pulse Width Modulator

Circuitry
A 133 kHz clock signal (from the DCtoDC Converter Board) is fed
through a buffer/driver to a Pulse Width Modulator (PWM). The 133 kHz
PWM output pulses are fed 1) directly to the Buck FET Switch via a driv
er, and 2) to the Boost FET Switch via a Boost Switch Timer and Driver.
The two signals control the respective FET switches to control the Pow
er Coil in the Charger Supply Circuitry so that it produces an approxi
mately +12 to +16 V dc output to be filtered and charge the external
battery.
Battery Revert Circuitry

Overview
The Battery Revert Circuitry accepts various inputs and determines
when to activate battery revert mode by turning on the Battery Revert
FET Switches. Battery Revert Mode will be activated or deactivated in
the following conditions:
If the AC_FAIL signal (from the DCtoDC Converter Board) goes
low (indicating that AC power has failed), the Battery Revert FET
Switches will be turned on (via the FET Driver).
If the battery voltage is too low, the Undervoltage Detect circuit
detects the condition and disables the battery revert circuitry.
If the battery voltage is too high, the Overvoltage Detect circuit
detects the condition and disables the battery charger and the
battery revert circuitry.
If a fault condition exists (e.g., +5V Overcurrent), the shutdown
detect circuitry detects the condition and disables the battery
charger and the battery revert circuitry.
Current Mode Controller

Circuitry
Overview
The Current Mode Controller Circuitry performs two major functions:
The PWR_CUT signal (from the DCtoDC Converter Board) is
fed through a Voltage Scaling Circuit and reduces the battery
charger output current during periods of heavy current draw by
the station.
The Voltage Scaling Circuitry accepts V_BC_RAW (voltage feed
back signal from battery) and BATT_VOLT_RANGE and
BATT_VOLT_SELECT signals (from the Station Control Module
via the D/A Converter) which combine to set the charger output
voltage (in a range of +12 V dc to +16 V dc).
16 68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
SPI Bus Interface Circuitry

This circuitry consists of a D/A Converter that accepts digital signals
from the Station Control Module and converts them to analog signals
which control the operation of the Battery Charger/Revert Board.
These signals:
Control the charger voltage to the battery (BATT_VOLT_RANGE
and BATT_VOLT_SELECT)
Disable the Undervoltage Detect Circuitry (UVLO_DISABLE) to
allow the station to continue operation even though the battery
voltage is below the desired level
Provide a watchdog signal to refresh the Watchdog Timer Cir
cuitry (BATT_WATCHDOG)
Shutdown Circuitry
This circuitry accepts four input signals and generates a shutdown sig
nal to shut down the battery charger for certain input signal conditions,
A shutdown signal will be generated for any of the following conditions:
The BATT_WATCHDOG signal (from the Station Control Mod
ule) is not present (indicating that the Station Control Module
has failed, or the station's Battery Type field has been pro
grammed (via RSS) for NONE"
The OVLO_LCKOUT signal is high (indicating that the battery
voltage is too high)
The MAIN_SD_SEC signal is low (indicating that one of the vari
ous monitoring points indicates a fault, such as overcurrent
condition for +14V or +5 V supplies, overcurrent condition for
entire Power Supply Module, etc.
The AC_FAIL signal is high (indicating that the AC power to the
Power Supply Module has been interrupted)
Local Supplies Circuitry

This circuitry contains two voltage regulators which accept +14V_RAW
(from the +14V Main Supply Circuitry) and generate VCC (+10 V dc)
and +5 V supply voltages for use by local circuitry.
68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
17
18 68P81096E09-O
11/15/99
CPN1049A/CPN1050B Power Supply Modules
INPUT CONDITIONING CIRCUITRY
FRONT PANEL
ON / OFF SWITCH
BOOST / POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CIRCUITRY

RELAY APPROX.400 VDC
FULL WAVE
BRIDGE RECTIFIER TOROID 400 VDC
POWER COIL
AC INPUT TRANSIENT/EMI FILTER

50-60 HZ PROTECTION CIRCUITRY
110V/220V AC CIRCUITRY
INPUT OUTPUT
VOLTAGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE
SENSE CURRENT SENSE
VCC SENSE
OUTPUT
A CURRENT
A
A DETECT
STARTUP DELAY CIRCUITRY
VCC
+5V REF
AC MONITOR 67 KHZ
CIRCUITRY 1.5 SECOND
TIMER RELAY ON SYNC PULSE
FROM WIDTH
DCTODC BOARD MODULATOR 67 KHZ
A
V_OUT_SNS
V_IN_SNS DRIVER POWER FET
I_OUT_SNS TRANSISTORS TRANSISTORS
VCC
AC ON
(GREEN)
VCC VCC SUPPLY CIRCUITRY
MODULE
SD_MAIN FAIL VCC 400 VDC
FROM DRIVER (RED)
DCTODC TRANSISTOR
CONVERTER
BOARD
SYNC 67 KHZ
BATTERY REVERT TRIGGER CIRCUITRY FROM
HOUSEKEEPING
DCTODC
CONVERTER PULSE TRANSFORMER APPROX.+13 VDC
BOARD WIDTH VCC
MODULATOR
67 KHZ
+400 VDC BOOST_LOW
COMPARATOR TO
+5V REF BATTERY CHARGER
BOARD
Figure 2. CPN6065B ACtoDC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram
11/15/99 68P81096E09-O 19
MAIN_SD_PRI
+14V MAIN SUPPLY CIRCUITRY
E
VCC_PRI 400 VDC
VCC_PRI (FROM ACTODC BOARD)
VCC_PRI P/O
BACKPLANE
F
SHUTDOWN 1 SYNC_SEC
CONNECTOR
133 KHZ 133 KHZ
C
POWER 4
PULSE DRIVER
BUFFER FETS +14 VDC 5 +14V DC
WIDTH
TO
MODULATOR
I_SENSE 1 STATION
+5V_REF 1
MODULES
PEAK CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUITRY 22 VIA
23 BACKPLANE
133KHZ +14V_RAW V_GATE_1

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION CIRCUITRY
BUFFER/
AMPLIFIER
SYNC
+14V_RAW BUFFER/
GENERATOR 133KHZ BUFFER/ FILTER FILTER
CIRCUITRY ISOLATION PEAK/AVERAGE REF ISOLATION
CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY +14V
CURRENT
B
POWER_CUT_PRI
H DETECT
CIRCUITRY
D
MAIN_SD_SEC
266 KHZ
+14V_RAW
VCC_PRI 400 VDC
VCC_PRI V_GATE_2 VCC_PRI (FROM ACTODC BOARD)
I_SENSE 2
133 KHZ
VCC_SEC
PULSE DRIVER POWER
BUFFER WIDTH FETS
67 KHZ MODULATOR
2
H
SYNC_PRI 14V_DIAG
TO
ACTODC CONVERTER
BOARD
DIVIDEBY2
F
SHUTDOWN 2
G
5V_DIAG
+5V SUPPLY CIRCUITRY +14V_RAW
POWER
G
VCC_SEC COIL
+5V_RAW
FILTER
VCC_SEC
POWER FET
CIRCUITRY +5V
SWITCH
SYNC_SEC FET P/O
133 KHZ 133 KHZ BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
C BUFFER/
DRIVER
N/C 133 KHZ
PULSE
WIDTH DRIVER CURRENT
CROWBAR
CIRCUIT +5 V
24
25 +5V DC
MODULATOR SENSE TO
OVERVOLTAGE STATION
DETECT MODULES
30 VIA
REF 31 BACKPLANE
REF
CURRENT LIMIT MAIN_SD_SEC
+5V_REF
DETECT CIRCUITRY
D
Figure 3. CPN6079B DCtoDC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram (1 of 2)
20 68P81096E09-O 11/15/99
BATTERY CHARGER CONTROL CIRCUITRY STARTUP/SHUTDOWN CONTROL CIRCUITRY
VCC_PRI
SHUTDOWN 1
AC_GOOD_DIAG
AC_FAIL BUFFER/ISOLATION
G E
MAIN_SD_PRI 1SECOND
SHUTDOWN
DELAY
SOFT START
CIRCUITRY F
FROM CIRCUITRY BATTERY_REVERT CIRCUITRY SHUTDOWN 2
ACTODC TO
CONVERTER BATTERY
BOARD CHARGER/REVERT
BOARD VCC_PRI
1SECOND
RELAY_ON STARTUP/
FROM SHUTDOWN
ACTODC DELAY
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
BOARD
REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUITRY DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY

+5V_REF
+14V_RAW REGULATOR +10V_SEC +14V_RAW
MOD_FAIL_DIAG
D
MAIN_SD_SEC
50SECOND
FAN FAULT DELAY
+2.5V_SEC DETECT FAN_FAIL_DIAG
FAN_ON_DIAG
BATT_T_DIAG BATT_T_DIAG
FROM
BATTERY BATT_CH_V_DIAG BATT_CH_V_DIAG
CHARGER/REVERT
A/D SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS
BOARD
CONVERTER TO/FROM
3 STATION CONTROL
AC_GOOD_DIAG AC_GOOD_DIAG MODULE
14V 14V
G 14V_DIAG 14V_DIAG
5V_DIAG 5V_DIAG
+10V_SEC
THERMISTOR
MOUNTED ON
HEATSINK
T
MAIN_SD_SEC
ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY
HEATSINK TEMP
D
DETECT CIRCUITRY HEATSINK_DIAG
P/O ADDRESS BUS

FROM ADDRESS
STATION DECODE ENABLE ENABLE
CONTROL CIRCUITRY
BOARD 9
Figure 3.CPN6079B DCtoDC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram (2 of 2)
11/15/99 68P81096E09-O 21
CHARGER SUPPLY CIRCUITRY

V_BC_RAW
+14V_RAW
POWER
COIL D CARD EDGE
CONNECTOR
REVERSE +12 TO +16 V DC

FROM BUCK FILTER BATTERY
DCTODC FILTER FET CIRCUITRY FET SWITCHES
CONVERTER SWITCH
BOARD
BOOST
FET
SWITCH
I_SENSE
A
FET
DRIVER
BATT_T_DIAG
TO
AC_FAIL DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY REF
AC_FAIL
FROM ON DCTODC
CONVERTER BOARD
DCTODC
CONVERTER BOARD
CHARGER
THERMISTOR
T
OUTPUT
CONTROL MOUNTED NEAR
CIRCUITRY BATTERY
VA_OUT
B
+

BATTERY
BATTERY REVERT PATH TEMPERATURE
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR CIRCUITRY SENSOR CABLE
(CONNECTS TO
(THERMISTOR)
BACKPLANE)
VCC (+10V)
STORAGE
BATTERY
VCC (+10V)
133 KHZ
SYNC_SEC
133 KHZ PULSE
SYNC_SEC 133 KHZ WIDTH
FROM BUFFER/ MODULATOR BOOST 133 KHZ
SWITCH DRIVER
DCTODC DRIVER
CONVERTER TIMER
BOARD
LEGEND
E BATTERY CHARGE PATH
BATTERY REVERT PATH
BATTERY REVERT CIRCUITRY

AC_FAIL
FROM AC_FAIL BATTERY
DCTODC REVERT
CONVERTER BOARD FET
SWITCHES
F
UVLO_DISABLE
+5V REF UNDERVOLTAGE

DETECT
+5V FET
BUFFER DRIVER
REF
SCALED
BATT + BATT +
12/24 OVERVOLTAGE
BATTERY DETECT
RECOGNiTION
12/24 SELECT
FROM
DCTODC
CONVERTER REF
C
OVLO_LCKOUT
BOARD
Figure 4. CPN6074A Battery Charger/Revert Board Functional Block Diagram (1 of 2)
22 68P81096E09-O 11/15/99
CURRENT MODE CONTROLLER CIRCUITRY
FROM PWR_CUT VOLTAGE

DCTODC SCALING
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
BOARD
VA_OUT
B
D
V_BC_RAW
OPERATIONAL OPERATIONAL
SCALED AMPLIFIER
BATT + AMPLIFIER
BATT_VOLT_RANGE VOLTAGE
E
SCALING
CIRCUITRY +5V
BATT_VOLT_SELECT REF
I_SENSE
A
SPI BUS INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
BATT_VOLT_RANGE
BATT_VOLT_SELECT
SPI BUS SPI BUS D/A
TO/FROM CONVERTER
F
STATION CONTROL UVLO_DISABLE
MODULE 2
BATT_WATCHDOG
LOCAL SUPPLIES CIRCUITRY
+28V_RAW VCC
FROM REGULATOR
SHUTDOWN CIRCUITRY DCTODC (+10V)
CONVERTER
BOARD
BATT_WATCHDOG WATCHDOG
TIMER
REGULATOR +5V
CIRCUITRY
C
OVLO_LCKOUT
MAIN_SD_SEC INVERTER
FROM CIRCUITRY
DCTODC
CONVERTER
BOARD AC_FAIL
Figure 4. CPN6074A Battery Charger/Revert Board Functional Block Diagram (2 of 2)
11/15/99 68P81096E09-O 23
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
INCLUDES MODELS:
CPN1047A (625W w/o Battery Charger; AC Input)
CPN1048A (625W with Battery Charger; AC Input)
1 DESCRIPTION
The Models CPN1047A/CPN1048A Power Supply Modules are described in this section. A general description,
General Description
The Models CPN1047A/CPN1048A Power Supply Modules each ac
cept an ac input (90-264 V ac, 47-63 Hz) and generate +28.6V dc,
+14.2V dc, and +5.1V dc operating voltages to power the station mod
ules. Each power supply module is comprised of three circuit boards
which provide several switchingtype power supply circuits, power fac
tor correction circuitry, battery charger/revert circuitry (CPN1048A
only), and diagnostics and monitoring circuitry, all contained within a
slidein module housing.
Autoranging for input voltage and frequency circuitry
automatically adjusts for input ranges of 90-264 V ac and
47-63 Hz; no jumpers, switches, or other settings are required
Input transient and EMI protection MOV, gas discharge,
and filter devices protect the power supply circuitry from ac line
voltage transients and electromagnetic interference
conditions

General Description
(continued)
Battery Reverse Polarity Protection Charger circuitry is pro
tected against connecting the external battery in reverse polarity
(CPN1048 only)
Auto Switchover to/from Battery If AC input fails, station is
automatically switched over to battery operation; when AC input
is restored, station is automatically switched back to power sup
ply operation (CPN1048 only)
longer exists
SoftwareControlled Battery Charging Voltage The battery
charging voltage and current is controlled based on the ambient
temperature (CPN1048 only)
The Models CPN1047A and CPN1048A differ only in the inclusion of
battery charger/revert board (CPN1048A only). Unless otherwise
noted, the information provided in this section applies to both models.
Power Supply Module

Supply Module (with battery charger) showing how the three circuit
boards interconnect. A detailed block diagram and functional theory
of operation for each board is provided later in this section (beginning
on page 8).
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

+5 V DC
+400 V DC DCTODC +14 V DC SUPPLY VOLTAGES

AC INPUT ACTODC
CONVERTER TO
50-60 HZ CONVERTER
BOARD BOARD STATION MODULES
110V/220V AC +28 V DC
VIA BACKPLANE
BATTERY CONNECTS TO
CHARGER/REVERT EXTERNAL
BOARD BATTERY
CHARGING CURRENT
REVERT CURRENT
2 68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
CPN1047A/CPN1048A 625W Power Supply Modules
The power supply module is comprised of three circuit boards, con
ACtoDC Converter Board (CPN6065B)

Input Conditioning Circuitry consists of ac line transient
protection, EMI filtering, front panel on/off switch, startup
delayed relay, and a fullwave rectifier.
Startup Delay Circuitry provides a delay of approximately
1.5 seconds from time on/off switch is turned on until the power
supply becomes functional (allows precharge of highcapacity
filter capacitors to limit inrush current on power up).
Boost/Power Factor Correction Circuitry consists of
switchingtype power supply that generates +400V dc for use
by DCtoDC Converter Board, as well as providing power factor
correction.
Battery Revert Trigger Circuitry Monitors +400 V dc and
generates a signal to the Battery Charger/Revert Board to acti
vate battery revert if the +400 V dc fails or drops below approxi
mately +350 V dc.
VCC Supply Circuitry consists of switchingtype power sup
ply that generates the VCC supply voltage (approximately +13V
dc) for use by circuitry on ACtoDC Converter Board and DCto
DC Converter Board.
DCtoDC Converter Board (CPN6067A)

+28 V Main Supply Circuitry consists of switchingtype
power supply that generates the +28 V dc supply voltage and
provides primary/secondary isolation.
supply that generates the +14 V dc supply voltage (from +28 V
dc supply voltage).
ply that generates the +5 V dc supply voltage (from +28 V dc
supply voltage).
Battery Charger Control Circuitry Provides buffering for sig
nals related to battery charging/revert operation.
Startup/Shutdown Control Circuitry Provides delay inter
vals for startup and shutdown of entire power supply module.
68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
3
(Continued)
Battery Charger/Revert Board (CPN6074B)
Charger Supply Circuitry consists of switchingtype power
supply that generates charging current for the external storage
battery.
Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry consists of pulsewidth
modulator, boost switch timer, and driver circuitry to provide vari
ablewidth pulses for the FET switches in the Charger Supply
Circuitry.
Battery Revert Circuitry consists of signal monitoring circuit
ry which turns on the Battery Revert FET Switches for certain in
put signal conditions (such as AC Fail).
Current Mode Controller Circuitry consists of current and
voltage feedback signal monitoring circuitry which controls the
Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry to maintain the desired charger
output current and voltage.
SPI Bus Interface Circuitry consists of a D/A converter
which accepts charger control digital signals from the Station
Control Module and converts these signals to analog dc volt
ages to control various operating characteristics of the battery
charger circuitry.
Shutdown Circuitry consists of signal monitoring circuitry
which shuts down the battery charger for certain input signal
conditions (such as loss of BATT_WATCHDOG signal from the
Station Control Module).
Local Supplies Circuitry Accepts +28V_RAW (from DCto
DC Converter Board) and generates VCC (+10V) and +5V sup
ply voltages for use by local circuitry.
4 68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
5
Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Models CPN1047A and CPN1048A Power Supply
Modules.
Table 1.CPN1047A/CPN1048A Power Supply Modules

Input Voltage Range 90 to 264 V ac
Input Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
+28.6 V dc 5%
Steady State Output Voltages +14.2 V dc 5%
+5.0 V dc 5%
+28.6 12.5 A
Output Current Ratings +14.2 8A
+5.1 3A
625W*
* including 100W for battery charger

Output Ripple with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at
25C).
6 68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

FRONT PANEL
MODULE FAIL
LED
POWER ON
LED
STATION
ON/OFF
SWITCH
REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

AC INPUT CONNECTOR
(BLIND MATES WITH
AC CONNECTOR ON
BACKPLANE
BATTERY CHARGER
OUTPUT CONNECTOR
(CPN1048)
OR
EXTERNAL CHARGER CONNECTOR
(CPN1047)
Figure 1. CPN1047A/CPN1048A Power Supply Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs
68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
7

(ACtoDC Converter Board)
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6065B ACtoDC Converter Board circuitry
to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the ACtoDC Converter Board.

Introduction
The ACtoDC Converter Board accepts ac power from an external
source, typically a 110V or 220/240V ac wall receptacle. AC power is
connected to the board via a 3wire line cord plugged into an ac recep
tacle mounted on the station backplane, into which the entire power
supply module slides (blind mate connection).

The ac line input is fed to the ACtoDC Converter Board circuitry via
transient protection and EMI filter circuits. The transient protection de
vices provide protection against voltage spikes by providing an effec
tive short to ground under high voltage transient conditions. The EMI
filter prevents electrical noise generated by the power supply module
from interfering with other equipment connected to the same ac line cir
cuit.
Front Panel On-Off Switch / Relay Circuitry

the switch allows the filter circuitry (p/o Boost/Power Factor Correction
Circuitry) to slowly charge ( for approximately 1.5 seconds after switch
is turned on) through two diodes and resistors. After the 1.5 second
delay, the relay turns on and provides an ac input to the bridge rectifier.
This 1.5 second precharge delay period limits inrush current through
the filter capacitors upon power up.
Rectifier Circuitry
The ac line voltage (via the relay) is rectified by a fullwave bridge rectifi
er and fed to the Boost/Power Factor Correction Circuitry.
Startup Delay Circuitry

This circuitry monitors the ac input (from the on/off switch) and pro
vides a 1.5 second delay when switch is turn on before energizing the
relay to turn on the power supply.
If the AC input is below approximately 85 V rms, the relay will not be
turned on and the power supply outputs will be disabled. The red
Module Fail LED on the front panel will light.
8 68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
Boost/Power Factor
Correction Circuitry
Overview
The Boost/Power Factor Correction Circuitry is comprised of a switch
ingtype power supply which generates a +400 V dc voltage. This volt
age is fed to the DCtoDC Converter Board to be used as the source
for the +28V, +14V, and +5V Supply Circuits.

The switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator
(PWM) running at 67 kHz. The PWM output pulses are fed through driv
er transistors to control three power FETs which rapidly switch the To
roid Power Coil to ground. The result is a high induced current which
charges the filter capacitors to approximately 400 V dc.
Note that the PWM output pulses are also controlled by voltage and
current feedback signals. These feedback signals allow the average ac
line current over switching cycles to be sinusoidal and inphase with
the ac input voltage (i.e., power factor corrected).
Battery Revert Trigger

Circuitry
A comparator monitors the +400 V dc from the output of the Boost/
Power Factor Correction Circuitry and a +5V reference signal. If the
+400 V dc voltage should drop below approximately +350 V dc (con
sidered an ac input failure), a BOOST_LOW signal is sent to the Battery
Charger/Revert Board (via the DCtoDC Converter Board) to activate
VCC Supply Circuitry

This circuitry consists of a switchingtype power supply which gener
ates a +13 V dc supply voltage used as VCC by the local circuitry and
the primary side of the DCtoDC Converter Board.
The circuitry consists of a pulse width modulator (PWM) running at
67 kHz (from DCtoDC Converter Board). The PWM output repetitively
gates the +400 V dc (from the Boost/Power Factor Correction Circuitry)
to the primary of the housekeeping transformer. The result is an in
duced voltage in the secondary winding which feeds a halfwave rectifi
er circuit. The output is a +13 V dc VCC supply voltage.
68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
9

AC On lights GREEN when On/Off switch is On and the AC in
put voltage is within operating range; LED turns off when module
is turned off, ac power is removed, or AC input voltage is below
approximately 85 V rms.
NoteWhen in Battery Revert Mode (CPN1048 only), neither

LED is lit. The cooling fan will continue to run.
10 68P81095E88-A
11/15/99

(DCtoDC Converter Board)
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6067A DCtoDC Converter Board circuitry
to Figure 3 for a block diagram of the DCtoDC Converter Board.
+28V Main Supply Circuitry

Overview
The +28V Main Supply Circuitry is comprised of two mirrored switch
ingtype power supplies which generate the +28 V supply voltage. This
voltage is used as the source for the +14V and +5V supply circuits, as
well as the +28V supply voltage for the station modules (via the back
plane) and

The +28V Main Supply Circuitry consists of two identical switching
type power supplies operating in parallel. Both supplies operate identi
cally, as follows. A 133 kHz clock signal from the Sync Generator Cir
cuitry is fed through a buffer to a Pulse Width Modulator (PWM). The
PWM output pulses control a pair of power FETS (via a driver) to gate
the +400 V dc (from the ACtoDC Converter Board) to the primary of
a power transformer. The induced voltage in the transformer secondary
is halfwave rectified to charge the output filter circuitry, resulting in an
output voltage of +28 V dc.
Since each supply receives a 133 kHz clock signal that is 180 out of
phase with the other, each switching power supply alternately charges
the output filter circuitry, resulting in an effective charging rate of
266 kHz.
mands.
generates a shutdown signal (MAIN_SD_PRI) if the average output cur
rent reaches a predetermined limit.
Overvoltage Protection Circuitry This circuitry monitors the +28V
output voltage and generates a shutdown signal (MAIN_SD_SEC) to
shut down the entire power supply module if the +28 V output voltage
exceeds a preset threshold.
68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
11

Overview
The +14 V Supply Circuitry is comprised of a switchingtype power
supply which generates a +14.2 V dc supply voltage. This voltage is
used as the +14.2 V supply voltage for the station modules (via the
backplane).

(from the +28V Main Supply Circuitry) to a power coil. The result is a
high induced voltage which charges the filter capacitors to approxi
mately +14.2 V dc. A current sense comparator provides a feedback
signal to the PWM to maintain a constant output voltage.
thresholds are exceeded, turns on a FET crowbar circuit which im
mediately discharges the output to protect other modules in the sta
tion.
MAIN_SD_SEC signal which shuts down the entire power supply mod
ule.
The +5 V Supply Circuitry operates identically to the +14 V Supply Cir
cuitry (described above) to generate a +5.1 V dc supply voltage. This
voltage is used as the +5 V supply voltage for the station modules (via
the backplane).
12 68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
Battery Charger Control

Circuitry
The POWER_CUT_PRI signal (from the Peak/Average Current Detect
Circuitry) is buffered and fed to the Battery Charger/Revert Board as
POWER_CUT_SEC. This signal reduces the current supplied by the
battery charger circuitry to divert maximum power to the power supply
outputs (+28V, +14V, and +5V) during times of heavy current draw.
The AC_FAIL signal (from the ACtoDC Converter Board) is buffered
and fed to 1) the diagnostics circuitry as AC_GOOD_DIAG, and 2) the
Battery Charger/Revert Board as BATTERY_REVERT. This signal acti
vates battery revert mode.

by local circuitry.
Overview

MAIN_SD_SEC shutdown signal which shuts down the entire power
Fan Monitor and Control Circuitry

The cooling fan in the power supply module is powered from the +14V
Supply Circuitry and runs continuously. If the fan fails, the Fan Fault De
tect circuit generates a fail signal (FAN_FAIL_DIAG) which is fed to the
A/D converter. The fail signal also triggers a 50 second delay circuit
which (after 50 seconds) generates a MAIN_SD_SEC signal which
shuts down the entire power supply.
68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
13

signals from the Diagnostics Circuitry and providing charger output
control signals to the Battery Charger/Revert Board.
Circuitry
Upon receiving a shutdown signal (MAIN_SD_PRI) from the +28V Main
Supply Circuitry, this circuit passes the signal through the Soft Start Cir
cuitry for a 1 second interval to allow the entire power supply module
to shutdown. The module then restarts (if the on/off switch is in On posi
tion). If the MAIN_SD_PRI signal is still active, the shutdown process
will repeat.
Startup/Shutdown Delay Circuitry

When the power supply module is first turned on, the RELAY_ON sig
nal is low and the output of the Startup/Shutdown Delay Circuitry keeps
the supply in shutdown mode. After about 1.5 seconds RELAY_ON
goes high, and the Startup/Shutdown Delay Circuitry provides a 1 se
cond delay before releasing the shutdown signal and allowing the pow
er supply to operate.
When the power supply module is turned off, the RELAY_ON signal
goes low and the Startup/Shutdown Delay Circuitry keeps the supply
in operating mode for 1 second to allow Battery Revert Mode to acti
vate.

MAIN_SD_PRI is inactive and the output of the Startup/Shutdown
Delay Circuitry is high), the Soft Start Circuitry provides a gradually in
creasing output signal to soft start" the Pulse Width Modulators (p/o
+28V Main Supply Circuitry). This action minimizes the surge current
when charging the output filter capacitors.
14 68P81095E88-A
11/15/99

(Battery Charger/Revert Board)
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6074B Battery Charger/Revert Board circuitry
to Figure 4 for a block diagram of the Battery Charger/Revert Board.
NoteModel CPN1047A Power Supply Modules (without battery charging capabilities) are equipped with a
CPN6078A External Charger Connect Board in place of the CPN6074B Battery Charger/Revert Board. The External
Charger Connect Board provides a direct electrical path from the +28V Main Supply Circuitry (p/o the DCtoDC
Converter Board) to the card edge connector used to connect to an external charger and battery. The external char
ger is responsible for 1) charging the external battery and 2) detecting an AC power fail condition and initiating
Charger Supply Circuitry

Overview
The Charger Supply Circuitry is comprised of a switchingtype power
supply which generates the charging current necessary to charge an
external storage battery.

The charger switching power supply accepts +28V (from the DCto
DC Converter Board) which is fed through a filter and a Buck FET
Switch to a Power Coil. This coil is controlled by the Buck FET Switch
and a Boost FET Switch to produce an induced output voltage of
approximately +21 to +31 V dc. This charging voltage is filtered and
fed through a pair of Reverse Battery FET Switches to the output termi
nals (card edge connector that extends from the rear of the Power Sup
ply Module). Connections to an external storage battery are made to
this card edge connector.
Protection against connecting the battery in reverse polarity is provided
by the Charger Output Control Circuitry and the Reverse Battery FET
Switches.
A thermistor mounted near the battery and connected to the station via
a backplane connector provides an input to a comparator. The
comparator output (BATT_T_DIAG) provides a dc voltage proportional
to the battery temperature. This signal is sent to the Station Control
Module via the Diagnostics Circuitry on the DCtoDC Converter Board.
68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
15
Pulse Width Modulator

Circuitry
A 133 kHz clock signal (from the DCtoDC Converter Board) is fed
through a buffer/driver to a Pulse Width Modulator (PWM). The 133 kHz
PWM output pulses are fed 1) directly to the Buck FET Switch via a driv
er, and 2) to the Boost FET Switch via a Boost Switch Timer and Driver.
The two signals control the respective FET switches to control the Pow
er Coil in the Charger Supply Circuitry so that it produces an approxi
mately +21 to +31 V dc output to be filtered and charge the external
battery.
Battery Revert Circuitry

Overview
The Battery Revert Circuitry accepts various inputs and determines
when to activate battery revert mode by turning on the Battery Revert
FET Switches. Battery Revert Mode will be activated or deactivated in
the following conditions:
If the AC_FAIL signal (from the DCtoDC Converter Board) goes
low (indicating that AC power has failed), the Battery Revert FET
Switches will be turned on (via the FET Driver).
If the battery voltage is too low, the Undervoltage Detect circuit
detects the condition and disables the battery revert circuitry.
If the battery voltage is too high, the Overvoltage Detect circuit
detects the condition and disables the battery charger and the
battery revert circuitry.
If a fault condition exists (e.g., +5V Overvurrent), the shutdown
detect circuitry detects the condition and disables the battery
charger and the battery revert circuitry.
Current Mode Controller

Circuitry
Overview
The Current Mode Controller Circuitry performs two major functions:
The PWR_CUT signal (from the DCtoDC Converter Board) is
fed through a Voltage Scaling Circuit and reduces the battery
charger output current during periods of heavy current draw by
the station.
The Voltage Scaling Circuitry accepts V_BC_RAW (voltage feed
back signal from battery) and BATT_VOLT_RANGE and
BATT_VOLT_SELECT signals (from the Station Control Module
via the D/A Converter) which combine to set the charger output
voltage (in a range of +21 V dc to +31 V dc).
16 68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
SPI Bus Interface Circuitry

This circuitry consists of a D/A Converter that accepts digital signals
from the Station Control Module and converts them to analog signals
which control the operation of the Battery Charger/Revert Board.
These signals:
Control the charger voltage to the battery (BATT_VOLT_RANGE
and BATT_VOLT_SELECT)
Disable the Undervoltage Detect Circuitry (UVLO_DISABLE) to
allow the station to continue operation even though the battery
voltage is below the desired level
Provide a watchdog signal to refresh the Watchdog Timer Cir
cuitry (BATT_WATCHDOG)
Shutdown Circuitry
This circuitry accepts four input signals and generates a shutdown sig
nal to shut down the battery charger for certain input signal conditions,
A shutdown signal will be generated for any of the following conditions:
The BATT_WATCHDOG signal (from the Station Control Mod
ule) is not present (indicating that the Station Control Module
has failed, or the station's Battery Type field has been pro
grammed (via RSS) for NONE"
The OVLO_LCKOUT signal is high (indicating that the battery
voltage is too high)
The MAIN_SD_SEC signal is low (indicating that one of the vari
ous monitoring points indicates a fault, such as overcurrent
condition for +14V or +5 V supplies, overcurrent condition for
entire Power Supply Module, etc.
The AC_FAIL signal is high (indicating that the AC power to the
Power Supply Module has been interrupted)
Local Supplies Circuitry

This circuitry contains two voltage regulators which accept +28V_RAW
(from the +28V Main Supply Circuitry) and generate VCC (+10 V dc)
and +5 V supply voltages for use by local circuitry.
68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
17
18 68P81095E88-A
11/15/99
CPN1047A/CPN1048A Power Supply Modules
INPUT CONDITIONING CIRCUITRY
FRONT PANEL
ON / OFF SWITCH
BOOST / POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CIRCUITRY

RELAY APPROX.400 VDC
FULL WAVE
BRIDGE RECTIFIER TOROID 400 VDC
POWER COIL
AC INPUT TRANSIENT/EMI FILTER

50-60 HZ PROTECTION CIRCUITRY
110V/220V AC CIRCUITRY
INPUT OUTPUT
VOLTAGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE
SENSE CURRENT SENSE
VCC SENSE
OUTPUT
A CURRENT
A
A DETECT
STARTUP DELAY CIRCUITRY
VCC
+5V REF
AC MONITOR 67 KHZ
CIRCUITRY 1.5 SECOND
TIMER RELAY ON SYNC PULSE
FROM WIDTH
DCTODC BOARD MODULATOR 67 KHZ
A
V_OUT_SNS
V_IN_SNS DRIVER POWER FET
I_OUT_SNS TRANSISTORS TRANSISTORS
VCC
AC ON
(GREEN)
VCC VCC SUPPLY CIRCUITRY
MODULE
SD_MAIN FAIL VCC 400 VDC
FROM DRIVER (RED)
DCTODC TRANSISTOR
CONVERTER
BOARD
SYNC 67 KHZ
BATTERY REVERT TRIGGER CIRCUITRY FROM
HOUSEKEEPING
DCTODC
CONVERTER PULSE TRANSFORMER APPROX.+13 VDC
BOARD WIDTH VCC
MODULATOR
67 KHZ
+400 VDC BOOST_LOW
COMPARATOR TO
+5V REF BATTERY CHARGER
BOARD
Figure 2. CPN6065B ACtoDC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram
11/15/99 68P81095E88-A 19
MAIN_SD_PRI
+28V MAIN SUPPLY CIRCUITRY
E
VCC_PRI 400 VDC
VCC_PRI (FROM ACTODC BOARD)
VCC_PRI P/O
BACKPLANE
F
SHUTDOWN 1 SYNC_SEC
CONNECTOR
133 KHZ 133 KHZ
BUFFER
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
DRIVER POWER
FETS C +28 VDC
4
5 +28V DC
TO
I_SENSE 1 STATION
+5V_REF 1
MODULES
PEAK CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUITRY 14 VIA
15 BACKPLANE
133KHZ +28V_RAW V_GATE_1

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION CIRCUITRY
BUFFER/
AMPLIFIER
SYNC
+28V_RAW BUFFER/
GENERATOR 133KHZ BUFFER/ FILTER FILTER
CIRCUITRY ISOLATION PEAK/AVERAGE REF ISOLATION
CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY +28V
CURRENT
B
POWER_CUT_PRI
H DETECT
CIRCUITRY
D
MAIN_SD_SEC
266 KHZ
+28V_RAW
VCC_PRI 400 VDC
VCC_PRI V_GATE_2 VCC_PRI (FROM ACTODC BOARD)
G
I_SENSE 2 14V_DIAG
133 KHZ
PULSE DRIVER POWER
BUFFER WIDTH FETS P/O
67 KHZ MODULATOR BACKPLANE
2 CONNECTOR
H
SYNC_PRI
TO
F
DIVIDEBY2 SHUTDOWN 2 16
ACTODC CONVERTER +14.2V DC
BOARD +14.2V 17
TO
STATION
MODULES
22 VIA
+14V SUPPLY CIRCUITRY +28V_RAW 23 BACKPLANE
VCC_SEC POWER
COIL
+14V_RAW
FILTER
POWER FET
CIRCUITRY +14V
+28V_RAW REGULATOR VCC_SEC SWITCH
FET
133 KHZ
+14V_RAW
VCC_SEC PULSE CROWBAR
WIDTH DRIVER CURRENT CIRCUIT
SYNC_SEC
MODULATOR SENSE
MAIN_SD_SEC
D
133 KHZ OVERVOLTAGE
133 KHZ DETECT
C BUFFER/
DRIVER
REF
REF
CURRENT LIMIT
DETECT CIRCUITRY
+5V_REF +5V_REF
5V_DIAG
POWER
G
VCC_SEC COIL
+5V_RAW
FILTER
POWER FET
CIRCUITRY +5V
SWITCH
FET P/O
133 KHZ BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
133 KHZ
PULSE CROWBAR 24
WIDTH DRIVER CURRENT 25 +5V DC
CIRCUIT +5 V TO
MODULATOR SENSE
OVERVOLTAGE STATION
DETECT MODULES
30 VIA
REF 31 BACKPLANE
REF
CURRENT LIMIT MAIN_SD_SEC
+5V_REF
DETECT CIRCUITRY
D
Figure 3. CPN6067A DCtoDC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram (1 of 2)
20 68P81095E88-A 11/15/99
BATTERY CHARGER CONTROL CIRCUITRY STARTUP/SHUTDOWN CONTROL CIRCUITRY
POWER_CUT_PRI POWER_CUT_SEC
B BUFFER/ISOLATION
CIRCUITRY
TO
BATTERY
CHARGER/REVERT
VCC_PRI
BOARD
SHUTDOWN 1
MAIN_SD_PRI 1SECOND
E SHUTDOWN
DELAY
CIRCUITRY
SOFT START
CIRCUITRY
SHUTDOWN 2 F
VCC_PRI
AC_GOOD_DIAG
AC_FAIL BUFFER/ISOLATION
G
FROM CIRCUITRY BATTERY_REVERT 1SECOND
ACTODC TO RELAY_ON STARTUP/
CONVERTER BATTERY FROM SHUTDOWN
BOARD CHARGER/REVERT ACTODC DELAY
BOARD CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
BOARD
REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUITRY DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY

+5V_REF
+28V_RAW REGULATOR +10V_SEC +14V_RAW
MOD_FAIL_DIAG
D
MAIN_SD_SEC
50SECOND
FAN FAULT DELAY
+2.5V_SEC DETECT FAN_FAIL_DIAG
FAN_ON_DIAG
BATT_T_DIAG BATT_T_DIAG
FROM
BATTERY BATT_CH_V_DIAG BATT_CH_V_DIAG
CHARGER/REVERT
A/D SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS
BOARD
CONVERTER TO/FROM
3 STATION CONTROL
AC_GOOD_DIAG AC_GOOD_DIAG MODULE
28V 28V
G 14V_DIAG 14V_DIAG
5V_DIAG 5V_DIAG
+10V_SEC
THERMISTOR
MOUNTED ON
HEATSINK
T
MAIN_SD_SEC
HEATSINK TEMP
D
P/O ADDRESS BUS

FROM ADDRESS
CONTROL CIRCUITRY
BOARD 9
Figure 3.CPN6067A DCtoDC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram (2 of 2)
11/15/99 68P81095E88-A 21
CHARGER SUPPLY CIRCUITRY

V_BC_RAW
+28V_RAW
POWER
COIL D CARD EDGE
CONNECTOR
REVERSE +21 TO +31 V DC

FROM BUCK FILTER BATTERY
DCTODC FILTER FET CIRCUITRY FET SWITCHES
CONVERTER SWITCH
BOARD
BOOST
FET
SWITCH
I_SENSE
A
FET
DRIVER
BATT_T_DIAG
TO
AC_FAIL DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY REF
AC_FAIL
FROM ON DCTODC
CONVERTER BOARD
DCTODC
CONVERTER BOARD
CHARGER
THERMISTOR
T
OUTPUT
CONTROL MOUNTED NEAR
CIRCUITRY BATTERY
VA_OUT
B
+

BATTERY
BATTERY REVERT PATH TEMPERATURE
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR CIRCUITRY SENSOR CABLE
(CONNECTS TO
(THERMISTOR)
BACKPLANE)
VCC (+10V)
STORAGE
BATTERY
VCC (+10V)
133 KHZ
SYNC_SEC
133 KHZ PULSE
SYNC_SEC 133 KHZ WIDTH
FROM BUFFER/ MODULATOR BOOST 133 KHZ
SWITCH DRIVER
DCTODC DRIVER
CONVERTER TIMER
BOARD
LEGEND
E BATTERY CHARGE PATH
BATTERY REVERT PATH
BATTERY REVERT CIRCUITRY

AC_FAIL
FROM AC_FAIL BATTERY
DCTODC REVERT
CONVERTER BOARD FET
SWITCHES
F
UVLO_DISABLE
+5V REF UNDERVOLTAGE

DETECT
+5V FET
BUFFER DRIVER
REF
SCALED
BATT + BATT +
12/24 OVERVOLTAGE
BATTERY DETECT
RECOGNiTION
12/24 SELECT
FROM
DCTODC
CONVERTER REF
C
OVLO_LCKOUT
BOARD
Figure 4. CPN6074B Battery Charger/Revert Board Functional Block Diagram (1 of 2)
22 68P81095E88-A 11/15/99
CURRENT MODE CONTROLLER CIRCUITRY
FROM PWR_CUT VOLTAGE

DCTODC SCALING
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
BOARD
VA_OUT
B
D
V_BC_RAW
OPERATIONAL OPERATIONAL
SCALED AMPLIFIER
BATT + AMPLIFIER
BATT_VOLT_RANGE VOLTAGE
E
SCALING
CIRCUITRY +5V
BATT_VOLT_SELECT REF
I_SENSE
A
SPI BUS INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
BATT_VOLT_RANGE
BATT_VOLT_SELECT
SPI BUS SPI BUS D/A
TO/FROM CONVERTER
F
STATION CONTROL UVLO_DISABLE
MODULE 2
BATT_WATCHDOG
LOCAL SUPPLIES CIRCUITRY
+28V_RAW VCC
FROM REGULATOR
SHUTDOWN CIRCUITRY DCTODC (+10V)
CONVERTER
BOARD
BATT_WATCHDOG WATCHDOG
TIMER
REGULATOR +5V
CIRCUITRY
C
OVLO_LCKOUT
MAIN_SD_SEC INVERTER
FROM CIRCUITRY
DCTODC
CONVERTER
BOARD AC_FAIL
Figure 4. CPN6074B Battery Charger/Revert Board Functional Block Diagram (2 of 2)
11/15/99 68P81095E88-A 23
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
INCLUDES MODELS:
TRN7802A (210W; 12/24V DC Input)
TRN7803A (210W; 48/60V DC Input)
1 DESCRIPTION
The Models TRN7802A/TRN7803A Power Supply Modules are described in this section. A general description,
all modules in the satellite receiver or station.)
General Description
The Model TRN7802A Power Supply Module accepts an input of either
12 V dc or 24 V dc, while the Model TRN7803A Power Supply Module ac
cepts an input of either 48 V dc or 60 V dc. Each module generates
+5V dc and +14.2V dc operating voltages to power the satellite receiv
er or station modules. Each power supply module is comprised of sev
eral switching-type power supply circuits and diagnostics and moni
toring circuitry, all contained within a slide-in module housing.
Internal voltage and current limiting circuitry continually moni
tors critical voltages and currents and shuts supply down if pre
set thresholds are exceeded
Temperature protection module contains built-in cooling fan
which is thermostatically controlled; supply shuts down if tem
perature exceeds preset threshold
Diagnostic monitoring critical internal parameters are contin
ually monitored and reported to the Station Control Module,
conditions
Front panel On/Off switch with built-in circuit breaker (30A for
TRN7802A, 10A for TRN7803A)
The Models TRN7802A and TRN7803A differ only in the required dc in
put voltage. Unless otherwise noted, the information provided in this
section applies to both models.

Printed in U.S.A.
Quantar Satellite Receiver and Station Products
1 DESCRIPTION (Continued)
The power supply module contains the following circuitry:
Startup Inverter Circuitry provides VCC for power supply cir
cuitry during initial power-up
Main Inverter Circuitry consists of switching-type power sup
ply that generates the +14.2V dc supply voltage
+5 V Inverter Circuitry consists of switching-type power sup
ply that generates the +5 dc supply voltage
Clock Generator Circuitry generates 267 kHz and 133 kHz
clock signals used by pulse width modulators in the three invert
er circuits
Diagnostics Circuitry converts analog status signals to digital
format for transfer to Station Control Module
Address Decode Circuitry performs address decoding to pro
vide chip select signals for the A/D and D/A converters
2 68P81085E12-B
9/1/00
TRN7802A/TRN7803A Power Supply Modules
Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Models TRN7802A and TRN7803A Power Supply
Modules.
Table 1.TRN7802A/TRN7803A Power Supply Modules

Operating Temperature Range -30 to +60 C
TRN7802A10.5 - 34.5 V dc
Input Voltage Range
TRN7803A41 - 72 V dc
+14.2 V dc 5%
+5.1 V dc 5%
+14.2 12.5 A
Output Current Ratings
+5.1 9 A
Total Output Power Rating no derating 225 W
with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at
25C).
High Frequency individual

Output Ripple
harmonic voltage limits in 10
kHz-100 MHz frequency band:
14.2 V 1.5 mV p-p

5V 5 mV p-p
Short Circuit Current 0.5 A avg. max
68P81085E12-B
9/1/00
3
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

FRONT PANEL
MODULE FAIL
LED
ON
LED
ON / OFF
SWITCH
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

DC INPUT CONNECTOR
REAR VIEW
Figure 1. Power Supply Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs
4 68P81085E12-B
9/1/00
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the power supply circuitry at a functional level. The
information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the
module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Refer to Figure 2 for a block
diagram of the power supply module.

Introduction
The power supply module accepts dc power from an external source,
typically a bank of storage batteries. DC power is connected to the
module via a 4-wire dc input cable mounted on the satellite receiver
or station backplane.

The dc input is fed to the power supply module circuitry via transient
protection and EMI filter circuits. The transient protection devices pro
vide protection against voltage spikes by providing an effective short
to ground under high voltage transient conditions. The EMI filter pre
vents electrical noise generated by the power supply module from in
terfering with other equipment connected to the same dc source.
Front Panel On-Off Switch and Breaker

A toggle-type switch located on the power supply module front panel
allows the power supply (and satellite receiver or station) to be turned
off by removing the dc input voltage. The switch controls a built-in cir
cuit breaker (rated at 30A for TRN7802A, 10A for TRN7803A) to provide
overload protection for the power supply and satellite receiver or sta
tion circuitry.
Startup Inverter Circuitry

This circuitry consists of a switching-type power supply which gener
ates a +12 V dc supply voltage used by the power supply module cir
cuitry as VCC at the time of initial power up. When all supply voltages
have stabilized, this circuit is overridden by +14.2 V BULK which con
tinues to supply VCC to the module circuitry.
The circuitry consists of a pulse width modulator (PWM) running at 133 kHz
(internal circuitry provides clock signal during initial power up). The PWM out
put pulses control a transistor switch which repetitively gates voltage (divided
down 400 V dc from the Input Conditioning Circuitry) to the primary of the
startup isolation transformer. The result is an induced voltage in the second
ary winding which feeds two half-wave rectifier circuits. One circuit provides
the +12 V dc Startup Bias voltage (used by the module circuitry as initial
VCC), and the other provides a BULK DETECT signal used by the Diagnos
tics Circuitry to generate the DC FAIL signal.
68P81085E12-B
9/1/00
5
Main Inverter Circuitry

Overview
The main inverter circuitry is comprised of a switching-type power
used as the source for the +5 V inverter circuit in the power supply
module, as well as the +14.2 V supply voltage for the satellite receiver
or station modules (via the backplane).

The main inverter switching power supply consists of a pulse width
modulator (PWM) running at 67 kHz. The PWM output pulses control
a power FET bridge which alternately gate the input dc voltage (from
the Input Conditioning Circuitry) to the primary of the main isolation
transformer. The result is an induced voltage in the secondary windings
of the transformer at 133 kHz rate.
Transformer Secondary Voltages

The main isolation transformer has two secondary windings, as fol
lows:
Module Fail Winding operates in conjunction with a half-
wave rectifier circuit to provide a dc signal (Mod Fail) to the A/D
converter (p/o Diagnostics Circuitry); indicates that the main in
verter circuitry is functioning properly.
+14.2 V Winding operates in conjunction with a full-wave
rectifier circuit to generate a +14.2 V dc supply voltage. Overcur
rent and overvoltage detect circuits monitor the circuit operation
and, if preset thresholds are exceeded, generate a shutdown
signal which is fed to the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main
inverter.
6 68P81085E12-B
9/1/00
+5 V Inverter Circuitry
Overview
The +5 V inverter circuitry is comprised of a switching-type power
supply which generates a +5 V dc supply voltage. This voltage is used
as the +5 V supply voltage for the satellite receiver or station modules
(via the backplane).

The +5 V inverter switching power supply consists of a pulse width
a power FET which repetitively gates the +14.2 V dc (from the Main In
verter Circuitry) to the filtering circuitry. The result is a +5 V dc supply
voltage.
thresholds are exceeded, generates a shutdown signal which is fed to
the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main inverter. Upon an overvol
tage detection, a FET crowbar circuit immediately discharges the out
put to protect other modules in the satellite receiver or station.
An overcurrent detect circuit monitors the current draw from the +5 V
inverter circuit and, if a preset threshold is exceeded, shuts down the
+5 V inverter. If the overcurrent condition lasts for a preset length (ap
prox. 50 msec), the surge current delay circuit generates a shutdown
signal which is fed to the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main invert
er.
68P81085E12-B
9/1/00
7
Overview
The diagnostics circuitry consists of a 11-channel A/D converter
which converts analog status signals from critical points in the module
to digital format for transfer to the Station Control Module via the SPI
bus. Most of the status signals are generated by detect circuits to indi
cate the status of dc supply voltages and references.

a varying resistance input to several detect and control circuits, as fol
lows:
Heatsink Status Detect compares signal from thermistor to
reference voltage to generate an output proportional to heatsink
temperature; signal is sent to Station Control Board via A/D con
verter and SPI bus.
Hi-Temp Detect compares signal from thermistor to refer
ence voltage to generate a high temperature signal if preset
threshold is exceeded; signal is sent to softstart circuitry to shut
down main inverter if overtemperature condition is detected.
Note: The cooling fan in the Power Supply
Module is thermostatically controlled and
Fan Control Circuitry compares signal from thermistor to ref
may come on at any time during satellite erence voltage to generate a fan control signal to turn on cooling
receiver or station operation. Failure of the fan mounted in power supply module; also generated is a FAN
fan to rotate continuously does not indi ON status signal which is sent to Station Control Board via A/D
cate a failure of the module. converter and SPI bus.
Note that a Fan Fault Detect circuit accepts a pulsed feedback

signal from the cooling fan to indicate whether the fan is function
ing (when turned on by Fan Control Circuitry); a FAN FAIL status
signal is sent to Station Control Board via A/D converter and SPI
bus
Status LED Indicators

On lights GREEN when power supply module is turned on and
functioning properly; LED turns off when module is turned off, in
put power is removed, or module startup circuitry is in fail mode
Module Fail lights RED when power supply module is in fail
mode, or when a failure in another station module causes exces
sive current drain on any of the power supply output voltages;
LED turns off when module is functioning properly

the address bus to select the A/D converter (Diagnostics Circuitry) for
communications via the SPI bus. Typical communications include
reading status signals from the Diagnostics Circuitry.
8 68P81085E12-B
9/1/00
9/1/00 68P81085E12-B 9
INPUT CONDITIONING CIRCUITRY MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY MAIN ISOLATION

TRANSFORMER
FRONT PANEL 67 KHZ
ON / OFF SWITCH
AND
CIRCUIT BREAKER
B
MOD FAIL
DC INPUT FILTER POWER FET
12/24 V DC CIRCUITRY SWITCHES
(TRN7802A) TRANSIENT/EMI REVERSE P/O
OR
48/60 V DC
(TRN7803A)
PROTECTION
CIRCUITRY
POLARITY
PROTECTION D +14.2V BULK
TO
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
+14.2V DC
DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY 4 TO
+14.2 VDC 5
FILTERING SATELLITE
CIRCUITRY RECEIVER
+14.2V OVERVOLTAGE OR
67 KHZ DETECT STATION
22 MODULES
23 VIA
REF
BACKPLANE
OVERCURRENT
CURRENT
+12V STARTUP BIAS

DETECT
REF
DETECT
A
+12V STARTUP BIAS +14.2V BULK
VCC
VCC
+5 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
SOFTSTART +5V DC
PULSE 24 TO
CIRCUITRY WIDTH TRANSISTOR
DRIVERS +5V +5V 25 SATELLITE
MODULATOR FILTER RECEIVER
POWER FET
SWITCH CIRCUITRY OR
A
SHUTDOWN STATION
VCC FET 30 MODULES
133 KHZ 31 VIA
BACKPLANE
VCC
67KHZ
PULSE CROWBAR
WIDTH FET +5V OVERCURRENT
DRIVER CIRCUIT
MODULATOR DETECT
OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
A
REF
SURGE CURRENT REF
STARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRY 133 KHZ DELAY
DC FAIL ALARM REF

TO
DC INPUT OPTO DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY
VCC REF DETECTORS COUPLER
A
DC FAIL ALARM
VCC
STARTUP ISOLATION +12V
PULSE TRANSFORMER STARTUP BIAS
WIDTH
MODULATOR
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH
133 KHZ
CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITRY 67KHZ
2
267KHZ 133 KHZ
CLOCK
GENERATOR 2
CIRCUITRY
267KHZ
Figure 2. 210W DC/DC Power Supply Module Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
10 68P81085E12-B 9/1/00
DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY REF
REF
MODULE
ON FAIL
B
MOD FAIL (RED)
(GREEN)
DC FAIL ALARM DC FAIL ALARM

FROM
STARTUP INVERTER
CIRCUITRY LO POWER ID
+14.2V BULK RIPPLE 14 RIPPLE

FROM DETECT
MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY
CIRCUITRY HEATSINK STATUS
DETECT
HEATSINK DIAG
REF
HI-TEMP
DETECT
REF A A/D SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS
FAN ON CONVERTER TO/FROM
3 STATION CONTROL
FAN CONTROL MODULE
+5V REF
FET
REF SWITCH COOLING DC ID
FAN
DC ID

T THERMISTOR
FAN FAIL
MOUNTED ON FAN FAULT
HEATSINK DETECT
+14.2V DIAG
FROM
DETECT +5V DIAG
CIRCUITRY
P/O ADDRESS BUS

FROM ADDRESS
CONTROL CIRCUITRY
BOARD 9
Figure 2.210W DC/DC Power Supply Module Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
9/1/00 68P81085E12-B 11
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Model TRN7801A (600W; 24 V DC Input)
1 DESCRIPTION
The Model TRN7801A Power Supply Module is described in this section. A general description, performance
specifications, identification of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional
the station.)
General Description
The Model TRN7801A Power Supply Module accepts an input of 24 V
dc and generates +28.6V dc, +5V dc, and +14.2V dc operating volt
ages to power the station modules. The power supply module is com
prised of several switchingtype power supply circuits and diagnostics
and monitoring circuitry, all contained within a slidein module housing.
Temperature protection module contains built-in cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled; supply shuts down if
temperature exceeds preset threshold
conditions
Front panel On/Off switch with builtin 50A circuit breaker

Industrial Solutions Sector 9/1/00-UP
Printed in U.S.A.
1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196
Quantar Station Products
1 DESCRIPTION (Continued)
The power supply module contains the following circuitry:
Startup Inverter Circuitry provides VCC for power supply cir
cuitry during initial power-up
Main Inverter Circuitry consists of switching-type power sup
ply that generates the +28V dc supply voltage
+14.2 V Inverter Circuitry consists of switching-type power
supply that generates the +14.2V dc supply voltage
+5 V Inverter Circuitry consists of switching-type power sup
ply that generates the +5 dc supply voltage
Clock Generator Circuitry generates 67 kHz and 133 kHz
clock signals used by pulse width modulators in the four inverter
circuits
Diagnostics Circuitry converts analog status signals to digital
format for transfer to Station Control Module
Address Decode Circuitry performs address decoding to pro
vide chip select signals for the A/D and D/A converters
2 68P81090E44-A
9/1/00
TRN7801A Power Supply Module
Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Model TRN7801A Power Supply Module.
Table 1.TRN7801A Power Supply Module

-30 to +45 C (no derating)
Operating Temperature Range
-30 to +60 C (derated)
Input Voltage Range 21.0- 34.5 V dc
Maximum Input Current 40A
+28.6 V dc 5% @ 16A
+28.6 V dc 5% @ 12.8A (derated)
+14.2 V dc 5% @ 9A
+5.1 V dc 5% @ 9A
+28.6 16A
+5.0 9A
no derating 630 W
derated 540 W
25C).
High Frequency individual harmonic

Output Ripple voltage limits in 10 kHz-100 MHz
frequency band:
28.6V 1.5 mV p-p

14.2 V 3.0 mV p-p
5V 5.0 mV p-p
Short Circuit Current 0.5 A avg. max
68P81090E44-A
9/1/00
3
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

FRONT PANEL
MODULE FAIL
LED
ON
LED
ON / OFF
SWITCH
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

DC INPUT CONNECTOR
REAR VIEW
Figure 1. Power Supply Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs
4 68P81090E44-A
9/1/00
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the power supply circuitry at a functional level. The
diagram of the power supply module.

Introduction
The power supply module accepts dc power from an external source,
typically a bank of storage batteries. DC power is connected to the
module via a 4-wire dc input cable mounted on the station backplane.

The dc input is fed to the power supply module circuitry via transient
protection and EMI filter circuits. The transient protection devices pro
vide protection against voltage spikes by providing an effective short
to ground under high voltage transient conditions. The EMI filter pre
vents electrical noise generated by the power supply module from in
terfering with other equipment connected to the same dc source.
Front Panel On-Off Switch

A toggle-type switch located on the power supply module front panel
allows the power supply (and satellite receiver) to be turned off by re
moving the dc input voltage. The switch controls a builtin circuit break
er (rated at 50A) to provide overload protection for the power supply
and station circuitry.
Startup Inverter Circuitry

This circuitry consists of a switching-type power supply which gener
ates a +12 V dc supply voltage used by the power supply module cir
cuitry as VCC at the time of initial power up. When all supply voltages
have stabilized, this circuit is overridden by +14.2 V BULK which con
tinues to supply VCC to the module circuitry.
The circuitry consists of a pulse width modulator (PWM) running at 133 kHz
(internal circuitry provides clock signal during initial power up). The PWM out
put pulses control a transistor switch which repetitively gates voltage to the
primary of the startup isolation transformer. The result is an induced voltage
in the secondary winding which feeds two half-wave rectifier circuits. One
circuit provides the +12 V dc Startup Bias voltage (used by the module cir
cuitry as initial VCC), and the other provides a BULK DETECT signal used
by the Diagnostics Circuitry to generate the AC FAIL signal.
68P81090E44-A
9/1/00
5
Main Inverter Circuitry

Overview
The main inverter circuitry is comprised of a switching-type power
used as the source for the +14.2 V and +5 V inverter circuits in the pow
er supply module, as well as the +28 V supply voltage for the station
modules (via the backplane).

The main inverter switching power supply consists of a pulse width
a power FET bridge which alternately gate the input dc voltage (from
the Input Conditioning Circuitry) to the primary of the main isolation
transformer. The result is an induced voltage in the secondary windings
of the transformer at 133 kHz rate.
Transformer Secondary Voltages

The main isolation transformer has two secondary windings, as fol
lows:
Module Fail Winding operates in conjunction with a half-
wave rectifier circuit to provide a dc signal (Mod Fail) to the A/D
converter (p/o Diagnostics Circuitry); indicates that the main in
verter circuitry is functioning properly.
+28 V Winding operates in conjunction with a full-wave rec
tifier circuit to generate a +28 V dc supply voltage. Overcurrent
and overvoltage detect circuits monitor the circuit operation and,
if preset thresholds are exceeded, generate a shutdown signal
which is fed to the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main invert
er.
6 68P81090E44-A
9/1/00
+14.2 V Inverter Circuitry

Overview
The +14.2 V inverter circuitry is comprised of a switching-type power
backplane).

The +14.2 V inverter switching power supply consists of a pulse width
a power FET which repetitively gates the +28.6 V dc (from the Main In
verter Circuitry) to the filtering circuitry. The result is a +14.2 V dc sup
ply voltage.
thresholds are exceeded, generates a shutdown signal which is fed to
the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main inverter. Upon an overvol
tage detection, a FET crowbar circuit immediately discharges the out
put to protect other modules in the station.
An overcurrent detect circuit monitors the current draw from the +14.2
V inverter circuit and, if a preset threshold is exceeded, shuts down the
+14.2 V inverter. If the overcurrent condition lasts for a preset length
(approx. 50 msec), the surge current delay circuit generates a shut
down signal which is fed to the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main
inverter.
+5 V Inverter Circuitry
Overview
The +5 V inverter circuitry operates identically to the +14.2 V inverter
circuitry (described above) to generate a +5 V dc supply voltage. This
the backplane).
68P81090E44-A
9/1/00
7
Overview
The diagnostics circuitry consists of an 11-channel A/D converter
which converts analog status signals from critical points in the module
to digital format for transfer to the Station Control Module via the SPI
bus. Most of the status signals are generated by detect circuits to indi
cate the status of dc supply voltages and references.

A thermistor mounted on the power supply module heatsink provides a
varying resistance input to several detect and control circuits, as follows:
Heatsink Status Detect compares signal from thermistor to
reference voltage to generate an output proportional to heatsink
temperature; signal is sent to Station Control Board via A/D con
verter and SPI bus.
Hi-Temp Detect compares signal from thermistor to refer
ence voltage to generate a high temperature signal if preset
threshold is exceeded; signal is sent to softstart circuitry to shut
down main inverter if overtemperature condition is detected.
Fan Control Circuitry compares signal from thermistor to ref
Note: The cooling fan in the Power Supply
Module is thermostatically controlled and
erence voltage to generate a fan control signal to turn on cooling
may come on at any time during station op fan mounted in power supply module; also generated is a FAN
eration. Failure of the fan to rotate continu ON status signal which is sent to Station Control Board via A/D
ously does not indicate a failure of the converter and SPI bus.
module.
Note that a Fan Fault Detect circuit accepts a pulsed feedback sig
nal from the cooling fan to indicate whether the fan is functioning
(when turned on by Fan Control Circuitry); a FAN FAIL status signal
is sent to Station Control Board via A/D converter and SPI bus
Status LED Indicators

Power On lights GREEN when power supply module is turned on
and functioning properly; LED turns off when module is turned off, in
put power is removed, or module startup circuitry is in fail mode
Module Fail lights RED when power supply module is in fail
mode, or if a failure in another station module causes excessive
current drain on any of the power supply output voltages; LED

the address bus to select the A/D converter (Diagnostics Circuitry) for
communications via the SPI bus. Typical communications include
reading status signals from the Diagnostics Circuitry.
8 68P81090E44-A
9/1/00
9/1/00 68P81090E44-A 9
INPUT CONDITIONING CIRCUITRY MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY MAIN ISOLATION

TRANSFORMER
67 KHZ
FRONT PANEL
ON / OFF SWITCH
AND
CIRCUIT BREAKER
B
MOD FAIL
FILTER POWER FET
CIRCUITRY SWITCHES
DC INPUT TRANSIENT/EMI REVERSE P/O
24 V DC PROTECTION
CIRCUITRY
POLARITY
PROTECTION D +28V BULK
TO
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY 4
+28 VDC 5 +28V DC
FILTERING TO
CIRCUITRY STATION
+28V OVERVOLTAGE MODULES
67 KHZ DETECT VIA
14
15 BACKPLANE
REF
OVERCURRENT
CURRENT
+12V STARTUP BIAS

DETECT
REF
DETECT
A
+12V STARTUP BIAS +28V BULK
VCC
VCC
+14.2 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
SOFTSTART PULSE
CIRCUITRY TRANSISTOR 16
WIDTH 17 +14.2V DC
MODULATOR DRIVERS +14.2V +14.2V TO
POWER FET FILTER
CIRCUITRY STATION
SWITCH MODULES
A
SHUTDOWN
VCC FET 22 VIA
133 KHZ 23 BACKPLANE
VCC
67KHZ
PULSE CROWBAR
WIDTH FET +14.2V OVERCURRENT
DRIVER CIRCUIT
MODULATOR DETECT
OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
A
REF
SURGE CURRENT
STARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRY 133 KHZ DELAY
REF
DC FAIL ALARM
TO REF
DC INPUT OPTO DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY
VCC REF DETECTORS COUPLER
A
DC FAIL ALARM
+28V BULK
VCC
STARTUP ISOLATION +12V
PULSE TRANSFORMER STARTUP BIAS +5 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY P/O
BACKPLANE
WIDTH
MODULATOR CONNECTOR
TRANSISTOR 24 +5V DC
SWITCH +5 V 25 TO
POWER FET FILTER STATION
SWITCH CIRCUITRY MODULES
VIA
VCC FET 30 BACKPLANE
133 KHZ 133 KHZ 31
VCC
PULSE
WIDTH FET +5V OVERCURRENT CROWBAR
CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITRY MODULATOR DRIVER DETECT
OVERVOLTAGE CIRCUIT
67KHZ
DETECT
2
A
REF
SURGE CURRENT REF
DELAY
267KHZ 133 KHZ 133 KHZ
133 KHZ
CLOCK
GENERATOR 2 REF
CIRCUITRY
267KHZ
Figure 2. 600W DC/DC Power Supply Module Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
10 68P81090E44-A 9/1/00
DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY REF
REF
MODULE
ON FAIL
B
MOD FAIL (RED)
(GREEN)
DC FAIL ALARM DC FAIL ALARM

FROM
STARTUP INVERTER +28.6 V DIAG
CIRCUITRY
+28V BULK RIPPLE 14 RIPPLE

FROM DETECT
MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY
CIRCUITRY HEATSINK STATUS
DETECT
HEATSINK DIAG
REF
HI-TEMP
DETECT
REF A A/D SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS
FAN ON CONVERTER TO/FROM
3 STATION CONTROL
FAN CONTROL DC ID MODULE
+5V REF
FET
REF SWITCH COOLING DC ID
FAN

T THERMISTOR
FAN FAIL
MOUNTED ON FAN FAULT
HEATSINK DETECT
+14.2V DIAG
FROM
DETECT +5V DIAG
CIRCUITRY
P/O ADDRESS BUS

FROM ADDRESS
CONTROL CIRCUITRY
BOARD 9
Figure 2.600W DC/DC Power Supply Module Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
9/1/00 68P81090E44-A 11
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
CPN1031B (600W; 48/60V DC Input)
1 DESCRIPTION
The Model CPN1031B Power Supply Module is described in this section. A general description, performance
specifications, identification of controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional
the station.)
General Description
The Models CPN1031B Power Supply Module accepts a dc input of ei
ther 48 V dc or 60 V dc and generates +28.6V dc, +14.2V dc, and
+5.1V dc operating voltages to power the station modules. The power
supply module is comprised of two circuit boards which provide sever
al switchingtype power supply circuits and diagnostics and monitor
ing circuitry, all contained within a slidein module housing.
conditions
longer exists

Power Supply Module

Supply Module showing how the two circuit boards interconnect. A de
tailed block diagram and functional theory of operation for each board
is provided later in this section (beginning on page 6).
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
+5 V DC
Vin +14 V DC SUPPLY VOLTAGES

DC INPUT DC INPUT DC OUTPUT TO
48V or BOARD BOARD STATION MODULES
60V +28 V DC
VIA BACKPLANE
2 68P81096E84-O
9/1/00
CPN1031B Power Supply Module
The power supply module is comprised of two circuit boards, con
DC Input Board (CPN6064B)

Input Conditioning Circuitry consists of: dc filtering compo
nents, reverse polarity circuitry to protect power supply circuitry
from reverse polarity connection to external DC source, Startup
Delay Circuitry
Filter Circuitry to provide filtering of DC input voltage
Reverse Polarity Circuitry to protect power supply circuit
ry from reverse polarity connection to external DC source
Startup Delay Circuitry to provide a delay of approximate
ly 1.5 seconds from time on/off switch is turned on until
the power supply becomes functional (allows precharge
of highcapacity filter capacitors to limit inrush current on
power up)
Filter Circuitry to provide filtering of DC output voltage
Inverter Circuitry A and B consists of two inverter circuits
that accept gating signals from the Inverters A/B Control Circuit
ry (on DC Output Board) to provide 133 kHz signal to Output Fil
ter Circuitry and to the +5V and +14V Power Supply Circuits (on
DC Output Board)
Output Filter Circuitry consists of dc filtering components to
filter the +28 V dc output voltage supplied to the station modules
DC Output Board (CPN6068A)

Inverters A/B Control Circuitry consists of switchingtype
circuitry that generates the 133 kHz V_GATE_1 and V_GATE_2
signals to the Inverter A and Inverter B circuitry on the DC Input
Board; also contains Peak Current Limiting Circuitry and Over
voltage Protection Circuitry.
supply that generates the +14 V dc supply voltage.
ply that generates the +5 V dc supply voltage.
Startup/Shutdown Control Circuitry Provides delay interval
for shutdown of entire power supply module.
68P81096E84-O
9/1/00
3
Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Model CPN1031B Power Supply Module.
Table 1.CPN1031B Power Supply Module Performance Specifications
Input Voltage Range +43.2 V dc to +62.4 V dc
Maximum Input Current 22 A
+28.6 V dc 5%
Steady State Output Voltages +14.2 V dc 5%
+5.0 V dc 5%
+28.6 12.5 A
+5.1 3A
Total Output Power Rating No Derating600 W

25C).
High Frequency individual

Output Ripple harmonic voltage limits in 10
kHz-100 MHz frequency band:
28.6V 1.5 mV p-p

14.2 V 3.0 mV p-p
5V 5.0 mV p-p
Short Circuit Current 25.5 A 3 A
4 68P81096E84-O
9/1/00
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

FRONT PANEL
MODULE FAIL
LED
POWER ON
LED
STATION
ON/OFF
SWITCH
REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

DC EXTERNAL SOURCE
INPUT CONNECTOR
Figure 1. CPN1031B Power Supply Module Controls, Indicators, and Inputs/Outputs
68P81096E84-O
9/1/00
5

(DC Input Board)
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6064B DC Input Board circuitry at a functional
block diagram of the DC Input Board.

Introduction
The DC Input Board accepts dc power from an external source, typical
ly a bank of storage batteries. DC power is connected to the board via
a 4wire dc input cable mounted on the station backplane.
Input Filter Circuitry

The DC input voltage is fed to filtering circuitry. This circuitry consists
of filter capacitors that remove any ripple and/or transients from the in
put dc signal.
Front Panel On-Off Switch / Startup Delay Circuitry

the switch allows the output filter circuitry to slowly charge (for approxi
mately 1.5 seconds after switch is turned on) through two diodes and
resistors. After the 1.5 second delay, the relay turns on and provides
the full dc input voltage to the output filter circuitry. This 1.5 second pre
charge delay period limits inrush current through the filter capacitors
upon power up.
If the DC input is below approximately 43.2 V, the relay will not be turned
on and the power supply outputs will be disabled. The red Module Fail
LED on the front panel will light.
Output Filter Circuitry

The DC input voltage is fed to filtering circuitry. This circuitry consists
of filter capacitors that remove any ripple or noise from the switching
circuitry from the +28 V dc output.
6 68P81096E84-O
9/1/00
Inverter Circuitry A and B

Inverter Circuitry A and Inverter Circuitry B are identical switchingtype
circuits that accept the gating signals (V_GATE_1 and V_GATE_2) from
the DC Output Board and generate a 133 kHz output signal. This signal
is fed to the Output Filter Circuitry (which provides a +28 V dc supply
voltage to the station) and to the +5V and +14V Supply Circuits on the
DC Output Board.
Output Filter Circuitry

This circuitry consists of a series of filter capacitors that filter the
133 kHz signal from Inverter Circuits A and B to provide a +28 V dc sup
ply voltage for use by the station modules (via the backplane).
68P81096E84-O
9/1/00
7

(DC Output Board)
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6068A DC Output Board circuitry at a func
tional level. The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions per
formed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Refer to Figure 3
for a block diagram of the DC Output Board.
Inverters A/B Control Circuitry

Overview
The Inverters A/B Control Circuitry is comprised of two mirrored switch
ingtype circuits which generate the V_GATE_1 and V_GATE_2 signals
used by the Inverter Circuitry A and Inverter Circuitry B (located on the
DC Input Board).
Switching Circuitry Operation

The switching circuitry consists of two identical switchingtype circuits
operating in parallel. Both circuits operate identically, as follows. A
67 kHz clock signal from the Sync Generator Circuitry is fed through a
buffer to a Pulse Width Modulator (PWM). The PWM outputs a 133 kHz
signal (V_GATE_1 or V_GATE_2) which is fed to Inverter Circuitry A (or
Inverter Circuitry B) located on the DC Input Board.
Since Inverter Circuitry A and Inverter Circuitry B each receives a
133 kHz V_GATE signal that is 180 out of phase with the other, each
circuit alternately charges the output filter circuitry, resulting in an effec
tive charging rate of 133 kHz.
mands.
generates a shutdown signal (PRI_SHUTDOWN) if the average output
current reaches a predetermined limit.
Overvoltage Protection Circuitry This circuitry monitors the
+28V_RAW voltage and generates a shutdown signal
(PRI_SHUT_SEC) to shut down the entire power supply module if the
+28 V output voltage exceeds a preset threshold.
8 68P81096E84-O
9/1/00

Overview
The +14 V Supply Circuitry is comprised of a switchingtype power
backplane).

(from the Output Filter Circuitry on the DC Input Board) to a power coil.
The result is a high induced voltage which charges the filter capacitors
to approximately +14.2 V dc. A current sense comparator provides a
feedback signal to the PWM to maintain a constant output voltage.
thresholds are exceeded, turns on a FET crowbar circuit which immedi
ately discharges the output to protect other modules in the station.
PRI_SHUT_SEC signal which shuts down the entire power supply
module.
The +5 V Supply Circuitry operates identically to the +14 V Supply Cir
cuitry (described above) to generate a +5.1 V dc supply voltage. This
the backplane).

by local circuitry.
68P81096E84-O
9/1/00
9
Overview

PRI_SHUT_SEC shutdown signal which shuts down the entire power
Overvoltage/Undervoltage Detect Circuitry

This circuitry monitors the VIN__FLTRD signal from the DC Input Board
and generates a DC_GOOD_DIAG signal as long as the VIN__FLTRD
signal remains within predetermined limits. The circuitry also drives the
LED indicators (described below).

Power On lights GREEN when On/Off switch is On and the AC
input voltage is within operating range; LED turns off when mod
ule is turned off, ac power is removed, or AC input voltage is be
low approximately 85 V rms.

signals from the Diagnostics Circuitry.
10 68P81096E84-O
9/1/00
Circuitry
Upon receiving a shutdown signal (PRI_SHUTDOWN) from the +28V
Main Supply Circuitry, this circuit passes the signal through the Soft
Start Circuitry for a 1 second interval to allow the entire power supply
module to shutdown. The module then restarts (if the on/off switch is
in On position). If the PRI_SHUTDOWN signal is still active, the shut
down process will repeat.

PRI_SHUTDOWN is inactive), the Soft Start Circuitry provides a gradu
ally increasing output signal to soft start" the Pulse Width Modulators
(p/o +28V Main Supply Circuitry). This action minimizes the surge cur
rent when charging the output filter capacitors.
68P81096E84-O
9/1/00
11
12 68P81096E84-O
9/1/00
INPUT CONDITIONING CIRCUITRY RELAY
VIN VIN
TO
DC OUTPUT
BOARD
FUSE REVERSE VIN+_FLTRD

FRONT PANEL
POLARITY ON / OFF SWITCH
A
DC INPUT FILTER CIRCUITRY FILTER
(-40 TO -60 VDC) 30 AMP CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY
STARTUP VIN-_FLTRD
DELAY
CIRCUITRY
INVERTER CIRCUITRY A +28V +28V

I_SENSE1 + TO
VIN+_FLTRD DC OUTPUT
TO BOARD
A
FILTER DC OUTPUT
CIRCUITRY I_SENSE1 - BOARD SYNC_SEC
VIN-_FLTRD
133 KHZ
TO
DC OUTPUT P/O
BOARD BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
4
VCC_PRI +28 VDC 5 +28V DC
TO
STATION
MODULES
14 VIA
V_GATE_1 OUTPUT FILTER CIRCUITRY 15 BACKPLANE
FROM
DC OUTPUT POWER
DRIVERS FETS HOUSEKEEPING SUPPLY
BOARD
FILTER VCC_PRI
CIRCUITRY
FILTER FILTER
CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY V28+
INVERTER CIRCUITRY B
V28+_RAW
VIN+_FLTRD I_SENSE2 +
TO
A
FILTER DC OUTPUT
CIRCUITRY I_SENSE2 -
BOARD SYNC SYNC
VIN-_FLTRD
TO
DC OUTPUT
BOARD
VCC_PRI
LEGEND
V_GATE_2
FROM
DC OUTPUT DRIVERS
POWER Primary Ground
BOARD FETS
Secondary Ground
Figure 2. CPN6064B DC Input Board Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81096E84-O 13
INVERTERS A/B CONTROL CIRCUITRY VCC_PRI
VCC_PRI
F
SHUTDOWN 1
67 KHZ V_GATE_1
PULSE TO
BUFFER WIDTH DC INPUT
MODULATOR BOARD
I_SENSE 1
+5V_REF 1
PEAK CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUITRY
+28V_RAW V_GATE_1 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION CIRCUITRY

67KHZ
BUFFER/
AMPLIFIER
SYNC PRI_SHUTDOWN
E
+28V_RAW BUFFER/
GENERATOR 67KHZ BUFFER/
REF ISOLATION
CIRCUITRY ISOLATION PEAK/AVERAGE
CIRCUITRY
CURRENT
H DETECT
CIRCUITRY
D
PRI_SHUT_SEC
133 KHZ
VCC_PRI V_GATE_2 VCC_PRI
G
I_SENSE 2 14V_DIAG
67 KHZ
V_GATE_2
PULSE TO
BUFFER WIDTH DC INPUT P/O
MODULATOR BOARD BACKPLANE
2 CONNECTOR
F
SHUTDOWN 2 16
17 +14.2V DC
+14.2V TO
STATION
MODULES
22 VIA
+14V SUPPLY CIRCUITRY +28V_RAW 23 BACKPLANE
VCC_SEC POWER
COIL
+14V_RAW
FILTER
POWER FET
CIRCUITRY +14V
+28V_RAW REGULATOR VCC_SEC SWITCH
FET
133 KHZ
+14V_RAW
VCC_SEC PULSE CROWBAR
WIDTH DRIVER CURRENT CIRCUIT
SYNC_SEC
MODULATOR SENSE
PRI_SHUT_SEC
D
133 KHZ OVERVOLTAGE
133 KHZ DETECT
C BUFFER/
DRIVER
REF
REF
CURRENT LIMIT
DETECT CIRCUITRY
+5V_REF +5V_REF
5V_DIAG
POWER
G
VCC_SEC COIL
+5V_RAW
FILTER
POWER FET
CIRCUITRY +5V
SWITCH
FET P/O
133 KHZ BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
133 KHZ
PULSE CROWBAR 24
WIDTH DRIVER CURRENT 25 +5V DC
CIRCUIT +5 V TO
MODULATOR SENSE
OVERVOLTAGE STATION
DETECT MODULES
30 VIA
REF 31 BACKPLANE
REF
CURRENT LIMIT PRI_SHUT_SEC
+5V_REF
DETECT CIRCUITRY
D
Figure 3. CPN6068A DC Output Board Functional Block Diagram (1 of 2)
14 68P81096E84-O 9/1/00
STARTUP/SHUTDOWN CONTROL CIRCUITRY
VCC_PRI
SHUTDOWN 1
PRI_SHUTDOWN 1SECOND
E SHUTDOWN
DELAY
CIRCUITRY
SOFT START
CIRCUITRY
SHUTDOWN 2 F
DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY
+5V_REF
+14V_RAW
MOD_FAIL_DIAG
FAN_ON_DIAG
REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUITRY
+28V 28V 28V
FROM
DC INPUT BOARD
+28V_RAW REGULATOR +10V_SEC A/D SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS
CONVERTER TO/FROM
14V_DIAG 14V_DIAG
3 STATION CONTROL
G 5V_DIAG 5V_DIAG
MODULE
+2.5V_SEC VCC
VCC
POWER
ON
(GREEN) MODULE
FAIL
(RED) DC_GOOD_DIAG
VIN+_FLTRD OVERVOLTAGE/
FROM UNDERVOLTAGE
DC INPUT DETECT CIRCUITRY
BOARD DC_GOOD_DIAG
+10V_SEC
THERMISTOR
MOUNTED ON
HEATSINK
T
PRI_SHUT_SEC
HEATSINK TEMP
D
P/O ADDRESS BUS

FROM ADDRESS
CONTROL CIRCUITRY
BOARD 9
Figure 3.CPN6068A DC Output Board Functional Block Diagram (2 of 2)
9/1/00 68P81096E84-O 15
STATION BACKPLANE BOARD
MODEL TRN7480A
1 DESCRIPTION
The TRN7480A Station Backplane Board provides the electrical interconnections for the plug-in modules of a
Quantar station. The board also provides the connectors necessary to interface the station to phone lines, periph
eral rf equipment, and other communications and maintenance equipment. This section provides a general de
scription, identification of inputs/outputs, and a pin-out listing for all interface connectors, including information
on signal names, functions, and levels.
General Description
The station backplane board (mounted across the rear of the Quantar
station card cage) is constructed with connectors on both sides. The
connectors on one side mate with the various station plug-in mod
ules; the connectors on the other side allow interface connections be
tween the station and the phone lines, peripheral rf equipment, and
other communications and maintenance equipment.
A metal shield mounts over the rear of the backplane board to provide
protection for the circuit board runners and connector solder pads,
ESD protection, and EMI/RFI shielding, as shown in Figure 1. This
shield also provides a mounting location for the antenna connector
bracket and the station grounding lug.
BACKPLANE
BOARD
PROTECTIVE
METAL SHIELD
Figure 1. Backplane (Shown with Protective Metal Shield Removed)

All Rights Reserved 68P81086E33-F
2 LOCATION OF BACKPLANE CONNECTORS
Figure 1 shows the location of the connectors on each side of the station backplane board.
CONNECTORS #7 & #8 CONNECTORS #5 & #6

MATE WITH MATE WITH
FRONT VIEW STATION CONTROL MODULE WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD
CONNECTOR #9
MATES WITH
EXCITER MODULE
CONNECTOR #11 CONNECTOR #10 CONNECTOR #4 CONNECTOR #2

MATES WITH MATES WITH MATES WITH MATES WITH
POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE POWER SUPPLY MODULE RECEIVER MODULE #2 RECEIVER MODULE #1
REAR VIEW
CONNECTOR #20
EIA232 CONNECTOR #18 CONNECTOR #19 CONNECTOR #21 CONNECTOR #14
(ALTERNATE RSS PORT EPIC FAN POWER DLAN1 1 PPS INPUT 6809 TRUNKING/MRTI
OR ZONE CONTROLLER LINK (Early Models Only)
CONNECTOR #15
6809 TRUNKING TSC/CSC LINK
CONNECTOR #22 CONNECTOR #27

ETHERNET PERIPHERAL TRAY
BNC CONNECTOR INTERFACE
CONNECTOR #31 CONNECTOR #17 CONNECTOR #30 CONNECTOR #23 CONNECTOR #24
EXTERNAL DC POWER SYSTEM 50PIN TELCO 5/10 MHZ INPUT ANTENNA RELAY BATTERY TEMPERATURE
(High Impedance)
Figure 1. Quantar Station Backplane (TRN7480A) Connector Locations (Front and Rear Views)
2 68P81086E33-F
11/15/99
TRN7480A Station Backplane
3 BACKPLANE CONNECTORS INFORMATION
Each connector on the backplane has been assigned a connector number. In some cases, the connector number
is stamped into the metal shield covering the rear of the backplane board. The connectors which accept the plug-
in modules are not marked. Table 1 lists each connector and its assigned number.
Figure 2 provides pin-out information for all connectors located on the rear of the backplane board. As shown,
each connector pin is defined by signal name, input or output (with reference to connector), to/from location, and
a brief description of the signal function. Note that pin-out information for any connectors intended for future
applications is not shown. Also, note that in the To/From" column the source or destination of the signal is given
as a connector number followed by a pin number. The first number (preceded by a #") represents the assigned
connector number, followed by the specific connector pin number.
Table 1.Assigned Connector Number vs Function/Location Information
Connector # Function/Location
1 Not used
2 Accepts plug-in Receiver Module #1
3 Not used
4 Accepts plug-in Receiver Module #2
5 Accepts bottom card-edge connector of plug-in Wireline Interface Board
6 Accepts top card-edge connector of plug-in Wireline Interface Board
7 Accepts bottom card-edge connector of plug-in Station Control Module
8 Accepts top card-edge connector of plug-in Station Control Module
9 Accepts plug-in Exciter Module
10 Accepts plug-in Power Supply Module
11 Accepts plug-in Power Amplifier Module
12 Not used
13 Not used
14 Provides interface for 6809 Trunking Controller and (future) MRTI Interface
15 Accepts TSC/CSC Link cable from 6809 Trunking Controller
16 Not used
50-pin Telco System Connector (accepts customer phone line connections, access to customer-defined inputs/outputs,
17
Simulcast inputs, etc.; connector located on backplane at rear of station)
18 Provides dc power to external fan module for early model EPIC Station Control Modules (limited production)
DLAN1 DB-9 connector (used in IntelliRepeater applications to form network between multiple stations; connector
19
located on backplane at rear of station; mates with DB-9-to-dual RJ11 PhoneNET adapter module; see note above)
EIA-232 asynchronous port (used for connection to SMARTZONE controller in wide-area IntelliRepeater trunking system
20
or for alternate RSS port in a non-IntelliRepeater trunking system)
21 1 PPS input from GPS Receiver for ASTRO Simulcast systems
BNC connector which allows connection to an IntelliRepeater Ethernet network via a 10BASE-2 coaxial Tconnector. Also
22
may be used to locally connect PC running RSS to download software to FLASH memory in Station Control Module.
Antenna Relay 3-pin AMP-type connector (used to supply control signal to antenna relay module; connector located
23
on backplane at rear of station)
Battery Temperature 3-pin AMP-type connector (used to accept variable resistance proportional to temperature of
24
co-located storage batteries; connector located on backplane at rear of station)
25 Not used
26 Not used
RF Peripheral Tray 10-pin AMP-type connector (used to transfer signals to/from components housed in externally-
27
mounted RF Peripheral Tray; connector located on backplane at rear of station)
28 Not used
29 Not used
BNC input connector (used to accept 5/10 MHz reference signal from external frequency standard for calibrating reference
30 oscillator in Station Control Module; connector located on backplane at rear of station; electrically isolated from BNC
connector on front panel of Station Control Module to allow for multidrop configuration)
31 Provides external +5V and +14.2 V dc power (e.g., MRTI, Modem, etc.)
PhoneNET is a registered trademark of Farallon Computing, Inc.
68P81086E33-F
11/15/99
3
D
J
G
E
C Q
B
A H M
P
I K L
F
N
Note...
Model CLN6955 WIB is designed for use in stations
installed in locations where local codes permit phone
line connections to either the 50-pin Telco connector
(I) or the orange screw terminal connector (D). Model
CLN6957 allows only connections to the orange screw
terminal connector (D).
Figure 2. TRN7480A Backplane Rear Connectors Pin-Out Information (Sheet 1 of 3)
4 68P81086E33-F
11/15/99
TRN7480A Station Backplane
A E I
+5V
EIA-232 CONNECTOR #21 CONNECTOR #17 SYSTEM 50-PIN TELCO
CONNECTOR #20
(Alternate RSS Port) Pin # Signal Input Output Function OUTPUT
1 PPS
Pin # Signal Input Output Function 1 PPS clock signal from GPS Receiver for ASTRO 1 Line 1+ Customer 4-wire Phone Line Input (Line 1+)
Simulcast application. TTL levels @ 50 ohms.
2 Line 2+ Customer 2-wire Phone Line Input/Output (Line 2+) 3.9K
1 DCD1 Data Carrier Detect
3 Line 3+ Customer 4-wire Phone Line Input (Line 3+)
2 RXD1 Receive Data
4 Line 4+ Customer 4-wire Phone Line Output (Line 4+)
3 TXD1 Transmit Data
5 Aux TX Audio Input from external device
4
5
DTR
SIGNAL GND
Data Terminal Ready
Station Ground
F 6
7
Open
GND
Open
Station Ground
6 DSR Data Set Ready 8 5 VDC Out +5V dc from Power Supply (1 Amp Max.) Typical Relay Closure Output Circuit
7 RTS1 Request to Send CONNECTOR #30 9 Gen TX Data Modulation signal from Simulcast equipment (Note 1)
8 CTS1 Clear to Send 10 PL (+) In Future Use
9 Ring Indicator Not used
5/10 MHZ INPUT 11 Aux In 1 (Ext Failsoft) Customer-defined transistor buffered Input (Note 1)
Accepts external 5 or 10 MHz Frequency 12 Aux In 2 (TX Inhibit) Customer-defined transistor buffered Input (Note 1) +5V
Standard for Calibrating Station Reference 13 Aux In 3 (Ext TX Code Det) Customer-defined transistor buffered Input (Note 1)
+5V

B Oscillator (located in Station Control
Module);
5 MHz injection level = 1.0 .5 V RMS;
14
15
Aux In 4 (RX WL Inhibit)
Aux In 5 (Duplex Enable)
Customer-defined transistor buffered Input (Note 1)
Customer-defined transistor buffered Input (Note 1)
10K
High Impedance Input 16 Aux In 6 (In Cabinet Repeat) Customer-defined transistor buffered Inpu (Note 1) 10K
17 Aux In 7 (Channel 4) Customer-defined transistor buffered Input (Note 1) 10K
EPIC Fan Control INPUT
CONNECTOR #18 18 Aux Out 7 (RD Stat +) N.O. contact of Relay A (Note 1)
(Early Models Only) 19 Aux Out 8 N.O. contact of Relay B 10K
20 Aux Out 9 N.O. contact of Relay C
Pin # Signal Input Output Function

1 FAN GND Ground for external fan
G 21
22
Aux Out 10
Aux In 9 (Ext PTT+)
N.O. contact of Relay D
Opto-isolated customer-defined input (Opto A+)
2 23 Aux In 10 (Channel 1 +) Opto-isolated customer-defined input (Opto B+) Typical TransistorCoupled
3 Input Circuit
4 CONNECTOR #25 24 Aux In 11 (Chanel 2 +) Opto-isolated customer-defined input (Opto C+)
5 25 Aux In 12 (Channel 3 +) Opto-isolated customer-defined input (Opto D+)
6 26 Line 1 Customer 4-wire Phone Line Input (Line 1 )
7 BATTERY CHARGER OUTPUT +5V
27 Line 2 Customer 2-wire Phone Line Input/Output (Line 2 )
8 FAN + +14.2 V dc for external fan Two RED (top) and two BLACK (bottom) wires to
28 Line 3 Customer 4-wire Phone Line Input (Line 3 )
9 battery revert connector mounted on station cage.
29 Line 4 Customer 4-wire Phone Line Output (Line 4 ) 100K
30 Aux RX Audio Output to external device 3.9K 3.9K
31 Open Open INPUT (+)
32 GND Station Ground 220PF
C H 33
34
14.2 VDC Out
Gen TX Data +
+14.2 V dc from Power Supply (1 Amp Max.)
Modulation signal from Simulcast equipment INPUT (-)
35 PL ( ) In Future Use 220PF
0.1UF
36 Aux Out 1 (Failsoft Ind) Customer-defined transistor buffered output (Note 1)
CONNECTOR #19 DLAN1 CONNECTOR #14 6809 TRUNKING/MRTI 37 Aux Out 2 (RX Code Det) Customer-defined transistor buffered output (Note 1)
38 Aux Out 3 Customer-defined transistor buffered output
Pin # Signal Input Output Function Pin # Signal Input Output Function Typical OptoCoupled
39 Aux Out 4 Customer-defined transistor buffered output
Input Circuit
1 Shield Gnd Station Ground 1 MRTI TX Audio MRTI 40 Aux Out 5 Customer-defined transistor buffered output
2 WFI+ Future use 2 MRTI PTT MRTI 41 Aux Out 6 Customer-defined transistor buffered output
3 WFI Future use 3 Open MRTI
4 Monitor MRTI
42 Aux In 8 Customer-defined transistor buffered input
4 DLAN1+ Differential Data (+) 43 Aux Out 7 (RD Stat -) N.O. contact of Relay A (Note 1)
5 PL Strip MRTI
5 DLAN1 Differential Data ( ) 6 Open MRTI 44 Aux Out 8 N.O. contact of Relay B
6 WFI+ Future use 7 MRTI RX Audio MRTI
7 WFI Future use 45 Aux Out 9 N.O. contact of Relay C OUTPUT
8 Patch INH MRTI 3.9K
8 DLAN1+ Differential Data (+) 9 Gnd MRTI 46 Aux Out 10 N.O. contact of Relay D
9 DLAN1 Differential Data ( ) 10 AUX Indicate Future use 47 Aux In 9 (Ext PTT ) Opto-isolated customer-defined input (Opto A )
11 TPTT Control signal to key transmitter (active low) (6809) 48 Aux In 10 (Channel 1 -) Opto-isolated customer-defined input (Opto B )
12 TSTAT Indicates transmitter status (active high) (6809) 49 Aux In 11 (Channel 2 -) Opto-isolated customer-defined input (Opto C )
13 Tx Data + Modulation input from 6809 Controller (6809) 50 Aux In 12 (Channel 3 -) Opto-isolated customer-defined input Opto D )
14 Open
D 15
16
Rx Carrier
Gnd
MRTI
Station Ground (6809)
Notes:
1. Many of the customer-defined inputs and outputs have been preassigned wtih signal names and functions usually required in
Typical TransistorCoupled
Output Circuit
17 Gnd Station Ground (6809) typical Trunking, SECURENET, and other systems. These default preassignments have been made for customer convenience
18 Gnd Station Ground (6809) only, and may be re-assigned as necessary. The preassigned signal names are shown in parentheses in the SIGNAL column.
PHONE LINE INPUTS 19 Gnd Station Ground (6809) (Reassignment requires the use of the Wildcard Option.)
20 Gnd Station Ground (6809)
1 LINE 1 + 5 LINE 3 + 21 Tx Data - Modulation input from 6809 Controller (6809)
2 LINE 1 6 LINE 3 22 Rx Wideband Aud Receive output to 6809 Controller (6809)
3 LINE 2 + 7 LINE 4 +
8 LINE 4
23 MUTE Mutes station signals (active low) (6809)
4 LINE 2
24 CCI Indicates Control Channel status (active low) (6809)
25 RSTAT Indicates receiver status (active high) (6809)
11/15/99 68P81086E33-F 5
J N
CONNECTOR #27 PERIPHERAL TRAY INTERFACE CONNECTOR #31 EXTERNAL DC POWER
Pin # Signal Input Output Function Pin # Signal Input Output Function
1 14.2 V +14.2 V dc from Power Supply (1 Amp Max.) 1 GND Station Ground
2 GND Station Ground 2 Spare Not Used
3 ANT RLY KEYED A+ Switched +14.2 V to energize antenna relay (if located in Peripheral Tray) 3 Spare Not Used
4 EXT I/O 2 Future Use 4 Spare Not Used
5 EXT I/O 1 Switched +14.2 V to energize Main/Standby relay 5 Spare Not Used
6 EXT Circ Temp DC voltage proportional to temperature from sensor mounted on Dual 6 +14.2 V +14.2 V dc @ 1 Amp (if no connection to Connector #17-pin 33)
Circulator Module 7 Spare Spare
7 EXT WM Ref Ground reference for External Wattmeter 8 +5 V +5 V dc @ 1 Amp (if no connection to Connector #17-pin 8)
8 EXT WM Vr DC voltage proportional to External Wattmeter reflected power 9 Spare Not Used
9 EXT WM Vf DC voltage proportional to External Wattmeter forward power 10 GND Station Ground
10 GND Station Ground
K P
CONNECTOR #22
CONNECTOR #23 ANTENNA RELAY
Pin # Signal Input Output Function
ETHERNET PORT
Accepts 10BASE-2 coaxial cable (via Tconnector) for
1 GND Station GND connections to an IntelliRepeater Ethernet network or to
2 ANT RLY KEYED A+ Switched +14.2 V to energize antenna relay download software via a locally connected PC running RSS.
3 GND Station Gnd
Q
L CONNECTOR #15 MULTIPURPOSE RS232
CONNECTOR #50 Pin # Signal Input Output Function
1 Shield Gnd Station Ground

AC INPUT 2 TxD3 Transmit Data
Connects to 110V/220V AC source 3 RxD3 Receive Data
via 3-wire line cord. 4 RTS3 Request to Send
5 CTS3 Clear to Send
6 DSR3 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground Station Ground
8 DCD3 Data Carrier Detect
9 OPEN
10 OPEN
11 OPEN
M 12
13
OPEN
Local Loopback 3 Not Used
14 OPEN
15 TCLK3 Transmit Clock
CONNECTOR #24 BATTERY TEMPERATURE 16 OPEN
17 RCLK Receive Clock
Pin # Signal Input Output Function 18 OPEN
19 OPEN
1 GND Station Ground 20 DTR3 Data Terminal Ready
2 BATT TEMP Variable resistance proportional to battery temperature 21 OPEN
from sensor near storage batteries 22 OPEN
3 GND Station Ground 23 OPEN
24 OPEN
25 Remote Loopback 3 Not Used
6 68P81086E33-F 11/15/99
ANTENNA RELAY MODULE
Option X371AA
1 DESCRIPTION
Option X371AA provides an antenna relay module for use with Quantar and Quantro station products. This section
provides a general description, option complement, identification of inputs/outputs, and functional theory of oper
ation. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module,
General Description
This antenna relay module allows a single antenna to be used for both
transmit and receive functions (base station applications only). The an
tenna relay is controlled by a signal from the Station Control Module
to connect the antenna to either the Power Amplifier Module (transmit)
or Receiver Module (receive). The antenna relay module is mounted
on an angle bracket provided on the rear of the station card cage.
Figure 1. Typical Antenna Relay Module

2 INPUT AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Figure 2 shows the antenna relay module input and output external connections.
CONNECTS TO
STATION TRANSMIT RF OUTPUT
(FROM POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE)
CONNECTS TO
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
ANTENNA
insert
FAEPS-48550
(C841)
@ 100% MATES WITH
CONNECTOR #23
(C841) ON STATION
BACKPLANE
CONNECTS TO
STATION RECEIVE RF INPUT
(TO RECEIVER MODULE)
ANTENNA RELAY
CONTROL CABLE
(30-85431U01)
Figure 2. Antenna Relay Module Inputs/Outputs
2 68P81086E22-B
9/1/00
Antenna Relay Module
3 OPTION COMPLEMENT
Table 1 shows the contents for the Option X371AA antenna relay module.
Option Complement
Chart
Table 1.Antenna Relay Option X371AA Complement
Model Description
Includes miscellaneous hardware
and antenna relay module
TRN7664A
(Motorola Part No.
80-84033T02)
Table 2 shows the electrical performance specifications for the antenna relay used in Options X371AA-AC.
Table 2.Performance Specifications for Antenna Relay
Operating Frequency DC - 4 GHz
Maximum Input Power 500W
Coil Specifications:
Pull-in voltage 9.5V dc
Drop-out voltage 2V dc
Resistance 100 10% @ 20C
Contacts Specifications:
Type SPDT
Actuation Failsafe
Pull-in time 20 msec max.
Drop-out time 10 msec max.
Insertion Loss 0.30dB max
Isolation 70dB min
VSWR Maximum 1.3 : 1
Temperature Range -30C to +80C
Terminations Female N-Type
Input and Output Impedance 50 Ohms
68P81086E22-B
9/1/00
3
5 MOUNTING LOCATIONS
In order to provide alternative routing for the antenna rf cable, the Antenna Relay Module may be installed in two
positions on the rf input/output bracket. Stations equipped with the antenna relay module option are shipped with
the antenna relay module installed as shown in Figure 3, allowing the rf cable to be routed out the side of the
cabinet or rack. If desired, the bracket may be turned 90 counterclockwise to allow the cable to be routed toward
the bottom of the cabinet or rack, as shown in Figure 4.
FROM ANTENNA RELAY

MODULE (STANDARD
MOUNTING
POSITION)
MATES WITH RF CABLE

FROM
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE
ANTENNA
FROM
RECEIVER CONTROL CABLE
MODULE CONNECTED TO
BACKPLANE
Figure 3. Standard Mounting Position for Antenna Relay Module
ANTENNA RELAY
MODULE
(OPTIONAL CONTROL CABLE
MOUNTING CONNECTED TO
POSITION) BACKPLANE
MATES WITH RF CABLE

FROM
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE
ANTENNA
FROM FROM
POWER AMPLIFIER RECEIVER
MODULE MODULE
Figure 4. Optional Mounting Position for Antenna Relay Module
4 68P81086E22-B
9/1/00
Antenna Relay Module
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the Antenna Relay Module at a functional level. The
and interconnect diagram of the Antenna Relay Module.
Functional Operation
Note that with the relay de-energized the The Antenna Relay Module contains a relay with a set of normally open
antenna is connected to the Receiver and normally closed contacts. The relay coil is controlled by a signal
Module. To connect the antenna to the from the Station Control Module to connect either the Receiver Module
Power Amplifier Module, the Station Con or the Power Amplifier Module to a single transmit/receive antenna. Re
trol Module must energize the relay.
fer to the block diagram shown in Figure 2.
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE
ANTENNA
N.C. N.O.
ANTENNA
RELAY
MODULE
RECEIVER POWER
MODULE AMPLIFIER
MODULE
3-WIRE
CABLE
MATES WITH
3-PIN CONNECTOR #23
ON BACKPLANE
Figure 5. Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Antenna Relay Module
68P81086E22-B
9/1/00
5
6 68P81086E22-B
9/1/00
TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION
(Options X676AA-AC)
1 DESCRIPTION
Options X676AA-AC provide band-specific dual circulator assemblies and low pass filters for use with Quantar
VHF station. The triple circulator option is comprised of the dual circulator assembly combined with the single
circulator located in the station power amplifier module. This combination provides 65 dB (min) of isolation be
tween the Power Amplifier Module and the transmit antenna. A low pass filter connects between the dual circulator
output and the transmit antenna.
This section provides a general description, option matrix chart, identification of inputs/outputs, and functional
theory of operation. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding
General Description
The dual circulator assembly consists of two rf circulators and a 50
load with heat sink, all mounted on a 3/16 " aluminum plate which is
housed in the Peripheral Tray. The tray is equipped with a cooling fan
which directs air across the fins of the heat sink. The rf output from the
Power Amplifier Module connects to the input of the assembly, while
the output connects to an external low pass filter. The output of the filter
connects to the transmit antenna (directly, via antenna relay module,
or via duplexer).

2 OPTIONS COMPLEMENT
Table 1 shows the applications and contents for the available triple circulator options for Quantar VHF station.
Option Complement
Chart
Table 1.Triple Circulator Options Complement
Option
Option Application
Contents
TYD4001A Dual Circulator
Quantar VHF High Band TLN3391A 50 Load w/ heatsink
X676AA
(132-146 MHz) TYD4010A Low Pass Filter
X676AB
X676AC
2 68P81086E34-B
9/1/00
Triple Circulator Option
Table 2 shows the electrical performance specifications for the dual circulator assembly used for
Options X676AA-AC.
Table 3 shows the electrical performance specifications for the low pass filter used in Options X676AA-AC.
Table 2.Performance Specifications for Dual Circulator Assembly
Operating Frequency
X676AA 132-146 MHz
X676AB 144-160 MHz
X676AC 158-174 MHz
Maximum RF Input Power 400W
Insertion Loss 1.25dB max (with low pass filter)
45 dB min
(total of 65 dB when combined with
Isolation
circulator built into power amplifier
module)
Operating Temperature Range -20C to +70C
Input/Output Return Loss 19.1 dB min
25W without cooling fan on
50 Load Maximum Power
90W with cooling fan on
50 k 25C
Thermistor Output
1.7 k 125C
Table 3.Performance Specifications for Low Pass Filter
Operating Frequency 132-174 MHz
Insertion Loss 0.25 dB
Rejection 55 dB min (264-600 MHz)
68P81086E34-B
9/1/00
3
4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 1 shows the dual circulator assembly input and output external connections.
CABLE HARNESS
(MATES WITH 10PIN
TRANSMIT OUTPUT CONNECTOR ON
FROM STATION BACKPLANE)
LOW PASS FILTER
TRANSMIT RF INPUT
FROM
POWER AMPLIFIER LOW PASS DUAL CIRCULATOR
MODULE FILTER ASSEMBLY
PERIPHERAL DC POWER COOLING FAN HEAT SINK THERMISTOR HEAT SINK 50 OHM
TRAY TO FOR OUTPUT LOAD
COOLING CIRCULATOR HEAT SINK TO
FAN CABLE HARNESS
Figure 1. Dual Circulator Assembly and Low Pass Filter (Mounted in Peripheral Tray) Inputs and Outputs
4 68P81086E34-B
9/1/00
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the Dual Circulator Assembly and Low Pass Filter at
a functional level. The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the func
to Figure 2 for a block and interconnect diagram of the Dual Circulator Assembly and Low Pass Filter.
Note:The Triple Circulator Option is typi The Dual Circulator Assembly accepts transmit rf output power from
cally used in high density radio site applica the power amplifier module and provides 45 dB (minimum) of isolation
tions where other co-located transmitters between the power amplifier module and the transmit antenna. The as
near the frequency of the station can cause
I.M. products. The addition of the dual circu sembly consists of two circulators, each with a 50 load. Each circula
lator improves I.M. from >30dBI to >75 dBI . tor allows forward rf energy to pass through to the output, while routing
The low pass filter reduces spurious emis any reflected rf energy to the corresponding 50 load. Refer to the
sions to 90 dBc. block diagram shown in Figure 2.
Most of the reflected energy is absorbed by the 50 load (heat sink
mounted) connected to the second circulator. A thermistor mounted on
the heat sink provides a variable resistance signal proportional to the
heat sink temperature. This signal is routed to the Station Control Mod
ule via the Peripheral Tray cabling harness. If the heat sink temperature
exceeds a preset threshold, the Station Control Module enables PA
cutback mode. If the overtemperature condition persists, the power
amplifier is shut down completely.
CIRCULATOR CIRCULATOR
LOW PASS FILTER
(OPTION X154AA)
TRANSMIT RF RF OUTPUT
FROM TO
POWER TRANSMIT
AMPLIFIER ANTENNA
MODULE
50 OHM
LOAD
MATES WITH
CONNECTOR
ON
PERIPHERAL TRAY
CABLING HARNESS
50 OHM THERMISTOR
LOAD 50K @ 25C
T
HEAT SINK
Figure 2. Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Dual Circulator Assembly
68P81086E34-B
9/1/00
5
6 68P81086E34-B
9/1/00
Options X676AN (UHF R1/R2)
X676AP (UHF R3/R4)
1 DESCRIPTION
Options X676AN and X676AP provide a dual circulator assembly and low pass filter for use with the Quantar UHF
station. The triple circulator option is comprised of the dual circulator assembly combined with the single circulator
located in the station power amplifier module. This combination provides 65 dB (min) of isolation between the
Power Amplifier Module and the transmit antenna. A low pass filter connects between the dual circulator output
and the transmit antenna.
General Description
The dual circulator assembly consists of a double rf circulator and a
50 load with heat sink, all mounted on a 3/16 " aluminum plate which
is housed in the Peripheral Tray. The tray is equipped with a cooling fan
or via duplexer).

2 OPTION COMPLEMENT
Table 1 and Table 2 show the contents of the X676AN and X676AP Triple Circulator Options.
Option Complement
Charts
Table 1.X676AN Triple Circulator Option Complement

Option
Option
Contents
TLE9120A Dual Circulator
X676AN TLN3391A 50 Load w/ heatsink
TLE9140A Low Pass Filter
Table 2.X676AP Triple Circulator Option Complement
Option
Option
Contents
TLE9130A Dual Circulator
X676AP TLN3391A 50 Load w/ heatsink
TLE9140A Low Pass Filter
2 68P81088E54-A
9/1/00
UHF Triple Circulator Option
Table 3 shows the electrical performance specifications for the dual circulator assemblies used in Options X676AN
(UHF R1/R2) and X676AP (UHF R3/R4). Table 4 shows the electrical performance specifications for the low pass
filter used in Options X676AN and X676AP.
Table 3.Performance Specifications for Dual Circulator Assemblies
X676AN403-475 MHz
Operating Frequency
X676AP475-520 MHz
Insertion Loss (with low pass 1.15dB typ
filter and cables) 1.6dB max
45 dB min
Isolation (total of 60 dB when combined with
circulator built into power amplifier module)
22 k 25C
Thermistor Output
1.7 k 125C
68P81088E54-A
9/1/00
3
4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CABLE HARNESS
(MATES WITH 10PIN
TRANSMIT OUTPUT CONNECTOR ON
FROM STATION BACKPLANE)
LOW PASS FILTER
TRANSMIT RF INPUT
FROM
POWER AMPLIFIER LOW PASS DUAL CIRCULATOR
MODULE FILTER ASSEMBLY
PERIPHERAL DC POWER COOLING FAN HEAT SINK THERMISTOR HEAT SINK 50 OHM
TRAY TO FOR OUTPUT LOAD
COOLING CIRCULATOR HEAT SINK TO
FAN CABLE HARNESS
4 68P81088E54-A
9/1/00
UHF Triple Circulator Option
I.M. products. The addition of the dual circu
sembly consists of two circulators, each with a 50 load. Each circula
LOW PASS FILTER

FROM TO
POWER TRANSMIT
AMPLIFIER ANTENNA
MODULE
50 OHM
LOAD
MATES WITH
CONNECTOR
ON
PERIPHERAL TRAY
CABLING HARNESS
50 OHM THERMISTOR
LOAD 22K @ 25C
T
HEAT SINK
Figure 2. Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Triple Circulator Option
68P81088E54-A
9/1/00
5
6 68P81088E54-A
9/1/00
Options X676AQ (800 MHz)
X676AR (900 MHz)
1 DESCRIPTION
Options X676AQ and X676AR provide a dual circulator assembly and low pass filter for use with the Quantar
800 MHz and 900 MHz stations, respectively. The triple circulator option is comprised of the dual circulator assem
bly combined with the single circulator located in the station power amplifier module. This combination provides
65 dB (min) of isolation between the Power Amplifier Module and the transmit antenna. A low pass filter connects
between the dual circulator output and the transmit antenna.
General Description
The dual circulator assembly consists of a double rf circulator and a
50 load with heat sink, all mounted on a 3/16 " aluminum plate which
is housed in the Peripheral Tray. The tray is equipped with a cooling fan
or via duplexer).

2 OPTION COMPLEMENT
Table 1 and Table 2 show the contents of the X676AQ and X676AR Triple Circulator Options.
Option Complement
Charts
Table 1.X676AQ Triple Circulator Option Complement

Option
Option
Contents
TLF7320A Dual Circulator
X676AQ TLN3391A 50 Load w/ heatsink
TLF7340A Low Pass Filter
Table 2.X676AR Triple Circulator Option Complement
Option
Option
Contents
TLF7330A Dual Circulator
X676AR TLN3391A 50 Load w/ heatsink
TLF7340A Low Pass Filter
2 68P81090E86-B
9/1/00
Table 3 shows the electrical performance specifications for the dual circulator assemblies used in Options X676AQ
(800 MHz) and X676AR (900 MHz). Table 4 shows the electrical performance specifications for the low pass filter
used in Options X676AQ and X676AR.
Table 3.Performance Specifications for 800 MHz and 900 MHz

Dual Circulator Assemblies
X676AQ850-870 MHz
Operating Frequency
X676AR935-941 MHz
Insertion Loss (with low pass 1.15dB typ
filter and cables) 1.6dB max
45 dB min
Isolation (total of 60 dB when combined with
circulator built into power amplifier module)
22 k 25C
Thermistor Output
1.7 k 125C
68P81090E86-B
9/1/00
3
4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CABLE HARNESS
(MATES WITH 10PIN
CONNECTOR ON TRANSMIT OUTPUT LOW PASS DUAL CIRCULATOR
STATION BACKPLANE) FROM FILTER ASSEMBLY
LOW PASS FILTER
TRANSMIT RF INPUT
FROM
POWER AMPLIFIER
MODULE
PERIPHERAL DC POWER HEAT SINK THERMISTOR HEAT SINK 50 OHM

TRAY TO OUTPUT LOAD
COOLING COOLING FAN TO
FAN FOR CABLE HARNESS
CIRCULATOR HEAT SINK
4 68P81090E86-B
9/1/00
I.M. products. The addition of the dual circu
sembly consists of two circulators, each with a 50 load. Each circula
LOW PASS FILTER

FROM TO
POWER TRANSMIT
AMPLIFIER ANTENNA
MODULE
50 OHM
LOAD
MATES WITH
CONNECTOR
ON
PERIPHERAL TRAY
CABLING HARNESS
50 OHM THERMISTOR
LOAD 22K @ 25C
T
HEAT SINK
Figure 2. Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Triple Circulator Option
68P81090E86-B
9/1/00
5
6 68P81090E86-B
9/1/00
DUPLEXER MODULE
Options X182AA (132-146 MHz)
X182AB (144-160 MHz)
X182AJ (158-174 MHz)
1 DESCRIPTION
Options 182AA/AB/AJ provide band-dependent duplexer modules for use with Quantar VHF stations. This sec
tion provides a general description, identification of adjustments and inputs/outputs, performance specifications,
and a typical mounting location detail. While the duplexer module is considered non-repairable, tuning screws
are provided for field tuning should replacement become necessary due to module failure, or if retuning is neces
sary due to a change in operating channels. A single channel field tuning procedure is provided in this section.
General Description
The duplexer module (shown in Figure 1) allows a transmit and re
ceive channel pair to share a common TX/RX antenna. Each duplexer
module consists of six resonant cavities (three for transmit and three
for receive) contained in a temperature-compensated copper enclo
sure designed to mount in a standard EIA 19" equipment rack.
Each set of three cavities is designed and tuned to pass the respective
transmit or receive channel frequency (or bandwidths) while providing
maximum TX noise suppression at the RX frequency and maximum RX
isolation at the TX frequency.
Figure 1. Typical Duplexer Module

Printed in U.S.A.
2 ADJUSTMENTS AND INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 2 shows the location of the adjustment screws and input and output rf connectors for the duplexer module.
PASS FREQUENCY TUNING RODS
DUPLEXER
MODULE
insert
faeps-48577
(U841)
@ 100%
NOTCH FREQUENCY
NOTCH FREQUENCY DUAL TRIMMER SCREWS
TRIMMER SCREW (3 PAIRS)
(3) HIGHPASS / LOW NOTCH RX INPUT/TX OUTPUT LOWPASS / HIGH NOTCH
DUPLEXER INPUT (CONNECTS TO SINGLE DUPLEXER INPUT
(CONNECTS TO PA OUTPUT RX/TX ANTENNA) (CONNECTS TO PA OUTPUT
OR RECEIVER INPUT, WHICHEVER OR RECEIVER INPUT, WHICHEVER
HAS HIGHER FREQUENCY) HAS LOWER FREQUENCY)
Figure 2. Quantar VHF Duplexer Module Adjustment Screws and Input/Output Connections
2 68P81086E71-B
9/1/00
Duplexer Module
Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the duplexer module.
Table 1.Duplexer Performance Specifications (Options X182AA/AB/

AJ)
Operating Frequency
Model X182AA 132-146 MHz
Model X182AB 144-160 MHz
Model X182AJ 158-174 MHz
Insertion Loss
1.3 dB max
(Transmitter to Antenna)
Insertion Loss
1.3 dB max
(Antenna to Receiver)
Tx-to-RX Bandwidth
Spacing (maximum)
Frequency Bandwidth
vs 1.5 MHz 200 kHz
Frequency Separation 2.5 MHz 600 kHz
3.5 MHz 800 kHz
4.5 MHz and above 1000 kHz
TX Noise Suppression at RX Freq. 75 dB min
RX Isolation at TX Freq. 75 dB min
Frequency Separation (Min.) 1.5 MHz
Return Loss 14 dB minimum
Maximum Input Power 150 W
3" (H) x 21.5" (D) x 17" (W)
Size
EIA Rack Mountable
Weight 22 lbs.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
68P81086E71-B
9/1/00
3
4 TYPICAL MOUNTING CONFIGURATION
The duplexer module is typically mounted in the same rack or cabinet as the station and peripheral tray (if
equipped). Figure 3 shows front and rear views of a typical repeater configuration in which a station, triple circula
tor option, and duplexer option are installed in a single cabinet. Also shown is a simplified interconnect diagram
showing the receiver and transmitter paths to a single RX/TX antenna.
4 68P81086E71-B
9/1/00
Duplexer Module
STATION
TRANSMIT
OUTPUT
STATION
CABINET STATION
PERIPHERAL PERIPHERAL
TRAY TRAY
STATION
RECEIVE
OUTPUT RX INPUT / TX OUTPUT
(CONNECTS TO SINGLE
RX/TX ANTENNA)
DUPLEXER DUPLEXER
MODULE MODULE
CABINET
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW TX/RX
ANTENNA
POWER LOW PASS FILTER

AMPLIFIER
MODULE
50 OHM
LOAD
TX RF
FROM
STATION
HEAT SINK
PERIPHERAL TRAY DUPLEXER
MODULE
RECEIVER RX RF
MODULE TO
STATION
Figure 3. Typical Duplexer Mounting Configuration and Interconnect Diagram
9/1/00 68P81086E71-B 5
5 FIELD TUNING PROCEDURE
Duplexer modules shipped with stations are tuned at the factory. If a duplexer must be replaced in the field, the
unit must be installed and tuned specifically to the transmit and receive frequency pair for the particular station.
Field Tuning
Overview
The duplexer module is comprised of three low-pass/high-notch ca
vities and three high-pass/low-notch cavities. Each set of three cavi
ties provides bandpass filtering for either the transmit rf signal or the
receive rf signal. In general, the duplexer must be tuned so that the
transmit cavity set passes the transmit signal and rejects the receive
Note:This tuning procedure is valid for chan signal; concurrently, the receive cavity set must be tuned to pass the
nels with a bandwidth of 200 kHz or less. If receive signal and reject the transmit signal.
bandwidth is more than 200 kHz, the duplexer
must be tuned by the service depot. Tuning is performed by injecting rf signals and making tuning adjust
ments (using the tuning rods and trimmer screws) while monitoring for
maximum or minimum readings on the rf millivoltmeter. Field tuning the
duplexer module requires the following general adjustments:
Tune high-pass/low-notch cavities for maximum pass and re
ject response
Tune low-pass/high-notch cavities for maximum pass and re
ject response
Check high-pass/low-notch and low-pass/high-notch cavi
ties for insertion loss
ties for isolation

Field tuning of the duplexer module requires the following test equipment:
RF Millivoltmeter (Boonton 92E or equivalent)
RF Signal Generator (HP8565 or equivalent)
50 N-type terminator
Male-to-Females N-Type T" connector (UG-107B/U or
equiv.)
Slotted screwdriver
3/32" allen wrench
Tuning tool (thin blade)
N-to-N bullet connector (UG29A/U or equivalent)
N-to-BNC Adapter (UG349A/U)
N-to-N Connector (UG57B/U)
6 68P81086E71-B
9/1/00
Duplexer Module
Setting Up for Tuning Duplexer

Perform the preliminary tasks shown in Figure 4 to prepare for tuning
the duplexer module.
Disconnect N-type connector

1 from each cavity (6).
For each cavity, unscrew and remove

2 trimmer screw dust covers (9).
TRIMMER
SCREW
DUST
COVER
ANT
3 Use allen wrench and loosen

tuning rod locking screws (6).
LOW-PASS/ HIGH-PASS/
HIGH-NOTCH LOW-NOTCH
CAVITIES CAVITIES
Figure 4. Preliminary Tasks Prior to Tuning Duplexer
68P81086E71-B
9/1/00
7
Duplexer Tuning Procedure

The duplexer field tuning procedures are provided in Figure 5. The pro
cedures are most easily performed with the duplexer module removed
from the station rack or cabinet. Be sure to make note of the transmit
and receive frequencies for the particular station before beginning.
If the duplexer module is tuned according to instructions and does not
meet specifications for return loss, insertion loss, and/or isolation, you
must return the duplexer for repair.
8 68P81086E71-B
9/1/00
Duplexer Module
1 TUNING LOW PASS RESONATORS

Range set to +10 dBm
BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER 3 TUNING HIGH NOTCH LOOP ASSEMBLIES
BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER
1 Set up test equipment as shown. 1 Set up test equipment as shown. TRIMMER

SCREWS (2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 2 Use tuning tool to adjust trimmer 1 2 3 4 5 6

2 Push or pull tuning rod for cavity #1 screws for cavity #1 to obtain
to obtain a PEAK reading on the LOOP
minimum reading on millivoltmeter. LOOP
millivoltmeter. ASSEMBLIES ASSEMBLIES
(Adjust trimmer screws equally to
obtain minimum. Reduce the range
3 Use allen wrench and tighten locking on the millivoltmeter as necessary to
screw. reach true minimum reading.)
4 Repeat steps 2 & 3 for cavities 2 T"
CONNECTOR HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for cavities 2 T"
and 3. 6 dB
and 3. 6 dB
IN-LINE IN-LINE
PAD PAD
(50 OHM) (50 OHM)
ALLEN
LOCKING
SCREW Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency, Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,
whichever is LOWER whichever is HIGHER
Output level set to +10 dBm Output level set to +10 dBm
RESONATOR
TUNING
ROD
2 TUNING HIGH PASS RESONATORS

4 TUNING LOW NOTCH LOOP ASSEMBLIES
1 Set up test equipment as shown. 1 Set up test equipment as shown. TRIMMER

SCREW
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 Push or pull tuning rod for cavity #4 2 Use tuning tool to adjust trimmer
to obtaina PEAK reading on the LOOP screw for cavity #4 to obtain LOOP
millivoltmeter. ASSEMBLIES minimum reading on millivoltmeter. ASSEMBLIES
(Adjust trimmer screw to obtain

3 Use allen wrench and tighten locking minimum. Reduce the range on the
screw. millivoltmeter as necessary to reach
true minimum reading.)
4 Repeat steps 2 & 3 for cavities 5 and 6. 6 dB
IN-LINE PAD
T" 6 dB
IN-LINE PAD
T"
(50 OHM)
CONNECTOR HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for cavities 5 (50 OHM)
and 6.
ALLEN
LOCKING
SCREW Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency, Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,
whichever is HIGHER whichever is LOWER
RESONATOR
TUNING
ROD
Figure 5. Quantar VHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (Sheet 1 of 3)
9/1/00 68P81086E71-B 9
5 VERIFYING INSERTION LOSS

6 VERIFYING ISOLATION
Range set to +10 dBm BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER R2001 COMMUNICATIONS ANALYZER
Monitor Function
Center frequency set to Rx or Tx
frequency, whichever is LOWER
Attenuator set to -50 dB
6 dB UG349A
IN-LINE PAD
1 Connect test equipment as shown. (50 OHM)
N-TO-BNC
CONNECTOR
1 Connect test equipment as shown. UG29A/U
BULLET CONNECTOR
2 Observe and note the level in dBm as

shown on the millivoltmeter. Observe and note the level in dBm as
2
shown on the R2001 display.
HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR
Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,

whichever is HIGHER
Output level set to +10 dBm Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,
whichever is LOWER
Output level set to +10 dBm
3 Connect the duplexer cable assembly HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR TERMINATOR

and test equipment to the duplexer as HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR
shown. 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 Connect the test equipment to the
Observe and note the level in dBm as duplexer as shown. 1 2 3 4 5 6
4
4
shown on the R2001 display. (If no
5 Subtract the absolute number noted number is displayed, consider
in Step 2 from the number noted in isolation to be greater than 105 dB,
Step 4. The difference should be less which exceeds the specification.)
than 1.3 dB to meet specification for TERMINATOR
Insertion Loss. BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER
5 Subtract the absolute number noted R2001 COMMUNICATIONS ANALYZER
in Step 4 from the number noted in

6 Repeat Steps 1-5 for Low-Pass/High-
Step 2. The difference should be
Notch cavities with the following higher than 75 dB to meet
exceptions:
specification for Isolation.
1) Set Frequency Generator for Rx or
Tx frequency, whichever is LOWER 6 Repeat Steps 1-5 for Low-Pass/High-
Notch cavities with the following
2) Connect Signal Generator to
exceptions:
Low Pass duplexer input (cavity #1)
3) Connect terminator to cavity #6.
1) Set Frequency Generator and R2001
for Rx or Tx frequency, whichever is Attenuator set to 0 dB
6 dB
HIGHER
IN-LINE PAD 2) Connect Signal Generator to
(50 OHM) Low Pass duplexer input (cavity #1)
Figure 5.Quantar VHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (Sheet 2 of 3)
10 68P81086E71-B 9/1/00
Duplexer Module
7 POST-TUNING CHECKS
Make sure all locking screws are

1 tight. Re-install dust covers on all
trimmer capacitors.
LOCKING
SCREW
(3)
2 Make sure all tuning rod locking

screws (6) are tight.
Figure 5.Quantar VHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (Sheet 4 of 4)
68P81086E71-B
9/1/00
11
12 68P81086E71-B
9/1/00
UHF DUPLEXER MODULE
Options X182AC (403-435 MHz)
X182AD (435-470 MHz)
X182AE (470-490 MHz)
X182AF (490-520 MHz)
1 DESCRIPTION
Options X182AC-AF provide band-dependent duplexer modules for use with Quantar and Quantro UHF sta
tions. This section provides a general description, identification of adjustments and inputs/outputs, performance
specifications, and a typical mounting location detail. While the duplexer module is considered non-repairable,
tuning screws are provided for field tuning should replacement become necessary due to module failure, or if re
tuning is necessary due to a change in operating channels. A single channel field tuning procedure is provided
in this section.
General Description
module consists of six resonant cavities (three for transmit and three
for receive) contained in a temperature-compensated copper enclo
sure designed to mount in a standard EIA 19" equipment rack.
Each set of three cavities is designed and tuned to pass the respective
Figure 1. Typical UHF Duplexer Module

Printed in U.S.A.
Quantar/Quantro UHF Station Functional Manuals
2 ADJUSTMENTS AND INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 2 shows the location of the adjustment screws and rf input and output connectors for the duplexer module.
LOWER FREQUENCY HIGHER FREQUENCY

RF CONNECTOR RF CONNECTOR
(RX OR TX) (RX OR TX)
HIGHER FREQUENCY NOTCH LOWER FREQUENCY NOTCH

TRIMMER SCREWS TRIMMER SCREWS
ANT
LO HI
LOWER FREQUENCY HIGHER FREQUENCY

PASS RESONATORS PASS RESONATORS
RX INPUT / TX OUTPUT
(CONNECTS TO SINGLE RX/TX ANTENNA)
Figure 2. Quantar / Quantro UHF Duplexer Module Adjustment Screws and Input/Output Connections
2 68P81087E94-A
9/1/00
UHF Duplexer Module
Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the duplexer module.
Table 1.Duplexer Performance Specifications (Options X182AC-AF)
Operating Frequency
Model X182AC 403-435 MHz
Model X182AD 435-470 MHz
Model X182AE 470-490 MHz
Model X182AF 490-520 MHz
Insertion Loss
1.3 dB max
Insertion Loss
1.3 dB max
TX-to-RX Frequency Separation 5 MHz (X182AC, AD)
(Min.) 3 MHz (X182AE, AF)
120 dB min (X182AC, AD)
TX Noise Suppression at RX Freq.
100 dB min (X182AE, AF)
120 dB min (X182AC, AD)
RX Isolation at TX Freq.
100 dB min (X182AE, AF)
5" (H) x 14" (D) x 19" (W)
Size
EIA Rack Mountable
Weight 23 lbs.
68P81087E94-A
9/1/00
3
Quantar/Quantro UHF Station Functional Manuals
4 68P81087E94-A
9/1/00
UHF Duplexer Module
STATION
TRANSMIT
OUTPUT
CABINET STATION
STATION
STATION
RECEIVE
OUTPUT

HERE DUPLEXER
MODULE
DUPLEXER
MODULE
FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW TX/RX

ANTENNA

AMPLIFIER
MODULE
50 OHM
LOAD TX RF
FROM
STATION
DUPLEXER
HEAT SINK MODULE
PERIPHERAL TRAY
RX RF
RECEIVER TO
MODULE STATION
9/1/00 68P81087E94-A 5
Quantar and Quantro UHF Station Functional Manuals
5 FIELD TUNING PROCEDURE
Duplexer modules shipped with stations are tuned at the factory. If a duplexer must be replaced in the field, the
unit must be installed and tuned specifically to the transmit and receive frequency pair for the particular station.
Field Tuning
Overview
The duplexer module is comprised of three low-pass/high-notch ca
vities and three high-pass/low-notch cavities. Each set of three cavi
ties provides bandpass filtering for either the transmit rf signal or the
receive rf signal. In general, the duplexer must be tuned so that the
transmit cavity set passes the transmit signal and rejects the receive
Note:This tuning procedure is valid for chan signal; concurrently, the receive cavity set must be tuned to pass the
nels with a bandwidth of 200 kHz or less. If receive signal and reject the transmit signal.
bandwidth is more than 200 kHz, the duplexer
must be tuned by the service depot. Tuning is performed by injecting rf signals and making tuning adjust
ments (using the resonator and notch adjusting screws) while monitor
ing for maximum or minimum readings on the rf millivoltmeter. Field tun
ing the duplexer module requires the following general adjustments:
Tune high-pass/low-notch cavities for maximum pass and re
ject response
Tune low-pass/high-notch cavities for maximum pass and re
ject response
ties for insertion loss
ties for isolation

Field tuning of the duplexer module requires the following test equipment:
RF Millivoltmeter (Boonton 92E or equivalent)
RF Signal Generator (HP8656B or equivalent)
50 N-type terminator
Tuning tool (5/32" x 4" screwdriver)
N-to-N bullet connector (UG29A/U or equivalent)
7/16" Nutdriver
7/16" Open End Wrench
N-to-BNC Adapter (UG349A/U)
N-to-N Connector (UG57B/U)
6 68P81087E94-A
9/1/00
UHF Duplexer Module
Setting Up for Tuning Duplexer

Perform the preliminary tasks shown in Figure 4 to prepare for tuning
the duplexer module.
Disconnect N-type connectors (12)

1 and remove cables (6) from cavities.
ANT
LO HI
LOW-PASS/ HIGH-PASS/
HIGH-NOTCH LOW-NOTCH
CAVITIES CAVITIES
For each cavity (6), use open end wrench

2 and loosen locknuts (2 per cavity).
LO
Figure 4. Preliminary Tasks Prior to Tuning Duplexer
68P81087E94-A
9/1/00
7
Duplexer Tuning Procedure

The duplexer field tuning procedures are provided in Figure 5. The pro
cedures are most easily performed with the duplexer module removed
from the station rack or cabinet. Be sure to make note of the transmit
and receive frequencies for the particular station before beginning.
If the duplexer module is tuned according to instructions and does not
meet specifications for return loss, insertion loss, and/or isolation, you
must return the duplexer for repair.
8 68P81087E94-A
9/1/00
UHF Duplexer Module
1 TUNING LOW PASS RESONATORS

6 dB
IN-LINE Range set to +10 dBm
BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER 3 TUNING HIGH NOTCH LOOP ASSEMBLIES
6 dB
IN-LINE Range set to +10 dBm
PAD PAD
(50 OHM) (50 OHM)
NOTCH ADJUSTMENT SCREW

AND LOCK NUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Set up test equipment as shown. 1 Set up test equipment as shown.
2 Use nut driver to adjust pass 2 Use screwdriver to adjust notch

adjustment screw for cavity #1 to adjustment screw for cavity #1 to
obtain a PEAK reading on the obtain a minimum reading on the
millivoltmeter. millivoltmeter. ( Reduce the range on
the millivoltmeter as necessary to
3 Use open end wrench and tighten RESONATOR
reach true minimum reading.)
lock nut carefully, making sure pass PASS ADJUSTMENT SCREW HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR
adjustment screw does not shift AND LOCK NUT
3 Use open end wrench and tighten
position. lock nut carefully, making sure notch
adjustment screw does not shift
4 Repeat steps 2 & 3 for cavities 2
position.
and 3.
and 3.
Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency, Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,
whichever is LOWER whichever is HIGHER
2 TUNING HIGH PASS RESONATORS 4 TUNING LOW NOTCH LOOP ASSEMBLIES

BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER Range set to +10 dBm
6 dB
IN-LINE PAD
6 dB (50 OHM)
IN-LINE NOTCH ADJUSTMENT SCREW
PAD AND LOCK NUT
(50 OHM)
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Set up test equipment as shown.
1 Set up test equipment as shown.
2 Use screwdriver to adjust notch

2 Use nut driver to adjust pass adjustment screw for cavity #4 to
adjustment screw for cavity #4 to obtain a minimum reading on the
obtain a PEAK reading on the millivoltmeter. ( Reduce the range on
millivoltmeter. the millivoltmeter as necessary to
reach true minimum reading.)
3 Use open end wrench and tighten RESONATOR HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR
lock nut carefully, making sure pass PASS ADJUSTMENT SCREW
AND LOCK NUT
HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR 3 Use open end wrench and tighten
adjustment screw does not shift lock nut carefully, making sure notch
position. adjustment screw does not shift
position.
and 6. 4 Repeat steps 2 & 3 for cavities 5
and 6.
Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency, whichever is LOWER
whichever is HIGHER Output level set to +10 dBm
Figure 5. Quantar / Quantro UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (Sheet 1 of 3)
9/1/00 68P81087E94-A 9
5 VERIFYING INSERTION LOSS

6 VERIFYING ISOLATION
Range set to +10 dBm BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER R2001 COMMUNICATIONS ANALYZER
Monitor Function
Center frequency set to Rx or Tx
frequency, whichever is LOWER
Attenuator set to -50 dB
6 dB UG349A
IN-LINE PAD
1 Connect test equipment as shown. (50 OHM)
N-TO-BNC
CONNECTOR
1 Connect test equipment as shown. UG29A/U
BULLET CONNECTOR
2 Observe and note the level in dBm as

2
shown on the R2001 display.

whichever is HIGHER
Output level set to +10 dBm Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,
whichever is LOWER
6 dB 6 dB
IN-LINE PAD IN-LINE PAD
(50 OHM) (50 OHM)
3 Connect the duplexer cables and test HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR
equipment to the duplexer as shown.
3 Connect the test equipment to the
Observe and note the level in dBm as 1 6 duplexer as shown. 1 6
4
4
shown on the R2001 display. (If no
5 Subtract the absolute number noted number is displayed, consider
in Step 2 from the number noted in isolation to be greater than 105 dB,
Step 4. The difference should be less which exceeds the specification.)
than 1.3 dB to meet specification for
Insertion Loss. BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER
5 Subtract the absolute number noted
in Step 4 from the number noted in
6 Repeat Steps 1-5 for Low-Pass/High- 50 OHM
Step 2. The difference should be 50 OHM
R2001 COMMUNICATIONS ANALYZER
Notch cavities with the following TERMINATOR TERMINATOR

higher than 100 dB to meet
exceptions:
specification for Isolation.
1) Set Frequency Generator for Rx or
Tx frequency, whichever is LOWER 6 Repeat Steps 1-5 for Low-Pass/High-
Notch cavities with the following
2) Connect Millivoltmeter to Low Pass exceptions:
duplexer input (cavity #1)
3) Connect terminator to cavity #6. 1) Set Frequency Generator and R2001
for Rx or Tx frequency, whichever is
HIGHER Attenuator set to 0 dB
2) Connect R2001 to Low Pass
duplexer input (cavity #1)
Figure 5.Quantar / Quantro UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (Sheet 2 of 3)
10 68P81087E94-A 9/1/00
UHF Duplexer Module
7 POST-TUNING CHECKS
Make sure all notch adjustment lock

1 nuts (6) are tight.
ANT
LO HI
2 Make sure all pass adjustment

lock nuts (6) are tight.
Figure 5.Quantar/Quantro UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (Sheet 3 of 3)
68P81087E94-A
9/1/00
11
Quantro UHF Station Functional Manual
12 68P81087E94-A
9/1/00
DUPLEXER MODULE
Options X182AG
RX (806-824 MHz)
TX (851-869 MHz)
X182AH
RX (896-902 MHz)
TX (935-941 MHz)
1 DESCRIPTION
Options X182AG and X182AH provide a duplexer module for use with Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz stations,
respectively. This section provides a general description, identification of inputs/outputs, performance specifica
tions, and a typical mounting location detail. The duplexer module is considered non-repairable and requires
no field tuning.
General Description
module consists of ten resonant cavities (five for transmit and five for
receive) contained in a temperature-compensated copper enclosure
designed to mount in a standard EIA 19" equipment rack.
Each set of five cavities is designed and tuned to pass the respective
Figure 1. Typical 900 MHz Duplexer Module

Printed in U.S.A.
2 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 2 shows the input and output rf connectors for the duplexer module.
RECEIVE RF INPUT
TO RECEIVER MODULE
TO / FROM TRANSMIT INPUT

ANTENNA FROM
Figure 2. Quantar 800 MHz/900 MHz Duplexer Module Input/Output Connections
2 68P81091E93-B
9/1/00
800 MHz and 900 MHz Duplexer Modules
Table 1 and Table 2 show the electrical performance specifications for the 800 MHz and 900 MHz duplexer modules.
Table 1.Duplexer Performance Specifications (Option X182AG)
Insertion Loss
1.0 dB max
Insertion Loss
1.0 dB max
RX 806-824 MHz
Frequency Passband
TX 851-869 MHz
Frequency Separation 45 MHz
3" (H) x 5" (D) x 19" (W)
Size with rack mounting panel
EIA Rack Mountable
Weight with rack mounting panel 7.5 lbs.
Table 2.Duplexer Performance Specifications (Option X182AH)
Insertion Loss
1.0 dB max
Insertion Loss
1.0 dB max
RX 896-902 MHz
Frequency Passband
TX 935-941 MHz
Frequency Separation 39 MHz
3" (H) x 5" (D) x 19" (W)
Size with rack mounting panel
EIA Rack Mountable
Weight with rack mounting panel 7.5 lbs.
68P81091E93-B
9/1/00
3
4 68P81091E93-B
9/1/00
800 MHz and 900 MHz Duplexer Modules
CABINET STATION
RECEIVE RF INPUT
TO RECEIVER MODULE STATION
PERIPHERAL
TRAY
PERIPHERAL
TRAY
DUPLEXER
MODULE
DUPLEXER
MODULE
TRANSMIT RF OUTPUT
(FROM PA VIA
TRIPLE CIRCULATOR
AND LOW PASS FILTER)
HERE
FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW
TX/RX
ANTENNA

AMPLIFIER
MODULE
50 OHM
LOAD
TX RF
FROM
STATION
HEAT SINK
PERIPHERAL TRAY DUPLEXER
MODULE
RECEIVER RX RF
MODULE TO
STATION
9/1/00 68P81091E93-B 5
6 68P81091E93-B 9/1/00
68P81091E93-A
7/1/94
ASTRO MODEM CARD
(Option X437AA)
WIRELINE INTERFACE
BOARD
(4WIRE VERSION SHOWN)
ASTRO MODEM CARD
MODEM CARD
CONNECTOR
Figure 1. ASTRO Modem Card Installed on Wireline Interface Board
1 DESCRIPTION
Option X437AA provides a single ASTRO Modem Card for use with Quantar station products. The ASTRO Modem
Card provides the interface between the station and the wireline in systems using ASTRO 9.6 kbps signaling. The
card connects to the Wireline Interface Board, as shown in Figure 1. Note that 8wire Wireline Interface Boards
are equipped with connectors for two ASTRO modem cards.
General Description
The modem card accepts ASTRO modem signaling from the wireline
and converts the signal to detected data, which is then fed to the
Note:The ASTRO modem card contains Station Control Module for further processing. Data from the Station
no jumpers or switches and requires no ad
justments. The card is autoconfigured upon
Control Module is fed to the modem card, which converts the signal to
station powerup. an ASTRO modem signal and outputs the signal to the wireline. (Refer
to the Wireline Interface Board sections in this manual for block
diagrams showing the interface between the ASTRO modem card and
the wireline/station.)

Printed in U.S.A.
PERIPHERAL TRAY
(Option X696AA)
CABLE
HARNESS LOW PASS
FILTER
DUAL CIRCULATOR
ASSEMBLY
PERIPHERAL
TRAY
Figure 1. Peripheral Tray with Internal Components (900 MHz Components Shown)
1 DESCRIPTION
Option X696AA provides a peripheral tray and cable harness for use with Quantar station products. This section
provides a general description, option complement, and identification of inputs/outputs. The information provided
is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module, allowing maintenance and trouble
shooting to the module level. (Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for de
tailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station.)
General Description
The peripheral tray is comprised of a rack-mount tray. The tray (shown
in Figure 1) allows various ancillary equipment (circulators, filters, etc.)
to be housed and electrically connected to the station.

2 OPTIONS COMPLEMENT
Table 1 shows the contents for the Option X696AA Peripheral Tray option.
Option Complement
Chart
Table 1.Peripheral Tray Option X696AA Complement
Model/Part No. Description

TRN7751A Peripheral Tray Assembly
0383498N08 Self-tapping screws (4)
2785203U01 Peripheral Tray Shelf
2 68P81086E37-B
9/1/00
Peripheral Tray Option
3 PERIPHERAL TRAY CONTENTS AND INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 2 shows the Peripheral Tray equipped with dual circulator assembly and low pass filter.
CABLE HARNESS
(MATES WITH 10PIN TRANSMIT OUTPUT
CONNECTOR ON FROM LOW PASS DUAL CIRCULATOR
STATION BACKPLANE) LOW PASS FILTER FILTER ASSEMBLY
50 OHM
LOAD
HEAT SINK
PERIPHERAL DC POWER TRANSMIT RF INPUT COOLING FAN HEAT SINK THERMISTOR

TRAY TO FROM FOR OUTPUT
COOLING FAN POWER AMPLIFIER CIRCULATOR HEAT SINK TO
MODULE CABLE HARNESS
Figure 2. Peripheral Tray Contents and Inputs and Outputs (900 MHz Circulator and Low Pass Filter Shown)
68P81086E37-B
9/1/00
3
4 68P81086E37-B
9/1/00
ULTRA HIGH STABILITY OSCILLATOR
(UHSO) MODULE
(Internal)
Option X873AA
1 DESCRIPTION
The Option X873AA UHSO Module is described in this section. A general description, identification of inputs/out
puts, functional block diagram, and functional theory of operation are provided. The information provided is suffi
cient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module, allowing maintenance and troubleshoot
ing to the module level. (Refer also to the Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting
procedures for all modules in the station.)
General Description
The X873AA Option provides an Ultra-High Stability Oscillator Module
which significantly increases the frequency accuracy of the station's in
ternal frequency reference circuitry (located on the Station Control
Module). The UHSO module is designed to slide into the 2nd receiver
slot of the station card cage and is powered by the station power sup
ply (via the backplane).
The module consists of a sealed ovenized element, voltage regulator
circuitry, and control and diagnostics circuitry.

2 IDENTIFICATION OF INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 1 shows the UHSO Module input and output external connections.
UHSO MODULE
FRONT PANEL
FRONT VIEW
CARD EDGE CONNECTOR

REAR VIEW
Figure 1. UHSO Module Inputs and Outputs
2 68P81088E08-A
9/1/00
Option X873AA UHSO Module
The following theory of operation describes the operation of the UHSO Module circuitry at a functional level. The
module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Refer to the block diagram
shown in Figure 2.
+10V Regulator Circuitry

A series pass regulator circuit accepts +14.2 V from the backplane and
generates a +10 V dc supply voltage. This +10 V is used to power the
ovenized 5 MHz element as well as other circuitry on the UHSO board.
5 MHz Oscillator Circuitry

A sealed ovenized 5 MHz element provides a highly stable 5 MHz refer
ence output. This output is fed to the Station Control Module (via the
backplane) and is used to control the reference oscillator circuitry (lo
cated on the SCM board) to maintain improved frequency accuracy. A
sample of the 5 MHz signal is fed to one of the A/D converter inputs (p/o
Diagnostics Circuitry).
The ovenized element also generates a +8V dc voltage. This +8V is
used to power the buffers associated with the steering voltage, and al
lows the steering voltage and ovenized element to track", eliminating
the need for additional temperature compensation. The + 8V dc volt
age is also scaled and buffered to provide a +8V sample which is fed
to one of the A/D converter inputs (p/o Diagnostics Circuitry).
Control Circuitry
The control circuitry accepts 12 bits of data from the Station Control Module
(via the SPI bus) and outputs a corresponding dc voltage. This voltage is
scaled and buffered and output as a dc steering voltage which controls the
frequency output of the 5 MHz oscillator. [Note that this is not a closed feed
back loop system. The 12 bits are sent only during station power up and
when performing the reference oscillator calibration procedure (using the
RSS).]
The dc steering voltage is also scaled and buffered to provide a steer
ing voltage sample which is fed to one of the A/D converter inputs (p/o
Diagnostics Circuitry).
68P81088E08-A
9/1/00
3

board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 thru A5 as the UHSO
signals for the D/A and A/D converters.
Various dc voltages and sample signals are input to an A/D converter
which converts the signals to a binary representation. The data is then
sent to the Station Control Module (via the SPI bus) for monitoring and
diagnostics purposes.
4 68P81088E08-A
9/1/00
Option X873AA UHSO Module
+10 V REGULATOR CIRCUITRY
P/O +10 V
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
+14 V DC SERIES PASS +10 V
22 +14 V
FROM REGULATOR
23
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITRY
24
MODULE
25
VIA BACKPLANE
26
+10 V
27
+5V DC 28
FROM 29
POWER SUPPLY 30 +5 V
31
MODULE
32 +8 V
VIA BACKPLANE
33 CONTROL CIRCUITRY
34
SCALING/ +8V SAMPLE
+10 V BUFFERING
+10 V +8 V CIRCUITRY
SEALED
5 MHZ P/O
OVENIZED BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ELEMENT BUFFER 5 MHZ
SPI BUS SPI BUS DC STEERING VOLTAGE 5 MHZ REFERENCE REFERENCE
D/A SCALING/ 70 OUTPUT TO
TO/FROM BUFFERING
STATION CONTROL CONVERTER STATION CONTROL
3 CIRCUITRY VIA BACKPLANE
MODULE
STEERING VOLTAGE
SAMPLE 5 MHZ SAMPLE
SCALING/
CHIP BUFFERING
SELECT CIRCUITRY
5 MHZ OSCILLATOR CIRCUITRY

3 +5 V
DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY
STEERING VOLTAGE
SAMPLE
5 MHZ SAMPLE
SPI BUS A./D +8V SAMPLE

CONVERTER
3
+14V
+10V
ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY +5V
VARIOUS SIGNALS
FROM UHSO
TO BE
MONITORED
A0 & A1 CHIP
SELECT CHIP
DECODE SELECT
ADDRESS CIRCUITRY
BUS
FROM
STATION
CONTROL
MODULE
BOARD
SELECT
DECODE
A2-A5 CIRCUITRY
Figure 2. Internal UHSO Module Functional Block Diagram
9/1/00 68P81088E08-A 5
RA/RT CONFIGURATION
(E & M KEYING)
For Quantar and Quantro Stations
1 OVERVIEW
The RA/RT (E & M keying) configuration allows a Quantar/Quantro station to be controlled by a remote console
using either a radio link or a microwave link in place of the usual wireline link. This configuration is typically used
in cases where the station is located in a relatively inaccessible location (such as a mountain top) where running
phone lines is either impractical or impossible.
As shown in Figure 1A, a pair of stations (called station 1 and station 2) is used to substitute for the normal wireline
connections between the repeater station and the console. Figure 1B shows a microwave RA/RT link.
STATION 2
STATION 3
STATION 1
RF LINK
T R3
WIRELINE
R T2 LINK REMOTE
T3 CONSOLE
R2
Figure 1ARA/RT WITH RF LINK
MICROWAVE
STATION 2
STATION 3
MICROWAVE MICROWAVE
LINK STATION 1
T
WIRELINE
R LINK REMOTE
CONSOLE
Figure 1BRA/RT WITH MICROWAVE LINK
Figure 1. Typical RA/RT Systems (E & M Keying)

2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS (RF LINK)

Install stations 1, 2, and 3 as described in the appropriate functional base station manual. Figure 2 shows the
connections between the stations necessary to allow RA/RT (E & M keying) operation. Perform the following
procedures to make the wiring connections between the console and Station 1 and between Stations 2 and 3.
STATION 3 STATION 2
LINE 1 LINE 2
T R3
RD STAT +
+5V
EXT PTT + RD STAT - RF LINK
EXT PTT -
+5V REMOTE
RD STAT + STATION 1 CONSOLE
EXT PTT +
LINE 1
RD STAT - EXT PTT -
T3
+5V
R T2
EXT PTT +
LINE 2 LINE 1
EXT PTT - PTT CLOSURE
R2 LINE 2
Figure 2. RA/RT (E & M Keying) Wiring Connections (RF Link)
Console to Station 1
Wiring Connections
Step 1. Connect the landline-to-station audio (from the
console) to the Line 1 connections on the backplane of
Station 1 as shown below.
Step 2. Connect the station-to-landline audio (to the console)
to the Line 2 connections on the backplane of Station 1,
as shown below.
NotePhone line connections may be made

at either the 50pin Telco connector or the
8position terminal connector. Refer to the
Installation section of the appropriate sta 8-POSITION
TERMINAL
tion functional manual for more details on CONNECTOR
phone line connections. Line 1 + Pin 1
Line 1 - Pin 2
Line 2 + Pin 3
Line 2 - Pin 4
50-PIN TELCO
CONNECTOR
Line 1 + Pin 1
Line 1 - Pin 26
Line 2 + Pin 2
Line 2 - Pin 27
2 68P81090E99-A
9/1/00
RA/RT Configuration (E & M Control)
Station 2 to Station 3
Wiring Connections
Wireline Connections
Step 1. Connect the Line 1 audio from Station 2 to the Line 2
connections on Station 3 as shown below.

TERMINAL
Line 1 - Pin 2
50-PIN TELCO Line 2 + Pin 3

CONNECTOR Line 2 - Pin 4
Line 1 + Pin 1
Line 1 - Pin 26
Line 2 + Pin 2
Line 2 - Pin 27
RDSTAT to EXT PTT Connection (Station 3 to Station 2)

Step 1. Connect the RD STAT + and - signals from Station 3 to
the EXT PTT + and - signals on Station 2 as shown
below. An equivalent schematic circuit for the RD STAT
and EXT PTT signals is also shown.
STATION 3 STATION 2
50-PIN 50-PIN
TELCO TELCO
RD STAT + 8 +5V
18
22 EXT PTT +
RD STAT - 43
47 EXT PTT -
GND 7
STATION 2 +5V
+5V
STATION 3 +5V
100K
NoteRDSTAT INT signal goes high when
3.9K 3.9K
Station 3 detects receive signal (according to EXT PTT
INT
RX Activation parameter setting via RSS). 220PF
This energizes relay, turns on LED in opto
coupler, and pulls EXT PTT INT low. This 3.9K 220PF
0.1UF
RDSTAT
causes Station 2 transmitter to key up and INT
routes Line 1 audio to the transmitter.
68P81090E99-A
9/1/00
3
Wiring Connections
(Cont'd)
RDSTAT to EXT PTT Connection (Station 2 to Station 3)
STATION 3 STATION 2
50-PIN 50-PIN
TELCO TELCO
+5V 8 RD STAT +
18
EXT PTT + 22
43 RD STAT -
EXT PTT - 47
7 GND

Station 2 detects receive signal (according to
RX Activation parameter setting via RSS).
This energizes relay, turns on LED in opto +5V STATION 3 +5V
coupler, and pulls EXT PTT INT low. This +5V
STATION 2
causes Station 3 transmitter to key up and 100K
routes Line 1 audio to the transmitter. EXT PTT
3.9K 3.9K
INT 220PF
220PF 3.9K
0.1UF RDSTAT
INT
4 68P81090E99-A
9/1/00
3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS (MICROWAVE LINK)
Install the station as described in the appropriate functional base station manual. Figure 2 shows the connections
between the station, microwave equipment, and console necessary to allow RA/RT (E & M keying) operation.
Perform the following procedures to make the wiring connections between the console and the Microwave
Station 1 and between Microwave Station 2 and Station 3.
MICROWAVE
STATION 3 STATION 2
T LINE 1
MICROWAVE
+5V LINK
EXT PTT +
EXT PTT - M-LEAD
MICROWAVE REMOTE
E-LEAD LANDLINE-TO-STATION
RD STAT -
WIRELINE AUDIO
R
E-LEAD PTT CLOSURE
LINE 2
STATION-TO-LANDLINE
WIRELINE AUDIO
Figure 3. RA/RT (E & M Keying) Wiring Connections (Microwave Link)
Console to Microwave
Station 1
Wiring Connections
console) to Microwave Station 1.
NoteRefer to the Microwave Station manu
al for details of making wireline connections. Step 2. Connect the station-to-landline audio (to the console)
to the Microwave Station.
68P81090E99-A
9/1/00
5
Microwave Station 2 to
Station 3 Wiring
Connections
NoteRefer to the Microwave Station manu Step 1. Connect the station-to-landline audio from Microwave
al for details of making wireline connections. Station 2 to the Line 1 connections on Station 3 as shown
below.
Step 2. Connect the landline-to-station audio to Microwave
Station 2 to the Line 2 connections on Station 3 as shown
below.

Installation section of the appropriate sta
tion functional manual for more details on
phone line connections.
8-POSITION
TERMINAL
CONNECTOR
Line 1 + Pin 1
Line 1 - Pin 2
Line 1 + Pin 1
Line 1 - Pin 26
Line 2 + Pin 2
Line 2 - Pin 27
RDSTAT to E-Lead Connection (Station 3 to Station 2)

the E-Lead signal on Microwave Station 2 as shown
and E LEAD signals is also shown.
MICROWAVE
STATION 3 STATION 2
50-PIN
TELCO
RD STAT +
18 E-LEAD
RD STAT - 43
GND 7
STATION 3 +5V
MICROWAVE STATION 2
This energizes relay and provides ground
signal to E LEAD input on Microwave Station 3.9K E-LEAD
2. RDSTAT
INT
6 68P81090E99-A
9/1/00
Station 3 Wiring
Connections (Cont'd)
M-Lead to EXT PTT Connection (Station 2 to Station 3)
Step 1. Connect the M-Lead on the Microwave Station 2 to the
EXT PTT + signal on Station 3 as shown below. An
equivalent schematic circuit for the EXT PTT and M LEAD
signals is also shown.
MICROWAVE
STATION 3 STATION 2
50-PIN
TELCO
+5V 8
EXT PTT + 22
EXT PTT - 47 M-LEAD
NoteMLEAD output from Microwave Sta

tion 2 goes low when transmitting signal on
wireline. This causes EXT PTT to activate and +5V STATION 3 MICROWAVE STATION 2
+5V
key Station 3 transmitter.
100K
3.9K 3.9K
EXT PTT
INT 220PF
M-LEAD
220PF
0.1UF
68P81090E99-A
9/1/00
7
4 RSS PROGRAMMING
Using the Quantar/Quantro Radio Service Software (RSS) program, make the following codeplug data changes
to allow proper RA/RT operation. (Refer to the RSS User's Guide 68P81085E35 for details on making codeplug
programming changes.)
Table 1.Codeplug Data Changes for RA/RT Operation (RF Link Configuration)
Equipment Codeplug Data Parameter RSS User's Guide Location

Programming the Wireline Configuration Data
Station 1 Disable TX Notch Filter
(p/o Chapter 4)
(p/o Chapter 4)
Table 2.Codeplug Data Changes for RA/RT Operation (Microwave Link Configuration)

(p/o Chapter 4)
8 68P81090E99-A
9/1/00
5 TX WIRELINE ALIGNMENT
You may align the TX Wireline levels as described in the RSS User's Guide 68P81085E35 (which requires the use
of an external signal generator), or you may use the station to generate the alignment tone. This method is
described as follows.
Note Make sure the Automatic Line Control parameter is disabled for Stations 1,2, and 3.
Station 1 TX Wireline
Alignment
Perform standard TX Wireline alignment procedure located in RSS
User's Guide 68P81085E35.
Alignment
Step 1. Connect the RSS to Station 3 and access the RX Wireline
Alignment screen.
Step 2. Set the RX wireline level and Save it. (Note that the
wireline level is typically set to -6 dBm.)
Step 3. Press F2 to turn on the 1 kHz tone. Do not exit this screen.
Step 4. With the RSS program still running, disconnect the RSS
cable from Station 3 and connect it to Station 2. Now exit
the RX Alignment screen.
Step 5. Access the TX Wireline Alignment screen and press F8 to
save the alignment value. (Station 3 is providing the 1 kHz
alignment tone.)
Step 6. Exit the TX Wireline Alignment screen.
cable from Station 2 and connect it to Station 3.
Step 8. Access the RX Wireline Alignment screen and turn off the
1 kHz tone.
68P81090E99-A
9/1/00
9
Alignment
Alignment screen.
alignment tone.)
1 kHz tone.
10 68P81090E99-A
9/1/00
RA/RT CONFIGURATION
(TRC CONTROL)
1 OVERVIEW
The RA/RT (TRC control) configuration allows a Quantar/Quantro station to be TRC controlled by a remote console
using either a radio link or a microwave link in place of the usual wireline link. This configuration is typically used
in cases where the station is located in a relatively inaccessible location (such as a mountain top) where running
phone lines is either impractical or impossible.
As shown in Figure 1A, a pair of stations (called station 1 and station 2) is used to substitute for the normal wireline
connections between the repeater station and the console. Figure 1B shows a microwave RA/RT link.
STATION 2
STATION 3
STATION 1
RF LINK
T R3
WIRELINE
R T2 LINK REMOTE
T3 CONSOLE
R2
Figure 1ARA/RT WITH RF LINK
MICROWAVE
STATION 2
STATION 3
MICROWAVE MICROWAVE
LINK STATION 1
T
WIRELINE
R LINK REMOTE
CONSOLE
Figure 1BRA/RT WITH MICROWAVE LINK
Figure 1. Typical RA/RT Systems (TRC Control)

2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS (RF LINK)

Install stations 1, 2, and 3 as described in the appropriate functional base station manual. Figure 2 shows the
connections between the stations necessary to allow RA/RT (TRC control) operation. Perform the following
procedures to make the wiring connections between the console and Station 1 and between Stations 2 and 3.
STATION 3 STATION 2
LINE 1 LINE 2
T R3
RF LINK
+5V
RD STAT + STATION 1 REMOTE
EXT PTT +
RD STAT - EXT PTT -
CONSOLE
T3 LINE 1
R T2
LINE 2 LINE 1
R2 LINE 2
Figure 2. RA/RT (TRC Control) Wiring Connections (RF Link)
Console to Station 1
Wiring Connections
console) to the Line 1 connections on the backplane of
Station 1 as shown below.
Step 10. Connect the station-to-landline audio (to the console)
to the Line 2 connections on the backplane of Station 1,
as shown below.

TERMINAL
Line 1 - Pin 2
Line 2 + Pin 3
Line 2 - Pin 4
50-PIN TELCO
CONNECTOR
Line 1 + Pin 1
Line 1 - Pin 26
Line 2 + Pin 2
Line 2 - Pin 27
2 68P81090E98-A
9/1/00
RA/RT Configuration (TRC Control)
Wiring Connections

TERMINAL
Line 1 - Pin 2

Line 1 + Pin 1
Line 1 - Pin 26
Line 2 + Pin 2
Line 2 - Pin 27
RDSTAT to EXT PTT Connection

STATION 3 STATION 2
50-PIN 50-PIN
TELCO TELCO
RD STAT + 8 +5V
18
22 EXT PTT +
RD STAT - 43
47 EXT PTT -
GND 7
STATION 2 +5V
+5V
STATION 3 +5V
100K
3.9K 3.9K
Station 3 detects receive signal (according to EXT PTT
INT
RX Activation parameter setting via RSS). 220PF
This energizes relay, turns on LED in opto
coupler, and pulls EXT PTT INT low. This 3.9K 220PF
0.1UF
RDSTAT
causes Station 2 transmitter to key up and INT
routes Line 1 audio to the transmitter.
68P81090E98-A
9/1/00
3
3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS (MICROWAVE LINK)
Install the station as described in the appropriate functional base station manual. Figure 2 shows the connections
between the station, microwave equipment, and console necessary to allow RA/RT (TRC control) operation.
Perform the following procedures to make the wiring connections between the console and the Microwave
Station 1 and between Microwave Station 2 and Station 3.
MICROWAVE
STATION 3 STATION 2
LINE 1 MICROWAVE
T LINK
MICROWAVE REMOTE
E-LEAD LANDLINE-TO-STATION
RD STAT -
WIRELINE AUDIO
R
LINE 2
STATION-TO-LANDLINE
WIRELINE AUDIO
Figure 3. RA/RT (TRC Control) Wiring Connections (Microwave Link)
Console to Microwave
Station 1
Wiring Connections
console) to Microwave Station 1.
NoteRefer to the Microwave Station manu
al for details of making wireline connections. Step 2. Connect the station-to-landline audio (to the console)
to the Microwave Station.
4 68P81090E98-A
9/1/00
Station 3 Wiring
Connections
NoteRefer to the Microwave Station manu Step 1. Connect the station-to-landline audio from Microwave
al for details of making wireline connections. Station 2 to the Line 1 connections on Station 3 as shown
below.
Step 2. Connect the landline-to-station audio to Microwave
Station 2 to the Line 2 connections on Station 3 as shown
below.

Installation section of the appropriate sta
tion functional manual for more details on
phone line connections.
8-POSITION
TERMINAL
CONNECTOR
Line 1 + Pin 1
Line 1 - Pin 2
Line 1 + Pin 1
Line 1 - Pin 26
Line 2 + Pin 2
Line 2 - Pin 27
RDSTAT to E-Lead Connection

the E-Lead signal on Microwave Station 2 as shown
and E LEAD signals is also shown.
MICROWAVE
STATION 3 STATION 2
50-PIN
TELCO
RD STAT +
18 E-LEAD
RD STAT - 43
GND 7
STATION 3 +5V
MICROWAVE STATION 2
This energizes relay and provides ground
signal to E LEAD input on Microwave Station 3.9K E-LEAD
2. RDSTAT
INT
68P81090E98-A
9/1/00
5
4 RSS PROGRAMMING
Using the Quantar/Quantro Radio Service Software (RSS) program, make the following codeplug data changes
to allow proper RA/RT operation. (Refer to the RSS User's Guide 68P81085E35 for details on making codeplug
programming changes.)
Table 1.Codeplug Data Changes for RA/RT Operation (RF Link Configuration)

Change command for Guard Tone
from (typically) MORE to KEY. Programming the TRC Commands Data (p/o Chapter 4)
Station 1 Leave all other commands empty.
Disable TX Notch Filter
(p/o Chapter 4)
Station 3 Enable TX Notch Filter
(p/o Chapter 4)
Note Make sure console is programmed for 240 msec HLGT. On SECURENET systems, increase to 360 msec.
Table 2.Codeplug Data Changes for RA/RT Operation (Microwave Link Configuration)

Station 3 Enable TX Notch Filter
(p/o Chapter 4)
Note Make sure console is programmed for 240 msec HLGT. On SECURENET systems, increase to 360 msec.
6 68P81090E98-A
9/1/00
5 TX WIRELINE ALIGNMENT
You may align the TX Wireline levels as described in the RSS User's Guide 68P81085E35 (which requires the use
of an external signal generator), or you may use the station to generate the alignment tone. This method is
described as follows.
Note Make sure the Automatic Line Control parameter is disabled for Stations 1, 2, and 3.
Alignment
Perform standard TX Wireline alignment procedure located in RSS
User's Guide 68P81085E35.
Alignment
Alignment screen.
alignment tone.)
1 kHz tone.
68P81090E98-A
9/1/00
7
Alignment
Alignment screen.
alignment tone.)
1 kHz tone.
8 68P81090E98-A
9/1/00
FALL BACK INCABINET
REPEAT FEATURE
1 OVERVIEW
Feature Description
The Fall Back InCabinet Repeat (FBICR) feature provides limited backup communications capabilities in
Simulcast (Option U764) and NonSimulcast Voting (Option X269) systems in which the link to the Comparator
has been lost (phone line disruption, cable disconnection, etc.). Figure 1 and Figure 2 illustrate typical scenarios
in which the FBICR mode is activated. (Note that in these examples automatic FBICR mode is assumed; refer to
Automatic and External Modes below for details.)
NoteThe FBICR feature is supported only for Station/RSS Release R10.03.00 and later.
Automatic and External Modes

The FBICR feature may be configured for either automatic or external modes (depending on system types, as
explained later). Automatic mode is configured by programming certain station parameters using the Radio
Service Software (RSS). External mode requires (in addition to RSS settings) that electrical connections be made
to certain pins on the System Connector (Connector #17) located on the station backplane; external equipment
(customerprovided) is used to ground one or more of these lines to force the station into FBICR mode.
The FBICR feature can be configured for the following system types in Automatic or External Modes:
Automatic Mode
Conventional Analog (both Simulcast and NonSimulcast Voting Systems)
Conventional ASTRO (CAI) (both Simulcast and NonSimulcast Voting Systems)
Trunked ASTRO (SMARTZONE or SMARTNET) (CAI, VSELP) (Simulcast only)
External Mode
Conventional Analog (both Simulcast and NonSimulcast Voting Systems)
Conventional ASTRO (CAI) (both Simulcast and NonSimulcast Voting Systems)
Trunked Analog (SMARTZONE or SMARTNET) (both Simulcast and NonSimulcast Voting Systems)
Trunked ASTRO (SMARTZONE or SMARTNET) (CAI, VSELP) (Simulcast only)
continued on page 3

If either/both of these links fail

(for any coverage area), station
will revert to FBICR mode.
Coverage Area Coverage Area Coverage Area

A B C
STATION STATION STATION

T O T O T
R V R V R
E E
R R
L L
R A R A R
P P
R R R
TO TO
COVERAGE COVERAGE
AREA B AREA C
STATION TX STATION TX
COMPARATOR
FROM FROM
COVERAGE COVERAGE
AREA AREA
B C
Figure 1. FBICR Feature in Simulcast Voting System (Automatic FBICR Mode Shown)
2 68P81095E96-O
7/15/99
Fall Back InCabinet Repeat Feature
If either/both of these
links fail, station will
STATION revert to FBICR
mode
T
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
R
R
COMPARATOR
Figure 2. FBICR Feature in NonSimulcast Voting System (Automatic FBICR Mode Shown)
Link Failure Detection Requirements

Before automatically enabling FBICR mode, a link failure detection must occur, defined as follows:
For Digital Systems

Protocol Failure
Carrier Detect Loss
NoteIn a V.24 Hybrid Configuration, the loss of the analog link will not cause the station
to enter FBICR mode. Only the failure of the digital link will cause the station to enter FBICR mode.
For Analog Systems

Loss of External PTT (Simulcast)
No TRC Keyup (Voting)
Other Things to Know

It is important to note that a station operating in FBICR mode is independent of other stations/receivers in
the particular system. This is especially important in a Simulcast system, because simulcast transmission
timing will be lost for the overlap coverage area between an active Simulcast station and a FBICR station.
In a typical Simulcast scenario, the station responsible for the major coverage area is set for FBICR, and
any adjacent stations are subsequently disabled.
Automatic and External modes are mutually exclusive (i.e., a station may not be configured for both modes).
68P81095E96-O
7/15/99
3
2 CONFIGURING THE FBICR FEATURE
Depending on the system type and whether you wish to configure for automatic or external operation, the FBICR
feature must be configured by using the RSS only, or a combination of RSS programming and external wiring
connections. Each configuration scenario is described on the following pages.
Automatic Mode
Conventional Analog or Conventional ASTRO (CAI)
(Simulcast or NonSimulcast Voting Systems)
Step 1. Access the Wireline Configuration Screen.
Step 2. Set the Fall Back InCabinet Repeat field to ENABLED.
Step 3. Enter the desired delay time (in msecs) in the Fall Back
Timer field.
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Use Up/Down Arrow Keys to Select

BASE STATION PRODUCTS Wireline Operation
Page 1 of 2 VER:XX.XX.XX
:CHANGE/VIEW:WIRELINE CONFIGURATION
Wireline Operation 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX

Console Priority DISABLED OPTION
Remote Control Type ASTRO
TRC Input Line 1
Outbound Analog Link Timer 120 sec
Comparator NONE OPTION
Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat ENABLED
Fall Back Timer xxx msec
Status Tone ENABLED

Status Tone Frequency 2175 kHz
Wireline Squelch DISABLED

Rx Securenet/ASTRO To Wireline ENABLED

Equalization DISABLED
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT
End of Procedure
4 68P81095E96-O
7/15/99
Automatic Mode (continued)

Trunked (SMARTZONE or SMARTNET) ASTRO (CAI, VSELP)
(Simulcast Systems Only)
(No Fall Back Timer setting is required.)
NoteWhile in FBICR mode, the MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Use Up/Down Arrow Keys to Select
station will transmit Failsoft beeps BASE STATION PRODUCTS Wireline Operation
and the subscriber will give the Fail Page 1 of 2 VER:XX.XX.XX
soft indication. :CHANGE/VIEW:WIRELINE CONFIGURATION

TRC Input Line 1

Status Tone ENABLED



F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT
Step 3. Access the 6809 Trunking Interface Screen.

Step 4. Make sure the Failsoft field is set to ENABLED, and set
the Modulation Type to ASTRO or ANALOG.
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Use Up/Dn Arrow Keys To Select

BASE STATION PRODUCTS RSTAT Mode
VER:XX.XX.XX
:CHANGE/VIEW:6809 TRUNKING
RSTAT Mode Normal
Failsoft ENABLED
Line TRC Encode DISABLED
Failsoft Carrier Squelch DISABLED
Dual CT Failsoft Only DISABLED
Modulation Type ASTRO
Trunking Tickle Source TX DATA LINE

Trunking Tickle Source TOT 1 sec
CSC Logical Channel Number 1
Rx Discriminator Type QUANTAR/MICOR
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT
End of Procedure
68P81095E96-O
7/15/99
5
External Mode
Conventional Analog or Conventional ASTRO (CAI)
Step 2. Set the Fall Back InCabinet Repeat field to DISABLED.


TRC Input Line 1
Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat DISABLED
Fall Back Timer 0 msec
Status Tone ENABLED



F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT
Step 3. Connect a wire to pin 16 of System Connector #17 (located on the

station backplane). To activate FBICR mode, an external circuit
(customerprovided) must ground this pin.
CONNECTOR
#17
End of Procedure
6 68P81095E96-O
7/15/99
External Mode (continued)

Trunked (SMARTZONE or SMARTNET) Analog
Set the Fall Back InCabinet Repeat field to 0 msec.


TRC Input Line 1
Fall Back Timer 0 msec
Status Tone ENABLED



F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT

Step 4. Set the Modulation Type to ANALOG.

VER:XX.XX.XX
RSTAT Mode Normal
Failsoft DISABLED
Modulation Type ANALOG

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT
68P81095E96-O
7/15/99
7
External Mode
(continued)
Trunked (SMARTZONE or SMARTNET) Analog
(continued)
Step 5. Connect a wire to pin 11 and pin 16 of System Connector

#17 (located on the station backplane). To activate FBICR
mode, an external circuit (customerprovided) must
ground these pins.
CONNECTOR
#17
NoteWhen pins 11 and 16 are

grounded, the station will enter
FBICR operation. The station will ig
nore any wireline transmit activity,
ignore the EXT PTT line, and assert
the TSTAT line. While in FBICR
mode, the station will transmit Fail
soft beeps and the subscriber will
give the Failsoft indication.
End of Procedure
8 68P81095E96-O
7/15/99
External Mode (continued)

(Simulcast Systems Only)
Step 2. Set the Fall Back InCabinet Repeat field to DISABLED.
(No Fall Back Timer setting is required.)


TRC Input Line 1
Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat DISABLED

Status Tone ENABLED



F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT

Step 4. Set the Modulation Type to ASTRO or ANALOG.

VER:XX.XX.XX
RSTAT Mode Normal
Failsoft DISABLED
Modulation Type ASTRO

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT
68P81095E96-O
7/15/99
9
External Mode
(continued)
(continued)
Step 5. Connect a wire to pin 11 and pin 16 of System Connector

#17 (located on the station backplane). To activate FBICR
mode, an external circuit (customerprovided) must
ground these pins.
CONNECTOR
#17
NoteWhen pins 11 and 16 are

grounded, the station will enter
FBICR operation. The station will ig
nore any wireline transmit activity,
ignore the EXT PTT line, and assert
the TSTAT line. While in FBICR
mode, the station will transmit Fail
soft beeps and the subscriber will
give the Failsoft indication.
End of Procedure
10 68P81095E96-O
7/15/99
MAIN/STANDBY
CONFIGURATION
1 OVERVIEW
The Main/Standby configuration allows two Quantar/Quantro stations to operate as a redundant pair. If the Main
station should fail (due to hardware or software malfunction), the Standby station will immediately take over and
provide service. Each station's operating mode (Main or Standby) is determined by a setting made using the Radio
Service Software (RSS).
Please note the following requirements/restrictions that are applicable to the Main/Standby feature:
Main/Standby feature is compatible with stations in Conventional systems only
Main/Standby feature is not compatible with ASTRO signaling
The station must be equipped with an 8-wire Wireline Interface Module and the Enhanced Wildcard Option

Install both stations (designating one as A and the other as B) as described in the appropriate functional base
station manual. Make the wiring connections as shown in Figure 2 to allow Main/Standby operation.
HintWiring connections between the two stations and with external equipment will be facilitated by using a
standard telephone punch block. Figure 1 shows how to connect the stations and punch block.
STATION A STATION B
PUNCH BLOCK

50-PIN 50-PIN
TELCO TELCO
Figure 1. Using Punch Block to Facilitate Wiring Connections
2 68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
Main/Standby Configuration

STATION A 50-PIN 50-PIN STATION B
TELCO TELCO
MAIN/STANDBY
AUX OUT 3 38 11 AUX IN 1
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
MAIN/STANDBY
AUX IN 1 11 AUX OUT 3
38
GND 7 42 AUX IN 8
AUX IN 8 42 7 GND
+14.2 V 33
AUX OUT 8 44
CONTROL FOR EXTERNAL ANTENNA SWITCH
AUX OUT 8 19 (AUX 8 OUT RELAY CONTACTS CLOSED WHEN STATION
A IS MAIN, OPEN WHEN STATION B IS MAIN)
(SEE INSET FOR TYPICAL ANTENNA SWITCH WIRING)
GND
32 GROUND RETURN FOR ANTENNA SWITCH
AUX OUT 4 39 14 AUX IN 4

SWITCHOVER HANDSHAKING SIGNALS
AUX IN 4 14 39 AUX OUT 4
AUX IN 2 12 12 AUX IN 2
LINE 1 + 1 1 LINE 1 +
LINE 1 - 26 26 LINE 1 -
LINE 2 + 2 2 LINE 2 +
LINE 2 - 27 27 LINE 2 -
AUX OUT 9 20 20 AUX OUT 9

(NOTE 4) (NOTE 4)
AUX OUT 9 45 45 AUX OUT 9
TX AUDIO +/- MAIN/STANDBY RX AUDIO +/-
FROM CONSOLE CONTROL TO CONSOLE
(NOTE 2) (FROM EXTERNAL SOURCE) (NOTE 2)
(NOTE 3)
TYPICAL ANTENNA SWITCH WIRING

CONTROL FROM
NOTES: STATION A
1. AUX OUT 3 GND = MAIN; +3V = STANDBY.
2. CONNECTIONS TO CONSOLE SHOWN FOR 4-WIRE PHONE LINE. IF
2-WIRE PHONE LINE, ONLY CONNECTIONS TO LINE 2+ AND - ARE USED.
3. IF MAIN/STANDBY IS NOT TRC CONTROLLED BY CONSOLE, EXTERNAL
SOURCE MUST BE PROVIDED TO GENERATE MAIN/STANDBY CONTROL STATION A
SIGNAL, AS FOLLOWS: N/O TRANSMIT
+3V = STATION A MAIN, STATION B STANDBY
COM ANTENNA
GND = STATION A STANDBY, STATION B MAIN
N/C
4. AUX OUT 9 RELAY CLOSURES ARE PROVIDED TO INDICATE A POWER AMP
STATION B
FAILURE IN THE RESPECTIVE STATION.
TO CONNECTOR TRANSMIT
#17-PIN 32
Figure 2. Wiring Connections for Main/Standby Configuration
68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
3
3 SETTING WIRELINE IMPEDANCE JUMPERS
Set the impedance jumpers on the Wireline Interface Modules in Stations A and B as described in Table 1.
Figure 3 shows the location of the jumpers.
Table 1.Wireline Impedance Jumpering for Main/Standby Operation
STATION A STATION B
2-Wire Connection 4-Wire Connection 2-Wire Connection 4-Wire Connection

to Console to Console to Console to Console
All jumpers removed All jumpers removed

Jumpers in position 1 on Jumpers in position 1 on
(high impedance) on (high impedance) on
T1001 T1000 and T1001
T1001 T1000 and T1001
Jumper JU1010 in Jumper JU1010 in Jumper JU1010 in Jumper JU1010 in

2wire position 4wire position 2wire position 4wire position
JUMPERS
P/O IN POSITION
INTERFACE
1
.033UF 511
BOARD SETTINGS .027UF
1 2 3 4
4.7UF
2-WIRE
LINE 1 LINE 2 2 120
.047UF
.033UF 909
AUDIO AUDIO
JU1010
T1000/T1001
4-WIRE 4.7UF
3 120
.068UF
.033UF 909
T1000 T1001
4 3 2 1 4.7UF
4 .1UF
680 .033UF 909
Figure 3. Wiring Connections for Main/Standby Configuration
4 68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
4 RSS PROGRAMMING
In order to enable the Main/Standby Feature, the following two tasks must be performed using the
Quantar/Quantro Radio Service Software (RSS) program. (Refer to the RSS User's Guide 68P81085E35 for details
on performing the following tasks.)
Step 1. Connect a PC running the RSS program to one of the two stations and read the station codeplug.
Step 2. Access the Hardware Configuration screen and set the Main/Standby field for MAIN (for station
designated as Main) or STANDBY (for station designated as standby) as shown in Figure 4.
Step 3. Perform all other RSS programming tasks to configure the station (as described in the RSS User's
Guide 68P81085E35).
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Please Enter The Serial Number

BASE STATION PRODUCTS Type Alphanumeric/Punctuation Chars.
VER:XX.XX.XX
MAIN:SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
Serial Number: Station Name:

Hardware Platform: QUANTAR
System Type: CONVENTIONAL Station Type: ANALOG ONLY

Rx Freq Band 1: UHF_R2 438-470 MHz Tx Freq Band: UHF_R2 438-470 MHz
Rx Freq Band 2: NONE IR Freq Band: NONE
PA Power Rating: 25 Watts Output limited to xxx Watts

Power Supply: AC LOW Battery Type: NONE
OPTIONS:
Wireline: 8-WIRE WildCard: ENHANCED
Freq Ref: INTERNAL - STD Simulcast Operation: DISABLED Set to MAIN (for Main Station)
Multi-Coded Squelch: DISABLED MRTI Interface: DISABLED Set to STANDBY (for Standby
Scanning Receiver Site Number: 1 Station)
Main/Standby: MAIN
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP VALIDATE EXIT
CONFIG
Figure 4. Making Main/Standby RSS Setting
Step 4. Access the Wildcard Configuration menu screen and select State/Action Configuration. Press F4 to
set the WildCard Tables to their default values. This ensures that the tables for the Main/Standby
Feature are programmed with the factory values. Note that any WildCard Tables that have been
custom created by the customer will be deleted, and that any customization of the default tables will
be returned to the factory default values. Reenter these if the functions are still required for this
installation.
Step 5. Save the codeplug to the station.
Step 6. Repeat Steps 1 thru 4 for the other station.
68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
5
5 MAIN/STANDBY OPERATION
Three Modes of Main/Standby Operation

The Main/Standby Feature offers three modes of switching from MAIN to STANDBY and from STANDBY to MAIN:
Automatic (or Hot") Switchover Whenever one of the modules fails in the MAIN station, the MAIN sta
tion will automatically set itself to STANDBY and will signal its companion station to set itself to MAIN. The
MAIN station will not automatically switch to STANDBY unless it is connected to its companion station and
the companion station has not indicated a failure mode. (To disable automatic switchover mode, refer to
page 8.)
Tone Remote Control Switchover Sending function tone 4 to the stations will force the MAIN station
to STANDBY mode and the STANDBY station to MAIN mode. Sending function tone 5 to the stations will
force the MAIN station back to MAIN mode and the STANDBY station back to STANDBY mode. If either
station has detected a module failure, neither switchover will occur. (To change the particular function tones
that trigger these events, refer to 9.)
External Control Switchover An external control device may be connected to Input 2 on Connector #17
(located on backplane of both stations) to initiate a MaintoStandby or a StandbytoMain switchover to
occur. Grounding this signal causes the MAIN station to go to STANDBY mode and the STANDBY station
to go to MAIN mode. Pulling this signal high causes the STANDBY station to go to MAIN mode and the MAIN
station to go to STANDBY mode.
Additional Functions Provided by the Main/Standby Feature

Antenna Relay Control - When the MAIN station is operating in MAIN mode, the relay driven output 8 is
energized. The use of this closure is left up to the user. Typically a user will use this closure to drive an exter
nal relay which connects the antenna to whichever station is operating in MAIN mode.
Status Request - Utilizing TRC function tone 14, the console operator can request which station is in MAIN
mode. One beep will be returned if the MAIN station is in MAIN mode and two beeps if the STANDBY station
is in MAIN mode.
Reset - Utilizing TRC function tone 15, both stations will reset.
6 68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
7
6 CUSTOMIZING MAIN/STANDBY OPERATION
Default Operation
The Main/Standby Feature is implemented using the Radio Service Software (RSS) WildCard Feature. As shipped
from the factory, the RSS contains 21 WildCard Tables for the Main station and 20 WildCard Tables for the Standby
station. These tables contain default settings that define the basic operation of the Main/Standby Feature (i.e.,
control of Main and Standby status of two interconnected stations via predefined Tone Remote Control function
tones to provide backup redundancy in the event of a station failure).
Customizing Main/Standby Operation

Although all of the Main/Standby WildCard Tables are user configurable (via the RSS), it is recommended that only
the following functions be customized by the user. Follow the instructions in Chapter 11 of the RSS User's Guide
68P81085E35 for details on modifying the WildCard Tables.
Disable Automatic (Hot) Switchover Delete WildCard Table 8 in both stations
TABLE 8 OF 20
STATE CONDITION
Description: MAIN/STANDBY 8
State Cond State Cond State
EVENT FLAG 6 AND INPUT 8

ACTION: INACTION:
STANDBY NULL
MRTI DISABLE
RX WL MUTE
WAIT 30
CLR OUTPUT 3
CLR OUTPUT 8

8 68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
Select Alternate Function Tones to Activate Main/Standby Switchover (default is FT4 to switch, FT5
to switch back) To modify the Function Tone that initiates the initial switch from Main to Standby, modify
the TRC TONE entry in WildCard Table 19 in the MAIN station and WildCard Table 17 in the STANDBY sta
tion.
To modify the Function Tone that initiates the switch back from Standby to Main, modify the TRC TONE entry
in WildCard Table 18 in the MAIN station and WildCard Table 18 in the STANDBY station.
TABLE 19 OF 31
STATE CONDITION
TRC TONE 4 AND NOT EVENT FLAG 12

ACTION: INACTION:
Main STANDBY NULL
MRTI DISABLE
RX WL MUTE
WAIT 30
CLR OUTPUT 3
CLR OUTPUT 8

Modify TRC Tone field
to change TABLE 17 OF 30
MaintoStandby STATE CONDITION
Switchover Description: MAIN/STANDBY 17

ACTION: INACTION:
Standby SET OUTPUT 3 NULL
SET OUTPUT 8
WAIT 30
RX WL ENABLE
MRTI ENABLE
MAIN

TABLE 18 OF 31
STATE CONDITION

ACTION: INACTION:
Main SET OUTPUT 3 NULL
SET OUTPUT 8
WAIT 30
RX WL ENABLE
MRTI ENABLE
MAIN
SET EVENT FLAG 8
to change TABLE 18 OF 30
StandbytoMain
STATE CONDITION
Switchover

Standby ACTION: INACTION:
STANDBY NULL
MRTI DISABLE
RX WL MUTE
WAIT 30
CLR OUTPUT 3
CLR OUTPUT 8

68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
9
Select Alternate Function Tone to Initiate a Status Request (default is FT14)
TABLE 12 OF 31
STATE CONDITION
TRC TONE 14 AND NOT STN KEYED AND NOTRX QUAL MET

ACTION: INACTION:
ABORT TIMER 1 NULL
Main SET EVENT FLAG 8

to change which
function tone initiates TABLE 11 OF 30
a Status Request STATE CONDITION
TRC TONE 14 AND NOT STN KEYED AND NOTRX QUAL MET

Standby ACTION: INACTION:
ABORT TIMER 1 NULL
SET EVENT FLAG 7

10 68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
Select Alternate Function Tone to Initiate a Reset to Both Stations (default is FT15)
TABLE 21 OF 31
STATE CONDITION
TRC TONE 15

ACTION: INACTION:
RESET NULL
Main

to change which
function tone initiates TABLE 20 OF 30
a Status Reset STATE CONDITION
TRC TONE 15

ACTION: INACTION:
Standby RESET NULL

68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
11
12 68P81095E89-O
2/15/99
FAST KEYUP FEATURE
1 OVERVIEW
The Fast Keyup Feature allows Quantar and Quantro stations to be keyed up by an external device (such as a Data
Controller) in approximately 12 milliseconds (Quantar VHF and Quantro UHF) or 10 milliseconds (all other
stations). Note that normal keyup time using the station's PTT input is approximately 50 msecs.
In order to implement this feature, three signals (TX Audio, RX Audio, and PTT) must be connected between the
station and the external device. Also, an RSS parameter setting must be made to properly configure the feature's
operation. This manual provides stepbystep instructions for performing these tasks.
Note The Fast Keyup Feature applies only to nonSimulcast, Analog Conventional stations.

All Rights Reserved 68P80800A02-A
As shown in Figure 1, the following signals must be connected properly between the station and the external
device:
PTT
TX Audio
RX Audio
Additionally, there are two possible connection configurations Direct Connection and Splatter Filter
Connection. The Direct Connection configuration is chosen when the external device provides the required
splatter filtering of the TX Audio signal. The Splatter Filter Connection configuration is chosen when the station's
internal splatter filter is to be utilized (no splatter filtering provided by the external device).
The following procedures describe how to make the signal connections for each type of connection configuration.
EXTERNAL
STATION DEVICE
PTT
TX AUDIO +
TX AUDIO -
RX AUDIO +
RX AUDIO -
Figure 1. Fast Keyup Feature Wiring Diagram
2 68P80800A02-O
1/31/98
Fast Keyup Feature
Wiring Details for Direct

Connection and Splatter
Filter Configurations
Step 1. Connect the PTT signal from the external device to
Connector #14 on the station backplane as shown below.
Step 2. Connect TX Audio (+) and (-) from the external device
to Connector #17 on the station backplane as shown
below.
Step 3. Connect Aux RX Audio and GND from the station
backplane Connector #17 to the external device as
shown below.
Direct Connection Configuration
25-PIN D-TYPE
CONNECTOR #14
PTT Pin 23
50-PIN TELCO
CONNECTOR #17
Gen TX Data - Pin 9
Gen TX Data + Pin 34
Aux RX Audio Pin 30

Station GND - Pin 7
Splatter Filter Connection Configuration
25-PIN D-TYPE
CONNECTOR #14
PTT Pin 23
50-PIN TELCO
CONNECTOR #17
Aux TX Audio Pin 5
Station GND Pin 7
Aux RX Audio Pin 30

Station GND - Pin 7
68P80800A02-O
1/31/98
3
3 RSS PROGRAMMING
Using the Quantar/Quantro Radio Service Software (RSS) program (Version R09.05.00 or higher), make the
following codeplug data changes to allow proper Fast Keyup operation. (Refer to the RSS User's Guide
68P81085E35 for details on making codeplug programming changes.)
Table 1.Codeplug Data Changes for Fast Keyup Operation
Codeplug Data Parameter RSS User's Guide Location
Set the Fast Key-Up parameter to

WIDEBAND for Direct Connection
configurations, or to AUX TX for Splatter Filter
Connection configurations. Programming the RF Configuration Data (p/o Chapter 4)
Note AUX TX selection is not compatible with

MRTI.
4 68P80800A02-O
1/31/98
Fast Keyup Feature
4 FAST KEYUP PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Figure 2 shows the performance characteristics of the station after implementing the Fast Keyup Feature.
Aux RX Audio Amplitude Response Aux RX Audio Phase Response

40
DEG
X: 7000 Hz
Y: 17.80 DEG
X: 5275 Hz
X
10 DEG/DIV
X
2dB/DIV
-40
START: 0 Hz STOP: 10 000 Hz START: 0 Hz STOP: 10 000 Hz
X: 5275 Hz X: 7000 Hz
Aux TX Magnitude Response Aux TX Audio Phase Response

40
DEG
10 DEG/DIV
1dB/DIV
-40
START: 0 Hz STOP: 10 000 Hz START: 0 Hz STOP: 10 000 Hz
Figure 2. Fast Keyup Performance Characteristics
68P80800A02-O
1/31/98
5
6 68P80800A02-O
1/31/98
DUAL CONTROL
OF GATED ACCESS
VIA TRC AND SAM
Servicing MCS Users
1 OVERVIEW
This section describes how to program the station (Quantar or Quantro) and the Station Access Module (SAM)
to allow two functions (repeater setup/knockdown and gated access" to be controlled (toggled on and off) by
both of the following methods:
Console Operator using TRC tones
Subscriber Unit using DTMF or MDC 1200 signaling transmitted over the air
By utilizing the MCS Feature and controlling the repeater setup/knockdown and gated access" functions, an
effective Mutual Aid" talk group configuration can be created. In this configuration, subscribers within a specific
coverage area (local subscribers) are assigned a primary" PL and have their MCS User Access field set to
ENABLED. These subscribers will repeat as normal (assuming station is toggled to repeater setup" mode).
Should emergency conditions require other subscribers outside of the local area to enter the communications
area, these subscribers will be able to communicate with each other (as well as local users) via the same local
repeater if they have been assigned with a secondary" PL and have their MCS User Access set to GATED.
Additionally, the repeat mode (setup or knocked down) and gated access mode (enabled or disabled) may be
controlled by both a console operator or a subscriber unit. (Note that Gated User Access is disabled upon station
reset. Gated Access must be enabled via overtheair transmissions to the SAM module, or via TRC tones from
the console.)
The following table shows how the repeater access and gated access" functions may be controlled to provide
access to local and visiting subscribers. Refer also to Figure 1 (showing a typical repeater access call flow chart
before Gated Access is employed), and Figure 2 (showing a repeater access call flow chart after Gated Access
is incorporated).
Gated Repeater
Subscriber Operation
Access Up/Down
Local subscribers (primary PL) will repeat.
Enabled Up Emergency subscribers (secondary PL and MCS User Access set to
GATED) will repeat.
Enabled Down No subscribers will repeat.
Disabled Up Only local subscribers (primary PL) will repeat.
Disabled Down No subscribers will repeat.
In order to perform the procedures in this section, you must program certain parameters in the Quantar or Quantro
station and the Station Access Module (SAM). In order to do this, you will need the following software programs:
RVN5002 Quantar/Quantro Radio Service Software (RSS) Version R09.05.00 or higher)
RVN4110 Station Access Module (SAM) Radio Service Software (RSS) Version R01.01 or higher)

Call Flow Prerequisites
MCS User Access is Enabled (but not Gated)

Analog Rptr Activation RSS Parameter set to SC
Local Subscribers are using Primary" PL
RF SIGNAL RECEIVED BY STATION
IS NO
CARRIER
DETECTED?
YES
IS NO
VALID PL
DETECTED?
YES
NO
(REPEATER IS
IS KNOCKED DOWN)
REPEATER
SETUP?
YES
START REPEAT CALL
Figure 1. Typical Call Flow Chart Without Gated Access Incorporated
2 68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
Dual Control of Repeater Access Via TRC and SAM
Call Flow Prerequisites
MCS User Access is set to Gated"

Analog Rptr Activation RSS Parameter set to SC
Emergency conditions exist, in which nonLocal
Subscribers are using Secondary" PL
RF SIGNAL RECEIVED BY STATION
IS NO
CARRIER
DETECTED?
YES
IS NO
VALID PL
DETECTED?
YES
NO
IS (GATED ACCESS OFF)
PL GATED ACCESS
ENABLED?
YES
NO
(REPEATER IS
IS KNOCKED DOWN)
REPEATER
SETUP?
YES
START REPEAT CALL
Figure 2. Typical Call Flow Chart With Gated Access Incorporated
68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
3
2 STATION RSS PROGRAMMING
In order to support dual control of gated access by TRC and SAM, certain station parameters must be
programmed using the Quantar/Quantro Radio Service Software (RSS) program (Version R09.05.00 or higher).
(Refer to the RSS User's Guide 68P81085E35 for details on making these settings.)
Step 1. Connect a PC running the Station RSS program to one of the two stations and read the station
codeplug.
Step 2. Access the Hardware Configuration screen and set the MultiCoded Squelch field to MULTI-PL
ONLY to enable the MultiCoded Squelch feature (as shown in Figure 3).
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Please Enter The Serial Number

BASE STATION PRODUCTS Type Alphanumeric/Punctuation Chars.
VER:XX.XX.XX
MAIN:SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
Serial Number: Station Name:

Hardware Platform: QUANTAR
System Type: CONVENTIONAL Station Type: ANALOG ONLY

Rx Freq Band 1: UHF_R2 438-470 MHz Tx Freq Band: UHF_R2 438-470 MHz
Rx Freq Band 2: NONE IR Freq Band: NONE
PA Power Rating: 25 Watts Output limited to xxx Watts Set to MULTI-PL ONLY
Power Supply: AC LOW Battery Type: NONE
OPTIONS:
Wireline: 8-WIRE WildCard: ENHANCED
Freq Ref: INTERNAL - STD Simulcast Operation: DISABLED
Multi-Coded Squelch: MULTI-PL ONLY MRTI Interface: DISABLED
Scanning Receiver Site Number: 1
Main/Standby: MAIN
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP VALIDATE EXIT
CONFIG
Figure 3. Making MultiCoded Squelch RSS Setting
4 68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
Step 3. Access Page 1 of the Channel Information screen and set the Analog Rptr Access field to MDC/TONE
(as shown in Figure 4) to enable the Station Access Module (SAM).
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Please Enter A Channel Number.

BASE STATION PRODUCTS Valid Range Is 1 to 1
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CHANNELINFORMATION
Channel Number 1 CHANNEL# 1 OF 1
Rx1 Frequency 0.000000 MHz Tx Frequency 0.000000 MHz

Rx2 Frequency 0.000000 MHz Tx Idle Frequency 0.000000 MHz
Modulation Type ANALOG

Tx Rated Deviation 5.00 kHz
Receive Channel BW WIDE 25-30 kHz Channel Spacing
Set to MDC/TONE
Call Sign
Call Sign Over Wireline DISABLED
Access Code Table 1
Analog Rx Activation OFF
Analog Rptr Activation OFF
Analog Rptr Hold-In OFF
Analog Rptr Access MDC/TONE
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP ADD PREV NEXT DELETE EXIT
CHN CHN CHN CHN
Figure 4. Making Analog Rptr Access RSS Setting
Step 4. Access the RF Configuration Data screen and set the Repeater Operation field for REPEATER (as
shown in Figure 5).

BASE STATION PRODUCTS Repeater Operation
VER:XX.XX.XX
:CHANGE/VIEW:RF CONFIGURATION
Repeater Operation REPEATER Fast Key-Up DISABLED

Max Deviation 92 %
Low Speed Deviation 17.0 %
Antenna Relay ENABLED
Antenna Relay Delay 30 msec
Call Sign Interval 15 min
Startup On Last Active Channel DISABLED
Startup Channel 1
Set to REPEATER
ASTRO Fade Tolerance 3 FRAMES
ASTRO RDLAP: Repeat DISABLED
Wireline Drop Out Delay 0 sec
ASTRO TX Filter WIDE PULSE
ANALOG Simulcast Reverse Burst INTERNAL
Securenet: Rx Code Detect Fade Timer 80msec
Fade EOM Timer 80 msec
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT
Figure 5. Making Repeater Operation RSS Setting
68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
5
Step 5. Access the MultiCoded Squelch screen, enter the desired number of users, then set the secondary"
PL's User Access field to GATED (as shown in Figure 6). Refer to the RSS User's Guide 68P81085E35
for details on setting up users in the MultiCoded Squelch screen.
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Use Up/Dn Arrows To Move, Press F5 To

BASE STATION PRODUCTS Add Or Modify Entry
VER:XX.XX.XX
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:VIEW CODEPLUG:MCS
Station Serial Number: xxxxxxxxxx Station Date: MM/DD/YYYY

Station Time: HH:MM:SS
F5
USER TABLES: Modify Entry # 2
Rx Tx User Total Number
# Type Freq/Code Type Freq/Code Access TimeType
Used Of Calls
Freq./Code
1 PL 103.5 1A PL 103.5 1A ENABLED 1:23:00
PL 12 3A
127.3
Rx
2 PL 127.3 3A PL 127.3 3A GATED PL 127.3 3A
Tx
3
User Access GATED
F1 F2 F9
Help Accept Cancel
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP SAVE MODIFY CLEAR EXIT
REPORT USER ACCNTNG
Set to ENABLED
for primary" PLs
Enter Users Here Set to GATED for
secondary" PLs
Secondary" PL allowing nonLocal Subscribers to use repeater in emergency situations
Primary" PL for Local Users
Figure 6. Entering Users and Setting to Gated
6 68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
Step 6. Access the TRC Commands screen and program tones FT3-FT6 (as shown in Figure 7). Refer to
the RSS User's Guide 68P81085E35 for details on programming the tones.
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Enter Command or Use Tab/Shift Tab

BASE STATION PRODUCTS and Enter To Move Between Fields
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRC COMMANDS
Guard Tone MORE

2175 Hz
FT1 2050 Hz MONITOR
FT2 1950 Hz CHN 001 KEY
FT3 1850 Hz RPT ON
FT4 1750 Hz RPT OFF
FT5 1650 Hz GATEACC ON
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Enter Command or Use Tab/Shift Tab

BASE STATION PRODUCTS and Enter To Move Between Fields
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRC COMMANDS
FT6 1550 Hz GATEACC OFF
FT7 1450 Hz
FT8 1350 Hz
FT9 1250 Hz
FT10 1150 Hz
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP EXIT
Figure 7. Programming TRC Tones FT3-FT6
End of This Procedure
68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
7
3 SAM RSS PROGRAMMING
In order to support dual control of repeater access by TRC and SAM, certain SAM parameters must be
programmed using the Station Access Module (SAM) Radio Service Software (RSS) program. (Refer to the SAM
RSS User's Guide 68P80309E35 for details on performing the following tasks.)
Step 1. Connect a PC running the RSS program to the RSS port on the front panel of the SAM module and
read the SAM codeplug.
Step 2. For DTMF operation, access Page 03 of the SAM Decoder Selection screen and program the
TARGET and ACT TBL settings as shown in Figure 1. These settings establish the keypad sequences
and corresponding Action Tables for Repeater Setup, Repeater Knockdown, Gated Access Enable
and Gated Access Disable. Note that if there is default data already entered when opening the
screen, overwrite the data with the data shown below.
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Enter DTMF Target, Valid input is:
SAM with QUANTAR/QUANTRO 0-9, A-D, #, *, or X
Page = 03 of 03
SAM DECODER SELECTION Set to ENABLED..
DTMF DECODER ENABLED SAM MODE# 00 of 01

DTMF INPUT RECEIVER 1
DTMF DECODER TARGET# TARGET ACT TBL

01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 123* 03 Enter Action Table numbers to
02 . . . . . . . . . . . . 456# 04 correspond to keypad se
03 . . . . . . . . . . . . 147* 06 quences 01 thru 04. Use 03,
04 . . . . . . . . . . . . 369# 07 04, 06, and 07 as shown.
05 . . . . . . . . . . . . (Note that if a table does not
06 . . . . . . . . . . . . exist, the RSS will prompt you
07 . . . . . . . . . . . . to create one.)
08 . . . . . . . . . . . .
09 . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter desired keypad se
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . quences for:
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . Gated Access Enable - 123*
Gated Access Disable - 456#
Repeater Setup - 147*
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Repeater Knockdown - 369#
HELP PRINT ADD DELETE ACTION EXIT (Keypad sequences are
PAGE MODE MODE EDIT shown here as examples. You
may choose other sequences
as desired.)
Figure 1. Making DTMF SAM Decoder Selection RSS Settings
8 68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
For MDC 1200 operation, access Page 02 of the SAM Decoder Selection screen and program the
OPCODE, ID, and ACT TBL settings as shown in Figure 2. These settings establish the IDs and
corresponding Action Tables for Repeater Setup, Repeater Knockdown, Gated Access Enable and
Gated Access Disable. Note that if there is default data already entered when opening the screen,
overwrite the data with the data shown below.
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Change Fields

SAM with QUANTAR/QUANTRO
Page = 02 of 03 Set to ENABLED..
SAM DECODER SELECTION
BINARY DECODER MDC1200 SAM MODE# 00 of 01

BINARY INPUT RECEIVER 1
BINARY DECODER TARGET# OPCODE ID ACT TBL

01 . . . . . . . . . . . . REPEAT ACC 0001 03 Enter Action Table numbers to
02 . . . . . . . . . . . . REPEAT ACC 0002 04 correspond to IDs 0001 thru
03 . . . . . . . . . . . . REPEAT ACC 0003 06 0004. Use 03, 04, 06, and 07 as
04 . . . . . . . . . . . . REPEAT ACC 0004 07 shown.
05 . . . . . . . . . . . . The ID column reflects the
06 . . . . . . . . . . . . MDC 1200 ID transmitted by
07 . . . . . . . . . . . . the subscriber unit. IDs 0001
08 . . . . . . . . . . . . thru 0004 are shown here as
09 . . . . . . . . . . . . examples. You may choose
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . other IDs as desired.
11 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select REPEAT ACC for IDs 01
thru 04. (You MUST select RE
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 PEAT ACC. Do not use the Re
HELP PRINT ADD DELETE ACTION EXIT peater Setup or Repeater
PAGE MODE MODE EDIT Knockdown selections.)
Figure 2. Making MDC 1200 SAM Decoder Selection RSS Settings
68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
9
Step 3. Access the SAM Action Tables screen and program Tables 03 and 04 as shown in Figure 3. These
Action Tables control the Gated Access functions (enabled and disabled). Note that if there is default
data already entered when opening the tables, overwrite the data with the data shown on the facing
page.
10 68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
Setting Action Table 03 (Enable Gated Access)

Page = 01 of 04
ACTION TABLES
Use arrow keys to toggle to 03.
ACTION TABLE 03 ACTION TABLE# 03 of xx

# ACTION ADDRESS TARG BIT POLARITY
01 MANIBIT 004C 1 DISABLED
# ACTION WAIT TIME Program Actions 01-03 as

02 WAIT 100 shown.

03 MANIBIT 004C 1 ENABLED
# ACTION
04
# ACTION
04
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP PRINT CLEAR EXIT
PAGE TABLE
Setting Action Table 04 (Disable Gated Access)

Page = 01 of 04
ACTION TABLES


02 MANIBIT 004C 0 DISABLED Program Actions 01-04 as
shown.
# ACTION WAIT TIME

03 WAIT 100

# ACTION
05
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
PAGE TABLE
Figure 3. Programming the Action Tables for Gated Access Enable/Disable
68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
11
Step 4. Access the SAM Action Tables screen and program Tables 06 and 07 as shown in Figure 4. These
Action Tables control the Repeater Setup and Knockdown functions. Note that if there is default data
already entered when opening the tables, overwrite the data with the data shown on the facing page.
End of This Procedure
12 68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
Setting Action Table 06 (Repeater Setup)

Page = 01 of 04
ACTION TABLES


02 WAIT 100 shown.

# ACTION
04
# ACTION
04
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
PAGE TABLE
Setting Action Table 07 (Repeater Knockdown)

Page = 01 of 04
ACTION TABLES


02 WAIT 100 shown.

# ACTION
04
# ACTION
04
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
PAGE TABLE
Figure 4. Programming the Action Tables for Repeater Setup/Knockdown
68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
13
Notes...
14 68P81096E11-O
12/15/99
INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
FOR EXTERNAL CONTROLLERS
1 OVERVIEW
The Quantar and Quantro stations can be connected to external thirdparty controllers to accommodate various
system applications. Connections between the station and the external controller equipment typically involve the
following primary interface signals (available on the station backplane System Connector #17):
Line 1 + and Line 1
Aux TX Audio (or Aux PL Audio)
Aux RX Audio
Carrier Indication + and Carrier Indication
PTT + and PTT
To facilitate making connections between the station and external controller, this section provides electrical
characteristics, frequency response curves, and other interface details for the primary interface signals.
NoteWhen the WildCard option is purchased (required to configure inputs/outputs for connection to an external
controllers) and is then enabled (via the RSS), the predefined functionality of the signals on System Connector J17
as shown in the Backplane section of this manual (e.g., J17Pin 22 is Ext PTT +, J17Pin 11 is Ext Failsoft, etc.)
is lost.
In order to restore the predefined signals, you must press F4 (SET TO DEFAULT) on any of the WildCard RSS
screens. Doing so automatically creates a set of WildCard Tables that now determine J17's signal functionality. The
Editing WildCard Tables section (page 8) may now be used to change the signal functionality, as desired.

Figure 1 shows the pinout locations of the primary interface signals available on System Connector #17.
SYSTEM CONNECTOR #17
Pin 38Carrier Indication (alternate; see note 1)

Pin 30Aux RX Audio (see note 3)
Pin 42PTT (alternate; see note 2)
Pin 43Carrier Indication -

Pin 26Line1 -
Pin 47PTT -
26 50
1 25
Pin 1Line1+
Pin 22PTT +
(see note 4)
Pin 5Aux TX Audio
Pin 18Carrier Indication +
Notes
1)The default WildCard Tables define pins 18 and 43 as Carrier Indication + and -. These
pins provide a relay contact closure output. If desired, the WildCard Tables may be modified to
provide the Carrier Indication signal on pin 38 as a transistor buffered output. See Editing
WildCard Tables on page 7 for details.
2)The default WildCard Tables define pins 22 and 47 as PTT + and -. These pins provide
an optocoupled input. If desired, the WildCard Tables may be modified to provide the PTT
signal on pin 42 as a transistor buffered input. See Editing WildCard Tables on page 7 for
details.
3)Stations shipped from the factory are programmed with no signal at pin 30. In order to
program this pin for Aux RX Audio, refer to Editing WildCard Tables on page 7.
4)Stations shipped from the factory are programmed with no signal at pin 5. Depending on
the application, this pin may be programmed for AUXPL Audio or Aux TX Audio In order to
program this pin for AUXPL Audio or Aux TX Audio, refer to Editing WildCard Tables on page 7.
Figure 1. Signal Locations on System Connector #17
2 68P81096E86-O
6/1/00
Input/Output Specifications for External Controllers
3 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
This section provides the electrical characteristics, frequency response curves, and other interface details for the
primary interface signals.
Line 1 + and Line 1

(J17-Pins 1 and 26)
General Characteristics
Line 1 + and Line 1 - provide a balanced phone line input for incoming
audio signals to the station. The input impedance is set by jumpers lo
cated on the Wireline Interface Board. The jumpers are set at the facto
ry for 600 impedance. You may change the impedance (if desired)
by changing the jumpers as described in the appropriate (4wire or
8wire) Wireline Interface Board section in this manual.
Phone Line Specifications
Most telephone companies recognize either 3002" or Type 5" as des

ignations to define phone line types and associated electrical specifi
cations. Telephone lines meeting the specifications for either of these
types are acceptable for use with the Quantar station. The following
table shows the specifications for 3002" and Type 5" phone line
types.
Type 5 and 3002" Phone Line Specifications
Type 5 3002
Parameter
Specification Specification
Loss Deviation 4.0 dB 4.0 dB
C-Notched Noise 51 dBrnCO 51 dBrnCO
Attenuation Distortion:
504 to 2504 Hz -2.0 to +8.0 dB -2.0 to +8.0 dB
404 to 2804 Hz -2.0 to +10.0 dB spec not available
304 to 3004 Hz -3.0 to +12.0 dB -3.0 to +12.0 dB
Signal to C-Notched Noise Ratio > 24 dB > 24 dB
Envelope Delay Distortion:
1750 sec 1750 sec
804 to 2604 Hz
Impulse Noise Threshold 71 dBrnCO
Intermodulation Distortion:
> 25 dB
R2 > 27 dB
> 30
R3 > 32 dB
Phase Jitter:
> 25 Degrees
> 30 Degrees
Frequency Shift 3 Hz 5 Hz
68P81096E86-O
6/1/00
3
Aux TX Audio
(J17-Pin 5)
The Aux TX Audio signal is an unbalanced, 470 impedance input to
the station. The input voltage range is -4.1 V to +4.1 V at 250 Hz to
NoteIn order for J17Pin 5 to support the 3 kHz. The response curves for this signal are shown below.
Aux TX Audio signal, you must edit the
Wildcard Table as shown on page 11.
Aux Tx Audio Magnitude Response
1dB/DIV
START: 0 Hz STOP: 10 000 Hz
Aux Tx Audio Phase Response

40
DEG
10 DEG/DIV
-40
4 68P81096E86-O
6/1/00
Aux PL Audio
(J17-Pin 5)
The Aux PL Audio signal is an unbalanced, 470 impedance input to
the station. The input voltage range is -4.1 V to +4.1 V at 5 Hz to 3 kHz.
NoteIn order for J17Pin 5 to support the The response curves for this signal are shown below.
Aux PL Audio signal, you must edit the
Wildcard Table as shown on page 12.
Aux PL Audio Magnitude Response
1dB/DIV
Aux PL Audio Phase Response

-10
DEG
10 DEG/DIV
-90
68P81096E86-O
6/1/00
5
Aux RX Audio
(J17-Pin 30)
The Aux RX Audio signal is an unbalanced output from an operational
amplifier with an output impedance of less than 5. The output voltage
range is 0 to 6.6V PP at 0 to 6 kHz. The response curves for this signal
are shown below.
Aux RX Audio Amplitude Response
X: 5275 Hz
X
2dB/DIV

X: 5275 Hz
Aux RX Audio Phase Response

40
DEG
X: 7000 Hz
Y: 17.80 DEG
X
10 DEG/DIV
-40
X: 7000 Hz
6 68P81096E86-O
6/1/00
Carrier Indication +/-

(J17-Pins 18 and 43)
The Carrier Indication + and Carrier Indication - signal provides a
relay closure output, as shown below. (If desired, the WildCard Tables
may be edited to provide the Carrier Indication signal on J17-Pin 38
as a transistorbuffered output. Refer to Editing WildCard Tables on
page 7 for details.)
+5V
J17-Pin 18
Carrier Indication +
Carrier Indication -
J17-Pin 43
3.9K
Typical Relay Closure Output Circuit
PTT +/-
(J17-Pins 22 and 47)
The PTT + and PTT - signal provides an optoisolated input, as shown
below. (If desired, the WildCard Tables may be edited to provide the
PTT signal on J17-Pin 42 as a transistorbuffered input. Refer to Edit
ing WildCard Tables on page 7 for details.)
+5V
100K
J17-Pin 22 3.9K 3.9K
PTT +
220PF
J17-Pin 47
PTT -
220PF
0.1UF
Typical Opto-Coupled
Input Circuit
68P81096E86-O
6/1/00
7
4 EDITING WILDCARD TABLES
You must edit certain WildCard Tables in order to cause certain signals to appear on specific pins on the System
Connector J17. Instructions for modifying these WildCard Tables are provided in this section.
The WildCard Tables are programmed in the factory to provide:

Carrier Indication + and - on J17-Pins 18 and 43 as a relay contact closure output
PTT + and - on J17-Pins 22 and 47 as an optoisolated input
If desired, the WildCard Tables may be modified to change the connector pin number and signal interface as
follows:
Carrier Indication on J17-Pin 38 as a transistor buffered output
PTT on J17-Pin 42 as a transistor buffered input
Changing Carrier
Indication Signal to
J17-Pin 38
The WildCard Tables are programmed in the factory to provide Carrier
Indication + and - on J17-Pins 18 and 43 as a relay contact closure
output. Modify WildCard Table 8 as shown below to move the Carrier
Indication signal to J17Pin 38 as a transistor buffered output.
MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Enter a Description of the State

BASE STATION PRODUCTS Condition
VER:XX.XX.XX
:WILD CARD: STATE/ACTION CONFIG
Description: RD STAT TABLE 8 OF 10 Jump to Table 8
STATE and CONDITION SETTINGS

RX QUAL MET
ACTION: INACTION:
SET OUTPUT 3 CLR OUTPUT 3

Change from 7 to 3
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
HELP CHOICE ADD SET TO PREV NEXT DEL PROGRAMMING ADDT'L EXIT
LIST TABLE DEFAULT TABLE TABLE TABLE RULES CMDS
8 68P81096E86-O
6/1/00
Changing PTT to
J17-Pin 42
The WildCard Tables are programmed in the factory to provide PTT +
and - on J17-Pins 22 and 47 as an optoisolated input. Modify Wild
Card Table 4 as shown below to move PTT to J17-Pin 42 as a transis
tor buffered input. When PTT is asserted, the station will gate audio
from Line 1 to the transmitter. Follow the alignment instructions for the
Wireline to set proper deviation level.

VER:XX.XX.XX
Description: EXT PTT TABLE 4 OF 10 Jump to Table 4

INPUT 8
ACTION: INACTION:
KEY FROM WL DEKEY FROM WL

Change from 9 to 8

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
68P81096E86-O
6/1/00
9
Routing Aux RX Audio to

J17Pin 30
Edit (or add) WildCard Table 9 in order to route the Aux RX Audio signal
to J17Pin 30.

VER:XX.XX.XX
Description: ENABLE RX AUDIO TABLE 9 OF 10 Jump to Table 9

COLD RESET OR WARM RESET
ACTION: INACTION:
RX DSC-AUXRX ON NULL

Program as shown

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
10 68P81096E86-O
6/1/00
Routing Aux TX Audio to

J17Pin 5
Edit WildCard Table 4 in order to route the Aux TX Audio signal from
J17Pin 5 to the transmitter. Alignment is fixed so that a 1 kHz tone at
-10 dBm at the input provides 60% deviation. (For example, on a 25
kHz channel with 5 kHz maximum deviation, a -10 dBm input results
in 3 kHz deviation.)

VER:XX.XX.XX

INPUT 9
ACTION: INACTION:
AUXTX-TX ON AUXTX-TX OFF

Program as shown

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
68P81096E86-O
6/1/00
11
Routing Aux PL Audio to

J17Pin 5
Edit WildCard Table 4 as shown below in order to sum the signal at Aux
TX Audio with the audio signal at Line 1. The signal input to the Aux TX
Port can be either a PL signal, a DPL signal, or some other low speed
digital signal. The port is scaled so that an amplitude of -10 dBm pro
vides a 20% deviation of the transmitted rf signal. (For example, on a
25 kHz channel with 5 kHz maximum deviation, the low speed signal
input at - 10 dBm results in 1 kHz deviation.) Note that the audio input
at Line 1 must be aligned following the wireline alignment procedure
located in the Radio Service Software (RSS) User's Guide.

VER:XX.XX.XX

INPUT 9
ACTION: INACTION:
AUXPL+TX ON AUXPL+TX OFF

Program as shown

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
12 68P81096E86-O
6/1/00

Manual Quantar PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Quantar PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM

FCC INTERFERENCE WARNING

Commercial Government and

VHF 25W & 125W

Motorola, Inc. 2000 Commercial Government and 68P81095E05-B

Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 28

MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E39

continued on next page

RECEIVER MODULE (VHF Ranges 1 and 2; Includes Preselector) . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E28

RECEIVER MODULE (UHF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E48

RECEIVER MODULE (800 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E76

9/1/00 68P81095E05-B iii

RECEIVER MODULE (900 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81091E92

EXCITER BOARD (VHF, UHF, 800/900 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E24

VHF POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE (25W/125W R1 & R2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E23

UHF POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE (R1/25W; R2/110W; R4/110W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81088E44

STATION CONTROL CIRCUITRY

STATION CONTROL MODULE (CLN6960/CLN6961) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81094E76

STATION CONTROL MODULE (CLN1614) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E87

WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD (4-WIRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81094E77

WIRELINE INTERFACE MODULE (8-WIRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81094E78

STATION BACKPLANE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E33

STATION POWER SUPPLY MODULES

265W POWER SUPPLY MODULE (ac input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E09

625W POWER SUPPLY MODULE (ac input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81095E88

210W POWER SUPPLY MODULE (12/24 and 48/60 V dc input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81085E12

9/1/00 68P81095E05-B vii

600W POWER SUPPLY MODULE (24 V dc input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81090E44

ANTENNA RELAY OPTION

ANTENNA RELAY (Option X371AA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E22

viii 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTIONS

VHF TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION (Options X676AA-AC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E34

UHF TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION (Options X676AN and X676AP) . . . . . . . 68P81088E54

VHF DUPLEXERS (OPTIONS X182AA, AB, AJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E71

ASTRO MODEM CARD (OPTION X437AA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E38

PERIPHERAL TRAY OPTION

PERIPHERAL TRAY (OPTION X696AA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81086E37

ULTRA HIGH STABILITY OSCILLATOR (UHSO; Option X873AA) . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81088E08

RA/RT CONFIGURATION (E & M Keying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81090E99

FALL BACK INCABINET REPEAT FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81095E96

MAIN / STANDBY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81095E89

FAST KEYUP FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P80800A02

DUAL CONTROL OF GATED ADDESS VIA TRC AND SAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81096E11

INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXTERNAL CONTROLLERS . . . . . . . 68P81096E86

, MOTOROLA, QUANTAR, SECURENET, and ASTRO are trademarks of Motorola, Inc.

xii 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

The sales model is T5365A (as translated from C99ED/001C).

A System Family Option must be selected as follows:

9/1/00 68P81095E05-B xiii

VHF High Band

UHF Range 1 Option Not Available Option

UHF Range 2 Option Option

UHF Range 3 Not Available Not Available Option

UHF Range 4 Option Not Available

Not Available Option

xiv 68P81095E05-B 9/1/00

Option/ Description Option/ Description

X43AB Power Supply Assembly X43AB Power Supply Assembly

C831AA Card Cage C831AA Card Cage

X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly

X249AW RF Cabling X249AW RF Cabling

Motorola, Inc. 2000 Commercial Government and 68P81095E05-B

FALL BACK INCABINET REPEAT FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P81095E96